JP6812388B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine").

Conventionally, there is known a game machine in which a big hit game is played in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out when the result of the lottery is a big hit.

In this type of game machine, the game board is detachably supported from the front side and can be attached directly to the island equipment of the game hall or via an outer frame, etc., and the front of the body frame is opened and closed to open and close the game area of the game board. It is equipped with a door frame with a game window facing the island, and a decorative member that can emit light is provided on the door frame to enhance the decorative effect and entertain the player (for example, patent). Document 1).

JP-A-2009-195354

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the appealing power to the player is low, and there is a risk that the player's interest in the game may be lowered.

Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a high appealing power and a strong interest of a player.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is
A game board with a game area where a game ball is hit by the operation of the player,
A body frame that detachably supports the game board and
A door frame having a game window so that at least the game area of the game board supported by the main body frame faces the player side when the front surface of the main body frame is openably and closably supported and closed.
A dish light emitting decoration means having a dish portion formed below the game window and bulging forward to store a game ball, and a light emitting decoration portion capable of emitting light decoration.
A first light emitting decoration means provided close to the dish light emitting decoration means, which decorates a predetermined area on the outer periphery of the game window and enables light emission toward the player side.
A second light emitting decoration means that decorates an area different from the predetermined area on the outer periphery of the game window and has a bulging portion that bulges forward from the first light emitting decoration means and can emit light.
With
The dish light emitting decoration means
It has a left side decoration area that is integrally decorated with the decoration by the first light emitting decoration means and a right side decoration area that is integrally decorated with the decoration by the second light emitting decoration means.
The bulging portion is located on the open side of the door frame that is openable and closable with respect to the front surface of the main body frame.
further,
A ball feeding unit that sends out a game ball stored in the dish portion of the dish light emitting decoration means to a launching position through a passage port, and a ball feeding unit .
It is provided with a launching means capable of launching a game ball sent to the launch position by the ball feed unit toward the game area one by one with respect to the launch passage .
The ball feed unit comprises a fraud prevention member made of a metal plate material,
The metal plate material has a first plate surface portion which is a plate surface portion on one side of a predetermined dividing line and a second plate surface portion which is a plate surface portion on the other side of the dividing line. The first plate surface portion is bent with respect to the second plate surface portion, and a substantially V-shaped gap that gradually narrows toward the end point of the dividing line is formed between the first plate surface portion and the second plate surface portion. By forming the wire rod attached to the game ball and making it possible to cut at the end point of the dividing line by entering the gap, it is difficult to cheat using the wire rod.
The ball feed unit is formed with an accommodating portion capable of accommodating the metal plate material , and the accommodating portion is provided with the metal plate material .
Further, the passage port is an opening formed on the outer surface of the ball feeding unit, and has a first opening having a size through which the game ball can pass and a second opening having a size through which the game ball cannot pass .
The second opening is an opening continuously formed from the first opening so that the end point of the dividing line is located at the second opening.
The first plate surface portion of the first plate surface portion and the second plate surface portion in which the dividing line is located in the second opening and the gap is formed by using the dividing line. However, by arranging the metal plate material in the ball feed unit so as to be closer to the launch passage than the second plate surface portion, the game ball passing through the first opening can be moved to the first plate surface portion and the second plate surface portion. In addition to making it difficult to collide with the plate surface portion, it is characterized in that the wire rod can easily enter the gap .

According to the game machine according to claim 1, it is possible to provide a game machine having a high appealing power and strongly attracting the interest of the player.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the figure of (A) viewed from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the operation of the lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of a door frame seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from the rear. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit disassembled and viewed later. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and viewed later. It is sectional drawing of the left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emitting mode of the left side decoration unit by a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and looked at afterwards. It is sectional drawing which cut at the part of the ball-renting unit of the dish unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and looked at from the upper right front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and looked at from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the pressing operation part in the operation unit in a pressed state. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a front view which shows with the front cover of a foul cover unit removed. It is a front view of the antistatic mechanism. It is a perspective view when the door frame which shows the state which provided the antistatic mechanism is seen from the back. It is a rear view of the main part of the door frame which shows the state which provided the antistatic mechanism. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 56. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit. It is a rear view of the ball feed unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit after removing the rear case. (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feed unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member as viewed from the front, and (D). Is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which shows by cutting the door frame substantially in the center in the vertical direction. It is a front view which shows the arrangement of LED for light-emitting decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emitting decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame. It is a rear view of the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. It is a left side view of the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and looked at from the front. It is a perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and looked at afterwards. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and looked at later. It is an exploded perspective view which shows from the rear by disassembling the relationship between a prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the prize ball device in a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in a prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the circulation passage of a ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the substrate unit. It is a perspective view explaining the operation of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which shows the part of the fastening mechanism in the back cover enlarged. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the fastening mechanism in the back cover and looked at from the rear side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a figure, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is an exploded perspective view after disassembling the lock device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the sliding rod for a glass door and the sliding rod for a main body frame in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the fraud prevention member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of a pachinko machine removed. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board and looked at later. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board while attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 104, which is viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. It is sectional drawing which cut the game panel in the game board of FIG. 107 in the vertical direction. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a front component of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107, which is viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. It is a partial cross-sectional view which shows the security structure on the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the game board housed in the main body frame. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the game board viewed diagonally from the upper right front. It is a perspective view of the game board viewed diagonally from the upper left front. It is a perspective view of the game board viewed diagonally from the lower left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a perspective view seen diagonally from the front by disassembling each of the main members constituting the game board. It is a perspective view seen diagonally from the rear by disassembling each of the main members constituting the game board. It is a perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the rear lower part. It is an exploded perspective view which saw after disassembling a part of the attacker unit. (A) is a perspective view of the front side unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front side unit viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view of the center accessory as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the center accessory afterwards. It is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the center accessory for each main composition and looked at later. It is a perspective view of the distribution unit of a center accessory as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the distribution unit of a center accessory from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the distribution unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the distribution unit and looked at afterwards. It is a front enlarged view which shows the movement of the distribution unit in a center accessory. It is the perspective view which looked at the periphery of the distribution unit from the diagonally upper left. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive of a distribution unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive of the movable decorative body of a distribution unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the flow of the game ball in the distribution unit in a center accessory. It is a perspective view of the back unit in a game board as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main component and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main component and looked at afterwards. (A) is a perspective view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit as viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back front decoration unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back front decoration unit and looked at afterwards. It is a perspective view which looked at the back upper production unit in the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back upper production unit in the back unit from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-up effect unit disassembled for each main unit and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back-up effect unit for each main unit and looked at later. It is a perspective view which looked at the back upper center unit in the back upper production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back upper center unit in the back upper production unit from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back upper center unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back upper center unit as seen from behind the military attaché Ishite. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment / detachment of the 2nd elevating decoration body in the back upper center unit. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back upper side unit in the back upper production unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back-up side unit in the back-up effect unit and looked at later. It is a front view explaining the movement of the back-up center unit in the back-up effect unit. It is a front view explaining the movement of the back-up center unit following FIG. 159. It is a front view explaining the movement of the back-up center unit following FIG. 160. It is a front view explaining the movement of the back upper side unit in the back upper production unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom production unit in the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom production unit in the back unit from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the underside effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled each main member of the underside effect unit and looked at afterwards. It is a perspective view of the back bottom front unit in the back bottom production unit as viewed from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back lower front unit in the back lower production unit from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the front lower back unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the front lower back unit and looked at afterwards. It is a front view which shows the underside production unit in a normal state. It is a front view which shows the state which the back bottom front slider of the back bottom front unit in the back bottom production unit is raised halfway. It is a front view which shows the state which raised the back bottom front slider of the back bottom front unit to the rising end. It is a front view which shows the state which the decoration body is raised to the appearance position after the back bottom in the back bottom production unit. FIG. 174 is a front view showing a state in which the pointer member of the lower back middle decorative body is rotated in the state of FIG. 174. It is a front view which shows the state which raised the back bottom front slider of the back bottom front unit to the rising end, and raised the back bottom rear middle decoration body to the appearance position. It is a front view which shows the state which the back side decoration body in the back bottom production unit is rotated to the appearance position. FIG. 177 is a front view showing a state in which the lower back middle decorative body is raised to the appearance position in the state of FIG. 177. FIG. 178 is a front view showing a state in which the lower back front slider is raised to the rising end in the state of FIG. 178. It is a front view which shows the state which the back lower front slider is raised to the rising end in the state of FIG. 177. (A) is a left side view of the lower right back effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a front view of the lower right back effect unit in the back unit. (A) is a perspective view of the lower right back effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower right back effect unit as viewed from the rear. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 181 and FIG. 18B is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. It is a disassembled diagonal view which disassembled the lower right production unit of the back and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the rear side with respect to the back right lower unit base in FIG. 184 enlarged. It is an exploded diagonal view which was seen after disassembling the lower right production unit of the back. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view showing an enlarged rear side of the lower right unit base on the back side in FIG. 186. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back right lower right rotation decoration body in the back right lower right production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the production ball of the back right lower right production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the production ball of the back right lower right production unit following FIG. 189. It is explanatory drawing which shows the lift of the production ball in the back right lower right production unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the movement of the back-up production unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the movement of the underside production unit. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in the main control board. It is a block diagram of a door frame base board, a peripheral side relay terminal board, an abnormal audio signal blocking board, and a lower speaker. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of the abnormal audio signal cutoff board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power failure occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special control process. It is a flowchart which shows the start opening winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game preparation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot game mode determination process. This is an example of a table used for the jackpot game mode determination process when the jackpot flag is ON. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game processing. It is an image diagram displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and is (A) a notice display to explain the game until the jackpot game is started, and (B) a game in the game until the jackpot game is started. It is a guidance display that guides the person's gaze. It is an image diagram displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and is an explanatory display of a method of selecting a safe type jackpot game. It is an image diagram displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and is an explanatory display of a method of selecting a pounding type jackpot game. It is an image diagram displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and is a display that prompts the player to select which type of jackpot game to be executed. It is an image diagram displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and is a display indicating that the current timing is a safe type. It is an image diagram displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and is a display indicating that the current timing is a throbbing type. It is an image diagram displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and it is a guidance display that guides the player's gaze to the lower right back production unit reminiscent of a rattling lottery machine after the pounding type jackpot game is selected. is there. (A) A diagram showing a mode of display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device based on the result of the special lottery, (B) Display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device based on the result of the special lottery. It is a figure which shows the mode of the display effect following (A). (A) A display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device based on the result of the special lottery, the figure showing the mode of the display effect following FIG. 217 (B), and (B) based on the result of the special lottery. It is a display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows the mode of the display effect following (A). (A) A display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device based on the result of the special lottery, the figure showing the mode of the display effect following FIG. 218 (B), and (B) based on the result of the special lottery. It is a display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows the mode of the display effect following (A). It is a display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device based on the result of the special lottery, and is a figure which shows the mode of the display effect following FIG. 219 (B). It is a time chart showing the process from the occurrence of a big hit by a special symbol to the start of a big hit game. It is a flowchart of the game state determination process which the main control MPU executes according to the backup data as one process in the power recovery process (power-on process). FIG. 5 is an image diagram displayed on a display screen of a liquid crystal display device, and is a diagram showing an example of a specific operation instruction screen for performing a specific operation by a player.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame that make up the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, main body frame, and game board that make up the pachinko machine. , It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

In FIGS. 1 to 7, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is pivotally supported by an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall and an outer frame 2 so that the front side is opened. A player has a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and a game ball as a game medium is driven into the main body frame 3, and the front surface of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4. It is provided with a door frame 5 that is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be seen from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 are stored. It includes a plate-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive a game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4.

As shown in the figure, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in the front view, and each in the left-right direction. The width of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that the upper ends are substantially aligned with each other, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and the right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 to open the door frame 2.

In the front view of the pachinko machine 1, a game area 1100 in which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 is desired, and the pachinko machine 1 projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. Further, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player operates the handle device 500 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game can be played.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, but the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. It is not possible to touch the game ball, the obstacle nail G (see FIG. 114), various winning openings, accessories, etc. in the game area 1100 by inserting a hand or the like into the game area. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure of the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame and the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 14 (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. .. FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support metal fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the shaft support pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support metal fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and the lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and the left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12, 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the ends of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 are provided, and the connecting members 14 are used to connect the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 respectively. By connecting them together, they are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of this example are made of solid wood (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, and are vertically and vertically located substantially in the center of the left and right ends in the front-rear direction. An engaging notch portion 15 is provided which penetrates the surface and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step portion 10a recessed from other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and the upper support metal fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step portion 10a. It has become like.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material (for example, an aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface projects inward to the rear end portion. It is provided with a protruding portion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction), and the strength and rigidity are enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 112). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the operator The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 extending vertically, a plate-shaped vertical piece 18 extending vertically from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the opposite of the vertical piece 18. It has a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engaging notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical, respectively. In addition to being formed in the shape of, the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in the front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes. Has been done.

In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 is an engaging notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame are screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 by penetrating the horizontal piece 17 and the engaging piece 19 and screwing a predetermined screw into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15. It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper end inner side surface of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other. The vertical piece 18 on the rear side of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state of being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It has become like. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower end inner side surface of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 of this example is arranged so as to face the upper support metal fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support metal fitting 20, and is fixed at a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame plate 12. The lower support metal fitting 21 to be formed, the reinforcing metal fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13 and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. It is provided with a decorative cover 23. The upper support metal fitting 20 and the lower support metal fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be openable and closable.

First, the upper support metal fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projecting piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixing piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. A support hook hole 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a side frame on the left side that hangs downward from the left end of the fixing piece 20 and the support projecting piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts on the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that hangs along the outer edge of the supporting protruding piece 20b that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d (FIG. 14A). 14) and a stop hanging portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the inlet end of the support hook hole 20c. The shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 67) of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c in the upper support metal fitting 20. Further, the upper support metal fitting 20 is adapted so that the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 can be connected by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

In the upper support metal fitting 20, the strength of the support protrusion 20b is increased by the hanging wall 20e hanging from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b, and the details will be described later, but when viewed from the front, the support protrusion 20b The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the above can be concealed so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the lock member 27 can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a dogleg shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 633.

On the other hand, the lower support metal fitting 21 is a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-shaped support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a, and a pin-shaped projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c. The support projection 21d and the like are provided. The main body frame shaft support formed on the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 70 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support metal fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the main body frame 3 can be easily opened and closed.

Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (FIG. 9). The closing plates 24, 25 and the hook portions 1054, 1065 (see FIG. 97) of the lock device 1000, which are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The hook portion 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 are disengaged by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it in one direction, which will be described in detail later. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. The guide plate 26 is for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is replaceably mounted and fixed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and is attached to the support projecting piece 20b by the rivet 28. On the other hand, it is rotatably supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 and the stopper portion 27a to the right from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The operating portion 27b that protrudes, the elastic piece 27c that protrudes from the side opposite to the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the tip of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. It is provided with an arc-shaped tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a width narrower than that of the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases to the left.

As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support protruding piece 20b of the upper support metal fitting 20 (normal state), the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27c is a hanging wall. It is in contact with the inner surface of the 20e, and the stopper portion 27a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. The head space portion of the above is not closed, and a space is formed in the head space portion of the support hook hole 20c into which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted. ..

In the support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of this example, the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the stopper portion 27a A state in which the tip side faces the stop hanging portion 20f at the entrance end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop hanging portion 20f, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, respectively. The centers are offset in the diagonal direction and face each other. Then, in this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 that supports the heavy main body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 Since the load on the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. Since the tip of the stopper portion 27a is provided with an arcuate tip surface 27d, the lock member 27 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 633 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and comes into contact with the arcuate tip surface 27d, the acting force F is applied to the shaft support. The component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped tip surface 27d, and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hook hole 20c. When the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface is divided, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27), so that the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 The moment for rotating the tip portion in the direction away from the support protrusion piece 20b (clockwise direction in the figure) does not work, and the shaft support pin 633 is attached to the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. Holds the state of being sandwiched between the inner surface on one side. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not constantly loaded, and the elasticity is integrally formed of the synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c, and prevent the shaft support pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support protrusion 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the tip of the stopper 27a Does not rotate in the direction of contacting the stop hanging portion 20f and further disengaging, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 20b.

Even if the shape of the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate, the tip portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protrusion piece 20b at a position where a rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27, and the lock member 27 is locked. The applicant applies that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 20b because the one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f even if the member 27 rotates. I'm checking.

The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support bracket is provided in a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 (see FIG. 67) of the main body frame 3. It is necessary that the support protrusion 21d of 21 is inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and pushed into the drawing. As shown in 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates the elastic piece 27c counterclockwise while deforming it, the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 20c at the same time. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook hole 20c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is in a state of being retracted from the support hook hole 20c. Therefore, the shaft support pin 633 is supported by the support hook. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. After that, the main body frame 3 is lifted to disengage the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 from the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21, so that the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2 It can be removed from.

As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extruded material (aluminum alloy), when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment lined up in the amusement park, it is necessary to perform the work of fixing it at a predetermined angle to the vertical surface of the island. However, since such work is performed by driving nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to make the nails easier to drive, and the pachinko machine 1 can be installed on the existing island equipment without any problem. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are extruded materials of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy), it is possible to form a thin wall thickness while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right width when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 67 and the like) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 having a large size in the left and right direction. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are connected by the connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is the side frame plate 12 and 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and is fixed in a state where the connecting member 14, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the assembling strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased and it is sturdy. It can be used as a rectangular framework. Further, after connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 by the connecting member 14, when the upper support metal fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine).

[1-2. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front surface side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right. Further, FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the right rear. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back.

As shown in the figure, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a door frame having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and an inner peripheral shape having a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. It includes a left side decorative unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, and an upper decorative unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

Further, the door frame 5 penetrates the plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the plate unit 300, and the plate unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 arranged behind the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 in between. The foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame, the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and the game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close. The glass unit 590 and the door are provided.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 28 is an enlarged view of the wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view which shows.

As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of this example has a door having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a substantially elliptical shape having an inner circumference penetrating in the front-rear direction. The frame base body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 arranged on both the lower left and right sides of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110, and a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base body 110. And a handle bracket 140 attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 to support the handle device 500.

The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 or the like on the outside of the side speaker 130 on the right side when viewed from the front. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer circumference of the speaker mounting portion 111, and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when attaching or detaching the side speaker 130. It has become.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is such that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 cover the lower part of the game window 101. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear. ), And the launch cover 191 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 under the launch cover 191. A handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100, a handle device relay board cover 193 that covers the rear side of the handle device relay board 192, and a launch cover 191 that sandwiches the center in the left-right direction. Door frame base board 194, which is arranged on the opposite side of the handle device relay board 192, etc. (on the right side (shaft support side) from the center in the left-right direction in the rear view) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base The door frame base board cover 195 that covers the rear side of the board 194, and the wiring cord 196 that is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the door frame base board cover 195 and connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side (FIG. A wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of (see 28) is provided.

In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the overall rigidity is increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 obtained by assembling a metal sheet metal with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has enough strength to sufficiently support each of the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. It is connected to the 4140 and includes an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs it to each speaker 130. In this example, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative boards 430, 432 provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motors 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b provided on the operation unit 400, The wiring code 196 that connects the 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. is on the right side (axis) of the door frame base board 194 when viewed from the rear. After being aggregated and bundled at the position of (support side), the details will be described later, but it is held by the wiring holding member 197 and extends backward, and the main relay terminal plate 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral relay terminal plate It is designed to be connected to 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape by synthetic resin, and penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a vertically long inner shape. The substantially elliptical game window 101 is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the game window 101 has the left and right side and the upper inner peripheral edge formed in a continuous smooth curved shape, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the door frame base body 110 on the lower side of the game window 101, a square notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Is formed. The width of the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base body 110 formed by the game window 101 is the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body 110 in the front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than that of the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become like.

In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base main body 110 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and mounts and fixes the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130 and the ball feed unit 580. The ball feed unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and the game ball that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 and is stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 to the ball feed unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supplying and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140, which is arranged in the lower right corner when viewed from the front and is inclined diagonally so that the right (open side) end of the front surface that bulges forward is retracted. The portion 114, the wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and allows the wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, and the tubular shape that extends forward shortly above the handle mounting portion 114 It is provided with a lock hole 116 which is formed and into which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side in the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base body 110 when viewed from the rear. From the arrangement of the board mounting part 118 for mounting the door frame base board 194, which is arranged on the lower right side (shaft support side), and the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101, which is closer to the center than the speaker mounting part 111. The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 projecting rearward to mount the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side substantially along the inner circumference of the game window 101, and the glass unit 590. A glass unit support step 110a with which the outer peripheral edge of the front surface can come into contact with the glass unit, and two locking members for rotatably supporting the glass unit locking member 190 projecting rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 The unit 110b is further provided.

Further, the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a door frame projecting piece 110c that protrudes rearward by a predetermined amount from the lower side thereof, and the door frame projecting piece 110c is provided with an engaging groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the door frame 5 and the lower side of the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame projecting piece 110c engaged with the engaging groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, a positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 when viewed from the rear and fits with the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3 is provided. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d with the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like on the front surface thereof. At the same time, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base body 110 has a mounting portion 110g for mounting the speaker bracket 132 for mounting the side speaker 130 and a mounting hole 110h for mounting the side speaker cover 338 (see FIG. 18 and the like) at appropriate positions. It is formed.

Further, in the door frame base main body 110, between the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 and the board mounting portion 118, the lower plate ball supply port 310 g in the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300 and the foul cover unit 540, which will be described later, A rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

Further, the door frame base main body 110 is formed on the upper side of the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 on the front side thereof, and includes a shallow dish-shaped security recess 120 recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A security member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the security recess 120 from the front side. The crime prevention member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape in which the front side is opened by bending a metal plate. As a result, in order to cheat the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, a hole is made from the joint portion between the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 by a thin drill or the like. It can be prevented by the crime prevention member 121, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, although detailed illustration of the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is omitted, the intersection of the central axes thereof is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1) from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view. It is fixed diagonally so as to be at the position of .5 m), so that the sound reaches the player who is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 most efficiently. Further, the side speaker 130 is designed to mainly output sound in the mid-high range, and is arranged at a position as far as possible in the left-right direction from the pachinko machine 1, so that the left and right side speakers 130 can be used. By outputting related different sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound having a high stereo feeling.

The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 arranged on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base main body 110 arranged on the rear side, whereby the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 can be attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base main body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open, and is vertically oriented on the rear surface on the rear side. It is provided with a stepped portion 195a that is recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center of the door. The wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the lateral direction and has an I-shaped cross section. , It is made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the drawing, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in each of the upper and lower sides in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. In the wiring holding member 197, the end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the state where the door frame 5 is assembled is vertically attached to the step portion 195a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. The wiring holding member 197 is rotatably supported around the extended shaft, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 can be formed. It can be accommodated in the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

The wiring holding member 197 is bound to a predetermined binding hole 197a paired up and down with a wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated with respect to the main body frame 3 in the direction of closing the door frame 5, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It is pushed forward by the portion and rotates in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. As a result, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

On the other hand, when the closed door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively far apart, so wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled backward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is expanded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being hindered by the wiring cord 196.

As described above, according to this example, the door frame base board cover 195 moves the end portion of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported so that the free end side moves toward the main body frame 3. The main body frame 3 is rotatably supported on the rear surface, and a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction. On the other hand, when opening and closing the door frame 5, the wiring cord 196 can be folded and unfolded laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when opening and closing the door frame 5. It is possible to prevent problems (disconnection of wiring cord 196, disconnection of connection connector, etc.) from occurring due to being pinched or pinched.

Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even if a force acts via the wiring cord 196 when opening and closing the door frame 5, even if a force acts through the wiring cord 196, It is possible to prevent blurring in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent the occurrence of defects.

Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 makes a state in which a bridge is built between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the wiring 196 Since a part of the wiring is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down even if the door frame 5 is opened and closed, and the wiring 196 hangs down and is caught by another member to break the wire. It is possible to prevent problems such as wiring and the door frame 5 from being unable to be closed, and the main control board 4100, peripheral control unit 4140, payout control board 4110, etc. as the main body side electrical equipment, and the door side. There is a problem with the wiring 196 that connects each decorative board 214,216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, speaker 130, 222, 262, ball rental unit 360, handle device 500, etc. as electrical equipment. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the occurrence of the above as much as possible.

Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the rotatable wiring holding member 197, and even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates. Since the force can be released, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled and causing a problem such as disconnection or disconnection of the connector. it can. Further, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 is only partially bent with the rotation of the wiring holding member 197, the conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-23675). ), The wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into a plurality of penetrating holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the held binding band 198 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and reliably prevent the wiring 196 from falling off from the wiring holding member 197 together with the binding band 198. can do.

Further, even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, as described above, the wiring 196 is provided by the wiring holding member 197. Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding the door frame 5, the main body frame 3 having increased strength and rigidity on the side side of the door frame 5 supported by the shaft. And the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 having high crime prevention against fraudulent activities can be used.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with ridges protruding from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction at least toward the side along which the wiring 196 is aligned, wiring is performed by a pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. It is possible to surround the three sides of the 196, and it is possible to easily hold the wiring 196 along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a ridge, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Therefore, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in good condition.

Further, the length from the base end to the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is set to be substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the main body frame 3 in the wiring 196 is extended. The predetermined position is the position on the axial center side of the door frame 5 with respect to the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member. Since a pantograph-shaped link is formed at the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring when opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be smoothed, and the opening / closing work can be facilitated. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-shaped link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wiring 196 extending from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the tip side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compactly assembled, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

Further, the door frame base board cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. A step portion 195a capable of accommodating the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base board cover 195. Since it is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring holding member 197 can be easily closed. The wiring 196 can be compactly organized, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by other members to prevent a problem from occurring.

Further, the wiring 196 is held with respect to the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base board cover 195 side). Therefore, the wiring from the door frame 5 is also possible. The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame 5 side for moving (opening / closing), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force for opening / closing the door frame 5, which is described above. It is possible to surely produce the desired action and effect. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 is provided. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of holding a game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 and having a large game board 4 and strongly attracting the attention of the player. it can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. On the other hand, an annular flange portion 142 extending outward in the perpendicular direction and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the tubular portion 141 and arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. The 143 and the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141 are provided. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 in the door frame base main body 110. Although not shown, the shaft of the tubular portion 141 substantially coincides with the wiring passage port 115 in the state of being attached to the handle mounting portion 114.

The handle bracket 140 is provided with one ridge 143 on the upper side and two ridges 143 on the lower side in the tubular portion 141, and these ridges 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a. Then, the cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the tubular portion 141 only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 match. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

By attaching the handle bracket 140 to the diagonally inclined handle mounting portion 114, the shaft of the tubular portion 141 is mounted so as to extend toward the right side (open side) as it faces forward in front view. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also inclined at an angle.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110 and a door frame base main body. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the back surface of the shaft support side side portion 110, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the back surface of the open side side portion of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110. It is provided with a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 attached along the lower back surface of the game window 101, and they are fastened to each other with screws, rivets, or the like to form a square shape.

As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the vertical direction, and a lower surface thereof. It is integrally provided with a lower shaft branch 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fittings 630 and the lower shaft support metal fittings 640 formed above and below the shaft support side of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. It is designed to be pivotally supported so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have substantially the same length as the width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and is formed on the lower long side edge of the long side edge thereof. A lower bent projectile 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25) and an upper bent projectile 160 bent forward toward the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in front view. , A vertically bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward and extended in the vertical direction at the central portion of the upper long side edge. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent projectile piece 159, the upper bent projecting piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with the locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, which will be described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 locks the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 moves in the left-right direction. It is possible to regulate the movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed with a notch 162 that substantially corresponds to the notch 101a of the door frame base main body 110.

Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes an open side outer bent projecting piece 163 bent rearward on both sides of a long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. It is provided with an open side inwardly bent projectile 164, and as shown in the figure, the open side inwardly bent projectile 164 is formed so as to extend backward longer than the open side outer bent projectile 163. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000, which will be described later, is provided in the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 that extends rearwardly to the outer end of the long side thereof and is open to the outside of the shaft support side (FIG. FIG. See 112). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent projecting pieces 167 bent rearward on both sides of its long side.

Since the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported only at two points above and below the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft support side If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large and illegal. Although there is a risk that the action may be facilitated, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of this example is provided with the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. , The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, in the shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, the front end piece 952b of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U shape (FIG. FIG. (Refer to 112), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and only the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. The security cover 180 is provided with a security function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 4, and as shown in the figure, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. It is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 arranged between the reinforcing sheets 152 and 153 of the above, and the upper side portion thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4. It includes a formed contact recess 181 and a crime prevention rear projection piece 182 that projects rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, both the left and right ends of the security cover 180 are provided with security rear end projecting pieces 183 that project rearward along the shape of the ends. It should be noted that the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the right side (shaft support side) in the rear view is in a form of extending backward longer than the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 180, a security front projecting piece 184 projecting along the downward shape of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 with the security cover 180 attached, and left and right outside the security front projecting piece 184. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 that projects forward is provided at the lower end of the.

In this security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 when viewed from the front, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side) is mounted on the plate. By attaching it to the security cover attachment portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back surface side of the door frame 5. In the state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the security front projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, and is also fitted. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 comes into contact with the vertically bent projecting piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the crime prevention rear projection piece 182 projecting rearward is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 whose shaft support side half is fixed to the game board 4, and the open side half is front. It is in a state of being inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 of the component member 1110. As a result, even if an illegal tool is to be intruded into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the crime prevention rear projection piece 182 inserted under the inner rail 1112. ..

Since the security cover 180 can cover the lower front portion of the ball striking guide passage formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. , It is possible to prevent the hit ball that flies or reverses the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

As a result, in this example, since the security cover 180 covers the outer periphery of the lower rear side of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5, the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are displayed from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if a highly flexible tool is inserted between the doors and an attempt is made to cheat inside the pachinko machine 1 (inside the game area 1100), the security cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering and cheating. It has become possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with higher safety against the above.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portion 110b protruding rearward from the door frame base main body 110 with the fitting portion 190a. A locking piece 190b for locking the locking projecting piece 451f of the glass unit 590 extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a is provided. In the glass unit locking member 190, a retaining screw is fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base main body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported by the locking member mounting portion 110b.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward, and the ridge rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating.

Further, the launch cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. When the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board cover 193 and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, their rear surfaces are substantially identical to each other. It is possible to cover the front surface of the ball launching device 650 attached to the main body frame 3.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit disassembled and viewed later.

As shown in the figure, the right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 excluding the lower part in the front view, and the inside is the game window 101. It is formed in an arc shape along the outside, and the outside is formed in a straight line along the outer circumference of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms an outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 that is arranged behind the side lens 210. On the rear side of the side inner lens 212, the decorative substrate 214 on the right side, which is arranged from substantially the center to the upper side in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LED) and 214b (white LED) mounted on the surface, and the side inner on the lower side. The rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 and the right side upper decorative substrate 214, which are arranged from substantially the center to the lower side of the lens 212 in the vertical direction and have a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LED) and 216b (white LED) mounted on the surface. The right side upper decorative board cover 218 attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative board 214, and the side so as to cover the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216 and sandwich the right side lower decorative board 216. It includes a lens 210 and a decorative substrate cover 220 on the lower right side that is attached to the side decorative frame 202.

Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged on the front surface of the side lens 210 and at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with the side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210, and is an abbreviation for the game window 101. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 extending radially around the center, a side upper inner lens 206 arranged between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 are side inner lenses. It includes an inner lens bracket 208 for attaching to 212, and an upper right speaker 222 attached to the upper side inner lens 206.

In the right side decorative unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be diffusely refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a and 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged behind the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the upper side inner lens 206. The 216a, 216b, etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Further, the front surface of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 is white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like. In addition to being able to do this, the decorative substrates 214 and 216 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right decorative substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, and 216a are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can be appropriately made to emit light, and the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has the right end and the upper end formed in a straight line along the outer circumference of the door frame base main body 110 when viewed from the front, and the left end is the game window 101. It is formed in a curved shape along the outer circumference on the right side of the door. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a composed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a that are divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and extend substantially concentrically with the game window 101. It is provided with a radiation lens portion 210b made of the prism surface of the above. As shown in the figure, the plurality of radiating lens portions 210b of the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend above the radiation centered on the lower center of the game window 101 in front view, and are formed from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed in a state of being recessed rearward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

Further, the side lens 210 is provided with a side diffusion lens portion 210c extending in the front-rear direction and arranged in the vertical direction on the right side surface. The side diffusing lens portion 210c makes it possible to widely diffuse the light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of through holes are formed in the portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker, so that the sound from the upper right speaker can be satisfactorily transmitted to the player side. It is designed to be transmitted.

The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent and is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the figure, a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkled shape. In addition, the portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the side inner lens 212, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and protruding forward. The side inner lens 212 can diffusely refract and reflect light by the wrinkled portion and a plurality of small diameter lenses, and cooperates with the side lens 210 arranged on the front side to make the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 glitter. At the same time, it is possible to make the perspective look unclear and mysterious.

The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on their surfaces, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. As the LEDs 214a and 216a, those having a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °) are used, and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively irradiated. A lens having a narrow angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used. The LED 214c of the decorative substrate 214 on the right side is a red and green LED in this example.

The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs sound in the mid-high range like the side speaker 130, and can be attached to a predetermined position by a side upper inner lens 206 in a predetermined direction. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 is provided with a cylindrical horn portion that extends diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front, and is provided on the back side of the upper end of the horn portion. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side when viewed from the front.

The upper right speaker 222 of this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part of the upper side inner lens 206, and is caused by noise with respect to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult to do. Similar to the side inner lens 212, the front side of the side upper inner lens 206 is also formed in a wrinkled shape, and a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed in a mountain portion protruding forward in the wrinkled portion. The wrinkled portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses allow light to be diffusely refracted and diffusely reflected.

The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is inserted and arranged on the front side of the radiation lens portion 210b recessed to the rear of the side lens 210, and imitates a rugged rocky area by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. It is possible to add an accent to the side lens 210. Further, the side flash lens 204 can produce a radial light emission effect by emitting light from the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decorative unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. FIG. 32 (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32 (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decorative unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit as viewed after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decorative unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a light emitting mode of the left side decorative unit with a photograph.

As shown in the figure, the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 excluding the lower part in the front view, and the right side is the game window 101. The left side and the upper side are formed in an arc shape along the outer circumference of the door frame base unit 100, and are formed asymmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has an elliptical shape arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and the large window frames 242a having a width substantially the same as the width of the right side decoration unit 200. A frame-shaped lower side decorative frame 242 having the small window frame 242b of the above, two large window frames 244a which are continuously arranged on the upper side of the lower side decorative frame 242 in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and a large window frame 244a. It includes a frame-shaped side upper decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b arranged between the window frames 244a.

Further, the left side decorative unit 240 has a side flash lens 246 fitted from the rear side with respect to the small window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the side flash lens 246 on the rear side. The transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a fitted from the rear side with respect to the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the side lens 250. An inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and having a plurality of slits 251a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and having a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the rear side of the inner decorative member 251. It is provided with a side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a formed by a plurality of strip-shaped lenses extending radially around the lower left and right center of the game window 101.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LED) and 254b (white LED) are mounted on the surface of the left side decoration unit 240. A substrate 254 and a decorative substrate 256 on the lower left side, which is arranged on the lower side from substantially the center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full-color LED) and 256b (white LED) mounted on the surface. The left side upper decorative board cover 258, which covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative board 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative board 254, and the left side, which covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative board 256. The left side lower decorative board cover 260 attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 256 is provided.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is a transparent transparent unit 240 that supports the upper left speaker 262 arranged on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and on the upper right portion of the front view and the upper left speaker 262 and is attached to the front upper right portion of the side inner lens 252. A diffuser formed by a plurality of band-shaped lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and the upper speaker bracket 264, inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right of the front view, and extending radially around the lower left and right centers. It includes an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

In the left side decorative unit 240, the lower side decorative frame 242, the upper side decorative frame 244, the upper left side decorative substrate cover 258, and the lower left side decorative substrate cover 260 are formed of a translucent member, and the inner The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (silver in this example). Further, the side flash lens 246 is translucent and is entirely made of a milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are made of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

In this example, the small windows on both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (small windows with respect to the radial axis direction centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101). On both sides of the frames 242b and 244b, opening frames 242c and 244c are formed so as to penetrate to the side surfaces of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 in a notched state, and the small window frames 242b and 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. ..

On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted from the rear side into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 to be closed, and the transparent peripheral lens portion is closed. The inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side through the 250a can be visually recognized from the player side. A diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251. Light is diffusely refracted by the diffusion portion 252a to pass through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 and behind the side inner lens 252. The side cannot be clearly seen. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. are not clearly visible from the player side.

Further, the front surface of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 is white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the mounted LEDs such as 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b. In addition to being able to do so, the decorative substrates 254 and 256 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are not lit. The upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the lower left decorative substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. Can be appropriately emitted to emit light to decorate the left side decoration unit 240.

The side lower decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example has a form extending in the vertical direction along the left outer circumference of the game window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the rear side open. The side lower decorative frame 242 is arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction and the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c arranged on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the game window 101 side and outside the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side surface, and is made of synthetic resin. It is formed.

In the side lower decorative frame 242, the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side lower decorative frame 242 can form the peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively.

Further, the side upper decorative frame 244 in the left side decorative unit 240 has a substantially triangular shape in front view, which is continuous with the upper end of the side lower decorative frame 242 and extends from the upper left outer circumference to the upper outer circumference of the game window 101. It is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the side open. The side upper decorative frame 244 is a substantially elliptical small window frame arranged between the two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction and the large window frames 244a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is provided with 244b and an opening frame 244c arranged on both sides of the small window frame 244b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side surface, and is formed of synthetic resin. ing.

In this side upper decorative frame 244, the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. The 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side upper decorative frame 244 can form the peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively. The side upper decorative frame 244 forms a continuous design with the side lower decorative frame 242 when assembled as the left side decorative unit 240.

In this example, the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing from the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. The 250 and the side flash lens 246 are emphasized and visible.

Further, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size obtained by combining the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and has a size extending to the left side of the center on the left side and the upper side of the game window 101. There is. The side lens 250 has a shape in which the peripheral lens portion 250a fitted from the rear side into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 and the peripheral lens portion 250a are recessed to the rear side. It is provided with a radiation lens portion 250b formed on the front side and a side flash lens 246 is arranged on the front side. The side lens 250 is formed by one curved surface in which the peripheral lens portion 250a is smoothly curved, and the radial lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. Further, the side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

Further, the inner decorative member 251 in the left side decorative unit 240 is arranged behind each peripheral lens portion 250a in the side lens 250, and includes a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the figure, the inner decorative member 251 also has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer circumference of the game window 101 and concentrically centered on the center of the game window 101 in the width direction thereof. Multiple are provided. Further, in the inner decorative member 251, the front surface on which the plurality of slits 251a are formed is formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface, and can be visually recognized from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. ..

Further, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. There is. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffused portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted into each inner decorative member 251 from the rear side. The diffused portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of strip-shaped lenses extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 on the front surface, and the inner strip-shaped lens is arranged in the extending direction on the front side. It intersects (substantially orthogonally) with respect to the extending direction of the slit 251a of the decorative member 251.

In the side inner lens 252, the diffuser portion 252a is visible from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. However, the light is diffusely refracted by the plurality of band-shaped lenses formed in the diffuser portion 252a, so that the light is diffused. The rear side is not clearly visible through the portion 252a. Further, as shown in the figure, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

Further, the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 are equipped with a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs on the surface, and the large side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are mounted. The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °) and are used on the side. The LEDs 254b, arranged at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c (the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246) of the lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244. As 256b, a lens having a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used.

The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sound in the mid-high range like the side speaker 130, and can be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that projects diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268 so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side in the front view. It has become. Further, the protective plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent mischief from being mischievous by the upper left speaker 262 or breaking the cone of the upper left speaker 262 and inserting an unauthorized tool into the pachinko machine 1. It has become. The upper left speaker 262 of this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player, and is less likely to be noisy than other pachinko machines.

Next, a characteristic light emitting effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the surface of the side lens 250 having a transparent peripheral lens portion 250a that forms the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240 and is curved, and is arranged behind the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a metal-gloss plating layer and having a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slit 251a. A side inner lens 252 having a diffuser portion 252a composed of a plurality of band-shaped lenses, a left side upper decorative substrate 254 and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lens 252 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a. And (see FIG. 35 and the like). As a result, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are made to emit light, the light emitted forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated to the player side, and the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be light-emittingly decorated.

By the way, the light radiated to the front (side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and is radiated to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected on the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a to illuminate the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Since the inner decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected from the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a toward the inner decorative member 251 is the surface of the inner decorative member 251. At (front), the light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a, and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decorative member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a and is irradiated to the player side.

At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the peripheral lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are each smoothly curved, so that the inner surface side ( The light reflected on the rear surface side) is converged and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) is diffused, and the peripheral lens portion 250a is provided with the direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 and the peripheral surface. The indirect light reflected from the front surface of the lens portion 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the positions shifted from each other. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused and intersected in a striped manner with respect to the extending direction of the slit 251a by the diffusing portion 252a formed by the plurality of band-shaped lenses in the side inner lens 252. It is diffused in the direction (approximately orthogonal). Therefore, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 extends in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slit 251a, which is longer than the width of the slit 251a, and is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped lights having different shades. As a result, it is possible to make a fantastic luminescent decoration with a sense of perspective (see FIG. 36).

[1-2D. Top decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 17, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is located at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5, and is located between the upper end edges of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 on the central side. It is attached between them and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 includes an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extending frame 281b that extends from the upper part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes thinner toward the tip. A front decorative member 281 having a frame-shaped lower extending frame 281c that extends from the lower part of the central frame 281a to the left and right toward the tip, and an upper extending frame 281b and a lower portion arranged behind the front decorative member 281. A transparent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a while closing the inside of the extension frame 281c, and a tubular shape inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282. A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward, and a plate-shaped diffuser lens 285 arranged behind the upper central lens 284 and having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface. , An annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffuser lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and a cylinder that is arranged on the rear side of the lens support member 286 and has substantially the same diameter as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286. A light-shielding member 287 having a portion 287a, a plurality of LEDs 288a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the tubular portion 287a of the light-shielding member 287 arranged behind the light-shielding member 287, and a position corresponding to the outside of the tubular portion 287a. A plurality of LEDs 288b arranged in the above are provided with an upper central decorative substrate 288 mounted on the front surface.

Further, the upper decorative unit 280 is arranged on the rear side of the unit base 289 that supports the front decorative member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decorative substrate 288 from the rear side, and is arranged on the front side. 290 The lower side of the mounting bracket 292, the upper lower cover 293 mounted on the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and the lower side of the upper lower cover 293 have a large amount of translucency and are predetermined. It is provided with a top and bottom decorative cover 294 that is shaped into a shape.

Further, the upper decorative unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decorative member 281 in a plate shape, and has a notch 295a whose rear end side is open in the center in the left-right direction. It includes a cover 295, a plate-shaped lid member 296 that closes the notch 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decorative member 297 that is attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 and shaped into a predetermined shape. ..

In the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, a plating layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decorative member 281 so that the front decorative member 281 shines with light from the outside. Further, the upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a central ring lens portion 282b facing inside the central frame 281a of the front decorative member 281 at the outer periphery of the through hole 282a and an upper extension of the front decorative member 281. The frame 281b and the extension frame lens portion 282c facing the frame of the lower extension frame 281c are provided. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of strip-shaped lenses extending radially on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and the axial core of the through hole 282a is centered on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of prisms extending concentrically are formed. As a result, the light can be diffusely refracted by the plurality of prisms and band-shaped lenses of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

The upper central lens 284 of the upper decorative unit 280 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper center lens 284 has a smooth spindle shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of lenses concentric on the rear side are formed, and light can be diffusely refracted, so that the rear side is clear. It is invisible to the lens.

Further, in the upper central decorative substrate 288 of the upper decorative unit 280, a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface are each full-color LEDs, and within the frame of the central frame 281a of the upper central lens 284 and the front decorative member 281. The outer periphery of the upper center lens 284 can be individually illuminated and decorated. Further, in the upper side decorative substrate 290 of the upper decorative unit 280, a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface are each full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c in the front decoration member 281. It is arranged at the position corresponding to each frame. The upper side decorative substrate 290 can illuminate the upper extending frame 281b and the lower extending frame 281c of the front decorative member 281 by appropriately emitting light from the LED 290a.

[1-2E. Dish unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view cut at a portion of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in the door frame.

The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650, which will be described later, via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 extending in the left-right direction fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish unit base 310. The front end of the dish-shaped upper plate body 312, which is fixed to the center of the front surface and the upper and rear sides are open and the left side (shaft support side) of the front view bulges forward greatly, and the upper outer circumference of the upper plate body 312 are both front. The upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward in the visual direction, the upper plate front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front end edge of the upper plate upper panel 314, and the upper plate front portion. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 arranged between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 is continuous with the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and covers the upper right side of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate is provided.

Further, the plate unit 300 is mounted on the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the center on the left and right to the right side, and is mounted on the plate-shaped substrate mounting base 320 on which a plurality of fine prisms are formed on the surface and the lower side of the substrate mounting base 320. It is provided with an upper plate decorative substrate 322 on which a plurality of LEDs 322a are mounted on the upper surface. By appropriately emitting light of the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322, a part of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be light-emittingly decorated.

Further, the plate unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the plate unit base 310 on the lower side of the upper plate body 312 to open the upper side and the rear side, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the front view, and the front end moves to the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower plate main body 324 formed so as to become lower toward the direction, and a dish-shaped lower plate main body 324 fixed to the upper part of the lower plate main body 324 A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000, which will be described later, are located on a portion that covers the lower front end of the lower plate body 324 and extends to the right in front view. The lower plate cover 328 having the lock hole 328a facing the lower plate cover 328, and the upper opening 330a and the upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 by decorating the right side from the position on the left and right center left side of the lower end of the lower plate cover 328. It is provided with a lower plate right side cover 330 having a lower opening 330b that opens to the lower side and into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front.

Further, the plate unit 300 is arranged at the lower end of the lower plate upper left side cover 332 extending diagonally to cover the left front end of the lower plate main body 324 and the left front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and the lower end of the lower plate upper left side cover 332. The lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, and the protective cover 336 made of a metal plate that closes the opening 334a of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate from the rear side to allow sound to pass through, and protection. It is provided with a frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate. The right front end of the lower plate top plate 326 is covered with the upper plate front decorative member 316.

Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the plate unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate upper left cover 332 are designed. A side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a formed in a continuous shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338. It includes a cover body 339 having a plurality of holes in a disk shape that is gently curved so as to close the 338a from the rear side and bulge toward the front side.

In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 is possible. It is designed to protect as much as possible. Further, the side speaker cover 338 has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster formed on the surface thereof. The cover body 339 is colored black.

Further, the plate unit 300 includes an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 for pulling out the game balls attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate main body 312 and stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and a lower plate main body 324. A lower plate ball pulling mechanism 350 attached to the lower surface for pulling out the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 downward, and a lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 attached to the upper left side of the plate unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. It includes a ball lending unit 360 that operates a ball lending machine (also referred to as CR unit 6, not shown).

The plate unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper plate 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, an upper plate main body 312, an upper plate upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, a lower plate main body 324, a lower plate top plate 326, a lower plate cover 328, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending to the left and right. It is provided. A ball-renting unit mounting portion 310b for mounting the ball-renting unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The plate unit base 310 is arranged below the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front), and has a horizontally long rectangular upper plate ball supply port 310c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and an upper plate ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction to the lower side near the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (approximately the middle in the height direction of the plate unit base 310), and the upper plate It is provided with a pair of lower plate support portions 310e which are arranged directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper plate ball supply port 310c and project forward and have the same upper surface. The upper plate ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower plate support portion 310e arranged directly below.

Further, the plate unit 300 is arranged between a pair of lower plate support portions 310e and is fitted with the rear ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326 to form a horizontally long rectangular ring-shaped lower plate support in a front view. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower plate ball supply port 310g arranged in the lower part on the right side of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower plate support groove 310f and penetrating in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 has a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward in a tubular shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. It is provided with a notch 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

The upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the notches 101a and 162 of the door frame base main body 110 and the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the first ball outlet 544a of the unit 540. The front end of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is provided with an induction recess 310j that extends long to the right in the front view and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j, and the right end of the guide recess 310j is equal to the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312. The height difference of is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game ball stored in the upper plate 301, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 is Since it is not possible to linearly exit the upper plate 301 in front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the dispensed game ball comes into contact with the game ball that has closed the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c and rolls. The direction changes, the guide is guided to roll in the guide recess 310j to the right in front view, and the ball is discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, so that the player does not pull the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. However, it is possible to continue to supply (release) the paid-out game balls into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. , It is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game by devoting himself to the operation of driving the game ball and the game by the driven game ball, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. Can be done.

The upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 provides an opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower plate ball supply port 310 g, the lower plate ball supply trough 310h extending rearward from the rear side penetrates the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply trough 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply trough 310h is in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal flow path 344c of the upper plate ball removal base 344.

In this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower plate ball supply port 310 g is provided with an opening portion 310k that expands to the left in front view, and the lower plate ball supply port is provided by the expansion portion 310k. The front end of 310 g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent early ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310 g due to the game balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310 g, and more games can be played. The ball can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (shaft support side) of the plate unit 300 bulges forward from the center and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. There is. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the shaft support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located near the intermediate positions in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate main body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

A metal upper plate rail 313 that can come into contact with the game ball is attached to the upper plate main body 312 from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the precision rail 313 is electrically grounded so that the static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate main body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 projects forward, and is outside the open side of the upper plate main body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction and into which the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 described later is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a stepped shape at the front end one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312, and is a decorative mounting portion 314b for attaching the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318. And an operation unit mounting portion 314c for mounting the operation unit 400, which will be described later, is formed in a stepped shape at the center in the left-right direction in front of the upper plate main body 312 and further lowered from the decorative mounting portion 314b. There is.

The upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape extending in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed in a smooth shape on the left side from the position on the right side of the center in the left-right direction, while the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape. It is formed in a rugged shape like this. Further, although detailed illustration of the upper plate front decorative member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by the plurality of curved surfaces, and light can be diffusely refracted. The rear side is not clearly visible from the player side. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 is arranged behind the smoothly formed portion on the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 can be clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the assembled state, whereas the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player's side, and the sense of distance is uncertain.

The upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The surface of the upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape, similar to the portion on the right side of the front decorative member 316 of the upper plate. It is formed in an integral shape with the right side portion, and the upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer circumference of the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 described later. Further, the upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface), so that light can be diffusely refracted and the lower side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. There is. The upper plate decorative substrate 322 is arranged on the rear side of the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and on the lower side of the upper plate upper right decorative member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is used. By appropriately emitting light, the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be appropriately emitted.

The lower plate main body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed so as to fan out forward in a plan view, a rear end linearly formed in the left-right direction, and a substantially center of the upper surface to be the lowest, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. It is provided with a lower plate ball punching hole 324b formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction, and a side plate 324c rising upward from the front end and the side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the bottom plate 324a. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower plate top plate 326 are placed and connected to the straight portion of the upper end.

In the lower plate main body 324, the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plate 324c are inserted and supported in the lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 arranged on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

The lower plate cover 328 is made of black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower plate side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a silver-colored and metallic plating layer (a matte state as if sandblasted instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower plate side cover 330 includes a plate-shaped portion that forms a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300 that extends rearward from the lower end. The lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3, and are formed in the main body frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces from the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

Further, the lower plate upper left cover 332 is provided with a plating layer which is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a silver metallic luster on the surface. Further, the lower left cover 334 of the lower plate is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and is a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300 extending rearward from the lower end. It has a plate-shaped part that forms a. The opening 334a of the lower left cover 334 of the lower plate is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of the lower speaker 821 (speaker for bass) provided in the main body frame 3 described later, and the sound from the lower speaker 821 is transmitted to the player side. It can be made transparent to. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower left cover 334 of the lower plate is made of punching metal having a plurality of holes formed in the metal plate to prevent an unauthorized tool from being inserted inside.

In the plate unit 300 of this example, the bottom surface excluding the center in the left-right direction is closed by the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower cover 334, and the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower cover 334 The bottom surface between the two is closed by the lower plate ball removing mechanism 340 described later.

The upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 is designed for the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341 and the upper plate ball removing button 341 that are vertically attached to the mounting hole 314a of the upper plate upper panel 314. The operating piece 342, which moves up and down more than the vertical movement of the upper plate ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310, and the operating piece 342 are operably supported and the plate unit base 310. A contact piece that slides in the vertical direction by the vertical movement of the mounting base 346 mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 346 and the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346, and comes into contact with the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 described later. The upper plate ball removing slider 343 provided with 343a and arranged behind the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate ball removing slider 343 are slidably supported in the vertical direction and attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 310. It is provided with a punching base 344.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 has an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper plate ball removing button 341 so that the upper plate ball removing button 341 is located at the upper moving end. It is urged upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the upper plate ball removal base 344.

The upper plate ball removal base 344 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d and opens forward 344a (FIG. 43) and the ball guidance flow path 344b (FIGS. 42 and FIG. 42) that guides the game ball that has passed through the opening 344a and the opening 344a on the back surface side of the upper plate ball removal base 344 downward and then guides the game ball backward. 44), and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding flow path 344b, extending substantially along the lower side of the upper plate ball removing base 344 toward the right end (shaft support side) in rear view It is provided with a ball removal flow path 344c, which enables the game ball to be distributed.

In the upper plate ball removing base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guiding flow path 344b communicating with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is communicated with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 via the feed opening 113, and the ball feed unit 580 is used. Can be supplied to.

Further, in the ball pulling flow path 344c of the upper plate ball pulling base 344, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding flow path 344b communicates with the ball pulling port 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 via the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110. At the same time, the lower end extending toward the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply trough 310h in the plate unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 is inserted. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower part of the rear end of the ball removal flow path 344c is closed by the upper plate ball removal flow path cover 345.

When the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward also Move down. Then, in the operating rod 583c of the ball pulling member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a, the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583 rotates in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. It moves, and the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other. As a result, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 enters the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and the ball guide path 344b. After that, it is discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper plate ball extraction base 344, and from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply trough 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged.

Since the ball pulling member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a in the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring, the ball pulling member 583 Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removing slider 343 via the operating paddle 583c, and the ball removing member 583 or the like can absorb the impact. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being damaged and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 in the plate unit 300 is arranged between the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower left lower cover 334 of the lower plate on the lower side of the lower plate main body 324, and forms the central portion of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. Rotate the plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 352 and the opening / closing shutter 352 that are rotatably supported on the upper surface of the punching base 351 and the lower dish ball punching base 351 and can open / close the lower dish ball punching hole 324b of the lower dish body 324. It is provided with a lower plate ball removal slider 353 that is slidably supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removal base 351 in the front-rear direction, and a lower plate ball removal button 354 that is attached to the front end of the lower plate ball removal slider 353. There is.

The lower plate ball removing base 351 is provided with a base ball removing hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324. Further, the opening / closing shutter 352 has a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b, and a shutter ball removing hole arranged in front of the closing portion 352a and penetrating in the vertical direction substantially coincident with the lower plate ball removing hole 324b. 352b and the lower plate ball removal base 351 are urged by a coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a is positioned to close the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a. ..

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the open / close shutter 352 is provided with a contact pin capable of contacting the lower plate ball removal slider 353, and the contact pin abuts on the lower plate ball removal slider 353. The lower plate ball removal slider 353 rotates the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b so as to move rearward, and the urging force of the coil spring 356 slides the lower plate ball removal slider 353 forward. You can do it.

Further, in the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower plate ball removing base 351. In order to hold the lower plate ball removing slider 353 in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower plate ball removing slider 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower plate ball removing button 354 is moved to the front end in a state where the surface shape of the lower plate ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 or the like. There is a state in which the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower plate ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pressed backward, the lower plate ball removal button 354 and the lower plate ball removal slider 353 slide backward, and the lower plate ball removal slider 353 opens and closes by sliding backward. The shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b move rearward.

Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates backward, the shutter ball extraction hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball extraction hole 352b and the lower plate ball extraction hole 352b. It coincides with 324b, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b. When the lower plate ball removal slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower plate ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower plate ball removal slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. By locking (holding) the slide of the lower plate ball removal slider 353, the lower plate ball removal button 354 remains in the open state retracted rearward, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is the lower plate ball. It is held in a state of matching with the drawing hole 3324b, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removing button 354 is not held down.

On the other hand, when closing the lower plate ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted open lower plate ball removal button 354 is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower plate ball removal slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released, and the lower plate is released. The ball pulling slide 353 can slide, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring in the direction of closing the lower plate ball pulling hole 324b, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the urging force to close the lower plate. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower plate ball removing slide 353 slides forward, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower plate ball removing button 354 is lowered. It returns to the closed position substantially coincident with the front surface of the plate cover 328 and the like, and the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 302.

The holding mechanism 355 of the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and the detailed mechanism thereof will be omitted.

The ball lending unit 360 in the plate unit 300 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a lending balance display unit 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. The ball lending unit 360 inserts cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and then presses the ball lending button 361 to release a predetermined number of game balls to the plate unit 300. You can rent (pay out) into the upper plate 301, and when you press the return button 362, the balance of cash and prepaid cards that you put in after subtracting the rest of the lent amount will be returned. There is. In addition, the loan balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

The ball lending unit 360 is adapted to be attached from the rear side to the ball lending unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a security cover mounting portion 364 that projects rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

More specifically, the ball rental unit 360 has a transparent front cover 365 that covers the front side of the loan balance display unit 363, and is arranged behind the front cover 365 to which the loan balance display unit 363 is attached and the ball rental button 361. And the ball rental unit board 366 (see FIG. 45) to which the switch operated by the operation of the return button 362 is attached, and the rear side of the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 that covers the rear side of the ball rental unit board 366. A rear cover 367, which is attached to the rear cover 367, is provided. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

The ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball rental unit 360 is mounted is formed between the circular button opening 310 m facing the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 and the button openings 310 m. A transparent front cover 365 that includes a rectangular display opening 310n that is closed by the cover 365, and a protrusion 310o that is formed on the outer periphery of each of the two button openings 310m and projects forward, respectively, and closes the display opening 310n. The loan balance display unit 363 arranged on the rear side can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protruding portion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

In the ball rental unit 360 of this example, as shown in the figure, the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 is arranged above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c, and the front surface. It is arranged so that it faces. Further, in the ball rental unit 360, the return button 362 is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the ball rental button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a color different from that of the plate unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362.

Further, the ball lending unit 360 is provided with a protruding portion 310o protruding forward (on the player side) from the outer periphery of the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts his / her hand into the upper plate 301. Since the hand touches the protruding portion 310o before touching the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent erroneous operation of 361, the return button 362, and the like.

The plate unit 300 of this example is provided with an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having a feeling similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine equipped with two storage plates. The machine can be reminiscent of the machine, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new model pachinko machine), the feeling of anxiety given to the player can be reduced and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play. It has become.

[1-2F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. FIG. 46 (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46 (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing the pressing operation unit in the operation unit in a pressed state.

The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is arranged in front of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the press that can be pressed by the player. It is equipped with an operation unit 405, and can accept the player's operation according to the game state and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved, so that the player can not only drive the game ball but also operate the game ball. , It is intended to be able to participate in the production during the game.

The operation unit 400 is an annular driven operation unit connected to an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and a lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 in which the drive gear 412 is fixed to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and an annular gear rail 416a. The operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports the pressing operation unit 405 in the vertical direction, and the pressing operation unit 405 arranged in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416. A base member having an upward urging spring 418, a gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416, and an opening 420a through which the button support cylinder 416b can pass, and the operation unit holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface. The base is mounted so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and the upper cover 422 which covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 422a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. It mainly includes a member 420 and a lower cover 424 that covers the lower surface of the dial drive motor 414.

Further, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422 and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the opening 426a. A cover body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a plating having a silver metallic luster on the surface while being arranged on the upper side of the cover body 426 and formed in a predetermined shape. An inner cover 427 provided with a layer and a transparent surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass.

Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430a attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 and the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass through, and the dial operation unit 401 on the upper surface. A dial decorative substrate 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of the above, and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 to detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. It includes a 432b, a pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decorative substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decorative substrate 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation unit holding member 416 by the substrate holding claw 416g of the operation unit holding member 416.

The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is made of a translucent material, and has a tubular inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper end to the outside. An annular top plate 401b with a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder 401c shorter than the inner cylinder 401a extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate 401b, and an outer cylinder. It mainly includes a flange portion 401d extending outward from the lower end of the portion 401c in a ring shape. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a of the upper cover 422. Further, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a connection locking portion (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder portion 401a, and the dial operation unit 401 is locked by locking the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410. The 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected to each other.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a projecting portion 401f protruding from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a toward the center at a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner cylinder portion 401a. Although the details will be described later, the protruding portion 401f can come into contact with the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operating portion 401. By contacting the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) from further immersing in the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 are lowered so that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. The surface is sloped so that the contact area when they come into contact with each other becomes large. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with the upper end closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 that closes the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. It includes a cap inner 408 that is arranged inside the 407 and is sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided in the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decorative substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It has become like.

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b whose lower end extends downward from the lower part of the outer circumference and protrudes outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the locking claws 406b are the operating portion holding member 416. By locking with the locking convex portion 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is moved so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support portion 416b. It can be regulated. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, a contact portion for preventing the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction is provided in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416. The button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating in the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap allows the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

Further, the button body 406 includes a press detection piece 406c that can be detected by the press detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432 that extends downward from a position different from that of the locking claw 406b. When the button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than the substantially center in the vertical direction and a smaller diameter than the upper side, and the step portion 407a is located between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the protrusion 401f in the dial operation unit 401 on the lower side of the step portion 407a, and a dial operation unit on the upper side of the step portion 407a. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the 401 and is larger than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from above the dial operation unit 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401. , The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can no longer be immersed in the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. The word "Push" is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the word can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 is provided with a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on the outer circumference of the annular shape. The inner diameter of the driven gear 410 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b in the operating portion holding member 416, and the annular sliding surface is in contact with the gear rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. It has a moving surface 410a. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. You can do it.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connecting locking claws 410b that extend upward from the opposite positions of the upper ends and then project inward, and the connecting locking claws 410b are used in the dial operation unit 401. By locking the inner cylinder portion 401a with the connection locking portion 401e, the driven gear 410 and the dial operation portion 401 are integrally rotatably connected.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432, and details will be described later, but the rotation detection piece 410c and the rotation detection piece 410c are of each other. The slit 410d formed between them makes it possible to detect the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 by the detection patterns of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d have substantially the same length in the circumferential direction.

Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. Further, the dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the dial drive motor 414 rotationally drives the drive gear 412 via the rotation shaft. Therefore, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation of the drive gear 412 (rotation shaft) in small steps by the dial drive motor 414. Further, by stopping the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. It is possible to give a feeling.

Further, the operation unit holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the operation unit 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a tubular shape. A button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports the button body 416b and a locking convex portion 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the button support cylinder 416b near the bottom and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406. (See FIGS. 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c that penetrates the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and sends light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decorative substrate 432 into the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation unit 405). The opening 416d through which the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432 can pass through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction, and the bottom portion inside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. The opening 416e desired from above by the pressure detection sensor 432c attached to the button decorative substrate 432, and a pair of substrate holding claws 416g for locking and holding the button decorative substrate 432 extending downward from the lower surface. I have.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the operation unit holding member 416 is arranged in the button support cylinder 416b, forms a predetermined amount of gap in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406, and locks the button body 406. It further includes a plurality of contact portions capable of contacting the claw 406b. The contact portion allows the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range and prevents the button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) from rotating around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decorative substrate 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Be prepared for.

The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 on the outer circumference of the button support cylinder 416b and mounting it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so that it can move and rotate. Further, by inserting the button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation unit 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button body 406. .. A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button body 406. The spring 418 causes the button body 406 (pressing operation unit). 405) is in a state of being urged upward.

The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is made of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 penetrates the lower recess 420b, which is recessed upward so that the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 can be fitted, and the bottom (ceiling portion) of the lower recess 420b in the vertical direction, and the operation holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c arranged on the opposite side of the opening 420a from the lower recess 420b and recessed downward to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. I have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and the motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414 and the lower recess 420b from the outside to the lower side. It is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e protruding by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f that opens downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e.

Further, the base member 420 has a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 arranged above the upper recess 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is upward from different positions outside the upper recess 420c. It is provided with a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decorative board 430 projecting to. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses, mounting holes, and the like for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

The base member 420 has a predetermined screw after fitting and inserting the operation portion holding member 416 into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, when the operation portion holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

Further, in the leg portion 420e of the base member 420, the positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof is fitted with the positioning projection 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later, and the base member 420. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at positions determined to each other. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and arranged in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decorative board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It is designed so that it does not come into contact with the gear 410.

Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor mounting portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be sufficiently transferred to and dissipated by the base member 420. As a result, overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 or the like due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with the lower side open, and has an inner diameter opening 422a through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the collar portion 401d cannot pass through. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in a plan view. It is formed so as to extend, and is provided with engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper part is raised. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

Further, the upper cover 422 has a claw-shaped locking piece 422c that extends downward from the outer circumference of one of the short axis directions (front-rear direction in the pachinko machine 1) (front side in the pachinko machine 1) and the lower end protrudes outward. I have. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316 of the plate unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper plate front decorative member 316, It is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from coming out of the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

In the upper cover 422, the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the base member 420 from below with respect to the opening 422a with the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decorative substrate 430, the dial member 401, and the like attached. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass through, the opening 422a can prevent the dial operation unit 401 from coming out upward.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open upper part, and the outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the outer peripheral shape of the upper cover 422, and the leg portion of the base member 420 is located at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the bottom. It is provided with a positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted with the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of the 420d. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b capable of engaging with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at the upper portions of both ends in the long axis direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1), and the engaging portions 424b By engaging the engaging claw 422b, the upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424.

As shown in the figure, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a through which the upper cover 422 can pass through in the vertical direction in the center, and an operation unit mounting of the dish unit 300 extending outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. It includes a fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c, and a fixing boss 426c fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 extending downward from the lower outer peripheral surface of the opening 426a.

The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, it is attached to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is mounted so as to be slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm), and the operation unit 400 is mounted. When the cover body 426 is elastically deformed or hit, the impact can be mitigated.

In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then. The structure is such that the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover body 426.

In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 rotating together with the dial operation unit 401 has the length in the circumferential direction in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths in the directions are the same. Further, in the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432, the circumferential distance corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410. It is said that. As a result, although details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection From the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b, it is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotating.

Further, although the details of the operation unit 400 of this example will be described later, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. .. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 stepwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using the stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from rotating intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward and reverse directions in small steps.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401, and the button cap Since the 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can no longer be immersed in the inner cylinder portion 401e, the load applied to the pressing operation unit 405 is dialed via the step portion 407a and the protruding portion 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial drive motor 414 is moved in small steps in a state where the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other by pressing the pressing operation unit 405. By repeating the rolling and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operating unit 401, and the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 can surprise the player and entertain the game and the production. It has become.

According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that the player can rotate and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420, and the operation unit 400 Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player or the like hits the operation units 401 and 405 strongly, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely used by the player. In addition to being able to operate, the operability of the operation units 401 and 405 can be improved, and it is possible to entertain the production using the operation units 401 and 405 and suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered. it can.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401, and if the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is also likely to be hit, and the operation unit The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, suppressing the concentration of the hitting impact and preventing the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 able to withstand a bang, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely operated. The operability of the 405 can be improved, and the production using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the base member 420 of the operation unit 400 and the like are housed in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As described above, when the cover body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied. Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover body 426, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, the bottom portion (dish unit 300) of the operation unit mounting portion 314c can receive an impact or a load, so that the impact or the like from the operation units 401 or 405 is dispersed to prevent the impact or the like from concentrating. It is possible to improve the impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300.

Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of leg portions 420e projecting downward from the positions supporting the operation units 401 and 405, and the leg portions 420e of the base member 420 are the operation unit in the dish unit 300. Even if the impact from the operation units 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 in contact with the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, since the leg portion 420e is not arranged directly under the impact, the operation units 401 and 405 of the base member 420 The portion supporting the above is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed) so that the impact from the operating units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in a plan view. When the operation unit 401 is struck from above, even if the operation unit holding member 416 holding the dial operation unit 401 deviates from the base member 420 and moves downward, the dial operation unit 401 comes into contact with the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401, and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

Further, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 arranged at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotational drive including vibration). As a result, the player can be surprised to pay attention to the production by the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can be entertained. At the same time, the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414 to appropriately drive the dial operation unit. It is possible to make the production using the 401 (pressing operation unit 405) more diverse and less likely to get tired of it, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is probably set to the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). Since the position can be eccentric with respect to the position of the rotation shaft of 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted through the rotation shaft of the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 from being directly affected, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) from being damaged.

Further, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401 and the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a, the dial operation unit 401 is supported. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can come into contact with the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 is the base member. It is possible to surely prevent the depression from being lower than 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operation unit 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation unit holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and the load from the above.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotationally driving the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 can be frequently rotationally driven by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 can be rotationally driven. Even if the amount of heat generated is increased due to an excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 due to the player forcibly stopping the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 even though the dial drive motor 414 is rotationally driven by the motor. The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated and dissipated through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from malfunctioning due to overheating, and the dial drive means 414. The pachinko machine 1 can withstand a high load, can fully embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using the dial drive means 414 as described above, and entertain the player. Can be.

Further, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c for detecting the press of the press operation unit 405 are provided, and the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the above, it is possible to perform an effect according to the operation of the player based on the detection signal, which is more suitable for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide a sensational effect, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. Further, the dial decoration board 430 and the button decoration board 432 for illuminating the operation units 401 and 405 are provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be luminescently decorated. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 emit light. By doing so, the interest of the player can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation unit 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 come into contact with each other, so that the player can press the pressing operation unit 405. Is pressed, the dial drive motor 414 repeatedly rotates forward and reverse within a predetermined angle range to vibrate the dial operation unit 401, thereby vibrating the dial operation unit 401 via the step portion 407a in contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even if a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405 is not separately provided, the player can be given an operation feeling for the pressing operation 405, so that the effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405, which was thought not to move without permission, can greatly surprise the player, which is good. It is possible to make people think that there may be something, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can move freely to attract the player's attention to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. In addition to making it easier, the operation unit 400 can be positively operated by the player, and the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is enjoyed, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operating unit 401 are brought into contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck hard, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side as well, and the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed. Can be enhanced. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck hard, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged, so that the game is prevented from being interrupted due to the damage of the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered due to the interruption of the game.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is rotatably supported only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the circumference of the axial center extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is rotationally driven by the motor 414, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from trying to rotate together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can operate the dial in the operation unit 400. The roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be reliably recognized, and the player can easily enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400, and the guide to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The word "PUSH" does not rotate or tilt significantly, making it easier for the player to read, and making the player surely recognize that the pressing operation unit 405 is the pressing operation. be able to.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a projecting portion 401f protruding from the inner circumference of the inner cylinder portion 401a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 has a diameter smaller than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a formed by the above is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible to each other at the upper end of the operation unit 400. The gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and the inside of the operation unit 400 can be improved through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and prevent the occurrence of problems such as the dial operation unit 401 becoming difficult to rotate or the pressing operation unit 405 becoming difficult to press due to the intrusion of foreign matter. be able to.

Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operating unit 401 in the operating unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, which of the dial operating unit 401 is in the circumferential direction. Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed (pressing a position deviated to the outer circumference from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), it is surely brought into contact with the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to reliably transmit the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are in circular contact with each other, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Impact resistance can be further improved.

Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, it may not be inclined. In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. Further, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be radially dispersed in the outward direction in the direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the rotation axis, preventing the load from concentrating, and the resistance of the operation unit 400. The load resistance and impact resistance can be surely increased, and the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased, and the occurrence of defects during the game can be reduced as much as possible, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward rotation and reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not only simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, and forward rotation and reverse rotation can be performed. It can be easily vibrated by repetition, and the operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that exerts the above-mentioned effects can be surely embodied.

Further, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 provided with the upper plate 301 for storing the game balls, the strength and rigidity of the plate unit 300 is high in order to store a large number of game balls. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a bang on the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400.

[1-2G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 51 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device disassembled and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. On the front of the handle base 502, which is fixed and cylindrical and whose front end bulges round in the direction perpendicular to the axis, the handle body 504 which is arranged on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and the front surface of the handle body 504. It is provided with a front end cover 506 that is arranged and fixed to the handle base 502 and rotatably supports the rear 504 of the handle body in cooperation with the handle base 502.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rear end and the front end are rotatably supported by the inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle body 504, the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506, and the handle body. A shaft member 510 that is integrally rotatable with the 504 and has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a that can rotate integrally with the transmission gear 511. It is equipped with a rotation position detection sensor 512 sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

Further, in the handle device 500, one end side is attached to the inner base 508 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotation position detection sensor 512 is viewed clockwise in the front view via the transmission gear 511. With respect to the auxiliary spring 514 for urging, the touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, the launch stop switch 518 attached to different positions on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the inner base 508. A single-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported to operate the launch stop switch 518, one end is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end is attached to the handle body 504, and the handle body 504 is placed in the initial rotation position (counterclockwise when viewed from the front). It is provided with a handle return spring 522 for urging to return to the rotating end in the direction of the above.

As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of this example has a form in which the front end is open and the front end is rounded and bulges rearward, and the rear end is cylindrically extended to the rear. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape of the above. The three grooves 502a of the handle base 502 are one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequally spaced in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three ridges 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Have been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the ridge 143.

In the handle device 500, the handle body 504 is formed with arc-shaped slits 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis thereof, and the front end cover 506 is formed with three mounting bosses 506a protruding rearward. These mounting bosses 506a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slit 504a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 comes into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506, so that the rotation range of the handle body 504 is restricted.

Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 504b projecting rearward is formed on the handle main body 504, and the other end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 504b. When locked, the handle body 504 is urged to rotate counterclockwise in front view by a handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 on one end side.

The handle device 500 of this example is adapted to be attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. Since the mounting surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 is inclined so as to face the outside (open side) in a plan view viewed from above, the handle mounted via the handle bracket 140 The device 500 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1) to form a door frame. It is designed to be mounted and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and the rotation operation is easy to perform without any discomfort in the rotation operation.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle body 504 (handle device 500) is rotated, the rotation position detection sensor 512 passes through the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a will rotate. Then, the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 654 in the ball launching device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle body 504 and the front end cover 508 are electrically plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the handle body 504 or the like. Then, when the handle body 504 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball is driven. Can be done. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original one and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, when the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 194) controls the firing solenoid 654. The rotary drive can be stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 520, before operating the single-shot button 520. It is possible to launch a game ball with the driving strength.

In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotation operation of the handle body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and then the launch control unit 4120 detects the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are doord like a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, a joint unit) mechanism so that the frames 5 are linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and the links are released when the door frame 5 is opened, so that the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. At the same time, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of defects in the joint unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest due to the malfunction of the gaming ball.

[1-2H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 53 is a front view showing the foul cover unit with the front cover removed.

The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is launched by a game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700, which will be described later, or a hit ball launching device 650. The game ball (foul ball) that has not reached the game area 1100 in spite of this is guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 whose front side is open and has a plurality of game ball flow paths inside, and a front cover 544 that closes the front end of the cover base 542.

As shown in FIG. 52B, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 communicates with the first ball entrance 542a, which is arranged in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the first ball entrance 542a. The first ball passage 542b that expands to the right side in the front view toward the front end of the cover base 542, and the second ball entrance that is located outside the first ball entrance 542a (on the right side in the rear view) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a. It is provided with a second ball passage 542d that extends downward and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower right corner of the front view inside the cover base 542 that communicates with the second ball entrance 542c. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c have the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 77 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. They are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the figure, the height of the portion of the cover base 542 extending in the left-right direction along the lower end of the second ball passage 542d is about three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball. , A storage space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

Further, the cover base 542 can guide the game ball to the upper part near the downstream side of the second ball passage 542d by communicating with the foul ball entrance 542e, which is arranged at the substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and the foul ball entrance 542e. It is provided with a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening / closing actuating piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g abuts on the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to rotate the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a is provided, and the second ball outlet 544b which is arranged in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h in the plate unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110.

In the foul cover unit 540 of this example, the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball entrance 542a is passed through the first ball passage 542b to the first ball outlet. It is possible to supply from 544a to the upper plate 301 via the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball entrance 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball exit. It is possible to supply from 544b to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g of the plate unit 300.

Further, although the details of the foul cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball launched by the hit ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supplies) the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be done.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 of this example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d and can be swung by the game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. A swing member 548 pivotally supported by the swing member 548, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that urges the swing member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550. It is equipped with 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the lower end of the swing member 548 is rotatably supported with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end of the swing member 548 rotates to the left side in the front view, and is substantially vertical. The left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed in such a state. Further, the swing member 548 is urged by a spring 552 to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the rocking member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a projecting outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. ..

Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-shaped earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the rear. , And it is possible to remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to the circulation of game balls.

In this example, the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 is supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. Even if the upper plate 301 is full, if the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, it stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, at the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, the game balls are circulated to the full tank passage 775 side through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 83), and the full tank branch unit 770 It will be supplied from the full tank outlet 776 to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540.

Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 was filled with the game balls, the game balls could not be discharged from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the game balls stayed in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. The game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are discharged from the prize ball unit 700 and a large number of game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swing member 548 to resist the urging force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the rocking member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 194) stops paying out the game balls from the prize ball unit 700, and at the same time, the game is played. A person is notified to urge the player to discharge the game ball in the plate unit 300 to the outside.

When the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swing member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the urging force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. It is not detected, and the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[Anti-static measures for door frame base board 194]
As described above, the foul cover unit 540 (a molded product of transparent polycarbonate) (see FIGS. 52 (A), (B) and 53) has a second ball passage 542d and a game ball for guiding the game ball to the lower plate. A storage space 546 is formed to retain the space, and the game ball (metal) passes at a high speed while contacting the wall surface of the passage. Therefore, static electricity is generated by rubbing the game ball and the resin, and the game ball is charged. Cheap.

Therefore, at the bottom of the second ball passage 542d, a metal earth rail 554 for removing static electricity of the game ball generated by rolling resistance due to the circulation of the game ball and discharging it to the lower plate is provided. There is. Further, the foul cover unit 540 is provided with a plate-shaped ground fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542, and the ground fitting 556 at the left end is conductive to the ground rail 554 on the bottom surface of the foul cover unit 540. (See FIGS. 52 (A), (B) and 53). The ground fitting 556 is screwed to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (FIGS. 18, 23, 26) of the door frame 5 so that static electricity can escape.

The second ball passage 542d of the foul cover unit 540 can remove static electricity from the game ball by the earth rail 554 as described above, but the electrostatic charge is accumulated in the polycarbonate of this part and becomes a dozen or so kV. (3-4 kV at most even if you feel pain due to the discharge of accumulated electrostatic charge). In addition, the electric charge accumulated in the resin escapes only in the immediate vicinity even if it is grounded, and most of it remains. Then, due to electrostatic induction by this electric charge, there is a risk that the digital amplifier circuit of the door frame base substrate 194 in the vicinity thereof may malfunction.

In the game machine, a ground wire for releasing static electricity is attached to, for example, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. However, there is a risk that the ground wire may be broken or the connection terminal of the ground wire may be disconnected due to an unexpected accident.

The embodiment described below is made in view of such circumstances, and even if the ground is not taken, electrostatic induction is not caused by the electric charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540. The present invention relates to an antistatic mechanism that shields the door frame base substrate 194 with a metal plate (shield plate 562 described later) and further prevents static electricity released to the metal plate for shielding from jumping to surrounding conductors. Is.

FIG. 54 is a front view of the antistatic mechanism. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of a door frame showing a state provided with an antistatic mechanism when viewed from the back. FIG. 56 is a rear view of a main part of the door frame showing a state in which the antistatic mechanism is provided. Further, FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 56.

As shown in FIG. 54, the antistatic mechanism 560 in the embodiment is a thin metal (tin plate in this example) plate that shields the door frame base substrate 194 so that the electric charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 does not cause electrostatic induction. It is composed of a thin shield plate 562 and a thin plate of polyethylene terephthalate (PET) which is formed in an outer peripheral shape larger than the shield plate 562 and insulates the electric charge transferred to the shield plate 562 so as not to transfer to the surrounding conductors. It is configured to include an insulating sheet 570.

The shield plate 562 has a flat plate-shaped conductive portion 563 that is conductively contacted by abutting the lower reinforcing plate metal 154 of the door frame 5 on the upper portion in the vertical direction, and a step portion 568 that is bent in the left-right direction. A substantially plate-shaped shield portion 564 located below and behind the conductive portion 563 and arranged over substantially the entire back side of the door frame base substrate cover 195 attached to the lower back surface of the door frame 5. And have.

A mounting portion 565 extending in a substantially semicircular shape is formed in the middle of the upper side of the conductive portion 563, an insertion hole 566 is formed in the mounting portion 565, and a mounting hole 567 is formed in the left corner near the upper side of the conductive portion 563. Has been drilled.

The insulating sheet 570 has a shape larger than the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562, and functions to electrically insulate the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 from the surrounding conductors. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, an insulating sheet 570 is attached to the upper side of the back surface of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562 by sticking.

In FIGS. 55 to 57, as described above, the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194 is covered with the door frame base substrate cover 195 (FIGS. 23 and 24). The insulating sheet 570 of the antistatic mechanism 560 is arranged over substantially the entire back surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. At this time, the shield plate 562 is arranged on the back surface of the insulating sheet 570 so that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570. That is, the shield plate 562 is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the door frame base substrate cover 195 and the shield plate 562. At this time, the outer peripheral portion of the insulating sheet 570 is located outside the outer peripheral portion of the shield plate 562 in the radial direction. Then, the conductive portion 563 of the shield plate 562 comes into contact with the back surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 23) of the door frame 5, so that the conductive contact is made and the static electricity is released.

The mounting boss portions 110g, 110h, 110i, and 110j for the foul cover unit 540 are projected at appropriate positions on the right side of the lower back surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base main body 110). Further, at appropriate locations on the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, screw insertion holes 154a and 154b for screwing the shield plate 562 and the ground fitting 556 to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 so as to release static electricity. 154c is provided (see FIG. 56).

The shield plate 562 is positioned by inserting the mounting boss portion 110 g into the insertion hole 566, and the screw is inserted into the screw insertion hole 154a of the mounting hole 567 and the lower reinforcing metal fitting 154, and the screw is screwed into the door frame. It is screwed to the base body 110.

The foul cover unit 540 is arranged with the front cover 544 in surface contact with the back surface of the shield plate 562, and a screw is inserted through the mounting portion, and the screw is screwed into the mounting boss portions 110g to 110j. It is screwed to the back surface of the door frame base body 110. Further, a screw is inserted into the mounting portion of the ground metal fitting 556, and a screw is inserted into the screw insertion holes 154b and 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. By screwing the screw, static electricity is applied to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. It is screwed to the door frame base body 110 so that it can escape.

The shield plate 562 and the foul cover unit 540 are attached by being fastened together with the attachment boss portion 110 g by screws. Further, the ground wire (not shown) is fastened together with the ground metal fitting 556 by screws to the screw insertion hole 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154.

[Action of antistatic mechanism 560]
The static electricity accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 escapes to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 through the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562 in surface contact and the conductive portion 563 in surface contact with the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. The thin plate-shaped shield plate 562 can shield the door frame base substrate 194 so that electrostatic induction is not caused by the electric charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540.

Further, since the shield plate 562 is arranged so that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570, the electric charge transferred to the shield plate 562 is transferred from the corners and end faces of the shield portion 564 to the surrounding conductor (metal). Objects and harnesses) can be prevented from jumping.

[1-2I. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feed unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61. FIG. 58 (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and FIG. 58 (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit. Further, FIG. 59 is a rear view of the ball feed unit. Further, FIG. 60A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 60B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit after removing the rear case. Further, FIG. 61A is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feed unit, FIG. 61B is a front view of the fraud prevention member, and FIG. 61C is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member as viewed from the front. , (D) are explanatory views showing the operation of the fraud prevention member. The ball feed unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and also supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 can be removed to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341.

In the ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b that opens below the entrance 581a and having an open rear, and a box-shaped front cover 581 that closes the rear end of the front cover 581 and opens the front. A rear cover 582, a rear cover 582, and a front cover, which are box-shaped and have a ball hitting supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that penetrates in the front-rear direction and enters from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball launching device 650. A ball pulling member 583 that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and has a partition portion 583a that separates the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. , The game balls on the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent one by one to the hit ball supply port 582a of the rear cover, and are rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. The ball feed member 584 and the ball feed solenoid 585 that rotates the ball feed member 584 are provided. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feed member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in front view, the ball feed member 583 is on the left side of the ball feed member 584, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is on the right side. Have been placed.

The front cover 581 of the ball feed unit 580 is provided with an arcuate slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 583 on the left side of the ball extraction port 581b when viewed from the front. From 581c, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding flow path 344b in the upper plate ball removing base 344. Is formed to close.

Further, the ball pulling member 583 has a partition portion 583a and a partition portion 583a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584 by partitioning the space between the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b below the entrance 581a. It extends downward from the end on the opposite side of the ball feed member 584, and bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction around the axis. A rotating paddle portion 583b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c. It is provided with a weight portion 583d projecting from the partition portion 583a to the opposite side. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 58), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base main body 110. The plate unit 300 comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 via 113.

Further, the ball feed member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction in the direction of the entrance 581a and the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583. It includes a ball holding portion 584b recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angle range of about 90 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feed member 584 rotates around the rotation shaft core by moving the paddle portion 584c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feed solenoid 585. ing.

In the ball feed member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the direction of the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b faces the supply position in the direction in which the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction of the partition portion 583a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position. When the ball feed member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650 from the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the game enters the partition portion 583a from the entrance 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (ball hitting supply port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a, and stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction of the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the paddle portion 584c side closes the ball hitting supply port 582a. , Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

Further, the ball feed unit 580 has a ball feed operating rod 586 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and a ball feed operating rod 586 that swings back and forth by the movement of the tip swinging in the vertical direction. It includes a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 has an engaging portion 587a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 586, and a side of the engaging portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 586. Is arranged on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a shaft portion 587b and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. It is provided with a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 60) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

In the ball feed unit 580 of this example, the ball feed operation rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587 transmit the movement of the ball feed operation rod 586 that swings by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves forward and backward in the vertical direction to transmit the ball feed member. The 584 can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 that swings away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward so that the ball feed member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 584 receives one game ball, and when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 584 receives the ball feed member 584. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hit ball launching device 650 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 in the ball feed unit 580 is controlled by the launch control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 654.

Further, the ball pulling member 583 rotatably supported by the ball feed unit 580 of this example is subjected to a moment such that it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the weight portion 583c. The rotation of the working rod 583c protruding forward is restricted by contacting the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300. In the normal state, the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583 partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball pulling port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 341 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the abutting piece 343a to abut. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating paddle 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the 381a and the ball ejection port 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball extraction port 381b to the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper plate ball extraction base 344 of the plate unit 300. , It is designed to be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

Since the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball pulling member 583 comes into contact is urged upward by the coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 via the operating paddle 583c, and it is possible to prevent the ball pulling member 583 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball It is possible to prevent the partition portion 583a from bouncing back.

Further, the ball feed unit 580 of this example is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 60B, etc.) recessed forward in the upper right when the ball hitting supply port 582a in the rear cover 582 is viewed from the rear. At the same time, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feed unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 582a of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 59 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 has an overall outer diameter formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the rear view, and is located on the left side of the tip in the rear view from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the opposite side. The upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c, and the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c are vertically divided with the dividing line 588a extending to the base end side (right side side) of the above as a boundary. A V formed between the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b in the direction perpendicular to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 588 (rearward) so as to move away from each other. It is provided with a character-shaped cutting portion 588d and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cutting portion 588d.

As shown in the figure, the fraud prevention member 588 has a cut portion 588d by bending the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the tip end (left end side in rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b moves rearward. It is formed in a V shape in a plan view, and the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is inserted into the V shape. The cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 has a state in which the lower side of the upper piece portion 588b and the upper side of the lower piece portion 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in a plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. It is formed like this.

Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d by the inclined portion 588e. It has become like. In the ball feed unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 as shown in the figure, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582. The portion corresponding to the portion where the ball is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction and at the same time communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

According to the fraud prevention member 588, the fraudulent game ball I to which the wire rod Iw is attached is supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the fraudulent game ball I is supplied to the gaming area of the game board 4 by the hitting ball launching device 650. When the ball is driven into the 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the ball launching device 650 moves diagonally to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in front view, and moves between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. Attempts to enter the game area 1100 through. At this time, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire rod Iw is different from the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I, and the passage of the game ball. It will move along the route connecting the shortest distance within. Therefore, the wire rod Iw extending from the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 side through the hitting ball supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 causes the game ball I to move in the upper left direction (upper right direction in the rear view). Then, in order to move on the shortest route, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the back view of the ball supply port 582a, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed in the upper right corner of the back view of the ball supply port 582a. Then, the wire rod Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) extending to the right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a is cut by a pair of inclined portions 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 arranged at the position. After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the momentum of the illegal game ball I.

As a result, the wire rod Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I is pulled by the force of the fraudulent game ball I in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (to the left when viewed from the front) at the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588. In this state, friction and shearing force act on the cutting portion 588d to cut the wire rod Iw (see FIG. 61 (D)). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal game ball I with the wire rod Iw is attenuated due to friction acting on the wire rod Iw or the like, it is between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660 without invading the game area 1100. It will be discharged through.

Therefore, since the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the fraudulent act is performed by the illegal game ball I with the wire rod Iw in the game area 605. It is designed to prevent it from being damaged. Even if the illegal game ball I invades the game area 1100, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the fraud prevention member 588 as described above, so that the fraudulent act cannot be performed. Further, even if the wire rod Iw cannot be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to attenuate the momentum of the illegal game ball I and the game area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent the invasion of the inside, it is possible to prevent cheating.

As described above, according to this example, after the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and the game balls are supplied to the ball feed unit 580, the player uses the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the hit ball launcher 650 by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580, and the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 by the ball feed launcher 650, so that the game window 101 of the door frame 5 The game will be performed in the game area 1100 which is visible through the door frame, and the player can be entertained. At the same time, a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 and ball feed solenoid 585) is placed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a ball feed unit 580 equipped with a discharge mechanism (ball pulling member 583), so that not only the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 but also the ball feeding member 584 and the ball launching device 650 are possible. The number of game balls remaining on the ball feed member 584 side can be reduced as much as possible when the game balls in the upper plate 301 are ejected by operating the upper plate ball removal button 341. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and to prevent the player from losing interest.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 provided with the ball pulling member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball can be driven. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing at an early stage or the upper plate 301 from becoming full with the game balls at an early stage by the operation. It is possible to reduce the annoyance of the player and suppress the decrease in interest, and the plate unit 300 can be miniaturized while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so that the game can be relatively played. The area 1100 can be made large (wide) so that the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the interest of the player.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 are separately compared with the ball feed member 583, and the ball feed member 580 is simply attached. The 584 and the ball pulling member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in assembling can be simplified, the feed unit 580 can be easily replaced, and problems occur in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583. Even so, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feed unit 580.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the one in which the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side. It is not necessary to configure the transmission mechanism (upper plate ball pulling mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the pulling button 341 to the ball pulling member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the openable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (as compared with the case where the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side) is provided every time the door frame 5 is opened. By shutting off the precision ball removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the risk that the transmission mechanism will be consumed early and malfunction or be damaged, and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580, etc. And durability can be increased.

Further, since the upper plate ball removing button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be ejected from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 simply by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 341 downward, or the upper plate 301. It is possible to stop the ejection of the game ball from the plate, and the player can easily operate the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

Further, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction in response to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, the partition portion 583a also moves in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 and the partition portion 583a can be made as small as possible, and the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 and the ball feed The unit 580 can be miniaturized, and the pachinko machine 1 can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, the upper plate ball removing slider 343 is urged upward, and when the upper plate ball removing slider 343 is in the raised position, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a. Therefore, even if the game ball vigorously contacts the partition portion 583a from the upper plate 301, the impact can be mitigated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removal member). The durability of 583) can be increased. Further, since the impact on the partition portion 583a can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to repel even if it collides with the partition portion 583a, and the repellent of the game ball. This makes it possible to prevent the ball feed unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing problems.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, it is related to the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a as compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. Friction loss can be reduced, the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 341 can be lightened to improve operability, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a can be reduced in plane projection, as described above. Can produce the effects of.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated in the direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball ejection port 581b communicate with each other by its own weight, if a problem occurs in the partition portion 583a or the upper plate ball extraction mechanism 340, the partition portion 583a is rotated. Is rotated by its own weight, so that the entrance and the discharge port are communicated with each other, and the gaming medium in the storage dish is fed to the feed mechanism (loading device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it will be discharged to the player side without being done, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem, and it is interesting to move it to the pachinko machine 1 without the problem. It can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, in the ball removing member 583, the partition portion 583a is rotated via the bent rotating paddle portion 583b. Therefore, when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a, the impact is bent by the rotating paddle portion. By dispersing by 583b or absorbing by bending of the rotating paddle portion 583b, it is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft, and the durability of the ball removing member 583 can be improved. Can be enhanced.

Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, the left and right of the game ball in the ball feed unit 580 when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged. The movement in the direction can be minimized, the passage of the game ball in the ball feed unit 580 is improved, and the game ball can be discharged satisfactorily. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a, the ejection path of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feeding unit 580 can be used as an ejection mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 from becoming unnecessarily large.

Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cut portion 588d) is arranged at a position as close as possible to the ball launching device 650. Therefore, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (momentum) state immediately after being launched by the hitting ball launching device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. By pulling the wire rod Iw quickly (strongly) with respect to the above, the wire rod Iw can be surely cut, and the momentum of the illegal game ball I is attenuated to prevent the wire rod Iw from entering the game area 1100. This makes it possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts by the fraudulent game ball I.

Further, since the fraud prevention member 588 provided with the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b recessed from the rear surface of the rear cover 582 toward the front, in order to form the V-shaped cutting portion 588d. The upper piece 588b bent rearward can be prevented from protruding rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece 588b of the fraud prevention member 588 injures the operator during assembly or the like. It can be prevented from being lost.

Further, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire rod Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I, the upper upper piece portion 588b is bent rearward across the dividing wire 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material. As a result, since the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. It can be suppressed from increasing.

[1-2J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. The glass unit 590 has an opening of substantially the same size as the game window 101, an annular and vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 molded from synthetic resin, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. It includes a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 112). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has two stopper pieces 592a arranged in the upper parts on both the left and right sides and extending outward in a plate shape, and a plate-shaped engagement piece extending in the left-right direction along the lower end and extending downward. It is provided with a piece 592b.

The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end so as to engage with the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190 to lock the door frame. It is designed to be detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2K. Modeling decoration on the door frame]
Next, the modeling decoration in the door frame 5, that is, the shape decoration will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 62. FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame cut at substantially the center in the vertical direction. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing the game balls are arranged vertically on the lower side of the vertically elongated elliptical game window 101. On the right side of the front view of the lower plate 302, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged behind the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101. The handle device 500 is arranged. Further, in the door frame 5, the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 are arranged so as to surround the left, right, and upper sides of the game window 101, and surround the lower side of the game window 101. The dish unit 300 is arranged so as to.

The appearances of the door frame 5 on both sides of the game window 101 are significantly different, and the right side has a rugged natural rock-like appearance due to the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left side has a metallic sharp and artificial appearance due to the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 that can be seen from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240. It has become.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, the door frame 5 has a different amount of protrusion forward between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. It protrudes forward more than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved flat shape.

As a result, in the door frame 5 of this example, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 look similar to each other when viewed from the right front (see FIG. 19), whereas the left front When viewed from the side, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is almost invisible, which can give a different impression depending on the standing position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It has become like. That is, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look like a different model of the pachinko machine. It is possible to increase the appealing power to the pachinko machine 1 and to make the pachinko machine 1 strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is asymmetrical to the left and right, for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction in an island facility in a game hall, the appearance of the entire island facility feels flat and solid. The appearance (atmosphere) that gives a rhythmic impression and excites the player by alternately arranging the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 in different forms is to suppress the situation. It is possible to increase the appeal to the player and strongly attract the player's interest.

Further, the door frame 5 emits light from the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided in the units 200, 220, 280, 300, etc. It is possible to illuminate and decorate with any luminescent color so as to surround the door. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246. By turning on and off the, 254b, and 256, the mode of the light emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101 can be changed.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on the door frame]
Subsequently, the light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. 63 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emitting decoration in the door frame. Further, FIG. 64 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emitting decoration in the door frame. In the door frame 5 of the present embodiment, the outer circumference of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300 is substantially circular. It is formed so as to surround it. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted, and by appropriately emitting light from each LED, the game window 101 The outer circumference of the window can be decorated with light emission.

As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery except the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered on the vicinity of the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101. It is arranged between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is formed. The peripheral lens portion 250a of the above is formed by one smooth and loosely curved surface. Further, in the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are arranged behind the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is arranged between the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252.

Further, the door frame 5 has a right side upper decorative substrate 214, a right side lower decorative substrate 216, and a left side upper decorative substrate 254 behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. , And the lower left side decorative substrate 256 is arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each decorative substrate 214,216, 254, 256. ing.

The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 have peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. It includes LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246). .. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high brightness. It is said to be an LED. Further, the two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the decorative substrate 214 on the right side are a green LED and a red LED.

In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist and white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. to make it white. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214,216,254,256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and unsightly, and by reflecting the light from each of the emitting LEDs 210a and 210b toward the player side by the substrate, the side lenses 210 and 250 can be prevented from becoming too dark. The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly luminescent and decorated.

As described above, the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 has an upper center lens 284 arranged in the center in the left-right direction, an annular central ring lens portion 282b arranged on the outer periphery of the upper center lens 284, and an outer side outside the central ring lens portion 282b. It is provided with four extension frame lens portions 282c extending to. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side of the front view is covered with the upper lower decorative cover 294.

The upper decorative unit 280 has an upper central decorative substrate 288 arranged behind the central ring lens portion 282b in the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending in the left-right direction from the upper central decorative substrate 288. The extension frame lens portion 282c in the above and the upper side decorative substrate 290 arranged on the rear side of the upper central decorative substrate 288 are provided. A plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the central ring lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface of the upper center decorative substrate 288, and the upper center lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282b are mounted. And can be individually luminescent and decorated. Further, on the upper side decorative substrate 290, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c are mounted on the front surface, and each extension frame lens portion 282c can be light-emitting and decorated. .. The LEDs 288a, 288b, and 290a of the upper center decorative substrate 288 and the upper side decorative substrate 290 are full-color LEDs.

Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, which is continuous with the appearance of the right side decorative unit 200. In this plate unit 300, the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is arranged on the rear side of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and the upper plate front decorative member 316 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper plate decorative substrate 322. The upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate, which decorates the right side portion and the outer periphery of the front side of the upper plate ball removing button 341, can be light-emittingly decorated. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full-color LED.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 has a translucent annular dial operation unit 401 and a translucent columnar pressing operation unit arranged inside the dial operation unit 401. A dial decorative board 430 and a button decorative board 432 are respectively arranged under the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. The dial decorative substrate 430 is provided with LEDs 430b arranged in a plurality (four in this example) in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decorative substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decorative substrate 430 is a high-brightness white LED, and the LED 432d of the button decorative substrate 432 is a full-color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surface) of the dial decorative substrate 430 and the button decorative substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be obtained.

By the way, the door frame 5 of this example corresponds to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are arranged in the first annular group 102 (within the hatch range in FIGS. 63 and 64) near the game window 101 and the second annular group 103 outside the first annular group 102. It is divided into (within the range of the crosshatch in FIGS. 63 and 64), and by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, the LED is substantially concentric so as to surround the game window 101. It is possible to make multiple (two in this example) light emitting decorations. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the range of the hatch near the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in an annular manner, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are emitted. When all the light is emitted, the range of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiating lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. , The radial group 104 (in FIGS. 63 and 64) extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 in the circumferential direction. (Within the shaded area). By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radiated and decorated, and the ring-shaped by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to make the luminescent decoration so as to divide it in the circumferential direction.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is designated as a notification group 105, and by appropriately emitting light of the LED 214c, a game is played. It is possible to notify various information to a person or an employee of a game hall in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282b in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101 are the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. It is said that the upper center group 106 is used to illuminate and decorate the upper center of the lens. By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 288a and 288b of the upper center group 106, the upper center of the game window 101 can be light-emitting and decorated, and the reference for the ring-shaped light emitting decoration by the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. It is possible to make a luminescent decoration that becomes a point. Further, the LED 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper center side group 107 that emits light and decorates both the left and right sides of the upper center group 106. By appropriately emitting light of the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be light-emitting and decorated.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322a corresponding to the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 of the plate unit 300 arranged under the game window 101 causes the upper plate 301 to emit light and decorate. It is said to be dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged in the upper center of the plate unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 press the operation unit 400. It is said to be an operation unit group 109 for light emission decoration. By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be light-emitting and decorated, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be set. It is possible to inform the player.

More specifically, the light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a provided in the door frame 5 will be described in more detail. 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided according to the control system within the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which each belongs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each peripheral lens portion 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems, and each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 is divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j. Has been done.

Further, the 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems of 104a to 104h for each side flash lens 204, 246 (radiant lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper 105a and a lower 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of a central portion 106a, a right portion 106b, and a left portion 106c. Further, the seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

Further, the 11 LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d in the front-rear and left-right directions. Further, the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 are left and right 109a and front and rear 109b as a set of four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and arranged diagonally with the pressing operation unit 405 in between. The two systems, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. As described above, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which the 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit light in full color. In the light emission control, it is tripled to 84 systems. Further, the LEDs 288a and 430b are high-brightness white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected, and the actual light emission control is doubled to eight systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal brightness, and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Further, the LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED, and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. Since the 10 systems 104a to 108h, 105a, 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system, the same number of 10 systems is obtained even in the actual light emission control.

Therefore, the actual number of systems for light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). .. This makes it possible to produce an expressive light emission.

As a light emitting effect in the door frame 5, for example, by sequentially emitting light from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential emission of the same color or a similar color), the light emission effect spreads outward centering on the game window 101. A light emitting effect, or conversely, a light emitting effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second ring group 103 to the first ring group 102 (sequentially emitting light with the same color or a similar color). Alternatively, by simultaneously emitting light from the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

Further, by cooperating with the LED provided in the game board 4 (detailed illustration is omitted), the LED of the game board 4, the LED of the first ring group 102 close to the game window 101, and the first ring group 102 The LED of the second ring group 103 located on the outside makes it possible to produce a more expressive light emission, which can strongly attract the attention of the player and entertain the player. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, the upper part of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed along the outer periphery of the game window 101 by appropriately emitting light of each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j. It is possible to produce a light emitting effect such that the light moves toward the central lens 284, or the light moves along the outer circumference of the game window 101 from the upper central lens 284. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided (divided into 10) into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to satisfactorily perform a light emitting effect such that light circulates around the outer circumference of the game window 101.

Further, by emitting light only in the radial group 104, a light emitting effect is produced in which light is emitted radially around the game window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted at the same time as the radial group 104. By causing the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or by causing the radial group 104 to emit light (lights / blinks) during the light emission of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to create a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration of. Further, by causing each system 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect such that the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiating lens portions 210b and 250b) circulate.

Further, by making the upper center group 106 and the upper center side group 105 emit light, a chance has arrived for the player and a specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability variation gaming state, a time saving gaming state, a probability variation time saving gaming state). , Etc.) can be suggested.

Further, by appropriately emitting light from each system 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, a light emitting effect for illuminating and decorating the upper plate 301 can be produced, or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation It is possible to produce a light emitting effect that encourages the operation of the unit 405. Further, by appropriately emitting light of the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109, it is possible to promote the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and to guide the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that encourages the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

Since the systems 109c of the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 are full-color LEDs, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to perform light emission effects with different gradations such as emission color and brightness for each 109 and each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 106a-106c, 108a-108d, 109c, and it has a variety of expressions. It is possible to produce a rich light emission.

[1-3. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 71. FIG. 65 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 66 is a rear view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 67 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 68 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and viewed from the front, FIG. 69 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a figure. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side of the front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. , The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 is capable of detachably holding the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

The main body frame 3 of this example has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for forming a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrating in the front-rear direction to hold the game board 4, and a main body frame base. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 for axially supporting the door frame 5 as well as being attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the front view of the 600, respectively, and the main body frame base 600. The ball launching device 650, which is attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4 to drive the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. When the prize ball unit 700 for the purpose and the door frame 5 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 are opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the flow of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 is blocked. It is provided with a ball outlet opening / closing unit 790.

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards, power supply boards 851, etc. for controlling the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the electrical parts provided in the main body frame 3 and the like. The board unit 800 that is unitized as a whole, the back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and the side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 in front view. A locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base in front view to open / close the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and to open / close the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is mainly provided.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally molded with synthetic resin, and the outer shape in the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is substantially in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 69). As a result, when the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, etc. are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, the main body frame base 600 is turned down. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is in a substantially flat state at the height of the depth D of the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and workability related to the assembly of the main body frame 3 can be easily placed. Can be improved.

As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a game board holding port capable of fitting and holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 through a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part. 601 and the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame 5 which is recessed from the front to the rear of the front end frame portion 602. Door frame projecting piece 110c projecting rearward from the lower end of the door frame, upper bent projecting piece 167 projecting rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and opening side outside projecting rearward of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. It includes an engaging groove 603 into which the bent projectile 163 is inserted and engaged.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spreads in a plate shape in the left-right direction. It includes a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The peripheral wall portion 605 connects the free ends of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 (upper and lower left end portions when viewed from the front), and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It has become like.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed by forming the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and mounting the game board 4 on the game board mounting portion 606 and the game board mounting portion 606. The game board of the game board 4 is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and the positioning protrusion 607 that protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. The game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 65) to which the stopper 1120 is fastened, and the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 605 that hangs downward from the upper inner wall and has a plate shape that can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. It is provided with a plurality of arranged upper end regulation ribs 609. By fitting the positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4, it is possible to regulate the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can regulate the movement of the right side of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. There is. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in the front view will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is attached with metal fittings for attaching the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 to the rear surface of the free end portion (upper and lower left end portions) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. It includes a section 610 (see FIG. 73). As shown in FIG. 72 and the like, the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the front view and a door frame 5 formed in the lower left of the front view of the cylinder lock through hole 611. A U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with a positioning protrusion 110d projecting rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and a launch solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in the front view are accommodated. It is provided with a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and is formed on the right side of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. The ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface so that the launching solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 is housed in the solenoid accommodating recess 613. When the ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 102, the ball launching device 650 is on the left side in the front view from the upper end of the launch rail 660, in the left direction and A foul space 626 that extends downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e in the foul cover unit 540 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a plurality of openings 614 that penetrate in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left side of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides in the front view. It is provided with a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed by the relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 70 and the like) from the front side, and the lower rear wall portion 604 is passed through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 mounted on the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation type holes having an opposition wall on the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a fixture support portion that rotatably supports the game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 on the upper side of the opening 614 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604. It is provided with 616 and a stopper 617 that projects forward from the lower right of the front view of the fixture support portion 616 and regulates the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

Here, as shown in FIG. 65 and the like, the game board fixture 690 includes a fixing piece 690a and a fixing piece 690a that spread in a fan shape around an axial center pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600. It is provided with an operation piece 690b that extends outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 in the clockwise direction in the front view. The fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, in the game board fixture 690, the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and by contacting the stopper 617, the rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is restricted. It has become.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611, with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressure is released so that the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, in the main body frame base 600, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( (See FIG. 73), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released so that the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has three vertically elongated penetrations in the front-rear direction on the inside (shaft support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) side in the front view of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. It is provided with a door hook hole 620 and two lock locking holes 621 that penetrate in the front-rear direction and are arranged in the left-right direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end. These three door hook holes 620 are formed in the vicinity of both upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and substantially in the center in the vertical direction, respectively. Locking protrusions 1004 provided on both upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and central door hook holes 620 and the lock locking hole 621, and the front end frame portion 602 The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. The 1010 is in a state of protruding forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 67).

Further, the main body frame base 600 gently and diagonally descends from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and then the lower rear wall portion 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction. It is provided with a main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 that hangs down from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly upward in the above direction and allows the game ball to be distributed. The rear side of the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 is closed by the board unit base 810 in the board unit 800, and although details will be described later, a game ball circulating through the ball pulling passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 It is now in circulation.

Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900 are rotatably supported by the back cover shaft support portion 623. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 diagonally to the upper left of the opening 614 in front of the lower rear wall portion 604, and a locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) side surface of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the front view. It is provided with a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

Although detailed description will be omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed in.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the metal fitting mounting portions 610 on the upper and lower rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2.

First, the upper shaft support bracket 630 has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that is attached to the upper bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The front extension portion 632, the shaft support pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side of the front view of the shaft support pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 67, etc.) through which the door frame is inserted and the door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. It includes a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 69 and 113) that regulates the ends. The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate with a mounting portion 631, a forward extending portion 632, and a stopper 635.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5 and the door frame shaft support bracket 642, and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. It is provided with a main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 for the purpose. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the mounting portion 642a from the lower end to the front. A plate-shaped front extension portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates vertically near the front end of the front extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extension portion. It is provided with a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end portion of the 642a in front view and regulates the rotating end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 is integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate with a mounting portion 642a, a front extending portion 642b, and a stopper 642d.

Further, the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions from the plate-shaped mounting portion 644a and the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. It is provided with a front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b. The main body frame shaft support bracket 644 also has a mounting portion 644a and a front extending portion 644b integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

In the lower shaft support bracket 640 of this example, the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame is in contact with each other. The front extension portion 642b of the shaft support bracket 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are attached to the lower metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 in a state of being separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It has become like.

The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. Is positioned coaxially, and the main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support protrusion 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and then the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting the upper support metal fitting 20 into the support hook hole 20c, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

Further, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached. The metal fitting 642c is positioned coaxially with the door frame so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. After placing the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed in the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Once the door frame 5 is slid downward so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 overlap each other, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3 C. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. 74 is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 75 is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. The hit ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball supplied from the ball feed unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

In the ball striking device 650 of the present embodiment, the launch base 652 of a metal plate attached to the front predetermined position of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and the rotation drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652. The launching solenoid 654 attached so as to be mounted, the hammer 656 fixed integrally to the drive shaft 654a of the launching solenoid 654, the mallet 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and the movement trajectory of the mallet 658. Hammer tip of ball hammer 656 between the launch rail 660 attached to the front of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660, extending diagonally to the upper left of the front view with the predetermined position above as the base end. At the same time that 658 is made passable, a ball stop piece 662 that forms a gap through which the game ball cannot pass and holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660, and a ball stop piece 662 holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660. It is provided with a stopper 664 that restricts the hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) from rotating toward the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position where the game ball can be hit.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the ball striking mallet 656 of the ball striking device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654 and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. It is provided with a paddle portion 656b in which the mallet tip 658 is fixed to the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that can come into contact with the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side of the paddle portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a in between. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 comes into contact with the stopper 664, the mallet tip 658 at the tip rotates toward the launch rail 660 from the hitting position (rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). It is becoming regulated.

Further, the launch rail 660 of the ball striking device 650 has a loose arc shape with a lower portion recessed substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 102), and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center has a V-shaped depression, and the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The launch rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 has a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of the stopper 664 that can regulate the rotation end of the hitting mallet 656 toward the hitting position side, and rotation of a position away from the hitting position of the hitting mallet 656. It is provided with a stopper 668 that regulates an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, so that the impact when the hitting mallet 656 comes into contact can be absorbed and the generation of noise due to the contact is suppressed. You can do it.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 102, when the ball launching device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launch rail 660 is substantially in the center in the left-right direction and is lower. It is located below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the game board mounting portion 606 (lower side of the game board holding port 601), and is outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed with the lower end of the rail 1111. Then, the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the launch rail 660 to hit the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 A game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven inward falls in the foul space 626, is received at the foul ball entrance 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

Further, in the ball launching device 650, the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the launching control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It is designed to be driven in synchronization with the drive of. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hit ball launcher 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven from that state. When the ball feed member 584 is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball feed launcher 650 side, so that the launch solenoid 654 is driven substantially at the same time as the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580. By turning (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably launched by the rotation of the ball hammer 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 83. FIG. 76 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 77 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit from the rear. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as viewed after being disassembled. FIG. 82 is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. Further, FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores the game balls supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. This is to be paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1 based on the above. The prize ball unit 700 is a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 to receive and store game balls supplied from the island equipment side. The tank rail unit 730, which is arranged under the prize ball tank 720 and stores the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720, is aligned and sent to the downstream side, and the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 are paid out. The payout device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction and the game ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the game ball paid out when the upper plate 301 is full with the game ball. Is mainly provided with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the lower plate 302 side.

Further, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage lid 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and an earth fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. The 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784 are provided. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engaging groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engaging groove 780a when viewed from the rear. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 77 and 79, etc.).

In this prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. In addition to being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged directly above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600. It is integrally molded with a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 is arranged so that the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward along the outer outer circumference of the inverted L shape and the peripheral wall portion 710a extend inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a with a predetermined width and substantially on the same plane. It is provided with a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 79, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed so as to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 has a rear wall portion 710b located at a position deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

Further, the prize ball base 710 is arranged next to the tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a and the tank mounting portion 711 (on the right side when viewed from the rear), and the external terminal plate 784 and the external terminal plate. An external terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the lower end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and a vertical side rear side of the rear wall portion 710b. The prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740, the prize ball passage 715 that guides the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, and the rear wall. A mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branch unit 770 is provided at the lower end of the portion 710b.

Further, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for allowing the payout motor 744 and the like protruding forward from the prize ball device 740 to pass through the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b in the front-rear direction, and the back surface. A back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900 is provided. Further, although detailed description is omitted on the prize ball base 710, mounting holes, mounting bosses, etc. for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, etc., or mounting on the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned. Is formed in.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 80, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper portion, and a bottom wall portion having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. 721 and the outer peripheral wall portion 722 rising upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and projecting rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape only on the right rear portion (rear portion on the open side) in a plan view, and the outer peripheral wall portion. A plate-shaped discharge port 723 formed by a portion of the 722 that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side and opens downward from the left side (shaft support side) of the discharge port 723 in a plan view to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. 724 of the eaves extending to, a rod-shaped shaft 725 extending rearward from the lower left end of the eaves 724 in a plan view, and a prize ball tank formed near the base end of the shaft 725 and at both ends of the front side of the outer peripheral wall 722. A mounting portion 726 for mounting the 720 to the prize ball tank mounting portion 711 on the prize ball base 710 is provided.

In the prize ball tank 720, the outer circumference of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Further, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the ball leveling member 727 has one end side pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side hangs down due to its own weight. .. The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in the tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and allows the game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 to be leveled and aligned. Further, the eaves 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls from overflowing from the inside of the tank rail unit 730 and the tank. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) becomes lower toward the right side in a plan view. In a plan view, the right side (the side closer to the discharge port 723) is formed so as to incline toward the rear discharge port 723. As a result, the flow of the game ball can be smoothed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80, the tank rail unit 730 of the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extends long in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with an open upper part and a predetermined depth, and has a width (depth) that allows the game balls to be arranged in two rows in the front-rear direction, and has a left end (shaft support side) end when viewed from the front. The bottom is tilted so that The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 83) that opens downward to the left end (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b extending upward from the bottom at substantially the center in the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the front end. A plurality of locking projecting pieces 731c (see FIG. 78), which project downward and are locked from above to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, are provided.

The end of the tank rail 731 on the right side (open side) of the front view is located directly below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed. After receiving it, it can be rolled to the left and delivered from the discharge port 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, by locking the locking projection piece 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be mounted on the prize ball base 710. ing.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in the front view. A ball holding plate 734 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stop piece that can advance and retreat into the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. It includes a 735 and a ground plate 736 that is arranged in the tank rail 731 and is in contact with the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. Further, the ball holding plate 734 includes a mounting portion 734a to which the ball stop piece 735 is mounted on the upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and allow the projecting piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 to be inserted.

In the tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above on the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 can be smoothed in one step and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. You can do it. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game ball which was not made one step by the ball leveling member 727 into one step, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731 as described above.

As shown in the figure, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery thereof, and is pivotally supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is deviated by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. It is designed to be sent to the device 740.

The bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with fine grooves that penetrate vertically so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls together with the game ball in the tank rail 731 falls downward from the fine grooves. It has become. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782. By contacting the game ball with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734a of the ball holding plate 734, and passes the projecting piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 through the slit 734a into the tank rail 730. By inserting it into the ball, the projecting piece 735a can close the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731, and the game ball can be stopped from being supplied to the prize ball device 740 side. There is.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the state of the game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 discharges and supplies the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. As shown in FIGS. 81 to 83 and the like, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the figure, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is a supply passage that opens at the upper end and extends slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction. The 741a, the distribution space 741b having a space of a predetermined size communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a, and the lower end of the rear view left side (open side) of the distribution space 741b are connected to each other and bent in an abbreviated shape for rear view. It is provided with a prize ball passage 741c that opens on the left side surface, and a ball removal passage 741d that communicates with the lower end of the distribution space 741b on the right side (shaft support side) of the rear view and extends downward to open at the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state of being open to the rear.

The prize ball device 740 of this example has a back cover 742 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support that is arranged under the back cover 742. The plate 743, the payout motor 744 arranged on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 are integrated. The first gear 745, which is rotatably fixed and arranged behind the motor support plate 743, meshes with the first gear 745, and the second gear 746, which is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, meshes with the second gear 746. The third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, the payout rotating body 748 that rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is arranged in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741, and the payout rotating body 748 are the third gears. It is provided with a rotation detection board 749 which is fixed to the opposite side of the 747 so as to be integrally rotatable and has a plurality of detection slits 749a (three in this example) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a ball-out switch 750 attached to the unit base 741 to detect the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the prize ball passage 741c. The counting sensor 751 for measuring the speed, the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and the rotation angle sensor 752 are held and attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. The sensor board 753, the payout motor 744, the ball break switch 750, the counting sensor 751, and the prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 by relaying the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110. I have.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, and the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 (rotation detection board 747). ), And the gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 sandwiching the sensor board 753 from the rear side, and the supply passage ground capable of contacting the game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. The payout motor 744 is fixed to the unit base 741 by sandwiching the metal fitting 757 and the motor support plate 743, and the screw 758 for grounding the payout motor 744 and the back cover 742 are detachably supported on the unit base 741. It is equipped with a detachable button 759.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are opened rear ends. Is to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end in the supply passage 741a once bulges rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be relaxed. You can do it. Further, the unit base 741 is partially notched on one side surface (left side when viewed from the rear) below the rearwardly bulging position in the supply passage 741a, and is outside the notched position of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a penetrating portion in the front-rear direction below the prize ball passage 741a. It is provided with a motor insertion hole 741 g, which is formed and can insert the payout motor 744.

By attaching the ball-cutting switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the working piece of the ball-cutting switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the game ball, the ball-out switch 741e can detect the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a. When the game ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball-out switch 741e (ball-out state), the payout motor 744 does not rotate, and the player or the hall indicates that the ball is out. It is designed to be notified to the side.

Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for axially supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (delivery rotating body 748), the switch mounting portion 741e in the supply passage 741a, and the distribution space 741b. A ground fitting mounting portion 741i for mounting the supply passage ground fitting 757 and a button support hole 741j arranged on the upper part of the unit base 741 for supporting the attachment / detachment button 759 for attaching / detaching the back cover 742. I have. In this unit base 741, by attaching the supply passage ground fitting 757 to the ground fitting mounting portion 741i, the rear surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a. The front surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 is in contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped ground fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a is removed through the supply passage ground fitting 757. Can be done.

The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape as a whole and a shape in which the upper end bulges rearward. At the upper part of the back cover 742, there is a button insertion hole 742a through which the attachment / detachment button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and a relay board mounting. It is provided with a sensor board mounting portion 742c arranged below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor board 753, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located behind the ground fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744 to generate heat generated by the payout motor 744. It is possible to easily dissipate heat.

Further, as shown in FIG. 82, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three recesses 748a having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating the 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are housed one by one in the recess 748a and can be discharged to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection plate 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively, and the detection slits 749a are formed by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

The prize ball device 740 of this example is a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 4100, a loan command from the CR unit 6, or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or the ball ejection switch 860b is operated. The 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 is rotated, and further, the second gear 746 is rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with the gear 747 rotates. A payout rotating body 748 is fixed to the third gear 747 on the front side, and a rotation detection board 794 is fixed to the rear side so as to be integrally rotatable. Together with the third gear 747, the payout rotating body 748 and the rotation detection board 747 are fixed. It is designed to rotate.

In this prize ball device 740, as shown in FIG. 82, the payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported in the substantially center of the distribution space 741b. Then, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the ball ejection passage 741d side, and the payout rotating body 748 The game balls discharged to the ball pulling passage 741d side are the ball pulling passage 778 of the full tank distribution unit 770, which will be described later, the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and the board unit from the lower end of the ball pulling passage 741d. It can be discharged to the rear side outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 in 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled on the main body frame 3, the prize is awarded from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as ball clogging can be easily found. ..

Next, the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 78, 79, and 83. The full tank distribution unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game ball paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the plate unit 300. At the same time, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game ball can be distributed so as to be paid out to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

The full tank branch unit 770 is fixed to the lower end back surface of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the locking portion 770a which is locked to the mounting locking part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially central upper part in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is in a state of being suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and the prize ball base. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box shape in which the whole becomes lower from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the rear end. The prize ball receiving port 771 that receives the game ball that has flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and the branch space 772 that is arranged under the prize ball receiving port 771 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 83). And the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 83) that guides the game ball from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and the game ball that has passed through the normal passage 773 is discharged forward and in front of the front end. The normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the view and the full tank passage 775 (see FIG. 83) that guides the game ball from a position far to the right side of the rear view from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 toward the front side. ), And a full tank outlet 776 that discharges the game ball that has flowed through the full tank passage 775 forward and opens on the left side of the front view of the normal ball outlet 774.

Further, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball ejection port 777 that opens upward to the left end of the front view of the upper part of the rear end and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball ejection passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, and a ball. The ball ejection passage 778 (see FIG. 83) that guides the game ball received by the extraction port 777 to the front side and the game ball that has passed through the ball extraction passage 778 are discharged forward and the normal ball outlet 774 and the normal ball outlet 774 at the left end of the front view. It is provided with a ball outlet 779 which is opened at a position behind the full ball outlet 776.

In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, assuming that the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are the first of the foul cover units 540 in the door frame 5, respectively. The game ball is designed to communicate with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c facing each other, and the game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and is connected to the dish unit 300. The game ball supplied to the upper plate 301 and released from the full tank outlet 776 is supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball ejection port 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the rear view of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 in the main body frame base 600, and the game ball released from the ball extraction outlet 779 is formed in the main body frame base 600. It is designed to be handed over to the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622.

In this full tank branch unit 770, the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 can be received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged directly below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball that has flowed down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal exit 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and is above the plate unit 300 from the first ball outlet 544a. It will be supplied to the dish 301.

By the way, when the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of game balls and the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game ball that could not come out from 544a to the upper plate 301 side stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually fills the upstream normal passage 773 through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 could not enter the normal passage 773, and started to move laterally in the branch space 772 and moved laterally. The game ball enters the full tank passage 775, and is under the plate unit 300 from the full tank outlet 776 via the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is designed to be supplied to the plate 302.

The full-tank branch unit 770 of this example is entirely made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and dirt that has entered the full tank branch unit 770 and the occurrence of ball clogging can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. ..

As described above, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branch unit 770 of this example automatically performs the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the full tank is cleared. Since it can be supplied to the lower plate 302, the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball launching device by operating the ball removal button on the upper plate when the upper plate is full like a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the game ball from being interrupted, eliminate the annoyance during the game, and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example branches the passage of the game ball to be paid out directly under the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1 when the upper plate 301 is full. Since the game balls staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are discharged to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are hit ball launching devices. The game ball can be directly driven by the 650, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. Can be done. Therefore, by making the upper plate 301 smaller, the game window 101 in the door frame 5 can be made relatively larger (wider), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be made to play a game. The pachinko machine 1 has a high appeal to the player, and the wide game area 1100 makes it possible to entertain the player.

Further, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray (first). Even if there is only one ball entrance 542a and second ball entrance 542c), the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball (full tank branch unit 770) in the main body frame 3. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage plates.

Further, as described above, even if the number of storage plates provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be handled without changing the main body frame 3, so that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole for changing the door frame 5 It is possible to reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and provide various pachinko machines 1 at low cost.

Further, the game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 provided with only one storage plate. Even if the ball is exchanged for, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage plate via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. , It is possible to suppress the player's interest from being lowered due to the shortage of game balls for driving, and it is also possible to sufficiently cope with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage plates. ..

Further, unless the upper plate 301 is full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible to concentrate the player on the operation of driving the game ball and the like, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

Further, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, and even when the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate, the first ball Since the position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the entrance 542a or the like can be set to the same height as the first ball entrance 542a or the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage plates, the storage plate It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of game balls by deepening the storage plate, so that the player does not have to worry about the storage amount frequently. It is possible to correspond to the door frame 5 equipped with a different number of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Can be suppressed.

Further, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with a game ball. Therefore, even if the game ball cannot be discharged from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of the game ball stored in the normal passage 773 between the normal ball exit 774 and the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. It is possible to increase the amount of substantially stored game balls stored in the upper plate 301 as much as possible. If only one storage plate is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage plate is full of game balls and the game balls cannot be discharged from the normal ball outlet 773 or the full tank outlet 776. Since the position where the full passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are placed not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full passage 775. Can be stored, and the amount of substantially stored game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage plates provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be increased to a limited number and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

Further, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are wide enough to allow the game balls to be distributed in a plurality of rows, and the amount of the game balls staying (stored) in the full tank branch unit 770 is determined. Since the number can be increased, even if the number of storage plates provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the actual storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 from being reduced. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball in the main body frame 3.

Further, since the full tank branch unit 770 is made of transparent resin, the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. At that time, the location of the ball jam can be easily found from the outside of the full tank branch unit 770, the defect can be resolved at an early stage, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG. 84 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 85 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 is moved to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of the game ball.

The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. The opening / closing shutter 792 is held so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the shutter base 791, the opening / closing crank 793 that slides the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 are raised via the opening / closing crank 793. It is equipped with an opening / closing spring 794 that urges the vehicle.

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening / closing shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to project upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates in the front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank that is arranged in front of the left end portion in a front view and rotatably supports an opening / closing crank 793 that extends in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b in the front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view.

Further, the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that project from the front surface of the flat shutter body 792a and the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ), And a horizontally long rectangular drive hole 792b arranged at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791, and the outer periphery on the right side of the front view of the shaft portion 793a. A drive rod 793b whose tip extends outward from the tip to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and a drive rod 793b that protrudes rearward from the tip and is slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. Drive pin 793c, contact portion 793d extending downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a and having a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end) of the opening / closing spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the drive rod 793b. ) Is provided with a spring locking portion 793e.

In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised, the opening / closing shutter 792 is arranged on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792. The normal ball outlet 774, the full tank outlet 776, and the like in the full tank branch unit 770 can be visually recognized.

In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the opening / closing crank 793 rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, so that the drive pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in the vertical direction in an arc shape, and at the same time, the drive pin 793c. The opening / closing shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b into which the shutter is inserted. In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 comes into contact with the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the front view clockwise direction together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 can be opened.

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact portion 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operating piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 are released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 rises to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

In this way, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically opens the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 767 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball is prevented from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 776. You can do it.

[1-3F. Board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 93. FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 88 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 91 is a perspective view illustrating the operation of the vertical wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. FIG. 92 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 92 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 93 (A) is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and FIG. 93 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A).

The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. A power supply board box 830 mounted on the rear surface of the right end of the front view of the 810, a power supply board box holder 840 mounted on the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the launch power board box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply board box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 that is mounted on the rear surface and has a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 that is mounted on the rear surfaces of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. The terminal board box 840 mounted on the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 in front view, the main relay terminal board 880 mounted on the front surface of the board unit base 810, and the peripheral side relay. It includes a terminal board 882.

As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of this example has a shape that extends long in the left-right direction, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is lowered by one step and gently inclined upward toward both left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding from the front to the front, an opening 812 arranged above the position one step lower in the center in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shielding wall portion 811. A board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end of the front view for mounting the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, and a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813. A plurality of vertically long slit-shaped through holes 815 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the penetrating tubular duct portion 814 and the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface, and the left side of the rear view (right side of the front view). ) A box accommodating portion 816 that is open rearward and upward and can accommodate the front side of the firing power supply board box 830 is provided on the rear surface of the upper portion.

The substrate unit base 810 is formed so that the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball from falling downward from the base ball pulling passage 622, and it is possible to increase the strength of the substrate unit base 810. Further, the board base unit 810 sends the game ball flowing down the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. You can do it.

Further, in the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In a state where the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It is designed to face. Further, the substrate unit base 810 can satisfactorily transmit the sound from the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box accommodating portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box accommodating portion 816 is arranged on the rear side, and the box accommodating portion 816 and the front box accommodating portion 843 are formed. As a result, it is possible to form an accommodating recess for accommodating the firing power supply board box 830.

The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 literally includes a lower speaker 821 mounted facing forward. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the lower speaker 821 in a hermetically sealed manner, and at the same time, a horizontally long rectangular opening 822 is formed on the left side of the lower speaker 821 in front view. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the lower speaker 821 via a predetermined maze-shaped passage to invert the phase of the sound behind the lower speaker 821. It is a bass-reflex type speaker box that can emit deeper bass to the diameter of the lower speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening port 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound radiated from the opening port 822 can be satisfactorily transmitted forward. ing.

The firing power board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear portion, and includes a firing power board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. The firing power supply board box 830 is adapted to accommodate various electronic components attached to the firing power supply board 831, and heat from the electronic components and the like is passed through slits 830a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to the outside.

The firing power supply board box 830 is detached from above in a housing recess formed by a box housing portion 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box housing portion 844 of the power supply board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as much as possible. As a result, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily attached / detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 for replacement or repair. It is possible (see FIG. 67).

Further, the firing power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 93, the firing power supply board 831 has a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging the electric power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current, which is the sum of the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is driven by passing a current through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650. The firing power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat dissipation holes on the upper and lower surfaces thereof in order to release the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the firing power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply board box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is arranged is provided with a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, in the firing power supply board box 830, a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is an upper inner wall. It is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the opening so as to connect the bottom surface and the inner wall of the bottom surface. As a result, when the firing power board 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power board box 830 and the internal space of the firing power board box 830 is closed, the internal space of the firing power board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Since two spaces are formed, the accommodating space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and the accommodating space 830d for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, the partition wall 830b and the accommodating space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The storage space 830d for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and the heat insulating wall for blocking the inflow and outflow of heat.

The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slits as heat dissipation holes formed in the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830c and the outside air, respectively. By being discharged to the outside via the 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transferred to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is heat dissipation holes formed in the upper surface and the lower surface respectively for communicating the accommodation space 830d and the outside air. By being discharged to the outside through the slit 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transferred to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the combined current to be passed through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By being provided on the power supply board 831, the size of the firing power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the miniaturization of the firing power supply board 831 makes it easier to handle, facilitates the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831, and contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement work, the firing power board 831 can be replaced as it is attached to the end opening of the firing power board box 830, that is, the entire firing power board box 830 can be replaced.

Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life, and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 is required. Since it can be easily performed, the interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage. Therefore, the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be eliminated extremely easily, and the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire can be eliminated at an early stage to restart the game, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of its life due to repeated charging and discharging at a frequency of, for example, 100 times per minute each time drive firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, although the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of island facilities such as a game hall, it is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831. Compared with the firing power supply board 831, its life is extremely long. In other words, the firing power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the firing power supply board 831 which is separate from the power supply board 851. Electronic components that accompany long-term changes can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic components having a long life from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life due to aging.

Further, since the launching power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 that controls the hitting ball launching device 650 can be attached to and detached from the front side through the gaming board holding port 601 that holds the gaming board 4, the capacitance is increased in order to change the hitting characteristics. Even if you try to change to a different electrolytic capacitor SC0, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to attach and detach the firing power supply board 831, and it is difficult to replace the firing power supply board 831. It is possible to make it difficult to commit fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that intentionally changes the driving strength that is optimized by illegally modifying the firing power supply board 831, and by making it difficult to commit fraud. It has become possible to use a pachinko machine 1 that can prevent a player who has been frustrated from developing into fraud such as cheating.

In addition, since the firing power supply board 831 is removable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 is fraudulent, the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced and the fraudulent operation is performed. It can be eliminated, the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the person in the game.

Further, the firing power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the firing control unit 4120 that controls the ball launching device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 that holds the game board 4. , When the game board 4 is replaced due to a model change, etc., the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can also be easily replaced, so it matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. By replacing the firing power supply board 831 equipped with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a that can realize the driving characteristics, the driving characteristics of the ball launching device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 can be replaced with a new game. It can be considered to match the board 4. Therefore, since the driving characteristics of the game ball can be easily matched to the concept of the game board 4, the game by the new model game board 4 can be fully enjoyed, and the player's interest is suppressed from being lowered. can do.

Further, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be attached and detached from the front side, it is not necessary to open the main body frame 3 for island equipment such as a game hall when replacing the launch power supply board 831. The time and effort required for replacement can be simplified, and the replacement can be performed in a short time, so that the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed from increasing. Further, since the firing power supply board 831 (fired power supply board box 830) is removable and can be replaced, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire firing control unit 4120 (payout control board 4110) is replaced. It is possible to reduce the cost required for the circuit board and reduce the burden on the hall side and the like.

Furthermore, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5, the main body frame 3, etc. can be used as they are, so that the launch control unit 4120 can be used for a long period of time. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side as described above, so that a problem occurs due to the deterioration and the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced. It is possible to eliminate the problem, shorten the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

Further, the firing power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the firing power supply board 831 is held by the game board holding port 601 in order to be attached and detached. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing fraudulent activity is inserted through the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the fraudulent tool reaches the firing power supply board 831 by the game board 4. It is possible to prevent the firing power supply board 831 from being cheated, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high defense against cheating.

Further, the firing power supply board box 830 is supported through the gaming board holding port 601. Probably, the position for supporting the firing power supply board box 830 is behind the front surface of the main body frame 3, so that the firing power supply is supported. It is possible to easily secure a space for supporting the substrate box 830, and it is possible to reliably embody the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply substrate box 830 and exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply board 831 and the firing power supply board 831 can be easily attached to and detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 tends to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the problem can be solved at an early stage to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 is opened upward on the left front side of the center on the left and right in front view, and receives the game balls discharged downward from the out ball discharging unit 1161 of the game board 4. The discharge ball receiving portion 841 and the discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and the front side (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. The front box accommodating portion 843 which is opened forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the power supply board box 830, and the front end of the power supply board box 850 which is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is recessed to the front side. It is provided with a rear box accommodating portion 844 capable of accommodating.

In this power supply board box holder 840, the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is at a position desired to the discharge passage 842. It is formed, and flows through the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, passes through the opening 812 of the board base unit 810, and is the rear side of the board unit base 810. The game ball that has flowed down to the ball and the game ball that has been discharged from the out-ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841 will be passed through the discharge passage 842 to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1. It can be discharged to.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodating portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810, and the box accommodating portion 816 and the front box accommodating portion 843 accommodate the firing power supply board box 830. It is possible to form a recess.

Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally receives heat from the electronic components and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 90, the power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

Further, the power supply board box 850 is a vertical wall in which the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 88 and 90) attached to the lower side of the power supply switch 852 in the power supply board 851 projects rearward along the lower side of the opening facing the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protrusions 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. It is provided with a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a gap. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking claw that locks with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. By locking and, the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

As shown in FIG. 91, the power supply board box 850 has a vertical wall portion 850b slightly rearward of the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. It is formed so as to protrude to. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 wraps around from the front lower side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear side so as to be caught by the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

By the way, if the connector terminal with the extended wiring cord is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board and the wiring cord is pulled toward the board, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since it is pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) moves to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even if it is pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to wrap around (fold back) to the rear side of the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent the terminal 855 from being pressed against the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 is provided with protrusions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the vertical wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the vertical wall portion 850b, the rear end The protrusions 850c provided on both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side, so that the wiring cord 854 can be moved from the standing wall portion 850b. The wiring cord 854 can be folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side at the wiring guide portion 850d, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It can be done, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the front-rear direction dimensions in the assembled state are substantially the same as the front-rear direction dimensions of the speaker box 820, and the board unit base 810 is formed. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially identical to each other.

Further, in this example, after connecting the connector terminal 855 to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851, the connector is connected by the vertical wall portion 850b protruding to the rear side from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension acting on the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is applied to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It is possible to act in a direction that disconnects from the 853, and it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 from being unable to be removed by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 can be prevented. Can be easily removed and maintenance such as board replacement can be performed easily.

Further, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the vertical wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending condition of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the vertical wall portion 850b is not provided. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a problem.

Further, the vertical wall portion 850b is provided near the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the vertical wall portion 850b is located adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, so that the vertical wall portion 850b is connected to the power supply terminal 853. It is possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and impossible. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting, and it is possible to prevent a problem such as disconnection from occurring.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the vertical wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the vertical wall portion 850b on the power supply board 851, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. .. Further, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dust, etc., which cause problems from adhering to the power supply board 851, and the power supply board 851 is mounted. Electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) can be made difficult to touch or replace, and the defense against fraudulent activities can be enhanced. It has become.

Further, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 on the power supply board 851 is a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-back direction), and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent a shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the power supply terminal 853 from being disconnected from the power supply board 851 and to cause a power failure due to breakage, so that the pachinko machine 1 is less likely to cause a problem.

Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means by the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b to connect the wiring cord 854. Even if a force acts on the connector terminal 855 in a direction that disconnects the power supply terminal 853, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 from being disconnected. It is possible to reliably maintain the connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 and prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization from occurring.

Further, since the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is provided with protrusions 850c protruding rearward at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the protrusions 850c provided on both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that can be prevented and surely achieves the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 is used to bring the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b toward the standing wall portion 850b, it is difficult to remove the wiring cord 854 from the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to ensure that the above-mentioned action and effect are exhibited, and after the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d. It is possible to perform a series of operations continuously, simplify the work process related to assembly, and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 has a horizontally long thin box-shaped box base 861 with an open rear and a thin box-shaped cover fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and the front is open. It includes a 862 and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 194) that is attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and whose rear surface is covered by a cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separated cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 protruding outward from the left end of the rear view, and at one location of the plurality of separated cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are crimped and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation cutting portion 863 must be cut before the box base 861 and the cover 862 can be separated. When the payout control board box 860 is opened, a trace thereof remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been opened or closed illegally. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

In the payout control board box 860, the error release switch 860a, the ball ejection switch 860b, the inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 66). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and has a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side of the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface of the right end of the rear view. On the board base 871 provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 mounted on the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871. A connection terminal board cover 873 which is attached from the rear side and has an opening 873b extending in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a and a CR unit connection terminal 874a which faces rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. It includes a CR unit connection terminal plate 874 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873, and a substrate box cover 875 that covers the rear side of the substrate base 871 together with the connection connection terminal plate cover 873.

The peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 to the frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as the CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871 and the connection terminal cover 873 and the board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 are each made of transparent synthetic resin, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal from the outside to the inside are formed. The board 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency display, CR unit 6, etc. installed on the island facility side when a problem such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1. The displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 92, the substrate base 871 in the terminal substrate box 870 has a substrate mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 is formed on a fixing piece (not shown) formed on the inner upper part of the board mounting portion 871a to fix the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and formed on the inner lower part of the board mounting portion 871a to relay the peripheral panel. A locking claw 871c that locks the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

Further, in the board base 871, the board cover mounting portion 871b is formed in a thin box shape open to the rear side, and the size of the inner circumference thereof is set so that the outer circumference of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be inserted. At the same time, the inner peripheral wall is said to be an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 comes into contact with a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side when viewed from the rear in the left-right direction and the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 extending rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover mounting portion 871b. It is provided with two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f arranged on the left outer side of the board cover mounting portion 871b in the rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The protrusion 871e in the substrate base 871 has a state in which the amount of protrusion to the rear is slightly smaller than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in the figure, it is possible to reach both ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It is arranged so that it is close to.

Further, the board base 871 is arranged vertically separated from the rear surface on the right side of the rear view of the board cover mounting portion 871b, and has a pair of bearing portions 871 g for rotatably supporting the board box cover 875 and the left end of the rear view. It is provided with a square tubular locking portion 871h arranged on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 is an outer wall portion 873c that surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting portion 871b surrounded by the outer piece portion 871c of the substrate base 871. A rear wall portion 873a that closes the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening 873b that penetrates the rear wall portion 873a and extends in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner circumference of the opening 873b. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the inner wall portion 873d extending from 873a to the front (board base 871 side) and the front end of the inner wall portion 873d are in contact with the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the upper and lower outer wall portions are held. It is provided with a pair of hook-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a, and abbreviated in the vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873 g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f arranged in the center and the left side of the rear view is open, and a substrate base 871 that extends outward (to the right) from the right end of the rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the above, and an elastic claw-shaped engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c and can be locked into the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. It is provided with a claw piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall portion 873d extending forward is also formed above and below the inner circumference of the central opening 873f provided with the protective portion 873g.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape with the front side open by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 can restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 to the rear by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. At the same time, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 forward, so that the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be held detachably. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is formed by inserting the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871 and then locking the locking claw piece 873i into the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. It can be detachably attached to the board cover attachment portion 871b of the base 871.

The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 is a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. There is.

Further, the substrate box cover 875 of the terminal substrate box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size that substantially covers the entire rear surface of the substrate base 871 and is entirely open to the front side, and is arranged on the right side surface of the substrate base 871. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a through-hole 875b forward from the left and right sides. It is provided with an impact wall 875c extending to the surface and a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 so as to be openable and closable together with the connection terminal board cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a to the bearing portion 871g of the board base 871. There is. Further, the substrate box cover 875 has a length such that the impact wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (the side supported by the shaft) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and the impact wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length of 875c is set to extend to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective contact walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surface of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It has become like.

In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. 92, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so as to be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

Then, as shown in FIG. 92, the terminal board box 870 of this example has the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the assembled state. The ridge 871e and the outer piece 871c of the above, and the outer wall portion 873c and the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the side impact walls 875c are present respectively, a barrier is constructed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 is a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal is used. Unauthorized tool intrusion from the direction along the surface of the plate 874 can be reliably prevented, and unauthorized activity against the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be reliably prevented. It has become.

Further, in this terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 comes into contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed with the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer circumference of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraudulent acts can be prevented. It has become like.

Further, the terminal board box 870 is a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through port 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a on the substrate box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. An impact wall 875c having a length straddling between them is provided, and the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the impact wall 875c. Therefore, a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the formation of a gap, which makes it difficult to cheat and deters. It can be made expensive.

Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873 g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, with the connection terminal on the wiring cord side fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b, which is a two-piece connector, insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even so, the protective portion 873 g and the substrate box cover 875 can prevent the electrodes from being inserted, and can prevent fraudulent acts on the internal connection terminal 874b.

As described above, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are arranged from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through a space or the like to allow the tip of the illegal tool to enter the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the housed CR unit connection terminal plate 874. This makes it possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874.

Further, in the state where the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is housed in the terminal board box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The protrusion 871e, the outer piece portion and 871c of the base 871, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the substrate of the connection terminal plate cover 873 in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the impact wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a barrier is constructed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape. , For example, even if you try to invade an illegal tool with excellent flexibility between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool will not bend along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal plate Unauthorized tool intrusion from the direction along the surface of 874 can be reliably prevented, and unauthorized acts on the CR unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are reliably prevented. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of capable.

Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as the CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer circumference of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraudulent acts can be reliably prevented.

Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 to cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 so as to be openable and closable, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873. A substrate box cover 875 having a plate-shaped impact wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the through-hole 875b corresponding to the above to the rear surface of the substrate base 871 is further provided. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the parts of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the board base 871 to form a gap and an illegal tool is inserted, the illegal tool is connected by the impact wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the connection terminal board cover 873 after opening the board box cover 875, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is possible to increase the deterrence against cheating. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the impact wall 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 is formed. It is possible to prevent the cover from being distorted and to prevent the formation of a gap, making it difficult to cheat and making it highly deterrent.

Further, even if an attempt is made to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal board 874, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector body is covered with the protective portion 873 g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870. It is not possible to insert a needle-shaped electrode from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the terminals of the connected wiring cord, and the security capability is high. Can be.

Further, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform fraudulent acts, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves to the rear side together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). It can be kept protected by, and it is not possible to cheat on the CR unit connection terminal 874a on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the CR unit connection terminal 874a cannot be used. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at such things.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is made of transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside of the terminal board box 870 without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Is an illegal tool inserted into the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 housed inside, or is the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like itself replaced with an illegal one? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether the electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like have been replaced with illegal ones. , It is possible to make it easier to detect fraudulent activity, and it is also easier to detect fraudulent activity. it can.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 5 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like faces the rear side, the terminal board box 870 is attached to the outer frame 2 during maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 5 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 are in a state of facing the operator side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 are the door frame together with the peripheral control unit 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. This is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in 5, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are provided with a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are a substrate formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 67, the front side of the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 is covered with the relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. At the same time, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to those connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 is a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a rental balance display unit 363, and a rotation position detection sensor of the handle device 500 of the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. The purpose is to relay the connection between the full tank detection sensor 550 of the 512, the touch sensor 516, the launch stop switch 518, and the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 is attached to the decorative units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative substrates 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This is for relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. 94 (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 94 (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 95 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as viewed from the rear side by disassembling. The back cover 900 of this example is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. .. The back cover 900 is provided on a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body 902 in front view, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of shaft support pins 906 arranged side by side in the vertical direction and projecting downward to be pivotally supported by the back cover shaft support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper and lower left sides of the main body 902, respectively. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, and a back cover 900 in the vicinity of the lower engaging piece 908. It is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening to 3 in a non-openable manner.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction to the left side in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. A vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side of the insertion hole 921 and the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking port that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a on one end side and a horizontally long elongated hole 923b corresponding to an insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and a plate-shaped guide member 923 inserted into the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side, The fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 via the insertion hole 921 and the guide member 923 are attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 so as to sandwich the guide member 923. It includes a holding member 925 and. The guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is made of a soft synthetic resin, and is easily bent.

Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking port 922 of the main body 902 in a loosely fitted state, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It is possible to play with. Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the elongated hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and is supported along the elongated hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall out of the elongated hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking port 922 of the main body 902 from the rear side, the fastening mechanism 920 projects the fastening member 924 to the front side through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is in a state of being inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

In the back cover 900 of this example, the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed by pivotally supporting the shaft support pin 906 to the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engaging piece 908 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame base 600 and the prize ball passage lid 780, the closed state can be obtained. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 are substantially aligned with each other.

When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted into the insertion hole 921 from the rear side to the front side is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the tip of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the elongated hole 923b of the locked guide member 923 of the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. The state of being located on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

Then, from this state, the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover fastening hole 780b and the fastening member 924 is rotated, so that the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. In the fastening mechanism 920 of this example, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is slanted with respect to the main body portion 902, the fastening member 924 is inserted. Since it is supported by the elongated hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male threaded portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily placed in the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. It can be released, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified and maintainability can be improved.

Further, the back cover 900 has a connection notch 910 cut out in a rectangular shape upward at the lower right end of the front view of the main body 902 and a confirmation opening that penetrates in a rectangular shape on the upper side of the front view of the connection notch 910. A 912 and a confirmation notch 914 notched in a rectangular shape in the lower left corner of the main body 902 in front view are provided.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed to the main body frame 3, and the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4, the test terminal 4100f, etc. are passed through the connection notch 910. Is designed to face the rear side. Further, in the back cover 900, the board management sticker 1178 (see FIG. 105) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side through the confirmation opening 912, and is used for confirmation. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the notch 914. As a result, the operation of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 can be checked, the appearance can be checked, the management status can be checked, and the like without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Further, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated and penetrated through the main body portion 902 and the side portions 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 or the like through these slits 916 is transferred to the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside on the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through holes 918 are provided at positions slightly to the left in front view from the center, which are wide and elongated in the vertical direction and arranged in rows at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. These through holes 918 keep the back cover 900 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and accommodate and hold the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. It is located behind the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the above, so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be satisfactorily exhausted. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

As a result, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is attached to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. Since the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3 so as to be playable, when the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game board 4. Even if the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left behind in the pachinko machine 1 because the fastening member 924 is held by the back cover 900 through the back cover 900. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing it from falling off.

Further, as described above, since it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off from the opened back cover 900, it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 that has been released from fastening at a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. , It can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is in an inclined state with respect to the surface of the back cover 900. The male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male threaded portion 924a is surely in the correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened to. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be surely exhibited.

Further, since the holding member 925 that cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 against the guide member 923 so as to be playable is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off from the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented from coming off. The fastening member 924 can be movably held by the guide member 923 by the gap between the two and the elongated hole 923b.

Further, a storage recess capable of accommodating the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is passed through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to cover the back cover of the main body frame 3. When fastening to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodating recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. The protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility that other members come into contact with the protruding portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced, and the occurrence of defects is reduced. You can do it and make it look good.

Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion and is screwed to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is fastened by simply pulling it as compared with the engagement by a simple locking claw. It is possible to make it difficult to remove the back cover 900 because the back cover 900 cannot be released, the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

Further, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 at a position straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 and to move the male screw portion 924 straight to the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

Further, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the locking port 923 along the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900. Since it is elastically locked to 922, the tip side (long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably attached extends in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. It can be moved so as to rotate around the heart, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the elongated hole 923b on the tip end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

Further, a plurality of back cover engaging grooves 718, 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and then the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engaging grooves 718, 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 are further provided, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is achieved. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using the fastening member 924 to fasten only one place, and work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. You can improve your sex. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by engaging the engaging piece 908 and the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closing range is wide. Even with the back cover 900, the rear side (rear side of the game board 4) of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

Further, by pivotally supporting the shaft support pin 906 of the back cover 900 to the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. Therefore, simply by rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction to close the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily matched, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported on the main body frame 3, even if the back cover 900 is opened by releasing the fastening by the fastening member 924 at the time of maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 is rotatably supported. The cover 900 can be left in a state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side security board]
Next, the side surface security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. As shown in the figure, the side surface security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in the front view, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 that is extruded into a shallow U-shape in a plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed vertically near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. A positioning member 956 that is fixed inside the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4 is provided.

The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 extends in the vertical direction with substantially the same length as the height of the main body frame base 600, and has a side plate piece 952a having a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a front view right from the front end of the side plate piece 952a. The front end piece 952b extending in the direction, the middle piece 952c which is arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and has a smaller protrusion amount than the front end piece 952b, and the front end to the front of the side plate piece 952a. It is provided with a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the rightward direction (see FIG. 112). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and is formed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d with a front component 1110 in the game board 4. The left side portion of the front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 112).

In the side security plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. In the side security plate 950, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b of the main body 952 is the shaft support side of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the character projecting piece 166, and prevents a tool for cheating from being inserted between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side of the front view. Can be done (see FIG. 112). Further, the main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of an extruded metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the middle piece 952c arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a, and Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, and the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be supported satisfactorily. It has become.

As described above, according to this example, assuming that the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is located between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side plate 950. The rear piece of the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the above is inserted (invaded), and the front end piece 952b is inserted into the shaft support side U shape. Since the door frame 5 is sandwiched between the shape projecting pieces 166, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the U-shaped projecting piece 166 on the shaft support side of the door frame 5 from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3 in contact with the door frame 5, and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being scooped open. It is possible to use the pachinko machine 1 which can prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Further, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. The strength and rigidity of the door frame 3 can be increased, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, and the security side plate 950 on the side that supports the door frame 5 (shaft support side) is made of metal. Compared with the case where the entire main body frame 3 is made of metal, the cost related to the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one place between the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by three door frame hooks 1041 so as to be stopped, the open side is illegal such as a bar. It is possible to satisfactorily prevent the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from widening even if the door frame 5 is scooped out by a simple tool, and it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly scooped out.

Further, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is extended rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension of the side piece 952a in the front-rear direction becomes longer. Since the flexural rigidity against the load applied in the front-rear direction becomes stronger, the strength and rigidity of the entire security side plate 950 can be further increased, and the security side plate 950 can be prevented from being forcibly bent and cheating. ..

Further, since the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by the extruded metal material, the security side plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily formed. It can be formed, and even if the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost, and at the same time, defects such as a decrease in strength that occur during processing are caused as compared with the case where a metal plate is bent. The number can be reduced as much as possible, and the security side plate 950 having high durability and strength can be obtained.

[1-3I. Locking device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101. FIG. 97 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and FIG. 97 (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 98 (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 98 (B) is a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped substrate of the lock device. Is a rear perspective view showing, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device after being disassembled, and FIG. 100 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the lock device. , FIG. 101 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the locking device.

The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side, as shown in FIG. 72. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the front end frame portion 602 of the main body frame base 600 on the right side (open side) side of the front view, a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600. It is designed to be attached to a plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the front view of the portion 605.

As shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, the locking device 1000 is for a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are U-shaped so as not to be illegally slid. It includes fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 that are attached to the lower part of the substrate 1001.

The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and inside the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. And are slidably arranged. The U-shaped substrate 1001 is extremely thin as compared with the conventional locking device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the substrate formed into an L-shaped cross section. As a result, the size of the lock device 1000 in the left-right direction can be made as thin as possible, and the size of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be made relatively large in the left-right direction. It is possible to provide a wide game board 4 of 1100.

The U-shaped base 1001 is attached with the open side having a U-shaped cross section facing the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, it is U-shaped. The open side of the base 1001 is closed to the main body frame base 600. As a result, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 are attached to the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively. It is completely covered and has a fraud prevention structure that makes it difficult to cheat on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can penetrate up and down on the closing side (front side) opposite to the opening side (rear side). The hook penetration opening 1002, the screw fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper and middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 99) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and the screw fixing portion. The upper end and middle portion of the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 99) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which 1003 is projected, and the lower end portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b on the open side project forward. The locking projection 1004 is provided.

The screw fixing portion 1003 and the locking protrusion 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking protrusion 1004 is attached to the door hook hole 620 of the main body frame base 600. And when it is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and then moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other, and the screw fixing portion 1003 is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625.

The lock device 1000 is attached by screws not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003, but also to the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and near the upper side of the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attachment portion 625 is fastened to the main body frame base 600 with screws (not shown), and the lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the U-shaped base 1001 on the open side (front side) are provided with the hook hole 620 for the door in the upper part and the lock locking hole. The locking device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame base 600 with an extremely simple structure because the structure is such that the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws while being inserted into the 621 for positioning and locking. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated on the U-shaped substrate 1001 having an extremely thin width dimension, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front side and the rear side of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) on the front side is projected onto the side surface 1001a which does not come into contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure on the rear side projects from the side surface 1001b which is in close contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605, the locking structure on the front side is the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to cause rattling as compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed so as to be close to the main body.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction in the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b, and the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame and a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and caulking with the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame housed, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are inside the U-shaped base 1001. Can be slidably attached in the vertical direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower parts of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. 98. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower end of the rivet slot 1055, 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, respectively. The sliding rivet 1040 for the door frame can be moved upward, and the sliding rivet 1050 for the main body frame can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 projects laterally from the front end of the fraud prevention notch 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower portion thereof and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021 and an escape horizontal hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 will be described in detail later, but the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is moved forward and backward. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009, which is projected from the front end toward the side and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and a mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two locations above and below for mounting with screws 1012. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the above and a screw fixing portion 1003 drilled to mount the lower portion of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 in which the first engaging projecting piece 1017 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 for urging the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward, and an escape horizontal hole 1022 for forming an escape hole so as not to interfere with the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It has.

The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped substrate 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting on the lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical cylinder lock body, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. At the same time, the engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engaging cam 1016 is formed in a boomeran shape, and one end side is a first engaging projecting piece 1017 that engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame when rotating. It is a second engaging projecting piece 1018 that engages with the rising engaging hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when the end side rotates.

In this cylinder lock 1010, the cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and then the attachment holes 1013 formed in the upper and lower two positions of the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

The fraud prevention member 1023, 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 illegally uses a piano wire, a wire, or the like to illegally use a sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key. This is to prevent the lowering of the. As shown in FIG. 99, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped substrate 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is the most together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. It is attached by a lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006.

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is vertically elongated at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 on its plate-like surface, and the second engagement projecting piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. It is provided with a protruding piece insertion hole 1026. The door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 by the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 penetrating the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020. The ascending engaging hole 1045 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is obliquely inclined so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface side of the first engaging projectile 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated on the outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 diagonally above the front surface. The inclined portion 1024 is provided, and the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. (The clockwise rotation direction in FIG. 101 (B)).

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from the diagonally rearward and lower outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. It is provided with a regulating projecting piece 1031 projecting downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 penetrating in the left-right direction and arranged vertically on the front side of the regulating projecting piece 1031. The stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame from sliding illegally. Further, the regulation projecting piece 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 comes into contact with the second fraud prevention member 1032 urged upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (in the urging direction). It is possible to regulate the movement.

Further, in the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is inserted and fixed. By engaging with the horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for rotatably connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connecting pin 1034.

On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "" -shaped plate material, and has a connecting hole 1033 at one upper end thereof and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other end. And are bored, respectively, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end portion. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be relatively rotatable by inserting the connecting pin 1034 after aligning the connecting hole 1033 with the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. You can do it. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. As a result, it is urged upward by the spring 1035. Further, in the second fraud prevention member 1032, the contact portion 1037 comes into contact with the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-shaped member. The door sliding rod 1040 is provided with a door frame hook portion 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the vertical side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 with the door sliding rod 1040 housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 67 and 72) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the door. As shown in the figure, the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, whereby the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised to raise the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover. The locked state with the 165 can be released.

Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is formed in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and below the uppermost rivet slot 1042 and for the door frame. The lowermost end of the sliding rivet 1040 is provided with a guide protrusion 1043 projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rivet 1040. The rivet slot 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040 is designed so that the rivet 1006 to be inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame sliding rod. It is formed vertically so as not to interfere with the ascending motion of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact with the upper end. Further, in the door frame sliding rod 1040, the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056, 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. It is possible to guide the mutual sliding operation of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 that locks one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, and the spring 1048 slides the door frame. The rod 1040 is urged downward and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is urged to each other in the upward direction. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is adapted to abut on the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and it is possible to prevent the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It has become like.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotating operation of the engaging cam 1016 when the first engaging projecting piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The part constitutes a movable space. Further, in the ascending engagement hole 1045, when the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is raised by the rotating operation of the engaging cam 1016. Is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with an escape notch 1049 which is notched in the vertical direction larger than the fraud prevention notch 1007 behind the lower part of the vertical side. In this escape cutout portion 1049, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is in the way so that the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is surely engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066. The relevant part is cut out so that it does not become.

On the other hand, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052. It has. That is, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is not composed of one vertically elongated plate made of metal as in the conventional case, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. The plate material is formed by a press, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped substrate 1001.

The upper hook member 1051 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame includes a hook portion 1054 formed at the upper end portion toward the rear and a rivet elongated hole 1055 penetrating the plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 in the left-right direction. , A projecting piece moving hole 1056 penetrating below the rivet slot 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the projecting piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. It is provided with a connecting hole 1058 formed in the above hook member 1051 and a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the inner upper portion of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claws are formed upward.

Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and is arranged in the rivet slot 1055. In the normal state in which the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the elongated hole 1055 for rivets, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. A guide projecting piece 1043 above the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the 1050.

Further, the other end of the spring 1048 is locked in the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051. Further, the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and in the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051. There is no rattling and it can slide smoothly.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is for a rivet that penetrates in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 that protrudes rearward from the lower end portion. An elongated hole 1061, a descending engaging hole 1062 arranged below the elongated rivet hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the descending engaging hole 1062, and a play hole 1063 below. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and a engagement formed in the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. It includes a notch 1066 and a contact portion 1067 formed on the upper and lower sides of the lower hook member 1052.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the lower hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed in the lower part of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claws are formed upward. Further, the rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1061 is formed in the rivet slot 1061. In the normal state in which the 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

Further, when the first engaging projecting piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted into the lower hook member 1052 and rotates, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered by the rotating operation. It is for engaging in such a way. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is a second engaging projecting piece 1018 so as not to interfere with the rotating operation when the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It is possible to form a movable space at the tip of the. Further, in the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, the guide projecting piece 1043 below the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the moving rod 1050.

Further, a bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be slid smoothly without rattling.

Next, the assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble this locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in that state, the guide protrusion of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the mutual rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and the layers are overlapped. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the slide for the main body frame are passed through. After inserting the moving rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet slot 1055, 1061 and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. Further, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the pin hole. After fixing to 1029 with a screw (not shown), it is necessary to further insert the guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame stored and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door is opened. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is hung on the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock mounting piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the mounting hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the tip of the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engaging protrusion of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

In order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding into a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock attachment portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed so as to project from the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project horizontally from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001, the locking structure of the front portion is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed, the lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to cause rattling.

Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. As shown in FIG. 100, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 100 (A). In addition, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are locked, and the hook portions 1041 for the door frame and the door frame 5 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame are engaged. The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engaging projection piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 100 (B). The tip of the first engaging projection piece 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, pushes the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and connects to the lower hook member 1052. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 toward the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a raised state due to the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as shown in FIG. 100A), but the hook portion 1054 Since the upper side of 1065 is inclined downward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1050, 1065 is formed of the closing plates 24, 25. Since it comes into contact with the lower end, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame descends downward, and the upward claws of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again and slide for the main body frame. The 杆 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. (Ii) The tip of the engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the ascending engaging hole 1045 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up and ascending the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame against the urging force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state, so that the door frame 5 can be pulled by pulling the door frame 5 toward the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as shown in FIG. 100A), but the door frame is closed. Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for door frame is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the lower side inclined portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame is inclined to the hook cover 165. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame rises upward in contact with the upper end portion of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are locked again to slide the door frame. The moving door 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the total length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the total length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire between them. It is not possible to perform an act.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and moves in the other direction. By rotating, the lock of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. Further, the lock device 1000 of this example performs a fraudulent act such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowering the hook portion 1054, 1065 without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be done. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped substrate 1001. The structure is such that the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. 101. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other. It is in a state of being. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 rotates counterclockwise due to the urging force of the spring 1035, the stopper piece 1027 penetrates into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch. It is in a state of being engaged with the engagement notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame at the position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and an attempt is made to pull it down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engaging notch portion 1066 are engaged, so that the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is used. It is impossible to illegally pull it down (unlock), and it is not possible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to normally unlock the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is performed by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a swing shaft hole. The rotation starts in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 1025, and the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engaging cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engaging projecting piece 1017, the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered, the locked state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1023 are in contact with each other. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. 101 (A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 101 (A) is obtained. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. Further, in the present embodiment, it is the main body that prevents the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 from illegally performing only the lowering operation of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame.

Further, even with the lock mechanism having the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an illegal act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), it is inside. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided in the above are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively, and are completely covered. Since it is in a state, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 This prevents fraudulent equipment from entering the closed space, making it impossible to easily commit fraudulent activities.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose width dimension is extremely thin as compared with the lock device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the lock device 1000 on the U-shaped base 1001 is set to a position lower than the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is made large, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be firmly attached.

Further, since the U-shaped open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) inside. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged in the above are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively. , A piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside, and other fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. The structure is such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock attachment portion 625 with screws, which is extremely simple. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) with such a structure.

In the lock device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 and the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. The structure is shown in which the formed lock mounting portion 625 is screwed together. Instead, the screw 1012 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is locked. A lock mounting hole that penetrates the piece 1008 and is screwed may be formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the lock device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) simply by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attachment portion 625 at the rear portion of the lock device 1000. It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

Further, in the lock device 1000 of this example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are slidably attached to the side surface 1001a on the opposite side not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. An L-shaped substrate (lock substrate) is used, and a sliding rod for a door frame 1040 and a sliding rod for a main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (lock substrate) and a first side wall 540. A structure for storing the 1050 may be used, and the same effect as that of the lock device 1000 described above can be obtained.

As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of this example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-back direction) behind the main body frame base 600 and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned and the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base. The transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side and the game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 are paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, and the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base 710 is paid out. It has a partially transparent prize ball device 740 attached to the rear side and a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600, and the rear surface is substantially the same as the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. Since it is provided with a transparent back cover 900 arranged in a plane shape, the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of visually recognizing the side surface and easily inspecting (visually inspecting) the rear side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. be able to.

Further, since not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the game board holding port of the main body frame base 600 can be visually recognized. When the game board 4 is attached to or detached from the front side to 601 even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, a waste cloth for cleaning, dust, dust, etc. remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, they are left outside. It can be easily found from, and it is possible to prevent some trouble from occurring due to the residue.

Further, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, an illegal device, a tool, or the like for performing an illegal act is attached to the rear side or the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is, it can be easily found, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts, and it is possible to easily find a fraudulent device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to hesitate to install an illegal device or the like, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent acts.

Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed may come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 may be covered. It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to maintain the game board 4 in a good state and prevent problems from occurring.

Further, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is set to be approximately twice as deep as the front end of the main body frame base 600 with respect to the depth D of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., and the above-mentioned effects can be surely achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to form a flat shape. It is possible to facilitate the attachment work of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. Therefore, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made a substantially flat surface, and by eliminating the protrusions to the rear, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being caught or in contact with other members in the installed island facility. It can be prevented to prevent problems from occurring. Further, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, a cushioning material having a simple shape can be used when transporting the pachinko machine 1, and the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be transported. The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 and the like can be made easier to see, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slit 916 or the like of the back cover 900. , It is possible to prevent heat from being accumulated from the game board 4, and it is possible to prevent problems such as unstable control of the game due to heat and deformation of members such as synthetic resin. be able to. Further, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 have a size that the game ball cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, the slit 916 or the like is passed through. It is possible to prevent the game ball from invading the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to the invasion of the game ball.

[1-4. Basic configuration of the game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 111. FIG. 102 is a front view showing a game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. Further, FIG. 103 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 106 (A) is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state of being attached to the pachinko machine, and FIG. 106 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

Further, FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 104 and the like by disassembling and viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 is a game in which FIG. 107 is viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. Further, FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel of the game board of FIG. 107 cut in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a front component of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 and the like by disassembling and viewed from the front, and FIG. 111 is a game board seen from the rear of FIG. 110. It is an exploded perspective view of.

As shown in the figure, the game board 4 of the present embodiment has a front configuration in which the outer periphery of the game area 1100 in which the game ball is driven by the player operating the handle device 500 is divided and the outer shape is substantially rectangular in the front. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 arranged behind the front component 1110 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100, a board holder 1160 arranged at the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a board holder 1160. A predetermined main control board box 1170 that houses the main control board 4100 that is attached to the rear surface and controls the game content that is performed by driving the game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. It is provided with a function display unit 1180 that can display the game status and is visually attached to the player side at a predetermined position of the front component 1110. The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, although not shown in FIGS. 102 to 109 will be omitted and details will be described later. Further provided (see FIGS. 114 to 120 and the like).

The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration that characterizes the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Front component]
Subsequently, the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer circumference of the game area 1100 is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1111 includes an outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in a front view along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending diagonally to the upper right. The inner rail 1112, which is arranged inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the inner rail 1112 so as to be smoothly continuous from the lower end of the inner rail 1112. The inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) and outer rail 1111 of the inner peripheral rail 1113. At the boundary between the abutment portion 1114 where the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 and the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 can come into contact with the game ball, and the inner rail 1113 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, the game area 1100 From the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to close between the out port guide surface 1115 arranged at the lowermost end and lowered toward the rear and the outer rail 1111 rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112. It is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward and the open position where it rotates in the clockwise direction and opens between the outer rail 1111 and returns to the closed position side. A backflow prevention member 1116, which is urged by a spring (not shown), is provided.

Assuming that the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 of the front component 1110, as shown in FIG. 102 and the like, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 fires the ball of the main body frame 3. It is located on the extension of the launch rail 660 in the device 650. A space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the ball launcher 650 is formed. The space is jumped over, and the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112. By rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

Further, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the abutment portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. When the game ball comes into contact with the abutting portion 1114, the rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner peripheral rail 1113. It is designed to prevent it from moving. Even if the game ball that has entered (dried) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. As a result, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

Further, if the game ball driven into the game area 1100 is not accepted by the start ports 2101, 1022 or the winning ports 2103, 2104, 2201 of the table unit 2000 described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 guides the game panel 1150 to the out port 1151 and discharges the game board 4 downward from the out port 1151. ing.

On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the ball striking device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 are combined. The foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the launch rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is formed from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 by rolling downward in the opposite direction. It will fall, and will be received by the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and will be discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110 to improve the wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. Further, the abutting portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides with the abutment portion 1114, the impact is alleviated. At the same time, the game ball can be repelled inward.

Further, the front component 1110 has a wall-shaped security protrusion 1117 protruding from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 toward the front, and a substantially center in the vertical direction from the lower side of the out port guide surface 1115 along the inner peripheral rail 1113. It is provided with a groove-shaped rail security groove 1118 that is recessed by a predetermined amount from the front end of the extension. The security protrusion 1117 in the front component 1110 overlaps the security rear end projecting piece 183 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is intruded between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the shaft support side (left side when viewed from the front), the illegal tool can reach the game area 1100. Can not be done.

Further, in the front component 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security rear projection piece 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. The rear projection piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface (the side opposite to the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. Even with the inner rail 1112, the rail security groove 1118, and the security rear projection piece 182, illegal equipment such as a piano wire that has entered between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

Further, the front component 1110 is vertically separated from the left end of the front view and is vertically separated from the pair of positioning recesses 1119 which are recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 arranged in the same direction, a fixed recess 1121 arranged on the left side of the outer rail 1111 on the left side of the front view and opened downward, and the upper side formed in an arc shape and recessed from the front side. A notch 1122 for a ball passage, which is notched in a rectangular shape extending upward from the lower end in the left-right direction, is provided near the left end of the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is fitted with the positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 is viewed from the front. However, it is possible to regulate the movement in the front-back direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be locked to the game board. By locking to the locking portion 608, it is possible to restrict the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 from moving in the front-rear direction. ..

Further, in the fixing recess 1121 of the front component 1110, with the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the game board fixing tool 690 axially supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 is viewed from the front. When rotated in the clockwise direction, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board fixture 690 restricts the lower end of the game board 4 from moving forward. It has become like. Further, in the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component member 1110, a similar ball passage notch 1152 is formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used as the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the state of being inserted into, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notch portion 1122, 1152 for the ball passage.

Further, the front component 1110 has a horizontally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end portion, and a thickness in the front-rear direction at a position on the lower side of the through hole 1123 from the center in the left-right direction to the left side in the front view. It is provided with a fastening portion 1124 formed thinly, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in the front view and for attaching a certificate stamp for confirming certification. Although detailed illustration of the fastening portion 1124 in the front component 1110 is omitted, when the game board is attached to the conventional main body frame, a predetermined fastening band is formed in the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame. By wrapping and fastening the game board 4 around each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4, and it is possible to prevent the game board 4 from being illegally removed.

Further, in the front component 1110, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged on the outside of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and at the lower right of the front view. Further, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 projecting rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning projections 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the board holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the board holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the board holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 is fitted into the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 so that the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Subsequently, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component 1110. The game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guidance surface 1115 in the front component 1110 at the lower part in the substantially center in the left-right direction in the front view, and is horizontally elongated in the front-rear direction on the left side in the front view at the lower end. The notch 1152 for the ball passage having the same shape as the notch 1122 for the ball passage of the front component 1110 and the rear protrusion of the function display unit 1180 which penetrates in the front-rear direction through the lower right corner of the front view. It includes an insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

Further, in the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 and positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed in the vicinity of the lower left and right ends. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1156 having a predetermined amount recessed from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and the lower end side being opened downward (see FIG. 105). And 1157, which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and is notched so as to penetrate from the right end of the front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 of this example can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer circumference is divided by the front component 1110, and is within the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface. A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the table unit 2000 is attached. Further, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 in the front component 1110 when assembled on the game board 4. The game ball guided backward by the out-port guide surface 1115 enters the out-port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Board holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open. In the substrate holder 1160, an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction is formed at the front end of the bottom wall portion at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is an out-ball. The game balls are formed so as to be lowered toward the discharge portion 1161, and the game balls discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit and the back unit, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the board holder 1160. It is designed to be discharged downward from the out ball discharge unit 1161. The out-ball ejection unit 1161 is located directly above the ejection ball receiving portion 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the pachinko machine 1 are discharged downward to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the substrate unit 800.

Further, the substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 protruding forward from the front ends of both upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The tips of the plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520, and then are fitted to the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110. In the state of being fitted with the boss 1126, the board holder 1160 is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the board holder 1160 through the inside of the fixed boss 1162 to attach the board holder 1160 to the front component 1110. In addition to being able to be assembled, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the board holder 1160.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the substrate holder 1160 has a fixing portion 1163 and a fixing portion into which the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the side to the left end portion of the rear surface of the rear wall portion when viewed from the rear. The elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170, which is arranged so as to face the 1163, is provided with a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear. The fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the board holder 1160 allow the main control board box 1170 to be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Subsequently, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontally long box-shaped board base 1171 with an open rear side and a thin horizontally long box-shaped board base 1171 that covers the rear surface of the board base 1171 and has an open front side, and is fitted into the inside of the board base 1171 from the rear side. A matching board cover 1172 and a main control board 4100 in which electronic components, terminals, and the like are mounted on the rear side of the front end of the board cover 1171 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end portion of the substrate base 1171 when viewed from the rear, and from the fixing piece 1174 which fits with the fixing portion 1163 of the substrate holder 1160 and the right end of the rear view of the substrate cover 1172. It includes an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is arranged at the right end of the rear view, two at the top and two at the bottom with the elastic fixing piece 1175 sandwiched between them, and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a sealing seal (not shown) that is affixed across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the sealing seal. It includes a protective cover 1177 and a board management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the board cover 1172. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation and cutting portion 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is fixed by caulking in any one of the four sealing portions 1176. Has been done. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the sealing portion 1176 fixed by caulking so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. It has become. As a result, it is possible to clearly visually determine from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

Since four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, the main control board box 1170 of this example has a sealing seal affixed across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, and the sealing seal is cut when the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated. It needs to be peeled off, and even with this sealed seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM that stores a program of game contents). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such fraudulent acts from being carried out.

Further, in the main control board box 1170, an opening penetrating the board cover 1172 in the front-rear direction is formed at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face to the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are skillfully crafted, it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of unauthorized modification of the main control board 4100 other than visually, and the pachinko machine 1 has high security performance. You can do it.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front constituent member 1110, and is a display unit 1181 that is visibly arranged from the player side on the front surface of the front constituent member 1110 and the front constituent member 1110. It is provided with a rear protruding portion 1182 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 106 (A), the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example displays a game state changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end of the front view. The game status indicator 1183, which consists of one LED, and the game status indicator 1183, which consists of two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side, displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2101. The first special symbol memory display 1184 for the purpose and the lottery result of the first special symbol placed on the right side of the first special symbol storage display 1184 and drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (first) The first special symbol display 1185 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying the special lottery result) as the first special symbol, and the first special symbol display 1185 arranged diagonally to the right and to the second starting port 2102. The second special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the lottery result (second special lottery result) of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball of the game ball as the second special symbol, and the first (Ii) It consists of two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the special symbol display 1186, and is equipped with a second special symbol storage display 1187 for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls to the second starting port 2102. ing. The lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102 is different from the big hit lottery seen in the conventional pachinko machine, and is a prerequisite for executing the big hit game. It is a lottery to decide whether or not to operate the condition device. Therefore, even if the lottery is won, the condition device only operates, and the jackpot game is not executed only by this as in the conventional pachinko machine.

Further, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged in an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186, and holds the number of reservations related to the passage of the gate unit 2301 by the game ball. A normal symbol storage display 1188 consisting of four LEDs for display and a normal symbol lottery result arranged under the normal symbol storage display and drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2301 are displayed as normal symbols. The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED and the normal symbol storage display 1188 are arranged side by side on the diagonally upper right side, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit (condition device operates). It is equipped with a round display 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening 2103 at the time of "hit)".

The game state display 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange, and the emission color of the emission and the lighting / blinking are defined. Depending on the combination, various game states (for example, probability fluctuation state, time reduction state, probability variation time reduction state, jackpot game state, etc.) can be displayed.

Further, when the first special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 1185, the game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2101. In this case, the number of holds (stored number) of the first special symbol whose start of variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol storage display 1184 has a first special symbol storage lamp 1184a composed of a predetermined LED and a first special symbol storage lamp 1184b, and the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are lit. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holdings is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holdings is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. 1184a flashes and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights up when the number of holds is three, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b both light up when the number of holds is four. It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, when the second special symbol storage display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner on the second special symbol display 1186, the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2102. In this case, the number of holds (stored number) of the second special symbol whose start of variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The second special symbol storage display 1187 has a second special symbol storage lamp 1187a composed of a predetermined LED and a second special symbol storage lamp 1187b, and the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are lit. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holds is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of holds is two, the second special symbol storage indicator lamp 1187a, When 1187b is lit together and the number of holds is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit, and when the number of holds is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are lit. Both are designed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are drawn by the first special lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed, and the 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first is based on the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED. The result of the special lottery and the result of the second special lottery can be recognized by the player.

Further, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange, and the combination of the emission color to emit light and lighting / blinking. As a result, it is possible to display the result of a normal lottery that is drawn when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301. As with the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after the display is varied for a predetermined time.

Further, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 suspends the start of the variable display when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301 when the normal symbol cannot be variablely displayed on the normal symbol display 1189. It displays the number of reserved ordinary symbols (stored) (stored). This ordinary symbol storage display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol storage lamp 1188a is arranged from the bottom according to the number of holdings. By sequentially lighting ~ 1188d, the number of reserved symbols can be displayed. In this example, up to four variable displays of normal symbols are reserved (memorized).

Further, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes a 2-round indicator lamp 1190a and a 16-round indicator lamp 1190b composed of predetermined LEDs, and each lamp is turned on to make a round in a "big hit" game. It is possible to display the number.

As shown in FIG. 106 (A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be visually recognized from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In addition, the game status display 1183, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the second special symbol storage display 1187, and the normal symbol storage of the function display unit 1180. The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are mounted on the front surface of the functional display board 1191 (see FIG. 147). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component 1110 of the game board 4, the function is compared with the case where the front unit 2000 and the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150 are provided. The display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent the cost from increasing, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 which is embodied by the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1) is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so that the player or the game The position of the display unit 1181 can be recognized by the clerk in the hall without any confusion.

Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may have a form as shown in FIG. 106 (B). In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 composed of 7-segment LEDs are each composed of eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol storage display 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187 are each composed of four LED groups, and the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is composed of two LEDs.

In addition to being able to achieve the same effects as described above with this function display unit 1180, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are configured to consist of eight LED groups. Compared with the case of using the segment LED, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since it is difficult to understand the content displayed by the function display unit 1180, it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming anxious and difficult to concentrate on the game during the game, and the movement of the game ball, It is possible to make the game more enjoyable by focusing on movable production and production images.

[1-4F. Second Embodiment of the game panel]
Subsequently, a game panel 1200 having a form different from that of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. The front component 1110, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 107 to 109 have the same configurations as those described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. The game panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the above-mentioned game panel 1150 and has a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer circumference is partitioned by the front component 1110. Also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110.

The game panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than that of the game area 1100, and is made of synthetic resin plates such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, and glass, metal, and the like. It is made of an inorganic plate. The thickness of this panel plate 1210 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail G is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said to be (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1210 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1211 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1212 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. It has. These fitting holes 1211 and elongated holes 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engaging step portions 1213 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engaging step portion 1213 is notched to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is arranged outside the game area 1100 like the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1127 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, although the details will be described later, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 such as the attacker unit 2100 and the center accessory 2500, with respect to the openings 1215. The attacker unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed from the front side (see FIG. 119 and the like).

On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the game panel 1200 has a size including the panel plate 1210 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of the above-mentioned wooden board (in this example, about It is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin) having a thickness of 20 mm). The panel holder 1220 has a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and front and rear having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. It is mainly provided with a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost on the same side as. Further, the holding step portion 1221 has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed on the front inner peripheral surface thereof with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and is arranged from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. It is provided with a plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned with each other.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is arranged on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward the surface and is elastically engaged with the engaging step portion 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engaging piece 1225 is arranged in the lower holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is connected to the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. In a state where the engaging step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 is formed with a predetermined gap having a size capable of being inserted, a predetermined amount extends toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. By engaging the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted, and the mounting boss of the front component member 1110 is provided in the boss insertion hole 1226. By inserting the 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component 1110 are positioned with each other.

As shown in FIG. 108, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 in a form recessed by a predetermined amount on the rear surface side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to this mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface side protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression (the amount of the depression). Depth) is a depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 141, etc.) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 that is mounted and fixed to the mounting support portion 1227. It is said that it is preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By mounting and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3010c from protruding to the rear side of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 can be attached to the main body frame 3. It can be securely installed and installed in the game board holding port 601 of the (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as shown in the panel holder 1220, a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and above the accommodating recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning protrusion protruding forward from a flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c on the front surface of the back box 3010 (not shown). Is omitted)) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a stop hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) in the rear view.

It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, a mounting hole having a large diameter and a small diameter are mixed, and the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the lightening portion 1230 reduces the weight of the panel holder 1220. It has become. As shown in FIG. 107, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed in the front side of the accommodating recess 630h, that is, in the predetermined range from the lower end of the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to the predetermined height, and are within the predetermined range. Since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component 1110 arranged on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball striking device 650. However, it is guided smoothly. Further, in this panel holder 1220, as shown in the drawing, the lightening portion 1230 is formed so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and at the same time, they are supported and the strength of the panel holder 1220 is maintained. In order to do so, a box-shaped rib is formed.

The panel holder 1220 is formed with an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 in the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set it in the state that it is. Further, in the lower part of the panel holder 1220, there is an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guidance surface 1115 of the front component 1110, and a lower end that penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction to the left side of the front view and downward. A ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 and a rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction are inserted into the lower right corner of the front view. It includes an insertion hole 1234 and.

Further, the panel holder 1220 has a front configuration including a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 108) in which a predetermined amount is recessed from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and the lower end side is opened downward. It is provided with a notch portion 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate from the right end in the front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is inserted into the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). It is designed to fit with the provided positioning protrusion 607, and when the out ball discharge groove 1235 fits with the positioning protrusion 607, the game board 4 moves relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction. It is becoming regulated.

In the game panel 1200 of the present embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225 are engaged with the engaging step portion 1213. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front side of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the panel plate 1210 in the conventional obstacle nail planting device while holding it in the panel holder 1220 without modifying the installation device, and the cost for planting the obstacle nail G increases. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the game panel 1200 of this example, although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel plate 1210. At the same time, the table unit 2000 can be attached. Further, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. As a result, in the thin panel plate 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, even if the panel plate 1210 is used as a transparent plate, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200, and the transparent panel. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the plate 1210 can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted by the player.

Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position of the obstacle nail, the winning opening, etc. changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 provided with the game board 4 compatible with various models can be obtained by simply replacing the panel plate 1210.

Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 which is mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 depending on the model. By designing the fixing parts of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228, the panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part of the pachinko machine 1 regardless of the model, even if the positions are different. It has become.

[1-4G. Second embodiment of the previous component]
Next, the front component 1110A having a form different from that of the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. In the game panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 110 and 112, the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220 are the embodiments of FIGS. 107 to 109. The configuration is the same as that of the examples of FIGS. 107 to 109 except that the above is different from the above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The front component 1110A shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 is different from the above front component 1110 in part of the inner peripheral shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and does not include the function display unit 1180. The points are very different. The other configurations are the same as those of the pre-component 1110, and the same reference numerals are given, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the game board 4 using the front component 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit). It is prepared for 2000).

As shown in the figure, the front component member 1110A has a frame-shaped inner peripheral shape that extends clockwise from the out port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction to the abutting portion 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The shape is formed to be the same as the above-mentioned front component member 1110, and the shape from the abutting portion 1114 to the out port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from the above-mentioned front component member 1110. ing. Specifically, a gentle arc shape is formed from the abutting portion 1114 to directly above the certificate stamp affixing portion 1125 on the right side arranged directly under the abutting portion 1114, and the out port is formed from the lower end of the arc shape. The area up to the guide surface 1115 is formed in a straight line inclined so as to be lowered toward the out port guide surface 1115.

In the front component 1110A of this example, the game area 1100 can be secured wider than the above-mentioned front component 1110, and the player can be more entertained by the wide game area 1100. You can do it.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machines]
Subsequently, the crime prevention structure of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. FIG. 112 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 113 is a perspective view seen from the rear side in a state where the game board is housed.

First, as shown in FIG. 112, the security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is the side surface of the main body frame base 600 formed of the synthetic resin in the main body frame 3 on the shaft support side (left side in front view). It is composed of a metal security side plate 950 attached to the door frame 5 and a metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

As described above, the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extruded mold material made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimensions in the front-rear direction are larger than the dimensions in the front-rear direction in which the front component 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 are combined. The side surface security plate 950 has a plate-shaped side surface piece 952a extending in the vertical direction and extending in the front-rear direction to form a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end extending substantially perpendicular to the inside (open side) from the front end of the side surface piece 952a. A middle piece 952c extending from the side piece 952a along the front end piece 952b and extending inward in a substantially perpendicular direction from the rear end of the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of gap between the piece 952b and the front end piece 952b. It is provided with a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the security side plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that is opened inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

Further, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) has the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 due to the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. It has been increased so that the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be supported satisfactorily.

On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed by forming a plurality of long metal plates into a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 by spot welding, rivets, or the like. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft support side is provided with a shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section that is open to the outside (shaft support side). In the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. ..

By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at two points above and below the upper shaft branch 156 and the lower shaft branch 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side When an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, and the gap is increased through the gap. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side plate 950. The rear piece of the shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 formed in a substantially U shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (invaded), and the front end piece 952a is used as the shaft support. It is in a state of being sandwiched between the side U-shaped projecting pieces 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 Since it is possible to prevent the U-shaped projecting piece 166 on the shaft support side from moving away from the main body frame 3, it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being scooped out, and the main body frame can be prevented from being opened. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 against 3.

Further, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. The strength and rigidity of the door frame are increased, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an illegal tool, and the crime prevention performance can be improved.

Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a of the security side plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 of the game board 4, it is assumed that the main body frame base 600 behind the rear end of the side piece 952a Even if is destroyed, an illegal tool such as a piano wire cannot be inserted into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150) from the rear end of the side piece 952a, and the illegal act is performed. Can be reliably prevented. As shown in FIG. 112, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the crime prevention side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface, and the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It has become possible to fully counter the vandalism of. Further, in general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side. From the (front side), it is almost impossible for an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the side piece 952c beyond the rear end, and the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

Subsequently, as a security structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 113, the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, and the prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 accommodating the game board 4 Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are made of transparent synthetic resin, the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4 housed in the main body frame 3 can be used as the game board 4. It can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 without removing it from the main body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an illegal device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4, it can be easily found and it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed. Further, since the illegal device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach the illegal device and enhance the deterrent against fraudulent acts. ing.

Further, since the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. When the game board 4 is attached / detached to / from 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, a waste cloth for cleaning, dust, dust, etc. remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, they are removed from the outside. It can be easily found from the above, it is possible to prevent some trouble from occurring due to them, and it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine, FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the game board viewed diagonally from the upper right front, and FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the game board viewed diagonally from the upper left front, FIG. 117. Is a perspective view of the game board viewed diagonally from the lower left front. Further, FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 119 is a perspective view of each of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 120 is a perspective view of each of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed diagonally from the rear. It is a figure.

The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium is generated by a player operating the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component 1110A that partitions the inner circumference of the game area 1100 to be driven, and a frame-shaped front component 1110A that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1110A so as to close the game area 1100 and has a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to the game area 1100. It includes a plate-shaped game panel 1200 having a plurality of openings 1215 (see FIG. 119 and the like) penetrating in the front-rear direction and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100.

The game panel 1200 of this example has a transparent panel plate 1210 having a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose inner circumference is partitioned by the front component 1110A and having an outer shape smaller than that of the front component 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110A is provided. The opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

Further, the game board 4 has a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a front end left end of the back unit 3000. The function display unit 1180 is arranged so that it can be seen from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210 and can be seen from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when it is attached to the pachinko machine 1. The liquid crystal display device 1900 having a display screen (display area) that is visibly attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 and can display a predetermined effect image, and the lower part of the back unit 3000 are covered from the rear side. A board holder 1160 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the game panel 1200 and a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1160 are provided.

The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of this example has an attacker unit 2100 arranged so as to extend from directly above the out port 1151 to the right in front view at the lower part of the game area 1100, and a game area 1100 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. The front side unit 2200 arranged along the inner circumference of the game area, the gate unit 2300 arranged at a position slightly above the center in the vertical direction near the left end of the front view in the game area 1100, and the abbreviation of the game area 1100. It is provided with a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 arranged in the central portion.

Further, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220) so that the front side is opened and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces the rear wall 3010a. The back box 3010 on which the 3010b is formed, the back front decoration unit 3100 arranged near the front end in the back box 3010, the back top effect unit 3200 arranged on the upper side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and the back box. The lower right back effect unit 3400 arranged below the opening 3010b in the 3010, and the lower right back area arranged between the lower back area effect unit 3400 and the back front decoration unit 3100 in the lower right corner of the front view inside the back box 3010. It mainly has a production unit 3600. The back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a function display unit 1180 at a position that can be visually recognized from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210.

Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 194) having a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150, which will be described in detail later, is housed. A box 1910 is provided.

In the game board 4 of the present embodiment, the game area 1100 is divided into left and right by the center accessory 2500 attached to the game panel 1200, and the outer circumference on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and the outer circumference of the game area 1100. The area between (the inner circumference of the front component 1110A) is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer circumference on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and the outer circumference of the game area 1100 (front component 1110A). It is considered to be a wide area where the game ball can sufficiently flow, and a plurality of obstacle nails (illustrated) are placed on the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100. Is omitted) is planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement.

In the game board 4 of this example, when the game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (strike with a strength equal to or higher than a predetermined strength), the center accessory is driven from the upstream side of the aisle portion 1114 of the front component 1110A. It is sent to the distribution space 2530 side by the distribution entry passage 2545 of 2500, is distributed in either the left or right direction in the distribution space 2530 by the distribution valve 2551 of the distribution unit 2550, and then discharged from the discharge port 2534. After being guided by the guide passage 2540, the game ball is distributed and discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge port 2541 opened on the upstream side of the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100. By passing through the space 2530, it is possible to accept (win) the large winning opening 2103 in the open state with a high probability.

Further, in the game board 4 of this example, when the game ball is driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is caused by a plurality of obstacle nails planted in the gate unit 2300, the front side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2100. By being guided in the direction or entering the warp entrance 2504 on the way, it is discharged directly above the first starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100 via the stage 2510, and the gate portion 2301, the general winning opening 2104, 2201, It is possible to win prizes in the starting ports 2101, 1022, the large winning opening 2103, and the like, and it is possible to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1 by the movement of the game ball.

In other words, on the route on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it is possible to enjoy the distribution of game balls within the distribution space 2530 and the easy acceptance of the winning opening 2103 without contacting the obstacle nails. , On the route on the left side of the center character 2500, you can enjoy the dynamic movement of the game ball by bouncing it with an obstacle nail, and you can enjoy the movement of the game ball according to your taste, mood, skill, etc. It is possible to make the driving operation of the game ball so as to pass through a simple route, and it is possible to prevent the driving operation and movement of the game ball from becoming monotonous and to make it hard to get bored.

[2-1. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. 121 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 122 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the rear.

The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is arranged so as to extend from directly above the out port 1151 to the right side at the lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100, and is supported on the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210). The front side unit 2200, which is arranged on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 and extends substantially along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 in an arc shape, and the front side unit 2200 above the left end in the game area 1100 near the left end of the front view. The gate unit 2300 is arranged at a position slightly above the center in the vertical direction, and the frame shape is arranged on the right side of the game area from the substantially central part of the game area 1100 and is supported by the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210). It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

The attacker unit 2100 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail later, but the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 in which a predetermined special lottery result is drawn when the game ball is accepted, and the attacker unit 2102 according to the special lottery result. It is provided with a large winning opening 2103 that can accept game balls and a general winning opening 2104 that can always accept game balls. In this example, the second starting port 2102 is arranged directly below the first starting port 2101, and the lower second starting port 2102 is normally unable to accept the game ball, and the gate portion in the gate unit 2300. It is a variable winning slot that allows the game balls to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn when the game balls pass at 2301. Further, the large winning opening 2103 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, and the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2103 and the large winning opening 2103 are left and right of each other. The central axes of the directions are located at different positions.

Further, the front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 is arranged on the upper left side of the two general winning openings 2201 arranged on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 and the general winning opening 2201 and flows down from above, although the details will be described later. It is provided with shelves 2202, 2203 that guide the game ball to the right.

The gate unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is arranged on the upper side of the front side unit 2200 and on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and is attached to the front surface of the transparent panel plate 1210, although the details will be described later. The gate unit 2300 includes a gate portion 2301 having a size that allows only one game ball to pass through, and a gate sensor 2302 that detects the passage of the game ball is provided in the gate portion 2301.

Further, although the details of the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 will be described later, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side of the center accessory 2500 attached to the large opening 1215 formed in the substantially center of the panel plate 1210, etc. Is formed in a frame shape having a window portion 2501 that can be visually recognized from the player side. The center accessory 2500 has a substantially frame-shaped flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210), and a game ball that has flowed down in the game area 1100 is prevented from entering the frame. The peripheral wall portion 2503, the warp inlet 2504 that opens at a predetermined position of the peripheral wall portion 2503, the warp outlet 2505 that discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and the game ball released from the warp outlet 2505 in the left-right direction It is provided with a stage 2510, which is rolled into the game area 1100 and then discharged into the game area 1100 to return the ball. The stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged directly above the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball returned from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 has a high probability of being an attacker. It is designed to be accepted into the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 of the unit 2100.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, a distribution space 2530 through which game balls that have flowed down along the outer peripheral wall 2503 on the upper right side of the center in the left-right direction and a game ball in the distribution space 2530 are provided. A distribution valve 2551 that distributes to either the left or right side, a gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) through which game balls distributed by the distribution valve 2551 can pass, and a gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate). The distribution detection sensor 2580 (2580L, 2580R) that can detect that the game ball has passed through 2575R) and the game ball distributed in the distribution space 2530 are centered in the left-right direction at a position below the stage 2510. A guide passage 2540 that guides the player to the side and a discharge port 2541 that returns and discharges the game ball guided by the guide passage 2540 into the game area 1100 above the large winning opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100 are provided.

In this center accessory 2500, a game ball that has flowed down the distribution space 2530 can be accepted by the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 with a high probability. Further, in the distribution space 2530 of the distribution unit 2550, when the condition device is activated, the game balls are distributed in any direction, so that a jackpot game in a mode corresponding to the distribution direction is given. It has become like.

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126. FIG. 123 is a perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from the front, FIG. 124 is a perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from the rear, and FIG. 125 is a perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from the rear bottom. Further, FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit partially disassembled and viewed later.

The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the table unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1215 formed in the lower center of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200 in the left-right direction, and then the game panel. It is fixed to the front surface of 1200 (panel plate 1210). The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of entrances (winning openings) in which a game ball driven into the game area 1100 can be accepted. Specifically, it is usually arranged between the first start port 2101, which is arranged directly above the out port 1151 in the game panel 1200 and is capable of always accepting the game ball, and the first start port 2101 and the out port 1151. It is placed at a height between the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 on the right side of the front view of the second starting port 2102 and the second starting port 2102 and the first starting port 2101 that cannot accept the game ball. It is possible to accept a horizontally long rectangular large winning opening 2103 that normally cannot accept a game ball, and a constant game ball that is placed directly above the large winning opening 2103 and between the large winning opening 2103 and the second starting opening 2102. It is equipped with a general winning opening 2104, which is said to be.

The first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open toward the upper side so that the game ball can always be received (winning). On the other hand, as shown in the figure, the second starting port 2102 arranged directly below the first starting port 2101 is provided by a pair of blade-shaped movable pieces 2105 arranged substantially upright on both the left and right sides of the second starting port 2102. The space between the game ball and the first starting port 2101 is closed, and the game ball cannot be received by the second starting port 2102 in the illustrated state (normal state).

The pair of movable pieces 2105 that close the second starting port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 are rotatably supported on the lower end side, and the upper end side is rotated in a direction away from each other to expand the opening. (2) The game ball is ready to be accepted into the starting port 2102. That is, the second starting port 2102 is a variable winning opening with a pair of movable pieces 2105. The second starting port 2102 opens and closes according to the result of a normal lottery in which a pair of movable pieces 2105 are drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion of the gate unit 2300 and being detected by a gate sensor. It has become.

Further, the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the openings of the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102. As shown in the figure, the opening of the large winning opening 2103 is closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing member 2106, and the opening / closing member 2106 opens and closes by rotating. The opening / closing member 2106 that opens and closes the large winning opening 2103 is rotatably supported around the lower side, and in a substantially vertical state, the large winning opening 2103 can be closed to make the game ball unacceptable. At the same time, when the upper side is rotated so as to move to the front side, the large winning opening 2103 can be opened so that the game ball can be accepted. That is, the large winning opening 2103 is a variable winning opening by the opening / closing member 2106.

Further, the two general winning openings 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 are substantially the same height as the second starting opening 2102 between the large winning opening 2103 and the second starting opening 2102 directly above the center of the large winning opening 2103 in the left-right direction. It is arranged in a state where the upper part is open.

The width of the attacker unit 2100 in the left-right direction of the first starting port 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 is slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball, and the size (width) is such that the game balls can be received one by one. ing. Further, the width of the second starting port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 in the left-right direction when the upper ends of the pair of movable pieces 2105 are rotated in the direction in which they are separated from each other and expanded is three times the outer shape of the game ball. It is said to be ~ 5 times wider. Further, the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the opening / closing member 2106 is opened, which is 5 to 8 times the width of the outer shape of the game ball. That is, in a state where the game ball can be accepted, the game ball is formed so as to be easily accepted in the order of the first starting port 2101, the general winning opening 2104, the second starting opening 2102, and the large winning opening 2103.

Further, the attacker unit 2100 of this example is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1210 so as to close the opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200, and the front end is formed flat in the base plate 2110 and the base plate 2110. The position where the first receiving member 2111 which is mounted at the position where the first starting port 2101 is arranged to form the first starting port 2101 and the upper side is opened and the first receiving member 2111 on the base plate 2110 are mounted (first starting A second receiving member 2112, which is attached to the lower side of the port 2101) and rotatably supports a pair of movable pieces 2105 and forms a second starting port 2102 with the upper and rear sides open, and a base plate 2110. The general winning member 2113 is attached to the position where the general winning opening 2104 is arranged to form the general winning opening 2104, and the upper side is opened.

Further, the attacker unit 2100 supports the start port solenoid 2114, which is arranged behind the base plate 2110 and drives the opening and closing of a pair of movable pieces 2105 that open and close the second start port 2102, and the start port solenoid 2114 so as to cover them. It includes a solenoid cover 2115 attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110, and a start port decorative board 2116 sandwiched between the solenoid cover 2115 and the base plate 2110 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

Further, as shown in FIG. 126, the attacker unit 2100 is attached to the rear side of the large winning opening 2103 in the base plate 2110, and rotatably supports the opening / closing member 2106 that opens and closes the large winning opening 2103, and can be divided into upper and lower parts. Unit case 2120, attacker solenoid 2121 for opening and closing the opening and closing member 2106 supported in the unit case 2120, count sensor 2122 for detecting the game ball received in the grand prize opening 2103, and the upper part of the unit case 2120. The general winning opening sensor 2123, which is supported by the above and is placed directly above the large winning opening 2103 and detects the game ball received by the general winning opening 2104, and the unit case 2120 are covered from the rear side and attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110. The unit cover 2124, the large winning opening decorative board 2125 mounted on the rear side of the unit cover 2124 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and the large winning opening decorative board 2125 arranged on the rear side of the unit cover 2124. It includes an attacker unit relay board 2126 to be attached.

The base plate 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a plate shape with the front surface extending in the left-right direction, and the surface is decorated with a shallow relief shape. The base plate 2110 is formed with an opening 2110a penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the game ball can pass at a position corresponding to the second starting port 2102 (see FIG. 123). Further, in the base plate 2110, a gutter portion 2110b extending rearward is formed at a position corresponding to the first starting port 2101, and a game ball received by the first receiving member 2111 as the first starting port 2101. Is guided to the rear side of the panel plate 1210, and then delivered to the first passage 3122a in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, via the guide path 2115a of the solenoid cover 2115. ing.

As shown in the figure, the second receiving member 2112 of the attacker unit 2100 has a translucent front surface and is decorated with a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the second receiving member 2112 includes a pair of shaft portions extending rearward from the rear surface of the front plate at intervals wider than the left and right widths of the openings 2110a in the base plate 2110. The movable piece 2105 can be rotatably supported by the shaft portion.

Further, the general receiving member 2113 of the attacker unit 2100 is provided with a gutter portion 2113a for guiding the received game ball to the rear side of the panel plate 1210.

Although not shown, the start port solenoid 2114 of the attacker unit 2100 has a plunger that can be advanced and retreated by energization and is urged in the protruding direction by a coil spring, and is located below the first start port 2101. (Ii) At the rear position of the starting port 2102, the plunger is supported by the base plate 2110 and the solenoid cover 2115 so as to project forward. In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the start port solenoid 2114 is energized, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2114 retracts against the urging force of the coil spring, and a pair of movable pieces are interposed via a transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The upper ends of the 2105s rotate in directions separated from each other, and the second starting port 2102 is in an open state.

Further, the solenoid cover 2115 of the attacker unit 2100 is provided on the upper surface with a taxiway 2115a whose front end side is connected to the rear end of the gutter portion 2110b of the base plate and guides the game ball from the gutter portion 2110b to the right in front view. ing. The guide path 2115a of the solenoid cover 2115 receives the game ball received by the first receiving member 2111 and is received by the first starting port 2101 and guided to the rear side of the panel plate 1210 by the gutter portion 2110b of the base plate 2110. It is possible to guide the vehicle to the right in front view and deliver it to the first passage 3122a in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later. Further, the solenoid cover 2115 is provided with a discharge port 2115b that opens rearward below the portion that supports the start port solenoid 2114. The discharge port 2115b communicates with the second start port 2102, and the game ball received in the second start port 2102 is transferred from the discharge port 2115b to the second passage 3122b in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. It can be handed over to.

As shown in FIG. 125, the unit case 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 has a large entry / discharge port 2120a for discharging the game ball received in the large prize opening 2103 downward on the rear side of the panel plate 1210, and a large prize. It is provided with a general discharge port 2120b for discharging the game ball received in the general winning port 2104 arranged directly above the port 2103 below the panel plate 1210. Further, although not shown, the unit case 2120 has a first passage for guiding the game ball received in the large winning opening 2103 to the rear side of the game panel 1210 and discharging it from the large entrance / discharging port 2120a. It is provided with a second passage for ejecting a game ball received by the general winning opening 2104 directly above the large winning opening 2103 and guided by the ball receiving portion 2124a of the unit cover 2124 from the general discharging port 2120b. As shown in FIG. 126, the unit case 2120 supports the general winning opening sensor 2123 at a position directly below the ball receiving portion 2124a on the unit cover 2124.

Although not shown, the attacker solenoid 2121 of the attacker unit 2100 has a plunger that can be moved forward and backward by energization and is urged in the protruding direction by a coil spring, like the start port solenoid 2114. In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the attacker solenoid 2121 is energized, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2121 is immersed, and the upper end of the opening / closing member 2106 moves relatively forward via the transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The large winning opening 2103 is in an open state.

As shown in the figure, the unit cover 2124 of the attacker unit 2100 is received by the general winning opening 2104 immediately after the gutter portion 2113a of the general receiving member 2113 attached directly above the large winning opening 2103, and is received by the gutter portion 2113a to the rear. It is provided with a ball receiving portion 2124a that receives the guided game ball and guides it downward.

The start port decoration board 2116 of the attacker unit 2100 can make the second start port 2102 emit light by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. Further, the large winning opening decoration substrate 2125 of the attacker unit can illuminate and decorate the large winning opening 2103 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. Further, the attacker unit relay board 2126 includes a start port solenoid 2114, an attacker solenoid 2121, a count sensor 2122, a general winning port sensor 2123 and a panel relay board 3040 (main control board 4100), a starting port decorative board 2116, and a large winning port decoration. This is for relaying the connection between the substrate 2125 and the lamp drive substrate 3041.

In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, the first starting port 2101 is in a state where the game ball can be constantly received. On the other hand, in the second starting port 2102, a pair of movable starting port solenoids 2114 are driven by energization according to a normal lottery result in which a game ball passes through the gate portion 2301 in the gate unit 2300 described later. The piece 2105 is expanded so that it can be accepted. Further, in the large winning opening 2103, the special lottery result is "big hit" according to the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102 (starting winning). ”), The attacker solenoid 2121 is energized and driven so that the opening / closing member 2106 opens / closes in a predetermined pattern and can be accepted.

In this attacker unit 2100, the game balls received in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 are the first passage 3122a and the second passage of the lower unit base 3122 in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. It is received by 3122b, detected by the first start port sensor 3131 and the second start port sensor 3132, and then discharged downward.

Further, in the attacker unit 2100, the game ball received by the large winning opening 2103 and the general winning opening 2104 directly above is detected by the count sensor 2122 and the general winning opening sensor 2123 in the unit case 2120, and then the unit case 2120. It is designed to be discharged downward from the large inlet / discharge port 2120a and the general discharge port 2120b on the lower surface.

In the attacker unit 2100 of the present embodiment, the attacker solenoid 2121 is arranged so that the advance / retreat direction of the plunger 2124a is in the left-right direction, and the attacker solenoid 2121 is arranged at a position as close as possible to the opening / closing member 2106. Therefore, the dimensions of the attacker unit 2100 in the front-rear direction can be shortened by 5 to 30% as compared with the conventional product, and the rear space of the attacker unit 2100 can be secured wider. ..

[2-3. Front side unit]
Subsequently, the front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 (a) is a perspective view of the front side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 127 (b) is a perspective view of the front side unit viewed from the rear. The front side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is located on the left side of the center of the game area 1100 in the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200 in the vertical direction and below the center in the vertical direction, and is the inner circumference of the game area 1100. It is fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1210 so as to be in contact with the panel plate 1210.

As shown in the figure, the front side unit 2200 of this example has a front view formed in an arc shape along the inner circumference of the game area 1100, and has two general winning openings 2201 arranged from the center in the left-right direction to the right side. , Two shelves 2202, 2203 arranged on the left side from the center in the left-right direction and inclined so that the right end side is lower in the front view, and a plate-like shape that abuts on the front surface of the panel plate 1210 and closes the opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210. It includes a base 2210 and a hi section 2211 extending rearward from the rear surface at a position where the general winning opening 2201 on the base 2210 is arranged.

As shown in the figure, the front side unit 2200 is provided with two general winning openings 2201 and shelves 2202 and 2203 on the front surface of the base 2210, and is formed substantially transparent as a whole.

Further, the front side unit 2200 uses the two shelves 2202 and 2203 to move the game ball that has flowed down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 toward the center side in the front left-right direction of the game area 1100. It is designed to be able to induce. Further, the front side unit 2200 guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2201 to the rear side of the panel plate 1210 by the gutter portion 2211, and the lower unit base in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. It can be delivered to the general passage 3122d of 3122.

[2-4. Gate unit]
Next, the gate unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. The gate unit 2300 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 1215 formed in the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200 at a position slightly above the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction. It is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210).

The gate unit 2300 has a gate portion 2301 having a width through which only one game ball can pass, and the gate sensor 2302 arranged in the gate portion 2301 detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2301. Can be done.

The gate unit 2300 of this example is formed to have a shorter length in the front-rear direction as compared with the conventional gate, and the portion of the game panel 1200 on the rear side of the front surface of the panel plate 1210 is the panel plate 1210. It is designed to fit within the thickness of. That is, only the wiring cord connected to the gate sensor 2302 extends from the rear surface of the panel plate 1210.

When the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301, the gate unit 2300 can detect the passage of the game ball by the gate sensor 2302, and when the gate sensor 2302 detects the passage of the game ball, it is normal. The lottery result is drawn, and the pair of movable pieces 2105 that close the second start port 2102 is rotated by driving the start port solenoid 2114 according to the lottery normal lottery result, and the second start port 2102 is received for a predetermined time. It has become possible.

[2-5. Center role]
Subsequently, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 to 140. FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed from the front, and FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed from the rear. FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each main configuration and viewed afterwards. Further, FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the distribution unit of the center accessory as viewed from the front, and FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the distribution unit of the center accessory as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the distribution unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the distribution unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 136 is an enlarged front view showing the movement of the distribution unit in the center accessory, FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the periphery of the distribution unit viewed from diagonally above left, and FIG. 138 is a drive of the distribution unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows, and FIG. 139 is the explanatory view which shows the drive of the movable decorative body of a distribution unit. Further, FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the flow of the game ball in the distribution unit in the center accessory.

The center accessory 2500 of this example is inserted from the front side into an opening 1215 formed large so as to penetrate substantially the center of the transparent plate-shaped panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200, and then the panel plate 1210. As shown in FIG. 114 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is visible, which is a frame-shaped frame that occupies most of the game area 1100 and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is arranged on the rear side. It is provided with a large window 2501.

The center accessory 2500 has a plate-shaped flange portion 2502 that abuts on the front surface of the game panel 1200 on the outer periphery of the window portion 2501 and a plate-shaped flange portion 2502 that bulges forward from the flange portion 2502 and swells in the game area 1100 with a substantially center in the left-right direction as a boundary. It is provided with a peripheral wall portion 2503 that guides the flowing game ball to the left and right and prevents the game ball from entering the frame. Further, the center accessory 2500 is opened in the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 located on the front side of the panel plate 1210, and the warp entrance 2504 (FIGS. 116 and 117) in which the game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter. The warp outlet 2505 that discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and the first start port of the attacker unit 2100 after rolling the game ball released from the warp outlet 2505 in the left-right direction. It is provided with a stage 2510 which is discharged and returned to the game area 1100 on the upper side of 2101 and arranged on the lower inner edge of the window portion 2501.

The stages 2510 in the center accessory 2500 are the first stage 2511 and the first stage 2511 in which the game balls released from the warp outlet 2505 are supplied and the supplied game balls can be released forward from a predetermined position. The second stage 2512, which is arranged on the front side of the first stage 2511 and is capable of supplying the game balls from the first stage 2511 and releasing the supplied game balls forward from a predetermined position, and the second stage 2512, which is arranged on the front side of the second stage 2512. The game balls are supplied from the third stage 2513, and the supplied game balls can be discharged rearward from a predetermined position, and between the third stage 2513 and the first stage 2511 on both the left and right sides of the second stage 2512. Two fourth stages 2514, which are arranged in the third stage 2513 and are supplied with game balls and can be discharged downward, and two fourth stages 2514, which are arranged below the fourth stage 2514 and are arranged from the fourth stage. It is provided with a fifth stage 2515 in which the game ball is supplied and the game ball is discharged forward from a predetermined position to return the game ball into the game area 1100.

Further, the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is opened at a predetermined position of the first stage 2511 so that the game ball can enter the first chance entrance 2516, and the stage 2510 is opened at the predetermined position of the second stage 2512 and the game ball enters. The enabled second chance entrance 2517 and the game ball that has entered the first chance entrance 2516 and the second chance entrance 2517 are returned and released into the game area 1100 and opened directly above the first starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100. It is equipped with a chance exit 2518.

The first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 is formed in a curved shape so that both the left and right ends are the highest, and is formed so that the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction is higher, and is a smooth and flat W shape as a whole. It is formed in a wavy shape, and the game ball is discharged forward from the lowest part on both sides of the higher part in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100. Further, the second stage 2512 extends in the left-right direction so as to straddle the left and right portions that are the lowest in the first stage 2511 and emit the game ball forward, and is gently curved so that the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction becomes low. It is formed in a shape, and the game ball is discharged forward from a predetermined width in the center in the left-right direction.

Further, the third stage 2513 in the stage 2510 has a length in the left-right direction substantially the same as that of the first stage 2511, is formed in a curved shape so that both the left and right ends are the highest, and the left and right sides of the game area 1100. It is formed in a smooth, flat, W-shaped wavy shape as a whole so that the center of the direction is high, and the lowest part on both the left and right sides of the raised part in the center of the left-right direction of the game area 1100 is the second stage. It is formed so as to be located on the lateral side in the left-right direction with respect to 2512. In this third stage 2513, the game ball is released backward from the lowest portion.

Further, as shown in the figure, the fourth stage 2514 in the stage 2510 is independently arranged on the left and right sides of the second stage 2512, and is gently inclined so that the side away from the second stage 2512 in the left-right direction becomes lower. At the same time, the lowest portion is provided with a drop hole 2514a that opens downward and allows a game ball to pass through. In the fourth stage 2514, the supplied game ball is discharged downward through the drop hole 2514a.

Further, the fifth stage 2515 in the stage 2510 has a length extending across the drop holes 2514a of the fourth stage 2514 arranged so as to be separated from each other in the left-right direction, and is curved so that both the left and right ends are the highest. The game area 1100 is formed in a smooth, flat, W-shaped wavy shape as a whole so that the center of the game area 1100 is raised in the left-right direction. The game ball is released forward (within the game area 1100) from the lowest part of the game.

Further, the first chance entrance 2516 in the stage 2510 is arranged so that the rear half in the front-rear direction is applied to the raised portion in the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction in the first stage 2511. Further, the second chance entrance 2517 is arranged so as to open to the rear side in the front-rear direction at a lowered portion in the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction in the second stage 2512. The first chance entrance 2516 and the second chance entrance 2517 communicate with each other on the lower side of the stage 2510, respectively, and face forward from directly below the raised portion in the center of the game area 1100 in the fifth stage 2515 in the left-right direction. The game ball is discharged into the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2518 opened.

In the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500, the game ball supplied through the warp entrance 2504 enters either the first chance entrance 2516 or the second chance entrance 2517 and is released from the chance exit 2518 into the game area 1100. Then, since the chance exit 2518 is arranged directly above the first starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, the game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2101 (the second starting port 2102 in the open state) with a high probability. It is designed to (win a prize).

Although detailed illustration is omitted, a groove narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball extending in the front-rear direction is formed on the inner bottom surface of the chance outlet 2518, and the game ball is rectified by this groove. It is possible to stabilize the behavior of the game ball discharged from the chance exit 2518 by discharging it into the game area 1100.

In this center accessory 2500, substantially the entire stage 2510 is formed of a transparent member, and the game balls that circulate each stage 2511,512,2513,2514,2515 formed in a plurality of stages from the player side can be sufficiently used. It can be visually recognized.

Further, as shown in the figure, the third stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a length extending in the left-right direction from the left end of the center accessory 2500 to substantially the same position as the right end of the first stage 2511, and the game The game ball protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1210 of the panel 1200, and the game ball abuts on the obstacle nail planted in the lower area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 and jumps upward greatly. However, it can come into contact with the lower surface side of the third stage 2513 and bounce downward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball jumped by the obstacle nail from entering the window portion 2501 (inside the frame) of the center accessory 2500, and a member that prevents the game ball from entering the window portion 2501. Is arranged at the lower part of the stage 2510 so that the inside of the stage 2510 and the inside of the window portion 2501 can be easily seen.

Further, the center accessory 2500 of this example has a plate-shaped flange portion 2502 that abuts on the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200 and a plate-shaped flange portion 2502 that projects forward from the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 2502 and is driven into the game area 1100. It further includes a transparent frame-shaped center base 2520 having a peripheral wall portion 2503 capable of preventing the game ball from entering the window portion 2501 (inside the frame). The center base 2530 has a rear extending wall 2521 extending rearward from the rear surface on the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 2502, and when attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1210, the rear extending wall 2521 is a panel. It is designed to be inserted into the opening 1215 of the plate 1210.

The center base 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is provided with a space forming recess 2522 having an open front side for forming a distribution space 2530, which will be described later, at a position at the right end above the center in the vertical direction in the front view. The center accessory 2500 includes a transparent plate-shaped distribution space cover 2525 that closes the open front end side of the space formation recess 2522 in the center base 2520, and includes the distribution space cover 2525 and the space formation recess 2522. The distribution space 2530 is formed by the above.

Further, the center accessory 2500 of this example is arranged at the right end position above the center in the vertical direction in the front view, and a game ball that has flowed down along the outer circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2503 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction can enter. At the same time, the entering game ball is discharged from the distribution space 2530 of a predetermined size that can be discharged to the outside of the peripheral wall portion 2503 on the right side in the vertical direction in the vertical direction, and the front view. A guide passage 2540 that guides and guides the game ball flowing down along the right peripheral wall portion 2503 so as to be discharged to the upstream side of the large winning opening 2503 in the attacker unit 2100, and a game ball in a predetermined direction in the distribution space 2530. A distribution unit 2550 that can be distributed to and a gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) that is arranged in the distribution space 2530 and allows game balls distributed to the left and right by the distribution unit 2550 to pass through. , Two distribution detection sensors 2580 (2580L, 2580R) capable of detecting game balls that have passed through these gates 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R), respectively.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is arranged above the distribution space 2530, and the upper end side opens at a predetermined position on the upper right side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 in front view, and the lower end side opens at the upper end of the distribution space 2530 and lower. A distribution approach passage 2545 formed so as to become narrower toward the direction is further provided, and the game ball enters the distribution space 2530 through the distribution approach passage 2545.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a distribution suggestion member 2590 which is arranged on each of the left and right sides of the distribution space 2530 and is formed in a downward arrow shape. This distribution suggestion member 2590 is partially translucent and can be light-emitting decorated by a decorative substrate arranged on the rear side, depending on the distribution direction of the distribution valve 2551 of the distribution unit 2550 described later. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the distribution direction and the like by emitting light.

As described above, the distribution space 2530 in the center accessory 2500 is formed by the space forming recess 2522 in which the front side of the center base 2520 is open and the distribution space cover 2525 in which the front end of the space forming recess 2522 is closed. The transparent center base 2520 and the distribution space cover 2525 make it possible to see the rear side well.

The distribution space 2530 includes an upper space 2531 that bulges upward in a semicircular shape, and a lower space 2532 that is arranged below the upper space 2531 and bulges wider in the left-right direction than the upper space 2531. There is. In the distribution space 2530, the lower end of the distribution entry passage 2545 is opened in the center of the upper space 2531 in the left-right direction. Further, in the distribution space 2530, the bottom portion 2533 of the lower space 2532 is inclined so as to be lower on the right side when viewed from the front, and a discharge port 2534 opened in the peripheral wall portion 2503 is formed at the right end of the bottom portion 2533 of the lower space 2532. Has been done.

Further, in the lower space 2532 of the distribution space 2530, a left gate 2575L containing the distribution detection sensor 2580L and a right gate 2575R incorporating the distribution detection sensor 2580R are arranged apart from each other in the left-right direction. Specifically, two gates 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) each incorporating a distribution detection sensor 2580 (distribution detection sensor 2580L, distribution detection sensor 2580R) have a distribution unit 2550 in the upper space 2531. On the axis that is distributed to the left and right by the distribution valve 2551 and hangs down (on the axis that is perpendicular to the circumference passing through the center of the inner circumference of the upper space 2531 and the outer circumference of the cylindrical portion 2551a in the distribution valve 2551). They are placed in each.

Further, in the distribution space 2530, a circular opening 2535 penetrating in the front-rear direction along the inner shape of the upper space 2531 formed in a semicircle shape is provided on the rear wall partitioning the rear end of the distribution space 2530. It is formed. The opening 2535 is closed by the disk-shaped rear wall portion 2551c of the distribution valve 2551 in the distribution unit 2550, which will be described later, so that the game ball cannot pass through.

The guide passage 2540 in the center accessory 2500 is discharged from the discharge port 2534 of the distribution space 2530 to the outer peripheral side of the peripheral wall portion 2503, and flows down between the inner circumference of the game area 1100 and the outer circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2503. The ball is guided to the center side in the left-right direction of the front view at a position lower than the stage 2510, and the large winning opening is opened from the discharge port 2541 (see FIG. 117) opened upstream of the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100. It can be released toward 2103.

It should be noted that the flow speed of the game ball is attenuated by coming into contact with the game ball in the passage between the discharge port 2534 of the distribution space 2530 and the guide passage 2540 on the outer circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500. A plurality of ridges 2506 are provided.

Further, as shown in the figure, the distribution entry passage 2545 in the center accessory 2500 is formed so as to become narrower toward the bottom, and the width on the lower end side is slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball. , The game balls can be sent in a row to the lower distribution space 2530. The distribution entry passage 2545 is formed so that the upper end side of the side wall on the left side of the front view forming the passage is continuous downward from the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2503, whereas the upper end of the side wall on the right side of the front view is formed. It is formed so as to extend to the abutting portion 1114 of the front component 1110A that divides the inner circumference of the game area 1100. As a result, all the game balls driven between the upper inner circumference of the game area 1100 and the outer circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2503 on the right side from the center in the front left-right direction in the center accessory 2500 are all accepted into the distribution approach passage 2545. It is designed to be sent to the distribution space 2530.

The distribution unit 2550 in the center accessory 2500 is arranged in the upper space 2531 in the distribution space 2530 and rotates to distribute the game ball to the distribution valve 2551 and the distribution valve 2551. It has a distribution shaft 2552 that extends rearward from the center of rotation of the valve 2551 and rotates integrally with the distribution valve 2551, and a locking piece 2553a that is fixed to the rear end of the distribution shaft 2552 and eccentric from the shaft core. After the unit base 2554 and the unit base 2554, which rotatably support the distribution shaft 2552 between the stop member 2553, the locking member 2553, and the distribution valve 2551, and are arranged behind the distribution space 2530. Locking that is slidably supported in a predetermined slide range in the left-right direction on the side and below the distribution shaft 2552, and is arranged at a position directly below the distribution shaft 2552 when slid to approximately the center of the slide range. A distribution slider 2555 having a piece 2555a and a groove 2555b extending in the vertical direction from one end side, and both ends approach each other across the locking piece 2555a of the distribution slider 2555 and the locking piece 2553a of the locking member 2553. It has a connecting spring 2556 that is locked so that an urging force acts in the direction of movement, and a transmission pin 2557a that slides in the groove 2555b of the distribution slider 2555 and extends in the front-rear direction, and has a shaft core of the transmission pin 2557a. It is provided with a link member 2557 that is rotatably supported at a position eccentric from the above, and a distribution drive motor 2558 that is mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 2554 by rotationally driving the link member 2557 so that the transmission pin 2557a revolves. There is.

As shown in the figure, the distribution valve 2551 of the distribution unit 2550 is abbreviated as a cylindrical portion 2551a extending shortly in the front-rear direction, a valve portion 2551b protruding radially from the outer circumference of the cylindrical portion 2551a, and a tip of the valve portion 2551b. It includes a cylindrical portion 2551a and a transparent disk-shaped rear wall portion 2551c attached to the rear side of the valve portion 2551b with the same diameter. The distribution valve 2551 is in a state in which the game ball can be distributed in a predetermined direction by the valve portion 2551b, and the game ball cannot pass through the opening 2535 of the distribution space 2530 by the rear wall 2551c. It can be closed to.

The locking member 2553 of the distribution unit 2550 is formed so that the locking piece 2553a projects rearward from a position eccentric with respect to the axis of the distribution shaft 2552. Further, the locking member 2553 includes a stopper piece 2553b protruding in the radial direction from a position where the locking piece 2553a is rotated about 90 degrees with respect to the eccentric direction. The tip of the stopper piece 2553b of the locking member 2553 is positioned in the rotation restricting portion 2554c formed in a U shape of the unit base 2554 in the assembled state, and the rotation restricting portion 2554c The rotation range of the distribution shaft 2552 (distribution valve 2551) can be regulated by contacting the end portion in the circumferential direction. As shown in the figure, the stopper piece 2553b of the locking member 2553 is formed so as to become thinner toward the tip.

The distribution valve 2551 and the locking member 2553 of the distribution unit 2550 are such that the position of the locking piece 2553a of the locking member 2553 is approximately abbreviated when the valve portion 2551b of the distribution valve 2551 stands up substantially vertically. They are fixed to the front end and the rear end of the distribution shaft 2552 in a non-rotatable state so as to be in a vertically hanging state, respectively.

The unit base 2554 of the distribution unit 2550 is formed on the lower side of the cylindrical cylindrical shaft portion 2554a extending in the front-rear direction through which the distribution shaft 2552 is inserted and the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a, and penetrates in the front-rear direction and in the left-right direction. It is mainly provided with a slit 2554b for sliding the distribution slider 2555 in the left-right direction in the shape of a long hole extending to. In the unit base 2554, bearing bushes 2559 are inserted at both ends of the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a, and the distribution shaft 2552 can be rotatably supported via the bearing bush 2559. There is. Further, two slits 2554b of the unit base 2554 are formed at the same height and separated in the left-right direction.

Further, the unit base 2554 is arranged at a position separated from the shaft core of the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a (distribution shaft 2552) in the radial direction by a predetermined amount, and extends rearward and has a substantially U-shape with the shaft core side open. It is provided with the formed rotation restricting portion 2554c (see FIG. 138 and the like). In the state where the distribution unit 2550 is assembled, the stopper piece 2553b of the locking member 2553 is inserted and arranged inside the U-shaped shape of the rotation restricting portion 2554c, and the rotation restricting portion 2554c is arranged. When the stopper piece 2553b comes into contact with the end portion of the distribution shaft 2552 in the circumferential direction centered on the axis, the rotation range of the locking member 2553 (distribution valve 2551) is restricted via the stopper piece 2553b. Can be done.

Further, the unit base 2554 includes a cylindrical support cylinder portion 2554d that extends forward shorter than the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a on the upper side of the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a. The support cylinder portion 2554d of the unit base 2554 is for rotatably supporting the support pin 2566 described later by the bearing bushes 2559 inserted at both ends. The unit base 2554 of the distribution unit 2550 is attached to the rear side of the center base 2520.

The distribution slider 2555 of the distribution unit 2550 is provided with a strip-shaped main body portion 2555c extending from the vertical center of the groove 2555b extending in the vertical direction to one side in the horizontal direction (left side in the front view). The locking piece 2555a extends rearward from a predetermined position of 2555c. Further, the distribution slider 2555 includes a cylindrical protrusion 2555d that projects forward from the front surface of the main body portion 2555c extending in the left-right direction and is inserted into each of the two slits 2554b in the unit base 2554 in a slidable state. .. The distribution slider 2555 is supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction between a predetermined slide range guided by the slit 2554b by inserting the two protrusions 2555d into the two slits 2554b of the unit base 2554, respectively. It has become.

The two protrusions 2555d of the distribution slider 2555 penetrate the slit 2554b and extend to the front side of the unit base 2554, and the tips of the protrusions 2555d extending to the front surface of the unit base 2554 are extended to each other. By attaching the receiving plate 2560 so as to be connected, the slit 2554b is prevented from coming off.

Further, the distribution slider 2555 sandwiches a plate-shaped detection piece 2555e extending downward from the lower surface between the locking piece 2555a and the groove 2555b in the main body 2555c and the locking piece 2555a in the main body 2555c. It is provided with a rack gear 2555f formed on the upper surface opposite to the 2555b. The detection piece 2555e of the distribution slider 2555 is detected by the distribution valve position detection sensor 2561 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2554, and when the detection piece 2555e is detected, the distribution slider 2555 It is possible to detect the direction in which the game ball can be distributed by the distribution valve 2551 via the slide position. Further, the rack gear 2555f of the distribution slider 2555 is adapted to mesh with the first gear portion 2562a of the first transmission gear 2562 described later, and the movement of the distribution slider 2555 can be distributed to the movable upper decorative body 2565 or distribution. It can be moved by transmitting it to the movable lower decorative body 2567.

Further, the distribution unit 2550 is rotatably supported at a position above the distribution slider 2555 on the rear side of the unit base 2554, and has a fan-shaped first gear portion 2562a that meshes with the rack gear 2555f of the distribution slider 2555, and The unit base meshes with the first transmission gear 2562 having a spur gear-shaped second gear portion 2562b having a diameter smaller than that of the first gear portion 2562a and being integrally rotatable, and the second gear portion 2562b of the first transmission gear 2562. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 2563 rotatably supported on the rear side of the 2554, a driven gear portion 2564a that meshes with the second transmission gear 2563, and a driven gear portion 2564a are formed on the outer periphery and in the unit base 2554. A cylindrical insertion portion 2564b that is rotatably inserted around the outer circumference of the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a, an operating piece 2564c that extends radially upward from the insertion portion 2564b, and an operating piece 2564c that is formed at the tip of the operating piece 2564c and is formed in the front-rear direction. It includes a long hole-shaped transmission slit 2564d that penetrates and extends in the radial direction, and a driven transmission member 2564 having two attachment portions 2564e that extend downward in the radial direction from the insertion portion 2564b.

Further, the distribution unit 2550 is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 2564d of the driven transmission member 2564 and is arranged at a different position above the sliding pin 2565a and the sliding pin 2565a that extend backward long and backward. A distribution movable upper decorative body 2565 having an extended shaft fixing portion 2565b, which is arranged between the distribution valve 2551 and the unit base 2554 and three-dimensionally imitating a part of a predetermined character, and a distribution movable upper The tip side is fixed to the shaft fixing portion 2565b of the decorative body 2565, and the support pin 2566 is inserted into the support cylinder portion 2554d of the unit base 2554 and rotatably supported via the bearing bush 2559, and the distribution is movable. It is arranged on the lower side of the decorative body 2565, and the mounting portion 2564e of the driven transmission member 2564 is mounted on the rear side, and the distribution movable in a predetermined character is a distribution movable that three-dimensionally imitates a part different from the decorative body 2565. It is equipped with a lower decorative body 2567.

Further, the distribution unit 2550 has a plurality of openings 2568a through which the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a and the support cylinder portion 2554d of the unit base 2554 can pass, and the outer shape is a three-dimensional predetermined shape and a part thereof is translucent. The distribution back decoration body 2568 and the distribution back decoration body 2568, which are formed to have and are attached to the front side of the unit base 2554 behind the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 and the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567, and the distribution back decoration body. A distribution decoration substrate 2569, which is arranged between the 2568 and the unit base 2554 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface to illuminate the distribution back decoration body 2568, and a distribution drive attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2554. It includes a motor 2558, a distribution valve position detection sensor 2561, and a distribution relay board 2570 that relays the connection between the distribution detection sensor 2580 and the panel relay board 3040.

The first transmission gear 2562 and the second transmission gear 2563 of the distribution unit 2550 are rotatably supported by a columnar shaft portion extending rearward from the rear surface of the unit base 2554, and the first transmission gear 2562. The second gear portion 2562b and the second transmission gear 2563 are housed in a recess recessed forward from the rear surface side of the unit base 2554. An opening penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the recess of the unit base 2554 that accommodates the second transmission gear 2563 and the like, and a part of the second transmission gear 2563 is formed on the front side of the unit base 2554 through this opening. It is designed to be exposed to. The second transmission gear 2563 is adapted to mesh with the driven gear portion 2564a of the driven transmission member 2564 rotatably supported by the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a at a portion exposed to the front surface side of the unit base 2554.

In the distribution unit 2550, the distribution movable upper decorative body 2565 is three-dimensionally shaped to imitate the head of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 is formed. Is three-dimensionally shaped to imitate the arm of the same character as the decorative body 2565. As shown in the figure, the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 is modeled with a broom on the arm. In addition, the distribution back decoration body 2568 of the distribution unit 2550 has a relief shape on the front side except for the head and arms of the same character as the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 and the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567. It is formed. As a result, when viewed from the front with the distribution unit 2550 assembled, the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565, the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567, and the distribution back decoration body 2568 allow the predetermined character to have a broom. A full-body image is formed, and the full-body image of a predetermined character can be visually recognized from the player side via the transparent center base 2520 and the distribution space cover 2525.

Next, the movement of the distribution unit 2550 in the center accessory 2500 will be described. First, the movement of the distribution valve 2551 arranged in the distribution space 2530 will be described. When the link member 2557 is rotationally driven by driving the distribution drive motor 2558, the transmission pin 2557a of the link member 2557 revolves around the rotation axis of the distribution drive motor 2558 with a predetermined radius. The transmission pin 2557a of the link member 2557 is slidably inserted into the groove 2555b extending in the vertical direction of the distribution slider 2555 slidably supported in the left-right direction, and the transmission pin 2557a revolves. Since the vertical and horizontal relative positions of the transmission pin 2557a change, the transmission pin 2557a slides in the vertical direction in the groove 2555b of the distribution slider 2555 due to the rotation of the transmission pin 2557a, and at the same time, the distribution slider 2555 becomes the unit base. Guided by the slit 2554b of 2554, it slides in the left-right direction.

Then, when the distribution slider 2555 slides in the left-right direction, the locking piece 2555a of the distribution slider 2555 also slides in the left-right direction together, so that it slides in the left-right direction within the same range as the revolution diameter of the transmission pin 2557a. It has become. The locking piece 2555a of the distribution slider 2555 is formed so that the substantially center of the sliding range in the left-right direction of the locking piece 2555a is located on a vertical line passing through the axis of the distribution shaft 2552. By sliding the slider 2555 in the left-right direction, the locking piece 2555a moves to the left or right beyond the vertical line passing through the axis of the distribution shaft 2552.

In this distribution unit 2550, the lower end side of the connecting spring 2556 is locked to the locking piece 2555a of the distribution slider 2555, and the upper end of the connecting spring 2556 is fixed to the rear end of the distribution shaft 2552. It is locked to the locking piece 2553a of the member 2553, and when the distribution slider 2555 (locking piece 2555a) slides in the left-right direction, the locking piece 2553a of the locking member 2553 is distributed via the connecting spring 2556. The slider 2555 is pulled in the sliding direction, and the locking member 2553 (distribution shaft 2552) rotates. Therefore, the distribution valve 2551 fixed to the front end of the distribution shaft 2552 is also rotated by the drive of the distribution drive motor 2558.

In the distribution unit 2550, since the locking member 2553 and the distribution slider 2555 are elastically connected by the connecting spring 2556, the game ball that enters the distribution space 2530 while the distribution valve 2551 is rotating Even if it is attempted to be sandwiched between the inner wall of the distribution space 2530 and the valve portion 2551b of the distribution valve 2551, the valve portion 2551b can rotate in the direction of escaping from the game ball due to the expansion and contraction of the connecting spring 2556. ing. Therefore, even if the distribution valve 2551 is rotating and the game ball cannot enter the distribution space 2530 by the valve portion 2551b, depending on the timing at which the game ball flows down, the connecting spring 2556 may be affected by the momentum of the game ball. In addition to being able to push the valve portion 2551b away against the urging force to allow the game ball to enter the distribution space 2530, it is also possible to prevent the game ball from being pinched at the entrance of the distribution space 2530. It is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring.

In this example, when the distribution slider 2555 is slid to the left in rear view, the distribution shaft 2552 (distribution valve 2551) rotates in the counterclockwise direction in rear view (FIG. 138 (a)). ), The game ball can be distributed to the left in the front view by the distribution valve 2551 in the distribution space 2530 (see FIG. 136 (a)). On the other hand, when the distribution slider 2555 is slid to the right in rear view, the distribution shaft 2552 (distribution valve 2551) rotates clockwise in rear view (see FIG. 138 (b)) and shakes. The game ball can be distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551 in the distribution space 2530 (see FIG. 136 (b)). Further, in this example, when the distribution slider 2555 slides to the right side slide end in the rear view, the detection piece 2555e of the distribution slider 2555 is detected by the distribution valve position detection sensor 2561. ..

By the way, the locking member 2553 fixed to the rear end of the distribution shaft 2552 is provided with a stopper piece 2553b that can be brought into contact with the rotation restricting portion 2554c formed on the rear surface of the unit base 2554. The rotation range of the distribution shaft 2552 (distribution valve 2551) can be regulated by contacting the stopper piece 2553b with the circumferential end of the rotation restriction portion 2554c formed in a substantially U shape. It has become. As a result, even if the game ball comes into contact with the valve portion 2551b of the distribution valve 2551, it is possible to prevent the valve portion 2551b from rotating downward, and the distribution valve 2551 ensures that the game ball is rotated in a predetermined direction. It can be distributed to. Further, as shown in the figure, the stopper piece 2553b of the locking member 2553 is formed so as to become thinner toward the tip end, and can exert an elastic force when it comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 2554c. The impact generated by the game ball coming into contact with the valve portion 2551b of the distribution valve 2551 can be mitigated by the elastic force of the stopper piece 2553b, and the valve portion 2551b and the like can be prevented from being damaged by the impact. It has become like.

Next, the movements of the distribution movable upper decorative body 2565 and the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 arranged on the rear side of the distribution space 2530 will be described. As described above, the distribution unit 2550 is capable of sliding the distribution slider 2555 in the left-right direction by rotationally driving the distribution drive motor 2558. The distribution unit 2550 of this example is provided with a rack gear 2555f on the distribution slider 2555 on the tip side of the locking piece 2555a, and the first gear portion meshed with the rack gear 2555f by sliding the distribution slider 2555 in the left-right direction. The first transmission gear 2562 having 2562a is designed to rotate.

When the first transmission gear 2562 rotates, the second transmission gear 2563 that meshes with the second gear portion 2562b of the first transmission gear 2562 rotates in the opposite direction, and further, the driven gear that meshes with the second transmission gear 25563. The driven transmission member 2564 having the portion 2564a rotates in the same direction as the first transmission gear 252. A distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 is attached to the driven transmission member 2564 on the front side so that the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 rotates in the same direction as the driven transmission member 2564 and the first transmission gear 2562. It has become.

On the other hand, the elongated hole-shaped transmission slit 2564d extending in the radial direction of the driven transmission member 2564 is rotatably supported by the support cylinder portion 2554d of the unit base 2554 via the support pin 2566. A sliding pin 2565a extending rearward in the upper decorative body 2565 is slidably inserted. The sliding pin 2565a of the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 is arranged between the rotation shaft core of the driven transmission member 2564 and the rotation shaft core of the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565, and is arranged between the rotation shaft core of the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565. Is rotated with the transmission slit 2564d, the upper decorative body 2565 for distribution movement is rotated in the direction opposite to that of the driven transmission member 2564 via the support pin 2566 inserted in the transmission slit 2564d.

Therefore, when the distribution drive motor 2558 of the distribution unit 2550 is rotationally driven and the distribution slider 2555 is slid in the left-right direction, the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 and the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 move in different directions. It can be rotated. As a result, when viewed from the front, the predetermined character can show the player a movement (movable effect) of swinging a broom while tilting his head.

In this example, when the distribution slider 2555 is slid to the left in rear view, the distribution movable upper decorative body 2565 rotates clockwise in the rear view and the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 is rearward. It is designed to rotate counterclockwise visually (see FIG. 139 (a)). Further, when the distribution slider 2555 is slid to the right in the rear view, the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the rear view, and the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 watches in the rear view. It is designed to rotate in a clockwise direction (see FIG. 139 (b)).

Further, in the distribution unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500, in the state where the distribution valve 2551 distributes the game ball to the left in the front view, the distribution movable upper decorative body 2565 stands up substantially straight. In addition, the broom is in a state where the broom is located behind the distribution detection sensor 2580L on the left side (see FIG. 136 (a)). On the other hand, in the state where the distribution valve 2551 distributes the game ball to the right in the front view, the distribution movable upper decorative body 2565 is in a state of being tilted to the right, and the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 is The broom is located behind the distribution detection sensor 2580R on the right side (see FIG. 136 (b)). As a result, not only the direction of the rotation position of the valve portion 2551b in the distribution valve 2551, but also the direction in which the game ball is distributed by the broom of the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 arranged on the rear side of the distribution space 2530. In addition to being able to be recognized by the player, it is also possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball is distributed by the broom of the movable lower decorative body 2567. ..

By the way, when the distribution valve 2551 is in the embodiment shown in FIG. 136 (b), the game ball is distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551. In this way, when the game ball is distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551, the game ball does not immediately pass through the right gate 2575R and is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R. An irregular delay unit 2585 is provided between the distribution unit 2550 and the distribution detection sensor 2580R (see FIGS. 136, 140 and 137). In this irregular delay unit 2585, the time until the game ball distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551 passes through the right gate 2575R, that is, the time until it is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R is not constant. As such, it delays irregularly.

The irregular delay unit 2585 has an upper irregular delay producing means 2586 and a lower irregular delay producing means 2587. As can be seen from FIG. 137, the upper irregular delay creating means 2586 and the lower irregular delay creating means 2587 have holes 2586a and 2587a having a size through which the game ball can pass, respectively. Further, the lower irregular delay creating means 2587 allows the game ball to roll around the hole 2587a.

As can be seen with reference to FIGS. 136 and 140, the axes passing through the centers of the holes 2586a of the upper irregular delay creating means 2586 and the holes 2587a of the lower irregular delay creating means 2587 are both parallel to each other. Although there is, it is not on the same axis and is shifted in the horizontal direction. As described above, since the axis of the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay producing means 2586 and the axis of the hole 2587a of the lower irregular delay producing means 2587 are deviated from each other, the distribution valve 2551 distributes the holes 2551 to the right in the front view. Even if the game ball passes through the upper irregular delay producing means 2586, it does not immediately pass through the lower irregular delay producing means 2587, but rolls around the hole 2587a of the lower irregular delay producing means 2587. Then, when the game ball falls from the hole 2587a, the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R and is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R.

Further, the passage from the game balls distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551 to the upper irregular delay producing means 2586 is large enough to allow the game balls to flow down one by one. As can be seen from FIG. 140, the passage of the game ball distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551 and the axis of the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay creating means 2586 are deviated from each other. Can make the movement of the game ball irregular as it passes through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay producing means 2586. In this way, the game balls distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551 pass through the right gate 2575R with irregular delays at different timings each time they are distributed to the right in the front view (distribution detection). It will be detected by the sensor 2580R).

Further, the upper irregular delay creating means 2586 is provided with an irregular delay side detection sensor 2588 that detects that the game ball has passed through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay creating means 2586. As a result, when the game ball is distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551, the game ball still passes through the right gate 2575R by rolling around the hole 2587a of the lower irregular delay producing means 2587. Even if it is not (even if it is not detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), the game ball will eventually pass through the right gate 2575R and be detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R (that is, front view right by the distribution valve 2551). It is possible to detect in advance that the game balls have been distributed in the direction).

Subsequently, the movement of the game ball by the distribution unit 2550 in the distribution space 2530 in the center accessory 2500 will be described. In the distribution space 2530, the game ball is placed in the game area 1100 so that the game ball enters between the upper right side from the center in the front left-right direction of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the inner circumference of the game area 1100. By driving in, it is possible to enter through the distribution approach passage 2545. A rotatable distribution valve 2551 having a valve portion 2551b is arranged above the distribution space 2530 in which the lower end of the distribution entry passage 2545 opens, and has a constant period (for example, 3 seconds to 10 seconds). The distribution direction is changed by the valve portion 2551b by repeating rotation and stop at intervals).

In this center accessory 2500, when the valve portion 2551b of the distribution valve 2551 stands up substantially vertically (see FIG. 114 and the like), the valve portion 2551b is located at the lower end of the distribution entry passage 2545. , The game ball cannot enter the distribution space 2530 from the distribution entry passage 2545. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the distribution valve 2511 in this state, it cannot enter the distribution space 2530 and is temporarily stopped at the lower end of the distribution entry passage 2545. ..

The game ball distributed in either the left or right direction by the valve portion 2551b of the distribution valve 2551 passes through the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) arranged directly under the distributed flow path. , It is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580 (distribution detection sensor 2580L, distribution detection sensor 2589R), and it is possible to detect in which direction the game ball is actually distributed. As described above, when the game ball is distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551, the ball is distributed to the right in the front view by the irregular delay unit 258 as described above, and then the right gate 2575R is immediately distributed. Instead of passing through the right gate 2575R with a delay of a different time each time, the distribution detection sensor 2580 detects it. Then, when the game ball is distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551, the irregular delay side detection sensor 2588 sets the right in the front view prior to passing through the right gate 2575R (detection by the distribution detection sensor 2580). It is possible to detect that the distribution has been made in the direction.

In this example, the two gates 2575 (left gate 2575, right gate 2575R) are substantially at the center of the lower space 2532 in the distribution space 2530 in the vertical direction and from the center in the horizontal direction, as shown in FIG. 140 and the like. Since they are arranged apart from each other, a space through which the game ball can pass is formed between the two gates 2575 (between the left gate 2575 and the right gate 2575R) and on the outside of each of the two gates 2575 in the left-right direction. It is in a state of being. As a result, when the game ball cannot pass through the gate 2575 for some reason, the game ball can be allowed to flow down to the bottom 2533 through the side of the gate 2575 and discharged from the discharge port 2534, and within the distribution space 2530. It is possible to prevent the game ball from getting stuck and clogging the ball.

In this example, which of the two gates 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) arranged on the left and right has passed is detected, and as described later, it is executed according to the passing destination. Since the method of determining the mode of the jackpot game is different (for example, when it is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L, it is determined to be the mode of the jackpot game in which a certain amount of prize balls is paid out, and the distribution detection sensor 2580R detects it. When the prize balls are paid out, the amount of prize balls to be paid out is determined by lottery in one of a plurality of modes of the jackpot game), and the movement (position) of the valve portion 2551b of the distribution valve 2551 is desired. By measuring the driving timing of the game ball based on the position of the gate 2575 to which the privilege is given, the game ball can be passed to the desired gate 2575, making the driving operation of the game ball more enjoyable. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, in this example, when the distribution detection sensor 2580R detects that the game ball has passed through the right gate 2575R, the mode of the jackpot game is determined by a lottery (the jackpot game mode determination lottery in step S607 described later). .. At this time, the game ball distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551 does not immediately pass through the right gate 2575R (not immediately detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), and such detection is an irregular delay unit. It is irregularly delayed by 2585. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the game ball rolling around the hole 2587a of the lower irregular delay creating means 2587 prior to the jackpot game mode determination lottery, and it is possible to raise the player's mood. ..

Further, in this example, since the discharge port 2534 for discharging the game ball from the distribution space 2530 is arranged in the lower right corner of the distribution space 2530 in front view, it is distributed to the left by the distribution valve 2551. The time spent in the distribution space 2530 is different between the game ball and the game ball distributed to the right. Therefore, in the two game balls that are continuously driven into the game area 1100, the game ball that is driven first is distributed to the left by the distribution valve 2511, and the game ball that is driven later is distributed to the right by the distribution valve 2511. If two game balls are hit at a timing that allows them to be distributed, the game balls that are hit later in the distribution space 2530 will catch up with the game balls that were hit first, and the two game balls are roughly lined up. Can be discharged from the discharge port 2534 (see FIG. 140). As a result, the game balls discharged side by side from the distribution space 2530 are discharged in a state of being lined up on the upstream side of the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100. The game balls can be accepted, and more game balls can be accepted into the large winning opening 2103.

Specifically, for example, in a jackpot game in which the big winning opening 2103 can be accepted, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and closed depending on the elapsed time of the open state or the number of accepted game balls, and is predetermined. When a predetermined number of game balls are received within the time, the large winning opening 2103 is closed. In this large winning opening 2103, since there is a time lag between the time when the game ball passes through the opening of the large winning opening 2103 and the time when it is detected by the count sensor 2122, it takes a short time until the large winning opening 2103 is closed. If the game balls can be entered into the large winning opening 2103, it is possible to win more game balls than a predetermined number, but in the normal distribution of game balls, the intervals between the game balls are not so shortened, so that there are a plurality of game balls. It was difficult to get the game ball in. However, as described above, since the distribution space 2530 and the distribution valve 2551 allow the game balls to be discharged to the large winning opening 2103 side in a substantially arranged state, the two games are played at the moment when the large winning opening 2103 is closed. It is possible to allow the balls to enter the large winning opening 2103, and it is possible to win more game balls than a predetermined number.

Further, although detailed description of the center accessory 2500 is omitted, a decorative member formed in a predetermined shape to decorate the center accessory 2500 and a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are three-dimensionally formed at appropriate positions. In addition to being provided with a model body or the like, a decorative member or a decorative substrate having a plurality of LEDs is provided on the rear side of the character body so that the decorative member or the like can be appropriately luminescent. .. In the center accessory 2500, the decorative member that decorates the rear side of the stage 2510 is opaque, and the underside effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side can be seen from the player side in a normal state. There is no such thing.

Further, in the center accessory 2500 of this example, the outer circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2503 on the right side of the substantially center in the left-right direction in the front view is substantially along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 (the inner circumference of the front component 1110A). When attached to the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed along the outer circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2503 on the right side of the center accessory 2500. By hitting right, it is possible to easily hit the game ball into the distribution space 2530 via the distribution approach passage 2545, and the game ball has a high probability of hitting the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100. Is now accepted. Further, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1210, a region having a predetermined width is formed on the outer circumference on the left side of the center accessory 2500 with the inner circumference of the game area 1100. ..

[2-6. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Subsequently, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main component and viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main component and viewed from the rear. is there.

The back unit 3000 of this example is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), the front side is opened, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces the rear wall 3010a and has an opening 3010b penetrating in the front-rear direction. The formed back box 3010, the back front decoration unit 3100 arranged near the front end in the back box 3010, the back upper effect unit 3200 arranged above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and the back box 3010. The lower right production unit 3400 placed below the opening 3010b and the lower right back production unit placed between the lower back production unit 3400 and the back front decoration unit 3100 in the lower right corner of the front view inside the back box 3010. Mainly equipped with 3600.

Further, the back unit 3000 has a decorative seal 3030 attached to the lower edge of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and the front surfaces of both left and right edges, and a back surface of the back wall 3010a of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010b. The panel relay board 3040 attached to the lower right corner of the back box, the lamp drive board 3041 attached to the left side of the rear view of the opening 3010b on the rear surface of the back wall 3010a of the back box 3010, and the lamp drive board 3041 covered from the rear side of the back box 3010. The substrate cover 3042 attached to the rear surface and the motor drive substrate 3045 (see FIG. 194) are rotatably supported around an axis extending in the left-right direction at positions on both sides of the lower side of the opening 3010b in the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010. ) Is housed in a horizontally long motor drive board box 3043, and a shield plate 3044 made of a metal plate attached to the upper rear side of the back box 3010.

The panel relay board 3040 in the back unit 3000 is connected to the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4010, and the general winning opening sensor 2123, the count sensor 2122, the gate sensor 2302, which are provided in the main control board 4100 and the game board 4. This is for relaying the connection with the start port solenoid 2114, the attacker solenoid 2121, and the like.

The lamp drive board 3041 in the back unit 3000 is a decorative board 214,216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430 provided on the door frame 5 based on a control signal (command) from the peripheral control board 4010. , 432, etc., and each decorative board provided on the game board 4, 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546, 3690, 3692, etc. This is for controlling the light emission of the LED.

Further, the motor drive board 3045 in the back unit 3000 is a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 and each drive motor provided in the game board 4 based on a control signal (command) from the peripheral control board 4010. It is for controlling the drive of 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508, 3622, 3640, 3676 and the like, and the solenoids 3624 and 3660 and the like.

The back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 has a box shape with an open front side, and a substantially rectangular opening 3010b penetrating the rear wall 3010a in the front-rear direction is formed. The opening 3010b of the back box 3010 is formed to be smaller than the front view outer shape of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The back surface 3010 is formed with a flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c extending outward from the outer circumference of the front end, and the fixing portion 3010c is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220). Although detailed description will be omitted, the back box 3010 is provided with mounting holes, mounting bosses, and the like for mounting the units 3100, 3200, 3400, 3600, substrates, and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, the back box 3010 has a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d recessed on the outer periphery of the opening 3010b on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a so as to be substantially the same size as the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a rear view of the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d. The liquid crystal fixing portion 3010e formed on the left side and capable of inserting the fixed piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the liquid crystal fixing hole 3010e are formed on the opposite side (right side when viewed from the rear) of the liquid crystal inserting portion 3010d and the lock mechanism 3050. The lock mechanism mounting portion 3010f to which the is mounted is provided. In the back box 3010, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d from the rear side, and the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a in the liquid crystal insertion portion frame 3010d is a flat surface. The front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 comes into contact with each other.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided with a lock mechanism 3050 for detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010. The lock mechanism 3050 of this example is slidably attached to the lock mechanism mounting portion 3010f of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction, and when slid upward, the fixed piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is rearranged. When the insertion port that can be inserted from the side opens, the fixing piece 1902 is inserted from the insertion port, and then the lock mechanism 3050 is slid upward, the rear end of the insertion port is closed and the fixing piece 1902 cannot be removed. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked.

[2-7. Back front decoration unit]
Subsequently, the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147. FIG. 145 (a) is a perspective view of the back front decorative unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 145 (b) is a perspective view of the back front decorative unit in the back unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the back front decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 147 is an exploded perspective view of the back front decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

The back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 of this example has a predetermined logo formed on the front side in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and the overall shape of the front view is formed in a substantially L shape. , It is attached along the left side and the lower side of the front view at the front end portion in the back box 3010. The back front decoration unit 3100 is visible from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, and mainly decorates the rear side of the area in which the obstacle nails are planted in the game area 1100. doing.

The back front decoration unit 3100 is more than the back front left decoration unit 3110 arranged on the left side of the front view opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and extending in the vertical direction, and the back front left decoration unit 3110 and the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. It includes a back front lower decoration unit 3120 arranged on the lower side and extending in the left-right direction, and a function display unit 1180 attached to the lower front surface of the back front left decoration unit 3110. The back front left decoration unit 3110 and the back front lower decoration unit 3120 are logo lens members formed so that a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is three-dimensionally shaped and partially translucent. It includes 3111, 3121, a left unit base 3112 and a lower unit base 3122, which support the rear side of the logo lens members 3111, 3121 and are attached to the back box 3010.

The back front left decorative unit 3110 is arranged between the upper part of the logo lens member 3121 and the left unit base 3112, and the back front upper left decorative board 3113 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front and the back front upper left decorative board 3113. The back front left middle decorative board 3114 arranged between the logo lens member 3121 and the left unit base 3112 on the side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and the logo lens member 3121 under the back front left middle decorative board 3114. It is provided with a back front left decorative substrate 3115 which is arranged between the left unit base 3112 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The back front left decorative unit 3110 illuminates the logo lens member 3121 by appropriately emitting LEDs mounted on the back front upper left decorative substrate 3113, the back front left middle decorative substrate 3114, and the back front left decorative substrate 3115. It is designed to be able to.

The back front lower left decorative unit 3120 is arranged between the logo lens member 3121 and the lower unit base 3122 from substantially the center to the left side in the left-right direction, and the back front lower left decorative board 3123 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front and the logo. It is provided with a back front lower right decorative substrate 3124 arranged between the lens member 3121 and the lower unit base 3122 from substantially the center to the right side in the left-right direction and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The back front lower decoration unit 3120 can illuminate the logo lens member 3121 by appropriately emitting LEDs mounted on the back front lower left decorative substrate 3123 and the back front lower right decorative substrate 3124. ing.

The lower unit base 3122 of the back front lower decorative unit 3120 receives the game ball received by the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 and guided and released from the guide path 2115a of the solenoid cover 2115 on the front side. The first passage 3122a that guides downwards, and the second passage 3122b that receives the game balls received by the second starting port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 and discharged from the discharge port 2115b of the solenoid cover 2115 and guides them downwards. The ball receiving unit 3122c that receives the game ball that is received by the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 and released from the hi section 2113a of the general receiving member 2113, and the hi section 2211 that is received by the general winning opening 2201 of the front side unit 2200. It is provided with a general passage 3122d that receives the game ball released from the vehicle and guides it downward.

Further, the back front lower decoration unit 3120 has a first starting port sensor 3131 that detects the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2101 by detecting the game ball circulating in the first passage 3122a, and the second passage. The second start port sensor 3132 that detects the acceptance of the game ball into the second start port 2102 by detecting the game ball circulating in the 3122b, the game ball received by the ball receiving unit 3122c, and the general passage 3122d. It is provided with a general winning opening sensor 3233 for detecting acceptance of a game ball into the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 by detecting the game balls circulating in the above. The game ball detected by the general winning opening sensor 3133 received by the ball receiving unit 3122c is discharged downward through the general winning opening sensor 3133.

Further, the back front lower decorative unit 3120 is attached to the lower unit base 3122 at a position corresponding to the rear side of the first starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and further includes a magnetic detection sensor 3134 capable of detecting magnetism. The magnetic detection sensor 3134 can detect the magnetism acting in the vicinity of the attacker unit 2100, and can detect fraudulent acts using a magnet or the like. In this example, the magnetic detection sensor 3134 is also provided at the position on the upper rear side of the function display unit 1180 in the back front left decoration unit 3110, and the gate portion 2301 of the gate unit 2300 and the center accessory 2500 are provided. It is possible to detect the magnetism acting near the warp entrance 2504 and prevent fraudulent activity.

Further, the back front lower decorative unit 3120 is attached to the front side of the lower unit base 3122, and appropriately closes the front side of the first passage 3122a, the second passage 3122b, and the general passage 3122d to prevent the game ball from falling off. A passage cover 3125 is provided.

The function display unit 1180 in the back front decoration unit 3100 has a shallow box-shaped function display front cover whose outer shape is formed to resemble a building, has a plurality of through holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is open. A function display board 1191 inserted into the function display front cover from the rear side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a function display rear cover that covers the rear surface of the function display board 1191 and is attached to the rear side of the function display front cover. It has. Each LED mounted on the function display board 1191 faces the player side through each through hole of the function display front cover 3141.

Each LED mounted on the front surface of the function display board 1191 in the function display unit 1180 has a game status display 1183, a first special symbol storage display 1184, a first special symbol display 1185, and a second special, as described above. It is a symbol display 1186, a second special symbol storage display 1187, a normal symbol storage display 1188, a normal symbol display 1189, and a round display 1190.

Specifically, the game state display 1183 is composed of one LED, and is for displaying a game state that changes when a game ball is driven into the game area 1100. Further, the first special symbol storage display 1184 is composed of two LEDs and is for displaying the number of holdes related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2101. The first special symbol display 1185 is composed of eight LEDs and is for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2101 as the first special symbol. Further, the second special symbol display 1186 is composed of eight LEDs and is for displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2102 as the second special symbol. Further, the second special symbol storage display 1187 is composed of two LEDs and is for displaying the number of holdes related to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2102.

Further, the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is composed of four LEDs and is for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the gate portion 2301 by the game ball. Further, the ordinary symbol display 1189 is for displaying the result of the ordinary lottery, which is composed of one LED and is drawn by passing the game ball through the gate portion 2301, as the ordinary symbol. Further, the round display 1190 is composed of two LEDs and is for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening 2103 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit". Is.

[2-8. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Subsequently, the back-up effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 148 to 162. FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up effect unit disassembled for each main unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up effect unit disassembled for each main unit and viewed afterwards. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the back-up center unit of the back-up effect unit as viewed from the front, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the back-up center unit of the back-up effect unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper center unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper center unit viewed from behind the military officer Ishite. Further, FIG. 156 is an explanatory view showing attachment / detachment of the second elevating decoration body in the back-up center unit. Further, FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up side unit in the back-up effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 158 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up side unit in the back-up effect unit disassembled and viewed afterwards. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 159 is a front view for explaining the movement of the back-up center unit in the back-up effect unit, FIG. 160 is a front view for explaining the movement of the back-up center unit following FIG. 159, and FIG. 161 is a front view for explaining the movement of the back-up center unit. It is a front view explaining the movement of the back upper center unit which follows. Further, FIG. 162 is a front view illustrating the movement of the back-up side unit in the back-up effect unit.

The back-up effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached between the back-front effect unit 3100 in the back box 3010 and the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010 above the opening 3010b. The back-up effect unit 3200 includes a back-up center unit 3210 arranged substantially in the center in the left-right direction, a back-up side unit 3300 arranged on both left and right sides of the back-up center unit 3210, a back-up center unit 3210, and a back-up center unit 3210. It includes a back-up lens member 3202 that is attached so as to project forward from the front surface of the back-up side unit 3300.

Further, although the details of the back-up effect unit 3200 will be described later, the back-up center unit 3210 is capable of sliding (elevating) to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and displaying a predetermined effect image. A liquid crystal display device 3252 is provided.

First, the back-up center unit 3210 in the back-up effect unit 3200 will be described. The back-up center unit 3210 of this example is supported so as to be separated from the back-up center base 3212 mounted at a predetermined position in the back box 3010 in the left-right direction and extended in the up-down direction on the front side of the back-up center base 3212. A pair of columnar first shafts 3214, a plate-shaped main body portion 3216a that is vertically supported by the pair of first shafts 3214, a mounting portion 3216b extending forward from both left and right ends of the main body portion 3216a, and a rear surface. A first slide base 3216 having rack gears 3216c extending in the vertical direction is provided at both left and right ends of the above.

Further, the back upper center unit 3210 is attached to the attachment portion 3216b of the first slide base 3216, and is a first elevating decorative body 3218 that three-dimensionally imitates a part of the face (above the upper jaw) of a predetermined character. With a pair of pinion gears 3220 arranged on the rear side of the back upper center base 3212 and meshing with the rack gear 3216c of the first slide base 3216 and supported on the rear side of the back upper center base 3212 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction. , A pair of transmission gears 3222 that mesh with each pinion gear 3220, a connecting shaft 3224 that integrally rotatably connects each transmission gear 3222, and a drive gear 3226 that meshes with one of the transmission gears 3222 (on the right side in front view). , A back-up first drive motor 3228 that rotationally drives the drive gear 3226.

Further, the back-up center unit 3210 includes a center cover 3230 attached to the rear side of the back-up center base 3212. A pair of pinion gears 3220 and a connecting shaft 3224 are rotatably supported on the center cover 3230, respectively. Further, a back-up first drive motor 3228 is attached to the rear surface of the back-up center cover 3230 via a motor bracket 3232.

Further, the back-up center unit 3210 is attached to the back-up second drive motor 3234 and the back-up second drive motor 3234, which are attached to the rear surface of the center cover 3230 so that the rotation shaft projects to the front surface of the center cover 3230. The transmission gear portion 3238b, which rotates integrally with the fixed drive gear 3236, the driven gear portion 3238a that meshes with the drive gear 3236, and the driven gear portion 3238a, and has a larger diameter than the driven gear portion 3238a and has gear teeth arranged on the outer periphery. , And a first connecting pin 3238c that protrudes forward from a position slightly inside the transmission gear portion 3238b, around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the center cover 3230 between the center cover 3230 and the back-up center base 3212. The first gear member 3238 rotatably supported and the transmission gear portion 3238b of the first gear member 3238 mesh with each other and have the same diameter as the transmission gear portion 3238b, and a plurality of gear teeth are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The second gear has a second connecting pin 3240b slightly inside the operating gear portion 3240a and protruding forward from a position having the same radius as the rotation radius of the first connecting pin 3238c and is rotatably supported by the center cover 3230. It includes a member 3240 and.

The first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240 in the back-up center unit 3210 are rotatably supported at substantially the same height, and the transmission gear is located at a position substantially center in the left-right direction of the back-up center unit 3210. The portion 3238b and the operating gear portion 3240a are arranged and supported by the center cover 3230 so as to mesh with each other. Further, in the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240, the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b pass through the center of the rotation centers of the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240, respectively. The transmission gear portion 3238b and the operating gear portion 3240a are meshed so as to be symmetrically positioned with respect to the line.

Further, in the back-up center unit 3210, the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b of the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240 are slidably inserted and penetrated in the front-rear direction and extended in the left-right direction. A drive slider 3242 having a pair of slits 3242a and slidably supported in the vertical direction between the back upper center base 3212 and the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240, and the left and right ends of the drive slide 3242. It is provided with a slide support member 3244 that slidably supports each of them in cooperation with the back-up center base 3212.

Further, the back-up center unit 3210 is separated in the left-right direction and extends in the up-down direction at a position on the front surface of the back-up center unit 3210 and in front of the first slide base 3216 supported by the first shaft 3214 so as to be able to move up and down. A pair of second shafts 3246 supported in such a manner, a plate-shaped second slide base 3248 supported up and down by a pair of second shafts 3246, and a detachably supported front side of the second slide base 3248. The second elevating decoration 3250 and the second elevating decoration 3250, which are arranged behind the first elevating decoration 3218 and three-dimensionally imitate different parts (lower jaw) on the face of the same character as the first elevating decoration 3218. A second liquid crystal display device 3252 attached to the decorative body 3250 and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image toward the front side, and a back upper center decorative member attached to the upper front center of the back upper center base 3212 to imitate a rotating light. It includes a 3254 and a shaft retainer 3256 that is attached to the upper front surface of the back-up center base 3212 and supports the upper ends of the first shaft 3214 and the second shaft 3246.

Further, the back-up center unit 3210 has a plurality of gear teeth arranged in a row on the outer periphery of the fan-shaped front end and meshes with the driven gear portion 3238a of the first gear member 3238 so that the center cover 3230 can rotate to a predetermined position on the front surface of the center cover 3230. It includes an assist gear 3258 that is supported, and an assist spring 3260 that urges the assist gear 3258 to rotate in a direction in which the drive slider 3242 rises via the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240. ..

The back-up center base 3212 in the back-up center unit 3210 has a shaft holding portion 3212a that holds the lower ends of the first shaft 3214 and the second shaft 3246 on the front side, and a shaft presser that holds the upper ends of the first shaft 3214 and the second shaft 3246. It is arranged at a position corresponding to the shaft support portion 3212b to which the shaft retainer 3256 is attached while cooperating with the 3256 and the rack gear 3216c of the first slide base 3216 which is supported up and down by the first shaft 3214 and is arranged in the front-rear direction. It includes a penetrating opening 3212c and a notch 3212d arranged at the center in the left-right direction and notched in a rectangular shape from the lower end upward.

In the back-up center base 3212, the rack gear 3216c of the first slide base 3216 faces rearward from the opening 3212c, and the pinion gear 3220 meshes with the rack gear 3216c through the opening 3212c. Further, the back-up center base 3212 has a second slide base 3248 arranged on the front side and supported by the second shaft 3246 so as to be attached to the elevating slider 3242 arranged on the rear side through the notch 3212d. ing.

The first slide base 3216 in the back-up center unit 3210 includes a detection piece 3216d extending upward from the upper end of the main body 3216a in addition to the main body 3216a, the mounting portion 3216b, and the rack gear 3216c. The detection piece 3216d of the first slide base 3216 is detected by the first elevating detection sensor 3262 attached to the back upper center base 3212, so that the elevating position of the first slide base 3216 (first elevating decoration body 3218) (Ascending position) can be detected.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first elevating decoration body 3218 in the back-up center unit 3210 is formed so that the member forming the front side has translucency, and a plurality of LEDs are internally formed on the front side. It is equipped with a mounted back, middle, and front decorative board. As a result, the first elevating decoration body can be light-emittingly decorated by appropriately emitting the LED of the back-up, middle-front decoration substrate.

Further, the elevating slider 3242 in the back-up center unit 3210 includes a detection piece 3242b extending upward from a predetermined position on the upper side, and the detection piece 3242b is attached to a predetermined position on the back-up center base 3212. By being detected by the elevating detection sensor 3264, it is possible to detect the elevating position (elevation position) of the elevating slider 3242 (second elevating decorative body 3254).

Further, as shown in FIG. 156, the second slide base 3248 in the back-up center unit 3210 has a plate-shaped fixed piece 3248a extending outward in the left-right direction from both left and right ends and arranged apart in the up-down direction, and left and right. It is provided with a fixing hole 3248b formed at a substantially central lower part in the direction and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a locking hole 3248c arranged adjacent to the fixing hole 3248b and penetrating in the front-rear direction. In the second slide base 3248, four fixing pieces 3248a are inserted into the fixing grooves 3250a formed on the rear surface of the second elevating decoration body 3250, respectively, and the second elevating and lowering pieces 3248b are inserted into the fixing holes 3248b. The fixing claw 3250b of the decorative body 3250 is inserted from above, and the second elevating decorative body 3250 can be suspended and supported by the fixing piece 3248a and the fixing hole 3248b. Further, in the second slide base 3248, the locking claw 3250c of the second elevating decoration body 3250 is elastically inserted into the locking hole 3248c. In the back-up center unit 3210, the locking claw 3250c was inserted into the locking hole 3248c to prevent the second elevating decoration 3250 from moving relatively upward with respect to the second slide base 3248. The second slide base 3248 and the second elevating decoration 3250 are inseparable from each other (locked state).

Further, as shown in the figure, the second elevating decorative body 3250 in the back-up center unit 3210 has a shape in which the front view imitates the mouth of a predetermined character, and the second liquid crystal so as to face the mouth. A display device 3252 is attached. Further, the second elevating decorative body 3250 has a fixing groove 3250a into which the fixing piece 3248a of the second slide base 3248 can be inserted and a fixing claw 3250b which can be inserted into the fixing hole 3248b of the second slide base 3248 from above on the rear surface side. And a locking claw 3250c that can be elastically inserted and locked from the rear side into the locking hole 3248c of the second slide base 3248. The fixing groove 3250a of the second elevating decoration body 3250 is formed in a substantially L-shaped groove in a side view that rises upward from the bottom of the opening opened rearward, and is fixed in the fixing groove 3250a. When the fixed piece 3248a is relatively moved upward after the piece 3248a is inserted, the fixed piece 3248a is prevented from coming out rearward. When the fixing piece 3248a cannot be pulled out from the fixing groove 3250a to the rear, the locking claw 3250c is elastically inserted into the locking hole 3248c, and the locking claw is inserted into the locking hole 3248c. By inserting the 3250c, the second slide base 3248 is prevented from moving relatively downward with respect to the second elevating decoration body 3250. As a result, the second slide base 3248 and the second elevating decoration body 3250 can be inseparably separated from each other (locked state), and the locking claw 3250c can be released to release the second elevating decoration body. When the second slide base is moved downward relative to the 3250, the fixing piece 3248a comes out rearward from the fixing groove 3250a, and the second elevating decoration 3250 and the second slide base 3248 are separated from each other. be able to. That is, the second elevating decorative body 3250 can be detachably supported with respect to the second slide base 3248.

Further, although not shown, the second elevating decorative body 3250 is provided with a back upper, middle and rear decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface on the outside of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 inside. The upper, middle, and rear decorative substrates allow the second elevating decorative body 3250 to be light-emitting decorated.

The back-up center decorative member 3254 in the back-up center unit 3210 has a front view shape that imitates a revolving light. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back-up center decorative member 3254 has a surface member formed in a shape imitating a rotating light and having translucency, and the back-up center base 3212 by closing the rear opening of the surface member. A base member to be attached, a reflector arranged between the base member and the surface member and inclined in a conical shape so as to be located rearward as it goes downward, and a reflector having a mirror-like front surface, and arranged below the reflector. It is provided with a back-up, middle-upper, and decorative substrate in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted in an arc shape upward. The back-up center decorative member 3254 is adapted so that the light from the LED mounted upward on the back-up middle-upper decorative substrate is reflected forward by the reflector. Further, the back-up center decoration member 3254 can perform light-emitting decoration as if the light is swirling in the surface member by sequentially emitting the LEDs arranged in a circular arc shape. It is possible to make a light emitting decoration similar to a revolving light.

Further, the back upper center unit 3210 is attached to the upper left and right corners on the front surface of the center cover 3230 and attached to the back upper middle side decorative substrate 3266 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the rear side of the center cover 3230. Back-up first drive motor 3228, back-up second drive motor 3234, back-up middle side decorative board 3266, back-up middle front decorative board of first elevating decoration 3218, and back-up middle-rear of second elevating decoration 3250 The back-up relay board 3268 for relaying the connection between the decorative board and the like, the motor drive board and the lamp drive board, and the second liquid crystal relay board 3270 for relaying the connection between the second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the peripheral control board 4010. And have.

Next, the back-up side unit 3300 in the back-up effect unit 3200 will be described. The back upper side unit 3300 of this example is configured substantially symmetrically, and will be described with the same reference numerals. The back upper side unit 3300 has a shallow box shape with the front side open and mounted inside the back box 3010, and the back upper side base 3302 so that the rotation axis protrudes to the front side of the back upper side base 3302. The back upper side drive motor 3304 (3304L, 3304R) mounted on the rear side, the spur gear-shaped drive gear 3306 fixed to the rotating shaft of the back upper side drive motor 3304, and the large diameter that meshes with the drive gear 3306. A transmission gear member 3308a having a driven gear portion 3308a and a transmission pin 3308b projecting forward from a position slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the driven gear portion 3308a and rotatably supported on the front side of the back upper side base 3302. , Is equipped.

Further, in the back upper side unit 3300, the transmission pin 3308b of the transmission gear member 3308 is slidably inserted, and the guide groove 3310a and the guide groove 3310a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in a predetermined direction are formed and the guide groove is formed. A drive link member 3310 having a plate-shaped working piece 3310b extending in the extending direction of the 3310a and a disk-shaped base 3310c formed on one end side of the working piece 3310b, and fixed to the front surface of the base 3310c of the drive link member 3310. The cylindrical shaft portion 3312a, the arm portion 3312b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the shaft portion 3312a from the tip of the shaft portion 3312a, and the arm portion 3312b formed three-dimensionally in a predetermined shape, and the connecting portion formed at the tip of the arm portion 3312b. The first movable decorative body 3312 having the 3312c and the shaft portion 3312a of the first movable decorative body 3312 are rotatably supported, and the back upper side base 3302 is arranged between the first movable decorative body 3312 and the drive link member 3310. A decorative cover 3314, which covers the front surface of the vehicle, is provided.

Further, the back upper side unit 3300 is rotatably supported around an axis whose one end side extends in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position on the front surface of the decorative cover 3314, and the other end side extends by a predetermined amount in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. The rod-shaped arm member 3316 and the base end are rotatably supported on the other end side of the arm member 3316 and rotatably connected to the connecting portion 3312c of the first movable decorative body 3312 at a portion on the way to the tip. A second movable decorative body 3318 whose outer shape is formed into a three-dimensional predetermined shape, and a back upper side upper decorative substrate arranged between the decorative cover 3314 and the back upper side base 3302 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. It includes a 3320 and a decorative substrate 3322 on the back upper side and lower side.

The drive link member 3310 of the back upper side unit 3300 is rotatably supported by the decorative cover 3314 via the shaft portion 3312a of the first movable decorative body 3312. The drive link member 3310 includes a detection piece 3310d extending outward from a predetermined position of the working piece 3310b, and the detection piece 3310d is attached to the back upper side base 3302 to be attached to the back upper side rotation detection sensor 3324. The rotation position of the first movable decoration body 3312 and the second movable decoration body 3318 can be detected via the drive link member 3310.

In the back upper side unit 3300, the first movable decorative body 3312 is formed in a shape that three-dimensionally imitates the forearm of a predetermined character, and the second movable decorative body 3318 is used as a nozzle of a household vacuum cleaner. A hand of a predetermined character is modeled at a portion connected to the connecting portion 3312c of the first movable decorative body 3312 while imitating, and the nozzle of the vacuum cleaner is formed by the first movable decorative body 3312 and the second movable decorative body 3318. An arm with a sword is formed. The arm member 3316 is formed in a shape that imitates a hose of a vacuum cleaner.

Further, although detailed illustration of the first movable decorative body 3312 of the back upper side unit 3300 is omitted, the back upper side first decoration in which the surface member has translucency and a plurality of LEDs are mounted inside. A substrate is provided so that the first movable decorative body 3312 can be appropriately luminescent and decorated. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the second movable decorative body 3318 is provided with a back upper side second decorative substrate in which a surface member has translucency and a plurality of LEDs are mounted therein. , The second movable decorative body 3318 can be appropriately luminescent and decorated.

Next, the movement of the back-up effect unit 3200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 159, the back-up effect unit 3200 of this example is in the ascending position where the first evacuation decoration body 3218 and the second evacuation decoration body 3252 in the back-up center unit 3210 are the ascending ends, respectively, in a normal state. It is located in the evacuation position where the first movable decorative body 3312 and the second movable decorative body 3318 arranged on the left and right sides of the back upper side unit 3300 are separated from each other and their arms are open. ing. In this normal state, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 provided on the second elevating decoration 3250 is partially visible from the lower side of the first elevating decoration 3218.

Further, in detail, in this normal state, the pinion gear 3220 is meshed with the pinion gear 3220 near the lower end of the rack gear 3216c extending in the vertical direction in the first slide base 3216 of the back-up center unit 3210. Further, the first gear member 3238 and the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b of the second gear member 3240 in the back-up center unit 3210 are separated from each other from the substantially rising end (top dead center) in the revolution trajectory. The positions are slightly rotated, respectively, and the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b are in contact with the outer end of the slit 3242a in the drive slider 3242, respectively. As a result, due to the load of the second elevating decoration body 3250 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, a downward force acts on the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b via the second slide base 3248 and the drive slider 3242. Therefore, even if the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b try to rotate in the direction away from each other, the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b are in contact with the outer end of the slit 3242a. The first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b cannot move in the direction away from each other, and the state in which the revolution of the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b is stopped is maintained, and the second drive on the back side is maintained. No load is applied to the motor 3228.

On the other hand, in the normal state of the back upper side unit 3300, the transmission pin 3308b of the transmission gear member 3308 that rotates the drive link member 3310 extends in the direction perpendicular to the axis extending the guide groove 3310a, and the transmission gear member 3308 rotates. It is located on the rotation center side of the drive link member 3310 with respect to the axis line passing through the shaft core, and is in contact with the base end side end portion of the guide groove 3310a. As a result, due to the load applied to the connecting portion 3312c side of the first movable decorative body 3312, a force for moving the connecting portion 3312c relatively downward acts on the first movable decorative body 3312, so that the drive link member Even if a force for rotating the working piece 3310b of 3310 acts toward the center of rotation of the transmission gear member 3308 and a force for revolving the transmission pin 3308b of the transmission gear member 3308 acts due to the force, transmission is performed. Since the pin 3308b is in contact with the base end side end of the guide groove 3310a, the transmission pin 3308b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the drive link member 3310 (first movable decorative body 3312) is prevented. The normal state is maintained. As a result, under normal conditions, the back upper side drive motor 3304 is not loaded.

From this normal state, when the first gear member 3238 is rotationally driven so as to rotate clockwise in the front view by the back upper second drive motor 3234 of the back upper center unit 3210, the first gear member 3238 The first connecting pin 3238c starts revolving in the clockwise direction in front view, and the second connecting pin 3240b of the second gear member 3240 rotates in the counterclockwise direction. As the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b revolve and their relative positions change with each other, the drive slider 3242 slides in the slit 3242a, and at the same time, the position of the drive slider 3242 in the vertical direction is changed. It will change. In this example, the drive slider 3242 (second elevating decoration 3250) slightly rises from the rising position until the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b reach the top dead center, and when the top dead center is exceeded. The drive slider 3242 will be lowered.

Then, when the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b reach the bottom dead center, the drive slider 3242 (second elevating decoration 3250) is located at the lowest lowered position, and the back-up second drive motor 3234 is located. Stop the rotary drive of. In the state where the second elevating decoration body 3250 is located in the descending position, as shown in FIG. 160, the head of a predetermined character composed of the first elevating decoration body 3218 and the second elevating decoration body 3250 has its mouth. Is wide open, and the entire second liquid crystal display device 3250 can be seen from the inside of the mouth to the player side.

When the drive gear 3226 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction by the back-up first drive motor 3228 while the second elevating decoration body 3250 of the back-up center unit 3210 is positioned in the descending position, the front view is engaged with the drive gear 3226. As the transmission gear 3222 on the right side rotates, the transmission gear 3222 on the opposite side also rotates in the same direction via the connecting shaft 3224, and the pinion gears 3220 meshed with each transmission gear 3222 rotate and each pinion gear 3220. The rack gear 3216c meshed with the first slide base 3216 (first elevating decorative body 3218) slides downward from the ascending position. In this first slide base 3216, since the rack gears 3216c separated to the left and right simultaneously drive up and down, the first slide base 3216 slides smoothly without rattling.

Then, when the first slide base 3216 reaches the descending end, the back-up first drive motor 3228 is stopped, and the first elevating decoration body 3218 is in the descending position. In this state, the relative positional relationship between the first elevating decoration body 3218 and the second elevating decoration body 3250 is substantially the same as in the normal state, and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 faces small from the mouth. It becomes. On the other hand, on the upper side of the first elevating decorative body 3218, as shown in FIG. 161, the back upper center decorative member 3254 can be visually recognized from the player side, and in this state, the back upper center decorative member 3254. By appropriately emitting the LED of the Nakagami decorative substrate, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect like a revolving light.

In order to return to the normal state (state of the ascending position), the first elevating decorative body 3218 and the second elevating decorative body 3250 can be returned to the ascending position by performing the drive opposite to the above. it can. Further, in this example, due to its structure, the second elevating decorative body 3250 remains in the raised position, and the first elevating decorative body 3218 cannot be in the lowered position.

On the other hand, in the back-up side unit 3300 of the back-up effect unit 3200, as shown in FIG. 162 (a), in the normal state, the tip side (the side of the connecting portion 3312c) of the left and right first movable decorative bodies 3312 is They are in a state of being far from each other, and it is like a predetermined character holding a vacuum cleaner (nozzle) in both hands and spreading his arms. In this normal state, the back upper side drive motor 3304 of the back upper side unit 3300 is driven to drive the drive gear 3306 in an appropriate direction (the left side is a clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the right side is a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). When it is rotationally driven to, the transmission gear member 3308 that meshes with the drive gear 3306 rotates, and the transmission pin 3308b revolves within a predetermined radius.

When the transmission pin 3308b revolves, the relative position of the transmission pin 3308b moves, so that the transmission pin 3308b slides in the guide groove 3310a of the drive link member 3310 and is pushed by the transmission pin 3308b at the same time. The drive link member 3310 rotates so that its tip side moves downward, and the first movable decorative body 3312 rotates together with the drive link member 3310.

In the back upper side unit 3300, the first movable decorative body 3312, the second movable decorative body 3318, and the arm member 3316 form a parallel link, and the tip side (connecting portion 3312c side) of the first movable decorative body 3312 is formed. When the first movable decorative body 3312 rotates so that the) moves downward, the arm member 3316 rotates in the same manner as the first movable decorative body 3312, whereas the second movable decorative body 3318 rotates in that direction. It is designed to move as it is. As a result, in the left and right first movable decorations 3312 and the second movable decorations 3318, the second movable decorations 3318 shown in FIG. 162 (b) approach each other from the state of the retracted position shown in FIG. 162 (a). It will be in the state of the appearance position.

In addition, in order to return the first movable decorative body 3312, the second movable decorative body 3318, etc. to the normal state (the state of the retracted position), the first movable decorative body 3312 and the first movable decorative body 3312 and The second movable decorative body 3318 and the like can be returned to the normal state.

As described above, according to the back-up effect unit 3200 of this example, since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is provided separately from the normal liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect image can be displayed on each of the two different display devices. , It is possible to present a player with a completely different effect from the conventional display effect, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, since the small second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be moved to the front of the large liquid crystal display device 1900, it is possible to enjoy the collaboration between the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the effect image of the second liquid crystal display device 3252. It is possible to get rid of it, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

Further, in the back-up center unit 3210, the second elevating decorative body 3250 that supports the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is detachably supported by the second slide base 3248 that is driven up and down in the vertical direction. Therefore, even if a problem occurs in the second liquid crystal display device 3252, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second elevating decorative body 3250) can be easily separated from the back-up center unit 3210 and replaced for maintenance. The operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased by reducing the time and effort required for the pachinko machine 1, and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be easily removed when the pachinko machine 1 is discarded, improving recyclability and improving the environment. It is possible to make a pachinko machine 1 that is kind to the user.

[2-9. Backside production unit]
Subsequently, the underside effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 163 to 180. FIG. 163 is a perspective view of the underside effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 164 is a perspective view of the underside effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the underside effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 166 is an exploded perspective view of the underside effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed afterwards. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 167 is a perspective view of the back lower front unit of the back lower effect unit as viewed from the front, FIG. 168 is a perspective view of the back lower front unit of the back lower effect unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the lower front unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the lower front unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 171 is a front view showing the back lower effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 172 is a front view showing a state in which the back lower front slider of the back lower front unit in the back lower effect unit is raised halfway. FIG. 173 is a front view showing a state in which the back bottom front slider of the back bottom front unit is raised to the rising end. Further, FIG. 174 is a front view showing a state in which the back lower rear middle decoration body is raised to the appearance position in the back lower rear middle decoration unit, and FIG. 175 is a rotation of the pointer member of the back lower rear middle decoration body in the state of FIG. 174. It is a front view which shows the state which made it made. Further, FIG. 176 is a front view showing a state in which the back bottom front slider of the back bottom front unit is raised to the ascending end and the back bottom rear middle decoration is raised to the appearance position, and FIG. 177 is a front view of the back bottom effect unit. FIG. 178 is a front view showing a state in which the back lower rear side decorative body is rotated to an appearance position, and FIG. 178 is a front view showing a state in which the back lower rear middle decorative body is raised to an appearance position in the state of FIG. 177. FIG. 179 is a front view showing a state in which the lower back front slider is raised to the rising end in the state of FIG. 178. Further, FIG. 180 is a front view showing a state in which the lower back front slider is raised to the ascending end in the state of FIG. 177.

The underside effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 of this example is attached between the back front decoration unit 3100 and the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010 below the opening 3010b.

The lower back effect unit 3400 has a lower back unit base 3402 mounted in the back box 3010 and formed in a substantially rectangular shape with a front view extending in the left-right direction, and a rotation shaft penetrating the lower back unit base 3402 to the rear side. A spur gear fixed to the rotation shaft of the lower back side drive motor 3404 and the lower back side drive motor 3404 that are attached to a predetermined position (lower right corner in front view) of the lower front of the lower back unit base 3402 so as to protrude. The second gear portion 3408b, which is integrally formed on the rear surface of the shaped drive gear 3406, the small diameter first gear portion 3408a that meshes with the drive gear 3406, and the first gear portion 3408a, and has a diameter larger than that of the first gear portion 3408a. The intermediate gear 3408 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the lower back unit base 3402.

Further, the lower back effect unit 3400 has a transmission gear portion 3410a that meshes with the second gear portion 3408b of the intermediate gear 3408, and a first cam pin 3410b that protrudes rearward from a position slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the transmission gear portion 3410a. The first cam gear 3410 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the lower back unit base 3402, the driven gear portion 3412a, which meshes with the transmission gear portion 3410a of the first cam gear 3410 and has the same diameter as the transmission gear portion 3410a, and the driven gear. It has a second cam pin 3412b that is slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the portion 3412a and protrudes rearward from a position having the same radius as the revolution radius of the first cam pin 3410b, and is at the same height as the first cam gear 3410 on the rear surface of the lower back unit base 3402. It includes a second cam gear 3412 that is rotatably supported. The first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412 are supported on the rear surface side of the lower back unit base 3402 so that the center of the axis connecting the respective rotation centers is located substantially in the center of the lower back unit base 3402 in the left-right direction. Has been done.

Further, in the lower back effect unit 3400, the first cam pin 3410b of the first cam gear 3410 is slidably inserted to form elongated slits 3414a and slits 3414a extending in a predetermined direction, and the slits 3414a are formed in the extending direction. A first link member having a strip-shaped working piece 3414b extending to one side and a tubular shaft portion 3414c formed on the base end side extending long from the slit 3414a of the working piece 3414b and extending in the front-rear direction. The 3414 and the second cam pin 3412b of the second cam gear 3412 are slidably inserted to form an elongated slit 3416a and a slit 3416a extending in a predetermined direction, and the slit 3416a extends long to one side in the extending direction. A strip-shaped working piece 3416b and a second link member 3416 having a tubular shaft portion 3416c formed on the base end side extending long from the slit 3416a of the working piece 3416b and extending in the front-rear direction are provided. There is. The first link member 3414 includes a detection piece 3414d extending in a plate shape from the shaft portion 3414c in the direction perpendicular to the axis.

Further, the under-back effect unit 3400 is a pair of under-back side decorative bodies 3420 (3420L, 3420R) rotatably supported around the axis extending in the front-rear direction near both the left and right corners of the front upper part of the under-back unit base. ) Is provided. The pair of lower back side decorations 3420 extend in a substantially arc shape along a surface extending in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis, and each is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape. More specifically, the lower back side decorative body 3420 includes a support pin 3422 rotatably supported at a predetermined position of the lower back unit base 3402 and a support pin 3422 extending from the front end side of the support pin 3422. A translucent decorative body 3424 that extends in a substantially arc shape along a surface extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis and is formed in a three-dimensional predetermined shape, and is arranged behind the decorative body 3424. It includes a lens sheet capable of diffusing light (not shown), and a lower back side decorative substrate 3426 which is arranged on the rear side of the lens sheet and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The pair of back lower rear side decorations 3420 are provided at positions where the support pins 3422 are substantially symmetrical with respect to the perpendicular line passing through the center of the axis connecting the rotation centers of the first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412. The shafts of the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 are rotatably supported by the lower unit base 3402 and at the rear end of the support pin 3422 that penetrates the lower unit base 3402 and extends rearward. 3414c and 3416c are fixed respectively. That is, the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 are rotatably supported with respect to the lower back unit base 3402 via the support pin 3422 of the lower back side decoration body 3420. Further, when the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 are rotated (rotated), the back lower rear side decorative body 3420 is also rotated. The support pin 3422 of the lower back side decorative body 3420 is rotatably supported by the lower back unit base 3402 via the bush 3428.

Further, the lower back effect unit 3400 is a plate-shaped protective plate 3430 that is attached to the left and right upper corners on the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402 so that a part of the rear surface of the lower back side decorative body 3420 is slidable. It is provided with a lower back side rotation detection sensor 3432 that is attached to a predetermined position on the rear surface of the lower back unit base 3402 and is capable of detecting the detection piece 3414d of the first link member 3414. In this example, the rotation position of the back lower rear side decoration body 3420 can be detected by detecting the detection piece 3414d of the first link member 3414 by the back lower rear side rotation detection sensor 3432. There is.

Further, the lower back effect unit 3400 supports the lower back middle decorative body 3450 arranged substantially in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402 and the lower back middle decorative body 3450 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The tip is connected to the lower front surface of the pair of guide shafts 3470 arranged at the center of the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402 and the lower back middle decorative body 3450 supported by the pair of guide shafts 3470. A spur gear-shaped gear portion integrally formed on the proximal end side of the arm portion 3472a and the arm portion 3472a whose base ends extend to the outside (left side in the front view) of the pair of guide shafts 3470 in the left-right direction. An elevating arm member having 3472b and a plate-shaped detection piece 3472c extending outward from the gear portion 3472b and rotatably supported on the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402 around the axis of the gear portion 3472b. The drive gear 3474, which meshes with the 3472 and the gear portion 3472b of the elevating arm member 3472 and is arranged behind the back lower unit base 3402, and the drive gear 3474 are fixed to the rotation shaft and the rotation shaft is the back lower unit base 3402. It is provided with a rear lower rear middle drive motor 3476 attached to the front side of the lower back unit base 3402 so as to penetrate and extend rearward.

Further, the lower back effect unit 3400 is attached to the lower front portion of the lower back unit base 3402, and cooperates with the lower back unit base 3402 to hold the lower end of the guide shaft 3470, and the lower back unit base 3402 and the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402. The lower back middle elevating detection sensor 3480, which is mounted at a predetermined position and is capable of detecting the detection piece 3472c of the elevating arm member 3472, meshes with the gear portion 3472b of the elevating arm member 3472 and rotates to the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402. A spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 3482 that can be supported, an assist gear 3484 that is rotatably supported on the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402 while being meshed with the intermediate gear 3482 to form a fan shape, and an assist gear 3484 are raised and lowered. It includes an assist spring 3486 that urges the tip of the arm portion 3472a of the arm member 3472 to rotate in a direction of upward movement.

Further, the under-back effect unit 3400 is attached to the rear side of the under-back unit base 3402, and the under-back side drive motor 3404, the under-back side rotation detection sensor 3432, the under-back pointer drive motor 3460, and the under-back rear middle. Drive motor 3476, back bottom rear middle lift detection sensor 3480, back bottom front drive motor 3508, connection between back bottom front lift detection sensor 3544 and motor drive board 3045, back bottom rear side decorative board 3426, back bottom rear middle It includes a decorative substrate 3456, a back lower front side decorative substrate 3536, and a back lower relay substrate 3488 for relaying a connection between the back lower front middle decorative substrate 3546 and the lamp drive substrate 3041.

The lower back middle decorative body 3450 in the lower back effect unit 3400 has a horizontally long rectangular base portion 3452a that is vertically supported by a pair of guide shafts 3470, and a support portion that extends upward from the upper side of the base portion 3452a in a vertically long rectangular shape. A plate-shaped slider base 3452 having 3452b, a translucent decorative body 3454 attached to the front surface of the support portion 3452b of the slider base 3452 and having a polygonal outer shape and three-dimensionally formed, and a decorative body 3454. A seat lens (not shown) arranged between the seat lens and the support portion 3452b of the slider base 3452 and capable of diffusing light, and a plurality of seat lenses arranged between the seat lens and the support portion 3452b of the slider base 3452 on the front surface. It includes a back-bottom rear-middle decorative substrate 3456 on which an LED is mounted.

Further, the lower back middle decorative body 3450 is arranged in front of the decorative body main body 3454 and has a pointer member 3458 whose base end is rotatably supported at the center of the decorative body main body 3454 and whose outer shape is formed in an arrow shape. The pointer member 3458 is rotationally driven around its base end to include a backside pointer drive motor 3460 attached to a predetermined position of the slider base 3452. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower back pointer drive motor 3460 is arranged so that its rotating shaft extends in the left-right direction, and a worm gear is fixed to the rotating shaft, and further meshes with the worm gear. Rotational drive is transmitted via a plurality of gears such as spur gears to rotate the pointer member 3458.

Further, the lower back middle decorative body 3450 has a guide hole 3452c extending in the left-right direction so that the tip of the arm portion 3472a of the elevating arm member 3472 can be slidably held in the base portion 3452a of the slider base 3452. It has. By inserting the tip of the arm portion 3472a of the elevating arm member 3472 into the guide hole 3452c of the slider base 3452, the slider base 3452 and the elevating arm member 3472 are connected to each other.

The under-back effect unit 3400 is arranged in front of the under-back side decorative body 3420, the under-back rear middle decorative body 3450, the elevating arm member 3472, the drive gear 3474, etc., and is attached to the front surface of the under-back unit base 3402. The back lower front unit 3500 is further provided. The lower back unit 3500 is attached to the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402 and is arranged at a pair of slits 3502a that penetrate the center in the left-right direction in the front-rear direction and extend in the up-down direction, and the upper end of the front surface in the center in the left-right direction. It is arranged in front of the lower back front base 3502 having the contact portion 3502b and the lower back front base 3502, and is slidably supported in the vertical direction by a pair of slits 3502a, and the outer shape is formed in a vertically long substantially rectangular shape. , A rack gear 3504a formed so as to extend in the vertical direction on both left and right side surfaces, a back lower front slider 3504 having a guide hole 3504b penetrating in the front-rear direction in the center of the left-right direction and extending in the vertical direction, and a back lower front slider 3504. It is provided with a translucent front lower front middle decorative body 3506 which is attached to the upper front surface of the machine and has a three-dimensional image of a predetermined character in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1.

The lower back front slider 3504 of the lower back front unit 3500 extends outward in the left-right direction from the locking portion 3504c protruding forward from the upper left center in the left-right direction and the rear ends of the rack gears 3504a at both left and right ends, and extends in the vertical direction. The guide piece 3504d, the detection piece 3504e extending outward from the lower end of the guide piece 3504d on one side (on the right side in the front), and the cylindrical guide boss inserted into the slit 3502a of the lower back front base 3502. It is equipped with 3504f. Further, the back lower front slider 3504 is formed with a plurality of through holes penetrating in the front-rear direction at a portion where the back lower front middle decoration body 3506 is attached. The lower back front slider 3504 is supported by the slit 3502a so as to be slidable in the vertical direction by inserting the guide boss 3504f into the slit 3502a of the lower back front base 3502 via the bush 3507.

Further, the lower back front unit 3500 is attached so that the rotating shaft penetrates the lower back front base 3502 and projects forward near one end in the left-right direction (right side in front view) on the rear surface of the lower back front base 3502. The lower back front drive motor 3508, the spur gear-shaped drive gear 3510 fixed to the rotating shaft of the lower back front drive motor 3508, and the drive gear 3510 mesh with each other and are rotatably supported on the front surface of the lower back front base 3502. It meshes with the intermediate gear 3512 and the rack gear 3504a on one side (right side in front view) of the rear lower front slider 3504 that is slidably supported by the intermediate gear 3512 and the lower back front base 3502, and can rotate to the front of the lower back front base 3502. A working gear 3514, which is supported by

Further, the back lower front unit 3500 is a spur gear that meshes with the other rack gear 3504a of the back lower front slider 3504 that is slidably supported by the back lower front base 3502 and is rotatably supported on the front surface of the back lower front base 3502. The driven gear 3516, the transmission gear 3518 that meshes with the driven gear 3516 and is rotatably supported on the front surface of the lower back front base 352, and the transmission gear 3518 that meshes with the transmission gear 3518 to form a fan shape and the lower back front base 3502. It includes an assist gear 3520 that is rotatably supported on the front surface, and an assist spring 3522 that urges the assist gear 3520 to rotate in a direction in which the lower back front slider 3504 slides upward. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the transmission gear 3518 has a large-diameter first gear portion that meshes with the driven gear 3516 and a small-diameter second gear portion that rotates integrally with the first gear portion and meshes with the assist gear 3520. And have.

Further, the lower back front unit 3500 is supported by a guide hole 3504b on the front surface of the lower back front slider 3504 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and is arranged at the upper ends on both the left and right sides with the center in the left and right directions interposed therebetween and extends in the horizontal direction. The elongated hole 3524a, the locking portion 3524b formed at a predetermined position on the rear surface, and the lower end of the rear surface can penetrate the guide hole 3504b of the lower back front slider 3504 and project rearward, and the lower back front base 3502 is hit. The lower end is locked to the vertically long movable slider 3524 having a protrusion 3524c that can be brought into contact with the contact portion 3502b from below, and the locking portion 3524b of the movable slider 3524, and the lower back front slider 3504 is locked. The upper end is locked to the portion 3504c, and the movable slider 3524 is provided with a drive spring 3526 that urges the movable slider 3524 toward the upper side of the back lower front slider 3504.

Further, the lower back front unit 3500 is arranged between the lower back front middle decoration body 3506 and the lower back front slider 3504 on both sides of the movable slider 3524 so that it can slide into one guide hole 3504b of the movable slider 3524. It has a sliding pin 3532 to be inserted, and is rotatably supported by the back lower front slider 3504 at a position outside the sliding pin 3532 in the left-right direction, and the tip side is laterally outward from the back lower front slider 3504. It is provided with a pair of lower back front side decorations 3530 having a wing-shaped extended appearance. The lower back front side decorative body is provided with a sliding pin 3532 on the base end side and has a translucent decorative main body 3534 having a blade-like appearance, and is arranged on the rear side of the decorative main body 3534 to emit light. It includes a diffusible sheet lens (not shown) and a back lower front side decorative substrate 3536 that is arranged behind the sheet lens and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

Further, the lower back front unit 3500 has a guide roller 3540 which is made in contact with the left and right guide pieces 3504d of the lower back front slider 3504 and is rotatably supported at a predetermined position on the upper front surface of the lower back front base 3502, and a guide roller. A roller retainer 3542 that prevents the 3540 from coming off the back bottom front base 3502, and a back bottom front elevating detection sensor that is attached to a predetermined position on the front of the back bottom front base 3502 and can detect the detection piece 3504e of the back bottom front slider 3504. It includes a 3544 and a lower back front middle decorative substrate 3546 attached to the upper rear surface of the lower back front slider 3504 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The LED of the back bottom front middle decoration substrate 3546 is provided at a position corresponding to the through hole of the back bottom front slider 3504, and the back bottom front middle decoration body 3506 arranged on the front side can be luminescently decorated through the through hole. You can do it. Reference numeral 3548 in the drawing is a cable retainer for pressing the flexible flat cable (FFC) connecting the lower back front middle decorative substrate 3546 and the lower back relay substrate 3488.

Next, the movement of the underside effect unit 3400 of this example will be described. In the normal state of the underside effect unit 3400, as shown in FIG. 171, a pair of underside rear side decorations 3420 that are separated from each other to the left and right and extend in an arc shape are oriented in a direction in which their tips are separated from each other. It is in a rotated state. In this state, the lower back side decorative body 3420 is located on the left and right outside of the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the state of the retracted position), and the left and right lower back side decorative bodies 3420 serve as centers, respectively. It is hidden behind the object 2500 and the back front effect unit 3100 and is almost invisible to the player.

Further, the lower back middle decorative body 3450 in the lower back effect unit 3400 is in a state of being lowered downward and hidden behind the back lower front unit 3500 (a state of the retracted position), and in this state, the liquid crystal display is displayed. It is located below the front surface of the device 1900 and is almost invisible to the player.

Further, the back lower front middle decoration body 3506 and the pair of back lower front side decorations 3530 of the back lower front unit 3500 in the back lower production unit 3400 are located at the descending ends, respectively, and the pair of back lower front side decorations The 3530 is in a state in which the tip end side thereof is lower than the base end side. In this state, both the lower back front middle decorative body 3506 and the pair of lower back front side decorative bodies 3530 are located below the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the state of the retracted position). It is almost invisible to the person.

More specifically, in the normal state of the underside effect unit 3400, the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 that rotate the left and right underside rear side decorations 3420 are respectively with respect to the rotation axis. The rotating positions are such that the working pieces 3414b and 3416b extend diagonally upward. In this state, the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b of the first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412 inserted into the slits 3414a and 3416a of the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 have their revolution loci. It is in a state of being located at the top dead center, and the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b are in contact with the distal end portion of the slits 3414a and 3416a.

In this normal state, even if a force for rotating the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 due to the weight of the lower back side decorative body 3420 or the like acts on the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b, Since the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b act in the direction of revolving toward the tips of the slits 3414a and 3416a, the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b are the tips of the slits 3414a and 3416a. Since it is in contact with the side end portion, the revolution of the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b is prevented. As a result, the back lower rear side decoration body 3420 can be maintained in a normal state without imposing a load on the back lower rear side drive motor 3404. In the normal state, the detection piece 3414d of the first link member 3414 is in a state of being detected by the back lower rear side rotation detection sensor 3432.

Further, in the lower back middle decorative body 3450 in a normal state, the tip of the arm portion 3472a of the elevating arm member 3472 slidably connected to the guide hole 3452c of the slider base 3452 in the lower back middle decorative body 3450. However, it is in a state of extending diagonally downward from the center of rotation. In this example, in this state, the urging force of the assist spring 3486 acts on the elevating arm member 3472 in the direction in which the tip end side of the arm portion 3472a rises. In the normal state, the detection piece 3472c of the elevating arm member 3472 is in a state of being detected by the elevating / lowering detection sensor 3480.

Further, in the lower back front unit 3500 in the normal state, the lower back front slider 3504 is in a state of being positioned at the lower end, and the movable slider 3524 supported to be raised and lowered by the back lower front slider 3504 is a drive spring 3526. It is located at a position relatively elevated with respect to the lower back front slider 3504 due to the urging force. In this state, a pair of elongated holes 3524a of the movable slider 3524 are located above the rotation center of the lower back front side decorative body 3530, and the sliding lower back front side decorative body 3530 inserted into the elongated holes 3524a. The pin 3532 is in a state where the tip end side of the back lower front side decorative body 3530 is lowered downward.

From this normal state, when the drive gear 3510 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) by the under-back front drive motor 3508 of the under-back front unit 3500, rotation is performed via the intermediate gear 3512. The rack gear 3504a transmitted to the 3514 and meshed with the operating gear 3514 causes the lower back front slider 3504 to slide upward. Even if the back bottom front slider 3504 rises, the positional relationship between the back bottom front slider 3504 and the movable slider 3524 does not change, so that the tip side of the pair of back bottom front side decorations 3530 is lowered as in the normal state. In this state, the whole is raised together with the lower back front slider 3504 (see FIG. 172).

Then, when the lower back lower front slider 3504 rises to some extent, the protrusion 3524c of the movable slider 3524 supported by the lower back lower front slider 3504 comes into contact with the contact portion 3502b of the lower back lower front base 3502, and the rise of the movable slider 3524 is prevented. Will be done. Then, in a state where the movable slider 3524 is blocked from rising by the contact portion 3502b of the back bottom front base 3502, when the back bottom front drive motor 3508 is driven so that the back bottom front slider 3504 further rises, the back bottom front The slider 3504 will rise further against the urging force of the drive spring 3526. As a result, the relative positions of the lower back front slider 3504 and the movable slider 3524 change in the vertical direction, and the elongated hole 3524a of the movable slider 3524 moves downward toward the rotation center of the lower back front side decoration body 3530. By doing so, the lower back front side decorative body 3530 rotates in the direction in which the tip side thereof rises (see FIG. 173).

When the back bottom front slider 3504 of the back bottom front unit 3500 rises to the rising end, as shown in FIG. 173, the pair of back bottom front side decorations 3530 rotate to a position where the tip side thereof extends diagonally upward. , The predetermined character imitated by the lower back front middle decorative body 3506 is in a state of spreading its wings. In this state, the lower back front middle decorative body 3506 and the pair of lower back front side decorative bodies 3530 are in a state of being moved from the lower side to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (state of appearance position), and are sufficiently visible to the player. become able to. By driving in the reverse direction of the above, the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 and the pair of back lower front side decorative bodies 3530 can be returned to the normal state.

On the other hand, when the drive gear 3474 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction (clockwise in front view) by the back lower rear middle drive motor 3476 from the normal state, the elevating arm member 3472 is driven by the gear portion 3472b meshed with the drive gear 3474. However, the tip side of the arm portion 3472a is rotated so as to be raised, and is pushed by the tip end of the arm portion 3472a so that the lower back middle decorative body 3450 can be raised. When the lower back middle decorative body 3450 is located at the rising end, the decorative main body 3454 of the lower back middle decorative body 3450 is located from the lower side to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (at the appearance position). (State) and becomes visible to the player (see FIG. 174).

In the lower back middle decorative body 3450, when the lower back pointer drive motor 3460 is rotationally driven in an appropriate direction in a state of being raised to the rising end (state of appearance position), an arrow arranged on the front surface of the decorative main body 3454. The shaped pointer member 3458 can be rotated like the hands of a clock (see FIG. 175). By driving in the reverse direction of the above, the lower back middle decorative body 3450 can be returned to the normal state.

Further, when the back bottom front slider 3504 of the back bottom front unit 3500 is raised to the rising end (appearance position) while the back bottom rear middle decorative body 3450 is raised to the rising end (appearance position), the back bottom front unit 3500 is raised. The back lower front middle decoration 3506 and the pair of back lower front side decorations 3530 are located on the front side of the back middle decoration 3450, and are in a state of hiding the back lower rear middle decoration 3450 ( See FIG. 176).

Further, when the drive gear 3406 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction (clockwise in front view) by the rear lower rear side drive motor 3404 from the normal state, the first cam gear 3410 moves in the same direction via the intermediate gear 3408. At the same time as the rotation, the second cam gear 3412 rotates in the opposite direction. In this example, the first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412 rotate so that the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b of the first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412 revolve in directions away from each other. ..

Then, as the first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412 rotate respectively, the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b located at the top dead center revolve in the direction of the bottom dead center. The first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b slide in the slits 3414a and 3416a, and are pushed by the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b so that the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 are each acted pieces 3414b. , 3416b will rotate in the descending direction, and the left and right back lower rear side decorations 3420 will rotate in the same direction as the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416, respectively.

Then, by stopping the rotation of the back bottom rear side drive motor 3404 so that the tips of the left and right back bottom rear side decorations 3420 come into contact with each other, a pair of back bottom rear side decorations formed in a substantially arc shape are formed. The body 3420 is in a state of being united in a ring shape (see FIG. 177). In this state, the pair of lower back side decorations 3420 are moved from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the front (state of appearance position), and can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player. By driving in the reverse direction of the above, the back lower rear side decorative body 3420 can be returned to the normal state.

In the under-back effect unit 3400 of this example, the left and right under-back side decorations 3420 are rotated to be positioned at the appearance position in an annular shape, and the under-back middle decoration 3450 is raised to the appearance position. When it is positioned at, the inside of the pair of lower back side decorations 3420 is filled with the lower back middle decoration 3450, and a large decoration appears. (See FIG. 178). As a result, the player can be greatly surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. In addition, in a state where the lower back middle decorative body 3450 is raised to the appearance position first, the back lower rear side decorative body 3420 may be rotated to the appearance position later, and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be used. It is possible to perform a movable effect so that the decorative body becomes huge one by one.

Further, with the pair of back lower rear side decorations 3420 and back lower rear middle decoration 3450 positioned at the appearance positions, the back lower front slider 3504 is raised, and the back lower front middle is placed on the front side thereof. The decorative body 3506 and the back lower front side decoration body 3530 may be made to appear, and the annular lower back lower rear side decoration body 3420 located behind the back lower front middle decoration body 3506 and the back lower front side decoration body 3530 may appear. As a result, the lower back front middle decorative body 3506 and the lower back front side decorative body 3530 can be complemented (see FIG. 179). In this case, the lower back middle decorative body 3450 may be in a lowered retracted position, which is a normal state (see FIG. 180).

In this way, according to the underside production unit 3400 of this example, it is possible to perform a variety of movable productions, entertain the player, and make it harder to get bored, and the interest of the player in the game is reduced. It is possible to suppress the hobby.

[2-10. Back right lower production unit]
Next, the back right lower right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 181 to 191. FIG. 181 (a) is a left side view of the back right lower effect unit in the back unit, FIG. 182 (b) is a front view of the back right lower effect unit in the back unit, and FIG. 182 (a) is a back right lower effect unit. Is a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back right lower right effect unit viewed from the rear. 183 (a) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 181 and FIG. 183 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 181. Further, FIG. 184 is an exploded oblique view of the back right lower right effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 185 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear side of the back right lower unit base in FIG. 184 enlarged. .. Further, FIG. 186 is an exploded oblique view of the back right lower right effect unit disassembled and viewed afterwards, and FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear side of the back right lower unit base in FIG. 186 in an enlarged manner. .. Further, FIG. 188 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back right lower right rotating decorative body in the back right lower right effect unit. Further, FIG. 189 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the effect ball of the back right lower effect unit, FIG. 190 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the effect ball of the back right lower effect unit following FIG. 189, and FIG. 191 is a back view. It is explanatory drawing which shows the lift of the production ball in the lower right effect unit.

The lower right back effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached from the lower right corner to the right side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 in front view. The lower right back effect unit 3600 is formed in an appearance imitating a so-called rotary lottery machine, and has a rectangular shape with a long front view extending in the vertical direction and a shallow box-shaped main body 3602a with the rear side open. The front and rear of the cylindrical portion 3602b extending forward at the upper front surface of the 3602a, the notch-shaped discharge portion 3602c formed at a predetermined position in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 3602b (diagonally lower left in the front view), and the cylindrical portion 3602b. A cylindrical bearing portion 3602d penetrating in the direction, a rectangular return port 3602e formed in the cylindrical portion 3602b on the right side of the bearing portion 3602d in the front view, and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and vertically below the return port 3602e in the main body portion 3602a. The lower right unit base 3602, which is formed in the substantially center of the direction and has a rectangular collection port 3602f that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the lower right unit base 3602, which is attached to the rear side and has approximately the same size as the main body 3602a and is forward. It is formed in a shallow box shape with the side open, and penetrates in the front-rear direction at positions facing the return port 3602e and the recovery port 3602f in the main body 3602a of the lower right unit base 3602, and extends in the vertical direction over substantially the entire height. It is provided with a back right lower unit case 3604 having a guide slit 3604a.

Further, the lower right back effect unit 3600 is fixed to the rear ends of the cylindrical shaft portion 3606a and the shaft portion 3606a which are rotatably inserted and penetrated in the front-rear direction while penetrating the inside of the bearing portion 3602d in the lower right back unit base 3602. The first driven pulley 3606 having the pulley portion 3606b and the detection piece 3606c extending outward from the front end of the pulley portion 3606b, and the first driven pulley 3606 fixed to the tip of the shaft portion 3606a in the first driven pulley 3606 in the outer circumference and the front-rear direction. A rotary cylinder 3608 and a rotary cylinder 3608 which are opened and have a plurality of (five in this example) accommodating recesses 3608a arranged in a row in the circumferential direction and are arranged in the cylindrical portion 3602b of the lower right unit base 3602 on the back. Each of the accommodating recesses 3608a is provided with a plurality of effect balls 3610 which are accommodated one by one and are formed in different colors. Each accommodating recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608 has a size capable of accommodating only one effect ball 3610.

Further, the lower right back effect unit 3600 is capable of preventing the effect ball 3610 from moving rearward from the accommodating recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608, and is between the rotary cylinder 3608 and the main body 3602a of the lower right back unit base 3602. The effect ball 3610 moves outward in the radial direction from the disc-shaped base portion 3612a which is arranged and rotatably supported on the outer periphery of the bearing portion 3602d, and the effect ball 3610 which extends forward from the outer peripheral end of the base portion 3612a and accommodates the rotating cylinder 3608. The peripheral wall portion 3612b and the peripheral wall portion 3612b are formed at positions facing each other across the center of the base portion 3612a, and are notched at substantially the same length as the circumferential length of one accommodating recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608. A pair of lateral notches 3612c, a rear notch 3612d notched from one side notch 3612c toward the center of the base 3612a in a substantially rectangular shape, and a columnar shape rearward from a predetermined position on the rear surface of the base 3612a. A discharge flap 3612 having an extended working radius 3612e, and a front end of a cylindrical portion 3602b in the lower right unit base 3602 on the front side of the discharge flap 3612 and the rotary cylinder 3608 are attached to the effect ball 3610 from the accommodating recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608. It is provided with a shallow circular dish-shaped cylindrical cover 3614, which prevents the vehicle from moving forward and has an open front side. Although not shown, the operating rod 3612e of the discharge flap 3612 penetrates the main body portion 3602a of the lower right unit base 3602 and extends into the main body portion 3602a.

Further, the lower right back effect unit 3600 is a pulley that is rotatably supported at the lower rear side (inside the main body 3602a) of the lower right back unit base 3602 at the same position in the front-rear direction as the pulley portion 3606b of the first driven pulley 3606. A first drive pulley 3616 having a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3616b fixed to the rear side of a portion 3616a and a pulley portion 3616a, a pulley portion 3616a of the first drive pulley 3616, and a pulley portion 3606b of the first driven pulley 3606. The first belt 3618 wound around the wheel, the first drive gear 3620 that meshes with the gear portion 3616b of the first drive pulley 3616, and the first drive gear 3620 penetrate the lower right unit case 3604 on the back and extend forward. It is possible to detect the detection piece 3606c of the first driven pulley 3606, which is fixed to the rotating shaft and attached to the rear surface of the lower right unit case 3604 on the lower right of the back, and is attached to the predetermined position of the lower right unit base 3602 on the back. It is equipped with a first detection sensor 3623 on the lower right side of the back.

In the back right lower right effect unit 3600, when the first drive pulley 3616 is rotationally driven by the back right lower first drive motor 3622 via the first drive gear 3620, the first driven pulley 3606 is rotated by the first belt 3618. The rotary cylinder 3608 containing the plurality of effect balls 3610 is designed to rotate. By detecting the detection piece 3606c of the first driven pulley 3606 by the lower right first detection sensor 3623 on the back right, the rotational position of the rotary cylinder 3608 can be detected via the first driven pulley 3606. There is.

Further, the lower right back effect unit 3600 has a lower right back release solenoid 3624 attached to the upper rear side of the lower right back unit base 3602 so that the plunger advances and retreats in the left-right direction, and the tip of the plunger of the lower right back release solenoid 3624. One end side is connected to, and the other end side is connected to the operating rod 3612e of the release flap 3612 so that it can rotate in the main body portion 3602a of the lower right unit base 3602 on the back right at the position between the one end side and the other end side. It comprises a supported release link member 3626. The release link member 3626 rotates when the plunger advances and retreats by energizing the lower right release solenoid 3624 on the back side, and the release flap connected to the other end side by the rotation of the release link member 3626. The release flap 3612 can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction (around the axis of the first driven pulley 3606) via the operating rod 3612e of the 3612.

Further, the lower right back effect unit 3600 has a bottomed cylinder whose outer circumference is formed in a polygonal shape (hexagonal shape in this example) and whose front end is closed and extends in the front-rear direction, and the inner cylinder of the lower right back unit base 3602 It has a shaft portion 3630a that extends from the center of the bottom to the rear, and a discharge port 3630b that is formed at a predetermined position on the outer circumference and penetrates in the radial direction, and has a predetermined decoration on the outer surface. A back right lower right rotating decoration body 3630 having a part of the front surface having transparency is provided. In the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630, the shaft portion 3630a extending rearward penetrates the cylindrical cover 3614 and the tubular first driven pulley 3606 and extends rearward from the first driven pulley 3606. In addition, the shaft portion 3606a of the first driven pulley 3606 is rotatably supported independently of the first driven pulley 3606 (rotary cylinder 3608). Further, as shown in the figure, the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630 is provided with an arrow-shaped decoration extending toward the outer circumference in which the discharge port 3630b is formed on the front surface, and the position of the discharge port 3630b is recognized from the front side. You can do it.

Further, the lower right back effect unit 3600 is fixed to the rear end of the shaft portion 3630a in the lower right back rotary decoration body 3630 and is arranged behind the first driven pulley 3606, and the detection piece 3632a extending outward is provided. The second driven pulley 3632 and the second driven pulley 3632 can rotate to a position higher than the first drive pulley 3616 on the rear side (inside the main body 3602a) of the lower right unit base 3602 at the same position in the front-rear direction. A second drive pulley 3634 having a pulley portion 3634a supported by the pulley portion 3634a and a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3634b fixed to the rear side of the pulley portion 3634a, a pulley portion 3634a of the second drive pulley 3634, and a second driven pulley 3632. The second drive gear 3636 that is wound around the second belt 3636, the second drive gear 3638 that meshes with the gear portion 3634b of the second drive pulley 3634, and the second drive gear 3638 that penetrates the lower right unit case 3604 and extends forward. It is possible to detect the lower right second drive motor 3640, which is fixed to the shaft and attached to the rear surface of the lower right unit case 3604, and the detection piece 3632a, which is attached to the predetermined position of the lower right unit base 3602 and is the second driven pulley 3632. It is equipped with a second lower right detection sensor 3461 on the back right side.

In the back right lower right effect unit 3600, when the second drive pulley 3634 is rotationally driven by the back right lower second drive motor 3640 via the second drive gear 3638, the second driven pulley 3632 is moved via the second belt 3636. It rotates, and the lower right back rotating decoration body 3630 rotates. By detecting the detection piece 3632a of the second driven pulley 3632 by the back right lower right second detection sensor 3641, the rotational position of the back right lower right rotating decorative body 3630 can be detected via the second driven pulley 3632. It has become like.

Further, the back right lower right effect unit 3600 is in contact with the inner circumferences of the first belt 3618 and the second belt 3636, respectively, and is rotatably supported by the back right lower unit base 3602, and the first belt 3618 and the second belt 3618 and the second belt are supported. The idler pulley 3642 that changes the passing position of the belt 3636, abuts on the outer circumferences of the first belt 3618 and the second belt 3636, and is coaxially and rotatably supported by the lower right unit base 3602 on the back, and the first belt 3618 and the first belt 3618. The two belts 3636 are provided with a tension pulley 3644 for applying tension to the belt 3636.

In the back right lower right effect unit 3600, the rotary cylinder 3608 is rotated by the back right lower right first drive motor 3622, and the open circumferential direction of the specific accommodating recess 3608a is discharged in the cylindrical portion 3602b of the back right lower unit base 3602. The rotation is stopped so as to coincide with the portion 3602c, and the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630 is rotated by the lower right back second drive motor 3640, and the discharge port 3630b is the discharge portion in the cylindrical portion 3602b of the lower right back unit base 3602. With the rotation stopped so as to coincide with 3602c, the release flap 3612 is rotated by driving the back right lower right release solenoid 3624, and the lateral notch 3612c of the release flap 3612 is made of the back right lower unit base 3602. When matched with the discharge portion 3602c in the cylindrical portion 3602b, the effect ball 3610 housed in the specific storage recess 3608a can be discharged to the outside through the discharge port 3630b of the lower right back rotating decoration body 3630. ..

Further, the lower right back effect unit 3600 is mounted at a position substantially the same height as the collection port 3602f below the cylindrical portion 3602b on the front surface of the main body portion 3602a of the lower right back unit base 3602 and in the left-right direction of the main body portion 3602a. A recovery unit base 3650 having a communication port 3650a extending outward from one end side (left end side in front view) and communicating with the recovery port 3602f in the front-rear direction, and a recovery unit base 3650 attached to the front surface of the recovery unit base 3650 and on the rear side. The upper part and the side of the side extending outward from the main body 3602a are formed in a box shape from approximately the center in the left-right direction, and the end of the side extending outward from the main body 3602a. With a recovery unit cover 3652 having a shaft portion 3652a extending rearward from the upper portion of the above, and a recovery passage 3652b inclined so as to be lower from the center side in the left-right direction than the shaft portion 3652a toward the communication port 3650a of the recovery unit base 3650. , Is equipped.

Further, the lower right back effect unit 3600 is a shallow dish-shaped ball receiver formed above the bearing portion 3654a and the bearing portion 3654a that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 3652a of the recovery unit cover 3652 and the upper portion is open. A ball receiving member 3654 having a portion 3654b, a connecting pin 3654c extending rearward from the lower side of the bearing portion 3654a, and a portion 3654d arranged below the connecting pin 3654c, and a connecting pin 3654c of the ball receiving member 3654. Connectable connecting portion 3656a, shaft portion 3656b arranged below the connecting portion 3656a and rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by a recovery unit cover 3652, and from below to rear of the shaft portion 3656b. A recovery link member 3656 having a transmission pin 3656c extending to the center, and a recovery slider 3658 in which the transmission pin 3656c of the link member 3656 is connected to the tip and slidably supported in the left-right direction by the recovery unit base 3650 and the recovery unit cover 3652. The lower right recovery solenoid 3660, which is supported by the recovery unit base 3650 and the recovery unit cover 3652, and the back of the recovery unit base 3650 and the recovery unit cover 3652, to which the tip of the plunger that advances and retreats is attached to the base end of the recovery slider 3658. A transparent ball bearing cover 3662, which is attached to the upper end of a portion extending outward in the left-right direction from the main body portion 3602a of the lower right unit base 3602 and covers the outer outer circumference of the ball bearing member 3654, is provided. ..

The ball receiving member 3654 includes a pair of arm portions 3654e extending downward from both left and right sides of the ball receiving portion 3654b so as to be centered on the shaft portion 3652a, and one arm (left side in front view). The portion 3654e is formed so as to extend to the portion 3654d. As shown in the figure, the ball receiving member 3654 is formed so that the appearance of the ball receiving portion 3654b imitates a bowl, and the pair of arm portions 3654e imitates the arm of a predetermined character. The bowl is shaped like a bowl supported by both arms from below.

In this back right lower right effect unit 3600, the ball receiving portion 3654b of the ball receiving member 3654 coincides with the discharging portion 3602c in the cylindrical portion 3602b of the back right lower unit base 3602, and the discharge port 3630b in the back right lower rotating decoration body 3630 is discharged. It is located below the tip, and the effect ball 3610 discharged from the discharge port 3630b can be received by the ball receiving portion 3654b. Further, the lower right back effect unit 3600 can tilt the ball receiving member 3654 via the collecting link member 3656 by driving the lower right back collecting solenoid 3660, and the tilted ball receiving portion The production ball 3610 can be dropped from the 3654b into the collection passage 3652b of the collection unit cover 3652, and the production ball 3610 can be sent to the collection port 3602f of the lower right unit base 3602 on the back.

Further, the lower right back effect unit 3600 has a box-shaped opening extending forward in the vertical direction and an opening 3670a having a size that allows the effect ball 3610 to enter, and extends rearward from the rear surface and collects the unit cover. A pair of sliding pins 3670b slidably inserted into the guide slit 3604a of 3604 and arranged vertically apart from each other, formed on one end side in the left-right direction (left end side in front view) on the rear surface and extended in the up-down direction. A ball lift member 3670 having a detection piece 3670d extending outward from the rack gear 3670c and the rack gear 3670c and arranged between the recovery unit base 3602 and the recovery unit cover 3604, and an opening 3670a in the ball lift member 3670. The front edge side is rotatably supported on the front end side of the lower side, and the trailing edge side is formed in a plate shape extending into the ball lift member 3670, and extends to the other end side of the ball lift member 3670 in the left-right direction on the front edge side. A movable bottom plate 3672 having an operating piece 3672a projecting forward, a spur gear-shaped third drive gear 3674 that meshes with the rack gear 3670a of the ball lift member 3670, and a third drive gear 3674 form a lower right unit case 3604 on the back. The lower right third drive motor 3676, which is fixed to the rotating shaft that penetrates and extends forward, and is attached to the rear surface of the lower right unit case 3604, and the ball lift member 3670, which is attached to the predetermined position of the lower right unit cover 3604. It is provided with a third detection sensor 3678 on the lower right side of the back, which is capable of detecting the detection piece 3670d.

The back right lower right effect unit 3600 can slide the ball lift member 3670 in the vertical direction by rotationally driving the third drive gear 3674 by the back right lower third drive motor 3676. The lifting position of the ball lift member 3670 can be detected by detecting the detection piece 3670d of the ball lift member 3670 by the third detection sensor 3678 on the lower right side of the back.

When the ball lift member 3670 is positioned at the lower end of the back right lower right effect unit 3600, the opening 3670a coincides with the collection port 3602f of the back right lower unit base 3602, and the ball receiving member 3654 The effect ball 3610 sent from the side enters the ball lift member 3670 through the collection port 3602f and the opening 3670a. At this time, the movable bottom plate 3672 on which the effect ball 3610 is placed is in a state where the trailing edge side is lowered, and the effect ball 3610 is held in the ball lift member 3670. In this state, when the opening 3670a of the ball lift member 3670 is raised so as to coincide with the return port 3602e of the lower right unit base 3602 on the back, the working piece 3672a of the movable bottom plate 3672 is on the back just before substantially matching with the return port 3602e. It abuts on the contact portion (not shown) of the lower right unit base 3602 and rotates so that the trailing edge side becomes higher. As a result, when the opening 3670a coincides with the return opening 3602e, the effect ball 3610 in the ball lift member 3670 is rolled forward by the movable bottom plate 3672 whose trailing edge side is raised, and passes through the opening 3670a and the return opening 3602e. It is designed to be returned to the rotary cylinder 3608.

Further, the lower right back effect unit 3600 is arranged above the ball lift member 3670 and has a columnar support boss 3680a projecting forward from substantially the center in the vertical direction, extending rearward from the rear surface and guiding the recovery unit cover 3604. With a pair of sliding pins 3680b slidably inserted into the slit 3604a and arranged apart in the vertical direction, the backflow prevention rear member 3680 having substantially the same height as the return port 3602e in the lower right unit base 3602 on the back. The front end side is rotatably and slidably supported by the support boss 3680b of the backflow prevention rear member 3680, and the base end side is the back right lower unit cover at a position above the return port 3602e of the back right lower unit base 3602. A rod-shaped rod-shaped rod member 3682 having a stopper piece 3682a rotatably supported on the front side of the 3604 and protruding outward at the base end, and an upper end locked at the middle portion of the rod member 3682 and a lower right unit cover on the back. The lower end is locked at a predetermined position on the front surface of the 3604, and the closing spring 3864 that urges the rod member 3682 in the direction in which the backflow prevention rear member 3680 moves downward, and the backflow prevention rear member 3680 attached to the front surface of the backflow prevention member 3680. It includes a member 3686.

Although not shown, the lower right unit cover 3604 is provided with a regulating piece that comes into contact with the stopper piece 3682a of the paddle member 3682 and restricts the tip end side of the paddle member 3682 from rotating downward by a predetermined value or more. When the stopper piece 3682a of the paddle member 3682 comes into contact with the regulation piece, the backflow prevention front member 3686 and the backflow prevention rear member 3680 are placed on the rear side of the return port 3602e in the lower right unit base 3602 on the back side via the paddle member 3682. It is possible to stop the descent at the position of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect ball 3610 from moving from the rotary cylinder 3608 side to the rear side of the main body portion 3602a through the return port 3602e. The backflow prevention front member 3686 and the backflow prevention rear member 3680 are adapted to rise together with the ball lift member 3670 when the ball lift member 3670 rises and comes into contact with the lower end.

Further, the lower right back effect unit 3600 includes a decorative lens 3688 attached to the outside of the cylindrical portion 3602b on the front surface of the lower right back unit base 3602 and having a decoration on the front surface. Further, the lower right back effect unit 3600 is arranged in the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630 and is attached to the front surface of the cylindrical cover 3614 to collect the lower right back rotating decorative substrate 3690 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. Back right lower ball receiving decorative board 3692 attached to the lower side of the ball receiving member 3654 in the unit base 3650 and having multiple LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and back right lower right first drive attached to the rear surface of the back right lower unit cover 3604 Motor 3622, back right lower first detection sensor 3623, back right lower release solenoid 3624, back right lower second drive motor 3640, back right lower second detection sensor 3461, back right lower recovery solenoid 3660, back right lower third drive The connection between the motor 3676 and the lower right third detection sensor 3678 and the motor drive board 3045, and the connection between the lower right back rotary decorative board 3690 and the lower right ball receiving decorative board 3692 and the lamp drive board 3041, respectively. It is equipped with a back right lower right relay board 3694 for relaying.

In this example, the distance (gap) between the inner circumference of the cylindrical portion 3602b in the lower right unit base 3602 and the outer circumference of the rotary cylinder 3608 is 1/5 to 1/3 of the diameter of the effect sphere 3610. It is formed within the range. Further, the rotary cylinder 3608 is designed to rotate in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and due to the rotation of the rotary cylinder 3608, each accommodating recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608 is made into a lateral notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612. On the other hand, they match from the top. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the effect ball 3610 to be sandwiched between the accommodating recess 3608a and the side notch 3612c, and it is possible to prevent problems such as the rotating cylinder 3608 not rotating. There is.

Next, the movement of the back right lower right effect unit 3600 of this example will be described. In the lower right back effect unit 3600 of this example, as shown in FIGS. 188 (a) and 189 (A), the discharge port 3630b of the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630 is the lower right back unit base in the normal state. It is stopped in a state substantially coincident with the discharge portion 3602c in the cylindrical portion 3602b of the 3602. Further, under a normal state, the lateral notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612 does not coincide with the discharge portion 3602c in the cylindrical portion 3602b of the lower right unit base 3602 on the back, and moves upward with respect to the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b. It is in a misaligned position (non-emission position), and the rear notch 3612d on the opposite side coincides with the return port 3602e opened in the cylindrical portion 3602b in the main body portion 3602a of the back right lower unit base 3602. There is.

Further, in a normal state, a production ball 3610 having a different color or pattern (in the present embodiment, a striped production ball and a non-striped production ball) is housed in each storage recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608. It is in a state of being. Further, in the normal state, the ball lift member 3670 is lowered and the opening 3670a is in a state of the collection position corresponding to the collection port 3602f of the back right lower unit base 3602.

In this normal state, first, as shown in FIG. 188 (b), the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630 is rotated in a predetermined direction by the lower right back second drive motor 3640. As a result, it can be suggested to the player that the lottery by the rotary lottery machine has started. Then, the rotation of the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630 is stopped so that the discharge port 3630b of the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630 coincides with the discharging portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b in the lower right back unit base 3602 (FIG. 189). (A)). In this example, the rotation direction of the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630 is adapted to rotate in an appropriate direction according to the game state.

Subsequently, the rotary cylinder 3608 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view by the lower right first drive motor 3622 on the back right, and the effect ball 3610 of a desired color is accommodated, and the accommodating recess 3608a is accommodated in the cylindrical portion of the lower right unit base 3602 on the back. It is rotated to a position substantially coincide with the discharge portion 3602c in 3602b and stopped (see FIG. 189 (B)).

In this state, when the lower right release solenoid 3624 is driven to rotate the release flap 3612 in the counterclockwise direction (release position) in front view, the lateral notch 3612c of the release flap 3612 becomes the lower right back. A production ball 3610 of a desired color, which coincides with the discharge portion 3602c in the cylindrical portion 3602b of the unit base 3602 and is housed in the storage recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608, has a side notch 3612c, a discharge portion 3602c, and a discharge port 3630b. Through, it is discharged to the outside of the back right lower right rotating decoration body 3630 (see FIG. 190 (C)).

When the effect ball 3610 is discharged from the accommodating recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608, the rotary cylinder 3608 and the discharge flap 3612 are each reciprocated a plurality of times within a predetermined angle range. As a result, by vibrating the accommodating recess 3608a and the side notch 3612c with a rattling motion, the dimensional error and positioning error of the discharging portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b, the rotating cylinder 3608, the discharging flap 3612, etc. are eliminated, and the inside of the accommodating recess 3608a is eliminated. The production ball 3610 can be reliably discharged from the discharge portion 3602c of the lower right unit base 3602.

Then, the effect ball 3610 discharged from the discharge port 3630b of the lower right back rotating decoration body 3630 is received by the ball receiving portion 3654b of the ball receiving member 3654 facing upward. At this time, since the outer circumference of the ball receiving member 3654 is covered with the transparent ball receiving cover 3662, even if the effect ball 3610 is vigorously released from the back right lower right rotating decoration body 3630, the ball receiving portion of the ball receiving member 3654 It is possible to reliably receive the ball at 3654b, and it is also possible to show the player the effect ball 3610 released to the ball receiving portion 3654b.

When a predetermined time has passed since the effect ball 3610 was released from the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630 to the ball receiving portion 3654b of the ball receiving member 3654, the lower right back collecting solenoid 3660 was driven to view the ball receiving member 3654 in front view. Rotate in the clockwise direction. By the rotation of the ball receiving member 3654, the effect ball 3610 received by the ball receiving portion 3654b is released to the collecting passage 3652b of the collecting unit cover 3652, and rolls the collecting passage 3652b to the lower right unit base on the back. It is sent to the collection port 3602f of 3602 (see FIG. 190 (D)).

When the effect ball 3610 is discharged from the ball receiving member 3654 to the collection passage 3652b side, the ball receiving member 3654 is tilted a plurality of times by driving the back right lower right collection solenoid 3660 a plurality of times. There is. As a result, the effect ball 3610 can be reliably discharged from the ball receiving portion 3654b of the ball receiving member 3654 to the collection passage 3652b side.

The effect ball 3610 sent to the collection port 3602f of the lower right unit base 3602 on the back right through the collection passage 3652b of the collection unit cover 3652 passes through the collection port 3602f and is arranged on the rear side and is a ball lift member located at the collection position. It enters the ball lift member 3670 through the opening 3670a of the 3670 (see FIG. 191 (a)). In this ball lift member 3670, the movable bottom plate 3672 on which the effect ball 3610 is placed is inclined so that the trailing edge side is lowered, and the effect ball 3610 that has entered the ball lift member 3670 is the ball lift member 3670. It is in contact with the rear wall and is held in the ball lift member 3670.

When the ball lift part 3670 is raised by the third drive motor 3676 at the lower right of the back while the effect ball 3610 is held in the ball lift member 3670, the effect ball 3610 held inside is also raised (FIG. 191). (B)). Then, just before the return position where the opening 3670a of the rising ball lift member 3670 substantially coincides with the return port 3602e of the back right lower unit base 3602, the working piece 3672a of the movable bottom plate 3672 is shown in the back right lower unit base 3602. The movable bottom plate 3672 rotates so that the trailing edge side is raised by abutting the contact portion (see FIG. 191 (c)). As a result, the effect ball 3610 on the movable bottom plate 3672 rolls forward in the ball lift member 3670, and the opening 3670a of the ball lift member 3670, the return port 3602e of the back right lower unit base 3602, and the discharge flap 3612 It will be returned to the rotary cylinder 3608 side through the rear notch 3612d.

Since each of the accommodating recesses 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608 has a size capable of accommodating only one effect ball 3610, the accommodating recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608 that coincides with the return port 3602e of the lower right unit base 3602 on the back. When the effect ball 3610 is accommodated inside, the effect ball 3610 returned from the ball lift member 3670 to the rotary cylinder 3608 side cannot enter the accommodating recess 3608a and is stopped at the rear side of the rotary cylinder 3608. It becomes. By rotating the rotary cylinder 3608 in this state, when the empty accommodating recess 3608a coincides with the return port 3602e, the effect ball 3610 located behind the rotary cylinder 3608 enters the empty accommodating recess 3608a and the accommodating recess 3608a. It will be housed in 3608a. By returning the effect balls 3610 emitted from the lower right back rotating decoration body 3630 one by one into the accommodating recess 3608a of the rotating cylinder 3608, the effect balls 3610 of a predetermined color can be returned into the original accommodating recess 3608a. it can.

Further, if the ball lift member 3670 is in a raised state when the effect ball 3610 reaches the recovery port 3602f of the lower right unit base 3602 on the back by rolling the recovery passage 3652b of the recovery unit cover 3652, the back Since the rear side of the collection port 3602f of the lower right unit base 3602 is closed by the front surface of the ball lift member 3670 (see FIG. 191 (c)), the effect ball 3610 cannot pass through the collection port 3602f. , It will be in a state of being stopped at the downstream end of the recovery passage 3652b. In this state, when the ball lift member 3670 is lowered to align the opening 3670a with the collection port 3602f, the effect ball 3610 enters the ball lift member 3670 through the collection port 3602f and is held.

Further, when the ball lift member 3670 is lowered, as shown in FIG. 191A, the backflow prevention front member 3686 and the backflow prevention rear member 3680 are located behind the return port 3602e of the back right lower unit base 3602. The effect ball 3610 is prevented from entering the rear side of the main body portion 3602a from the rotary cylinder 3608 side through the return port 3602e.

In the above example, after stopping the rotation of the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630, the rotating cylinder 3608 is rotated to form the accommodating recess 3608a in which the effect ball 3610 of a desired color is accommodated, and the lower right back unit base. Although the one is shown so as to match the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b in 3602, the rotating cylinder 3608 is rotated while the back right lower right rotating decoration body 3630 is rotating, and the effect ball 3610 of a desired color is accommodated. The accommodating recess 3608a may be aligned with the discharging portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b in the lower right back unit base 3602.

In this way, according to the back right lower right effect unit 3600 of this example, it is possible to perform a movable effect in which a predetermined effect ball 3610 actually appears by using a rotary lottery machine according to the game state. It is possible to present a more realistic production to the player as compared with the production by, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

[2-11. Liquid crystal display device]
Subsequently, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixing piece 1902 protruding outward from both the left and right sides, and is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixing piece 1902. It has become like.

Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted from the rear side into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010, and protrudes from the right side in the front view. One fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing portions 3010e on the left side of the rear view of the back box 3010, and the opposite fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the insertion slot formed by the lock mechanism 3050. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked and attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the lock mechanism 3050 downward to close the insertion slot.

Further, as shown in FIG. 118 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is viewed from the peripheral control board box 1910 containing the peripheral control unit 4140, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 194), and the like, and from the lower part of the peripheral control board box 1910. It has a volume 1912 that extends rearward. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 and the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 can be adjusted. It has become.

The liquid crystal display device 1900 is said to use a light-luminance white LED as a backlight.

[2-12. Movable production on the game board]
Next, the main movable effects of the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193. FIG. 192 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back-up effect unit. Further, FIG. 193 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the underside effect unit. In the game board 4 of this example, as shown in FIG. 114 and the like, in a normal state, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side through the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be visually recognized from the player side. It has become like.

Further, in the game board 4, in a normal state, the first elevating decorative body 3218 and the second elevating decorative body 3250 in the back-up effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 arranged above the liquid crystal display device 1900 are on the player side. It can be seen from. In a normal state, the back-up effect unit 3200 is arranged so that the lower portion of the second elevating decorative body 3250 slightly rests on the upper front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this normal state, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 provided on the second elevating decoration 3250 is partially visible from the lower side of the first elevating decoration 3218.

Further, in a normal state, the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630 and the ball receiving member 3654 of the lower right back effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 are located below the distribution space 2530 in the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. It is arranged so that it can be seen from the position to the player side. The ball receiving member 3654 of the lower right back effect unit 3600 is located behind a predetermined character body provided in the lower part of the center accessory 2500, and the predetermined character body is the ball receiving member 3654. It seems to support the ball receiving portion 3654b of the above.

As shown in FIG. 114 and the like, in a normal state, the pair of under-back side decorative units 3420 in the under-back effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are on the left and right outside of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the back-front decorative unit. It is located behind the distribution unit 2550 of the 3100 and the center accessory 2500 and the back right lower right effect unit 3600, respectively, so that it cannot be seen from the player side. Further, in a normal state, the back lower middle decoration body 3450, the back lower front middle decoration body 3506 and the back lower front side decoration body 3530 in the back lower production unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are below the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is located on the rear side of the decorative member that decorates the rear side of the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500, and is invisible to the player side.

In the game board 4 of this example, when the second elevating decoration body 3250 is moved from the normal state to the lowest lowered position by driving the back-up second drive motor 3234 of the back-up effect unit 3200, for example, FIG. 192 As shown in the above, the second elevating decoration body 3250 is located at the upper part of the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the entire display screen of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is on the player side under the first elevating decoration body 3218. You will be able to see from. In this state, the head of a predetermined character composed of the first elevating decoration body 3218 and the second elevating decoration body 3250 is in a state where its mouth is wide open, and the second liquid crystal display is displayed from inside the mouth. The entire device 3250 is visible to the player.

Further, from the normal state, the pair of back bottom rear side decorations 3420 are driven by the back bottom rear side drive motor 3404, the back bottom rear middle drive motor 3476, and the back bottom front drive motor 3508 in the back bottom production unit 3400. When the lower back middle decorative body 3450, the lower back front middle decorative body 3506, and the lower back front side decorative body 3530 are moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, they are formed in a substantially arc shape on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It seems that the pair of back lower rear side decorations 3420 are united in a ring shape, and the inside of the pair of back lower rear side decorations 3420 is filled with the raised back lower rear middle decoration 3450. Further, a pair of lower back front side decorations 3530 are diagonally upward from the left and right sides of the lower back front middle decoration 3506 on the front side of the pair of lower back side decorations 3420 and the lower back middle decoration 3450. It is located in a state of extending to (see FIG. 193). As a result, a predetermined character with a large semicircular background member as his back spreads his wings on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[3. Various boards]
Subsequently, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 194. FIG. 194 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of the main board 4000 and a group of the peripheral control boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of the main board 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls the game operation (progress of the game) and a payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of the game ball and the like. Further, the group of the peripheral control board 4010 is the peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 4100, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the command from the peripheral control board 4140. It includes a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 194, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), the main control input circuit 4100f to which the detection signals from various detection switches are input, and the main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. It includes a drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM 4100e (hereinafter, also referred to as "main control built-in RAM 4100e") built in the main control MPU 4100a. .. In addition to the built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter, also referred to as "main control built-in ROM 4100d") and the main control built-in RAM 4100e, the main control MPU 4100a has a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and prevents fraud. Functions etc. are also built-in.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a first start port sensor 3131 that detects a game ball received by the first start port 2101 and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received by the second start port 2102. The detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3133 that detects the game ball received into the 3132 and the general winning opening 2201 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, respectively, or the gate sensor 2302 and the general winning opening sensor 2123. , The count sensor 2122, the distribution detection sensor 2580, and the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 3134 attached to the back unit 3000, the panel relay board 3040 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b. It is designed to be input via.

The main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, thereby transmitting the start port solenoid 2114 and the attacker solenoid via the panel relay board 3040. A drive signal is output to the 2121 and the distribution drive motor 2558, and the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display are displayed via the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3040, and the function display board 1191. Outputs drive signals to the device 1186, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the second special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, and the round display 1190. Or

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3131, the second start port sensor 3132, the gate sensor 2302, and the count sensor 2122 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch. A contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 2123, 3133. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2301, so that the first start port sensor 3131, the second start port sensor 3132, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2302 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first start port sensor 3131, the second start port sensor 3132, and the gate sensor 2302. Further, when a big hit game state that is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count sensor 2122 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count sensor 2122 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensors 2123 and 3133 do not frequently detect the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 in which the game ball does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 2123, 3133.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or something. Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). The main control MPU 4100a will be described in detail later, but when it receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, it formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 851. The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. Described.) BC0 (see Exhibit Otsu 169) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated at the time of turning on the power, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

Further, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is output as a power failure warning. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 194, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of the game ball, etc., performs the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to the payout, the launch control by the launch solenoid 654, and the ball feed by the ball feed solenoid 585. The launch control unit 4120 that controls, the error LED display 4130 that displays the status of the pachinko game machine 1, the error release switch 860a for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and the prize ball tank. The 720, the tank rail 731, and the ball removing switch 860b for discharging the game ball in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starting the ball removing operation are provided.

[3-2A. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 194, the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The payout control MPU4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and the external watchdog timer 4111c for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU4111a is operating normally (hereinafter, "external WDT4111c"). The payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and the payout control input circuit 4111e for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. , Is equipped. In addition to the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") and RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), the payout control MPU4111a is used to prevent fraud. It also has built-in functions.

The payout control MPU4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or the main control board. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the 4100 being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the ball out switch 750. , The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the prize ball relay board 754.

A ball-out switch 750 that detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. .. The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed in the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 first passes through the sensor board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay board 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first generated by the payout control input circuit 4111e. Is input to the payout control MPU4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 that detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full is first the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

The payout control MPU4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the status of the pachinko game machine 1 with an error LED. A signal for displaying on the device 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko game machine 1 is issued to the payout control I / O port 4111b. It is serially transmitted to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4100, and the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the amusement park (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko game machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko game machine 1.

The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, "ball is seen". (Specifically, the payout rotating body 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740 based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752. And the game ball are engaged near the entrance to notify that the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it means that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically). Notifies that the counting sensor 751 has a problem based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the number "5" is displayed, it means that it is a "retry error" (specifically, Notifies that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value), and when the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, from the full tank detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal of, the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is notified that the stored game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected". Notifies that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means that it is "in stock" (specifically). Has notified that the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the prepaid card return request signal from the return switch 365b first pass through the frequency display board 365, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Is input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and this signal is used for the payout control I / O. It is received at port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU4111a. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining degree indicator 365c to the CR unit connection terminal. It is output to the board 874, the main relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the residual frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 194, the launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game region 1100 based on this clock signal, and this launch. It includes a firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game region 1100 per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

From the touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and the launch stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the launch control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and is input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input as a CR connection signal to the launch control input circuit 4120a and input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506 is first the handle device relay board 192 and then the main relay terminal. It is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via the plate 880.

Based on the signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512, the launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d launches a drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506. When the reference pulse is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e applies a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 585 via the main relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feed reference pulse is input. By outputting, the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, and the constant current is triggered by the completion of the input of the ball feeding reference pulse. By stopping the output of the ball feeding member 584, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see Exhibit Otsu No. 169) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. .. With the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU4111a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated at the time of turning on the power, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 194, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. It includes a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls drawing of the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[3-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 194, the peripheral control unit 4140 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 4010 performs the peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality performance. It includes a sound source IC 4140c to be performed, and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c is stored.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the lamp drive board 3041 or the game board. A motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to output the drive data on the game board side for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various production units provided in 4. Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive board 3045 and outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 and provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5. Door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to color LEDs, etc., and door-side drive light emission data composed of frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to peripheral panel Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted to the door frame base board 194 via the relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 or to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is liquid crystal. In addition to transmitting data from the serial I / O port for the control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, control signals (sound commands) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d are output to the sound source IC 4140c.

The detection signals from the various in-situ detection sensors for detecting the in-situ of the various production units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Has been done. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 are the door frame base substrate. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via 194, the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is monitored based on this operation signal. doing.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU4140a, and is provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. The lower speaker 821 controls the flow of music and sound effects according to various effects, and the door frame 5 is connected to the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base board 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are played from the provided speakers 130, 222, 262 and the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

In addition to the watchdog timer built into the peripheral control MPU 4140a (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in peripheral control"), the peripheral control unit 4140 includes an external watchdog timer (hereinafter, "external peripheral control") (not shown). It is also described as "WDT"), and the peripheral control MPU4140a diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k). ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, and the movable body drive command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010. , It is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 send a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. Output to the LED of each decorative board 214,216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided in 5, or output the lighting signal or blinking signal based on the received game board side lighting blinking command. It outputs to LEDs of each decorative board 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546, 3690, 3692, etc. provided in the game board 4. Further, the panel relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body to the dial drive motor provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882. It outputs to 414, each drive motor 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508, 3622, 3640, 3676, etc. provided in the game board 4, solenoids 3624, 3660, etc.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressure operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. Input is performed via the lamp drive board 3041 or the motor drive board 3045 mounted on the rear surface of the 3010.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and mounts the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the peripheral relay terminal board. The lower speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 from the side speaker 130 or the upper speaker 222, 262 of the door frame 5 via 882, or via the lamp drive board 3041 or the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Therefore, control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. that match various effects are played. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the game window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. Sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal to which the lower speaker 391 described later is added, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) is sent to the lower speaker 821 for bass. Therefore, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

[Measures to prevent abnormal noise]
The door frame 5 is equipped with various audio equipment, LEDs, sensors, and other equipment that require electric power, and a door frame base substrate 194 is attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 (FIG. 25). The door frame base board 194 includes side speakers 130, upper speakers 222 and 262 (FIGS. 29 and 32) of the left and right side decoration units, and lower speakers 821 (FIG. 67) in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It is connected to the bass speaker) (FIG. 89) and is also connected to the peripheral control board 4010 provided in the game board 4, and the audio signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 is amplified and output to each speaker. It is equipped with an amplifier circuit (digital amplifier circuit).

Further, on the door frame base board 194, wirings for connecting various audio equipment, LEDs, sensors, etc. to the payout control board 4110, peripheral control board 4010, etc. are aggregated and bundled, and then extended rearward. It is connected to the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 of the main body frame 3 (FIGS. 67 and 89). The rear side of the door frame base substrate 194 is covered with the door frame base substrate cover 195 (FIG. 23).

Further, in the place (rear side) where the door frame base board cover 195 is arranged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 or the game area 1100 even though it is fired by the hit ball launching device 650. A foul cover unit 540 (a molded product of transparent polycarbonate) that guides a game ball (foul ball) that has not reached to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 of the plate unit is provided in close proximity (FIG. 23).

Since the game ball (metal) passes through the ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 at a high speed while contacting the wall surface of the passage, electrostatic charges may be accumulated in the polycarbonate of this part and reach 10 kV. There is (at most 3-4 kV even if you feel pain due to the discharge of the accumulated electrostatic charge). Also, unlike metals, the electric charge accumulated in the resin escapes only in the immediate vicinity even if it is grounded, and most of it remains.

Then, due to electrostatic induction by this electric charge, a digital amplifier circuit (not shown) of the door frame base substrate 194 in the vicinity thereof may malfunction. In this case, an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period of time may be input to the voice coil of the speaker, or the audio signal from the digital amplifier circuit may be extremely amplified and exceed the appropriate amplification width (when the AC voltage becomes excessive). Occur. In that case, for example, a cracked sound such as rattling sound is generated from the speaker, or the sound reproduced by the speaker becomes a loud unpleasant sound (an abnormal sound is generated), which makes the player unpleasant sound. You will feel it. In addition, the speaker may be damaged, which is not good for the speaker. Although the digital amplifier circuit has a DC voltage cut function on the input side, it is usually not on the output side.

Since the woofer of the lower speaker 821 is hard to hear, there is a tendency to set a large output.

An embodiment described below detects whether or not the audio signal output from the door frame base board 194 to the lower speaker 821 is the above-mentioned abnormal audio signal, and if it is an abnormal audio signal, The present invention relates to an abnormal audio signal blocking substrate (described later) that blocks an abnormal audio signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

Regarding audio output, as described above, the peripheral control MPU4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc., and when various commands are received from the main control board 4100, these various commands are used. Based on this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c (FIG. 194).

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, the door frame base board 194, or the like. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speaker 821, the side speakers 130 provided on the door frame 5, and the upper speakers 222 and 262 (see FIGS. 194 and 196).

[Abnormal audio signal blocking board]
Next, the abnormal audio signal blocking board will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. FIG. 196 is a block diagram of a door frame base board 194, a peripheral relay terminal board 882, an abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, and a lower speaker 821. FIG. 197 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884.

As shown in FIG. 196, the door frame base board 194 arranged on the door frame 5 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 arranged on the main body frame 3 are connected by a harness 196, and are connected from the door frame base board 194 to the periphery. A + 24V voltage, a woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 amplified by the door frame base board 194, are output to the side relay terminal board 882, and are output to the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 through the harness 196. It is designed to be transmitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 196, in the main body frame 3, an abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 is provided between the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 and the lower speaker 821 housed in the speaker box 820, and the peripheral side relay terminal is provided. The plate 882 and the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 are connected by a speaker protection harness 883, and the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 and the lower speaker 821 are connected by a lower speaker harness 819.

In FIG. 197, from the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 to the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, the ground GND, + 24V voltage, and the woofer + signal and the woofer, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 output from the door frame base board 194, are transmitted. -The signal is relay-output and transmitted to the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883.

Further, the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 outputs the woofer + signal and the woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821, to the lower speaker 821, and is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. Has been done. In this way, the audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 through the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821.

By the way, it is desirable that the location of the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 in the main body frame 3 is a location that is not easily affected by electrostatic noise. In the present embodiment, the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 is arranged at a location far away from the foul cover unit 540, for example, inside the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. 67. In this way, by arranging the abnormal voice signal blocking board 884 in a place that is not easily affected by electrostatic noise, it is possible to stably suppress the input of an abnormal voice signal to the lower speaker 821.

[Circuit of abnormal audio signal cutoff board]
The abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 detects whether or not the audio signal supplied to the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 is an abnormal audio signal, and if it is an abnormal audio signal, it is abnormal. It blocks the audio signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

As shown in FIG. 197, the abnormal voice signal blocking board 884 is composed of an abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 that detects that the voice signal is an abnormal voice signal and outputs an abnormality detection signal, and an abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885. When it receives the output abnormality detection signal, it is provided with an abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895 that cuts off the supply of the abnormal voice signal to the lower speaker 821.

The + 24V voltage supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the + 24V supply line 886 on the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884. Further, the ground GND supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the ground line 887 on the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884.

The woofer + signal, which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two on the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, one is input to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the woofer + signal line 888, and the other is input to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895. It is input to the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885.

Further, the woofer signal, which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two on the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, and one is relayed on the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 through the woofer signal line 889. It is connected to the external lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. The other is input to the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885.

[Abnormal audio signal detection circuit]
The abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 includes a rectifying bridge circuit formed by connecting four diodes SD1 to SD4 in a bridge type, a resistor SR1 (47kΩ) arranged after the rectifying bridge circuit, and an electrolytic capacitor SC1 (in this embodiment, in this embodiment. It mainly comprises an infrared LED having a capacitance of 47 μF), a transistor STR1, a transistor STR2, and a photocoupler SPC1 (incorporating an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

The cathode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD2, and the other woofer + signal of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD4 and the anode terminal of the diode SD2. .. Further, the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD1, and the woofer signal of the other of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD1. ing.

Further, the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 and the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 are electrically connected, and the anode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD4 are electrically connected to form a rectifying bridge circuit. A + voltage line 890 that supplies a positive voltage rectified by the rectifying bridge circuit to the subsequent stage is connected to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2, while a rectifying bridge is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD4 to the subsequent stage. A 0V line 891 that supplies 0V whose negative voltage is cut by the circuit and whose voltage is substantially 0V is connected.

Then, in the subsequent stage of the rectifier bridge circuit, one end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, the other end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the-terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is connected to the 0V line 891. It is connected.

That is, the woofer + signal and the woofer signal rectified by the rectifying bridge circuit (the high and low peaks of the audio signal waveform are continuously connected to each other with 0V as the connection point) are electrolyzed via the resistor SR1. By being applied to the + terminal of the capacitor SC1, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak, and during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0V. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is designed to discharge. The time constants of charging and discharging in the series circuit (smoothing circuit) of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 are determined by the resistance value of the resistor SR1 and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

At the subsequent stage of the connection point of the resistor SR1 of the + voltage line 890, one end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and the other end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR1. The base terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the other end of the capacitor SC2, and is also connected to the other end of the resistor SR3 whose one end is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1. That is, the voltage of the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 via the resistor SR3. Further, the capacitor SC2 removes the ripple of the + voltage waveform and smoothes it.

At the subsequent stage of the connection point of the capacitor SC2 of the + voltage line 890, the collector terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and the woofer signal smoothed after rectification, that is, the + voltage is applied. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR2, the other end of the resistor SR2 is connected to one end of the resistor SR4, and the other end of the resistor SR4 is connected to the 0V line 891. The resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4 are voltage dividing resistors.

One end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4, the other end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1, and the anode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR6. , The other end of the resistor SR6 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2. Further, one end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2, and the other end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the 0V line 891.

That is, the voltage at one end of the resistor SR7 that appears based on the output voltage of the emitter of the transistor STR1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2.

On the other hand, in the subsequent stage of the connection point of the + voltage line 890 with the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the anode terminal of the diode SD5 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and the cathode terminal of the diode SD5 is the anode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1. It is connected to the. Further, the cathode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR2 is connected to the 0V line 891.

That is, when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on.

[Abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit]
The abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895 mainly includes a phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, a transistor STR3, and a relay SRL1. That is, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895 are connected through the photocoupler SPC1.

In the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895, the 24V supply line 886 is branched into two, one is connected to the collector terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 and the other is connected to the 8th terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1. Has been done. The emitter terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR8, the other end of the resistor SR8 is connected to one end of the resistor SR9, and the other end of the resistor SR9 is connected to the ground line 887. The resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9 are voltage dividing resistors.

The base terminal of the transistor STR3 for relay operation is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9, and one end of the capacitor SC3 whose other end is connected to the ground line 887 is connected. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the ground line 887, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the 1st terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 and the 3rd terminal (one of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1.

Further, the 4th terminal (the other side of the A contact) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the ground line 887. Further, the 5th terminal (one of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the woofer + signal line 888, and the 6th terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is the lower speaker harness 819 as an external output of the woofer + signal. It is connected to the external lower speaker 821 through.

Further, a varistor SZNR1 for inductive current bypass by self-induction action is connected in parallel between the 8th terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1 and the 1st terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 to form the 5th relay SRL1. A varistor SZNR2 for contact protection is connected in parallel between the terminal (one of the B contacts) and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1.

Since the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal voice signal blocking circuit 895 are signal-connected by the photocoupler SPC1, electrical noise does not directly enter the abnormal voice signal blocking circuit 895 from the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885. It has become like.

Next, the operation of the circuit of the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 configured as described above will be described.

[Operation when a normal voice signal is input] <Abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885>
When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage with a different peak of amplitude) is input, in the case of a woofer + signal in the rectifying bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 are conducted. In FIG. 197, a current flows through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 from top to bottom, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0 V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak.

When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having a different amplitude peak) is input, the voltage rise due to the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is not turned on and remains off.

Next, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0V, and the electric charge accumulated in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is transferred to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 through the resistor SR1.

In the case of a woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 are conductive, and in FIG. 197, a current flows from top to bottom through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 to reach the peak voltage of the peak from 0V of the + voltage waveform. During the period, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the voltage rise due to the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is not turned on and remains off.

Next, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0V, and the electric charge accumulated in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is transferred to the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 through the resistor SR1.

In this way, when a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the transistor STR1 of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 is maintained in the off state. Therefore, the infrared LED (photocoupler) of the transistor STR2 and the photocoupler SPC1 also keeps off, and the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 does not actually turn on.

<Abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895>
On the other hand, in the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895, the transistor STR3 also maintains the off state by keeping the photocoupler SPC1 in the off state. Further, the relay SRL1 is in an inactive state. Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in a non-excited state, and the B contact (contact is closed) between the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 is inactive, and the 3rd and 4th terminals are inactive. It is an A contact (contact is open). Therefore, the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 are in a conductive state, and the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819.

[When an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period of time is input] [Operation when an abnormal audio signal is input due to a fixed DC voltage] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal (for example, a constant voltage such as + 24V, + 18V, + 1.5V) due to a fixed DC voltage is continuously input, the diode SD2 and the diode in the rectifying bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885. The SD3 conducts, and in FIG. 197, a charging current flows from top to bottom through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 continues to be charged.

When an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the voltage rise at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 due to the increase in the charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 is applied over time. It approaches the constant voltage, and reaches the base terminal voltage that operates the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

When the transistor STR1 is turned on, a current flows through the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the emitter terminal of the transistor STR1, the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR4 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4) causes the current to flow. A current flows through the resistor SR5, the Zener diode SZD1, the resistor SR6, and the resistor SR7, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR7 (the voltage that appears at the connection point between the resistor SR6 and the resistor SR7) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2 in the subsequent stage. This turns on the transistor STR2.

When the transistor STR2 is turned on, the collector voltage of the transistor STR2 is lowered to the 0V line 891 side, and the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on through the diode SD5. That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. Here, turning on the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 corresponds to outputting the abnormality detection signal according to claim 1. The diode SD5 limits the current flowing through the infrared LED.

<Abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895>
When the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, and a current flows to the ground through the phototransistor, the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9 of the photocoupler SPC1. Here, turning on the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 means receiving an abnormality detection signal. The voltage applied to the resistor SR9 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3, and the transistor STR3 is turned on. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3 is smoothed by removing noise by the capacitor SC3.

When the transistor STR3 is turned on, the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, and the 1st terminal of the relay SRL1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, so that the 8th terminal and 1 of the relay SRL1 are pulled down. The coil inside the relay SRL1 between the terminal and the terminal is energized, and the relay SRL1 operates.

Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in the excited state, and the B contact (contact is open) between the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 in the operating state, and the operating state between the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal. It becomes A contact (contact is closed). Therefore, the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 shift to the cutoff state, and the output of the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off.

Further, the 3rd and 4th terminals of the relay SRL1 shift to the conductive state, the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 is pulled down to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 connected to the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 becomes the ground. It is pulled down and the transistor STR3 is turned off.

On the other hand, the 1st terminal of the relay connected in parallel to the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 is also pulled down to the ground, so that the current flows through the 8th terminal, the 1st terminal, the 3rd terminal, the 4th terminal, and the ground line 887. It shifts to the flowing conductive state and the energized state of the coil is maintained. Therefore, the output of the woofer + signal from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 remains cut off.

In this way, when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormality detection signal (photocoupler). Turns on). When the abnormal voice signal blocking circuit 895 receives the abnormality detection signal output from the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 (when the photocoupler is turned on), the relay SRL1 operates to supply the abnormal voice signal to the lower speaker 821. To shut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the speaker from being damaged due to the continuous application of a fixed DC voltage to the speaker.

In the above-described embodiment, when an abnormal sound is input, the energized state of the coil of the relay SRL1 is maintained, and the output of the woofer + signal from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is kept cut off. Ultimately, safety measures are taken with the highest priority being to prevent damage to the speaker. Therefore, when the cause of the abnormal audio signal can be grasped by the staff or the like, or when the audio output stop state is confirmed, the operating state of the relay SRL1 is released by turning on the power of the gaming machine again. It is possible to return to the normal initial state.

[Operation when an abnormal voice signal is input due to an excessive AC voltage] <Abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal due to an excessive AC voltage is input, that is, when the audio signal is extremely amplified and an excessive AC voltage exceeding the appropriate amplification width is input, for example, in the case of a woofer + signal, The diode SD2 and the diode SD3 are conductive, a charging current flows from top to bottom through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 197, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0 V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak. Will be done.

Further, for example, in the case of a woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 are conducted, and a charging current flows from top to bottom through the resistor SR1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 197, and the charging current flows from 0V to the peak of the + voltage waveform. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period up to the peak voltage.

In this case, since the peak voltage of the abnormal voice signal is extremely higher than the peak voltage of the normal voice signal, the resistor SR1 even if the width of the mountain-shaped waveform is the same between the normal waveform and the abnormal waveform. A charging current rapidly flows through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is rapidly charged.

Therefore, the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 increases rapidly. Due to this rapid increase in electric charge, the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 rises and reaches the base terminal voltage at which the transistor STR1 is operated. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

The operation of the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 and the operation of the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895 after the transistor STR1 is turned on are the same as the operation when the abnormal voice signal due to the fixed DC voltage described above is input. Yes, I will explain it briefly.

When the transistor STR1 is turned on, the transistor STR2 is turned on, and when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. In the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895, when the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the transistor STR3 is turned on, and when the transistor STR3 is turned on, the relay SRL1 is activated and the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 are cut off. The state shifts to the state, and the output of the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the generation of abnormal sound due to an abnormal voice signal having an excessive AC voltage that is extremely amplified and exceeds the appropriate amplification width. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from making an unpleasant sound.

[3-4. LCD control unit]
Next, as shown in FIG. 194, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 on the peripheral control board 4010 includes the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and various processing programs. A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b that stores various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c that displays and controls the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 described above, and a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is provided with a character ROM 4150d for storing various data of the above, and a character RAM 4150e for transferring and copying various data stored in the character ROM 4150d.

This liquid crystal control MPU4150a has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to control the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the first. (Ii) Drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 3252 is performed. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU4150a receives an execution signal described later from the VDP4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, as well as control data (display commands) from the peripheral control board 4010 and corresponding schedule data. A plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e is defined in advance for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The liquid crystal control MPU4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP4150c, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU4150a is input, the VDP4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU4150a, the VDP4150c outputs an executing signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU4150a. The VDP4150c employs a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing the left-right direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the line buffer, and one line of drawing data held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. This is a method of outputting to the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the character ROM 4150d, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, when displaying various people on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are arranged on the screen and have a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "sprite superposition order"), and the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device is set. It is drawn on 3252.

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it can be expressed using a total of 6 characters arranged in, for example, 2 horizontal × 3 vertical. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 intersect with a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels in order from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in the direction of movement. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1900, the main scanning is from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. And sequentially output to each line of pixels. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 shift to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, this next line Based on the drawing data of the minutes, the main scanning is sequentially output to the pixels of one line from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[3-5. Control processing on the main control board]
Next, an example of the control process executed on the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 to 208. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process. FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the starting opening winning process. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during fluctuation.

Further, FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game preparation process. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot game mode determination process, which is one of the jackpot game preparation processes. FIG. 208 is an example of a table used for the jackpot game mode determination process when the jackpot flag is ON. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100.

[About main processing]
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 198, when the supply of electric power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU4100a executes the power-on process (step S1). In this power-on processing, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a) is normal (whether it is the set value at the time of power failure), and if it is normal. For example, according to the backup data stored in the RAM, the process of returning to the state at the time of power failure (processing at the time of power recovery) is executed, and if the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the device settings around the CPU (normal initial settings). , Setting the interruption timing, etc.).

A game state determination process, which will be described later, is executed as one of the above-mentioned power recovery processes.

Further, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM as backup data. Further, if the RAM clear switch 4100c (FIG. 194) instructing the clearing of the backup data stored in the RAM in the power-on processing is on, the RAM is cleared and the normal initial setting is performed. Further, in the power-on processing, if the backup data is not saved in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and the normal initial setting is performed.

Further, in the power-on processing, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been started to the peripheral control unit 4140 when the normal initial setting is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 of the progress of the game such as the activation of the main control board 4100 and the game state when the power is cut off. Even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again supplied. When the supply is started, the power-on processing is executed.

When the power-on processing is completed, the main control MPU4100a starts a loop processing for repeatedly executing each processing for the game. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate at different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied to the pachinko machine 1 from the external power supply is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board, and then each of them is used. It supplies the equipment.

Then, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure warning signal indicating that the power supply voltage supply from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 is stopped is output. Will be sent. Then, when the power failure warning signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, the power failure occurrence processing is executed (step S4).

In this power failure processing, when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the gaming machine is in the state before the power failure. This is a process of storing the state at the time of power failure in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) as backup data in order to start from. The details of the processing will be described later, but in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing when a power failure occurs is not an interrupt processing but a branch processing executed immediately after the start of the loop according to the presence or absence of detection of a power failure warning signal. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

By the way, when the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power source is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step). S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

[Processing when power is cut off]
Next, as shown in FIG. 199, the power outage occurrence process is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. The main control MPU4100a first sets the interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether the contents of the RAM before the power failure are retained at the time of power recovery.

Subsequently, the main control MPU4100a sets a default value indicating that the power failure occurrence processing has been performed in the backup flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM (step S4c). After completing the above processing, the main control MPU4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d), enters an infinite loop, and prepares for stopping the power supply.

In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power outage or the like (hereinafter referred to as "instantaneous power failure"), the process when a power failure occurs is actually started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, the above process may not be able to recover from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is updated periodically while the processing is normally performed, but the processing is started when a power failure occurs and the update is not performed. As a result, even if the process when the power is cut off occurs due to the momentary power failure and the infinite loop is entered, the reset is performed after a predetermined period of time elapses, and the main control MPU 4100a is started in the same process as when the power is turned on.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, in the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms interrupt cycle by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during the execution of the main process, as shown in FIG. 200. In addition, the main control MPU4100a executes the processes of steps S11 to S19 after executing the register save process (step S10). In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signal of the above-mentioned switch (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed.

In the timer subtraction process of step S12, it is determined whether or not the timer values of various timers are set, and if the timer values are set, the timer values are subtracted by 1. For example, when "500" is set in the timer as a value corresponding to 2 seconds (2000 ms), the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the timer value is set to 1 each time the timer subtraction process is performed in the 4 ms cycle. When the subtraction is performed and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the time is up and the time is accurately measured.

In the random number update process 1 of step S13, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated by the random number update process 1 and the random number updated by the random number update process 2 described above are different. The random number will be described later, but the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may also be updated in the random number update process 1.

In the payout operation process of step S14, a payout command for instructing the payout of the game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

Further, in the special control process of step S15, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed on the special symbol display 1185 and 1186 based on the progress state of the game, and the special electric accessory (that is, the attacker solenoid 2121) is used. The opening / closing member 2106) that opens / closes the large winning opening 2103 is controlled, and a process of changing the opening / closing state of the large winning opening 2103 is executed.

In the normal control process of step S16, the normal symbol is changed based on the progress state of the game, and the normal electric accessory (that is, a pair of movable pieces 2105 that open and close the second starting port 2102 by the starting port solenoid 2344) is controlled. Then, a process of changing the open / closed state of the second starting port 2102 is executed.

In the output data setting process of the following step S17, a process of outputting a state signal indicating the game state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer, etc.) and a drive signal are output to a special figure start storage display (not shown). Execute processing, etc.

In the command transmission process in step S18, a process of transmitting an effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 is executed. Further, in the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed.

When the processes of steps S11 to S18 are executed, the register reset process (step S19) is executed, the timer interrupt process is completed, and the determination process of whether or not the power failure warning signal of step S2 is detected and step S3 Return to the loop process configured by the random number update process 2 of.

Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the above-mentioned random number update process 1 (step S12) and random number update process 2 (step S3) will be described. In this embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, a random number for jackpot determination used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (also called a jackpot determination or a jackpot lottery), and a jackpot game state in the jackpot determination are used. Random numbers for jackpot symbols used to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to generate, and whether to perform high-expected effects such as reach production when it is judged that it is not a jackpot (missing) in the jackpot lottery Reach judgment random numbers used for judgment (reach judgment) of whether or not, and fluctuation display pattern random numbers used for determining the fluctuation display pattern (variation time, etc.) of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 1185, 1186. (Random number for variable time), round determination random number used to determine the opening mode (number of rounds, etc.) of the big winning opening 2103 in the jackpot game (special bonus game), a pair of movable opening and closing of the second starting opening 2102 There is a random number for normal hit determination used for determining whether or not to control the piece 2105 in the open state (normal lottery hit determination).

In addition, the random number for the jackpot symbol is also used for determining the state type of the jackpot (whether or not to activate the probability fluctuation function or the time saving function) that is performed when it is determined that the jackpot has been won.

Of these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, whether or not to control the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the round determination random number, and the pair of movable pieces 2105 related to the occurrence of the jackpot game state to the open state. The random numbers for judgment of hitting the normal symbols involved are updated. That is, the random numbers used for the occurrence of the jackpot game state and the determination as to whether or not to control the pair of movable pieces 2105 to the open state are updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability of each random number in a predetermined period (probability of determining that a jackpot game state is generated, probability of determining that a pair of movable pieces 2105 is controlled in an open state) can be made constant. , It is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the jackpot game state is generated, the reach determination random number not related to the normal lottery, the variable display pattern random number, and the like are updated.

Although not shown in FIG. 200, in the timer interrupt process, the distribution drive motor 2558 that rotates the distribution unit 2550 (more specifically, the distribution valve 2551 fixed to the front end of the distribution shaft 2552). Drive control processing is also performed.

[About special control processing]
Next, the special control process will be described with reference to FIG. 201. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process.

In this special control process, first, the first and second starting port winning processes (step S110) are performed. In the first and second starting port winning processes, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102. Then, after the first and second start opening winning processes (step S110) are performed, among the plurality of processes (steps S120 to S230) shown in the figure, the process according to the state of the process flag is selectively selected. Will be done.

More specifically, when the first and second start opening winning processes (step S110) are completed, it is first determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120), and if the processing flag is 0 (step S120). YES) in step S120) and the fluctuation start process (step S130) are executed. In this fluctuation start processing (step S130), the processing flag is updated to "1" after the setting for starting the fluctuation display of the special symbol is made based on the result of the lottery for winning the jackpot. ..

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 (first special symbol display 1185 or second special symbol display). After the variation time from the start of the variation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) to the stop display in any of 1186 is determined), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). As a result, if the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the variable processing (step S180) is executed. In this variable processing, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and based on the time-out, the special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 is used. Stop the variable display of the symbol. After that, when it is determined in the fluctuation start process (step S130) that the jackpot has been won, the process selection flag is updated to "3". On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot has been lost (missing), the processing selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next timer interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing (step S130) is restarted.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S170), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S190). As a result, if the processing flag is 3 (YES in step S190), the jackpot game preparation process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game preparation process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to perform a process of determining the mode of the jackpot game, and the determined mode of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds). ) Is set, and the accessory continuous operation device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is activated to update the processing flag to "4". On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

If the processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S190), the jackpot game processing (step S210) is executed assuming that the processing flag is 4. In this jackpot game process, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled based on the mode of the jackpot game set in the jackpot game mode determining process (step S607). Further, when the jackpot game is completed, the processing flag is updated to "0" after the processing for stopping the operation of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device is performed. That is, in this case, in the next timer interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing (step S130) is restarted.

As described above, when any of the processes of step S130, step S150, step S180, step S200, and step S210 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag, the special control process is terminated.

[About the first and second start entrance winning process]
Next, the first and second starting port winning processes (processes in step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. 202. FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing an example of the first and second starting port winning processes.

In the first and second starting port winning processes (step S110), the processing related to determining whether or not the game ball has been won in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 and the winning process are largely performed. On the condition that it is determined that there was a problem, the process for updating the pending state of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is performed.

Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 3132. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second starting port sensor 3132, it is determined that the game ball has won the second starting port 2102 (YES in step S201), and then The process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second special symbol lottery (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbols, etc.) are acquired, and a second random number provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a) is provided. It is determined whether or not the value of the hold number counter is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold count counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU4100a first, as the second start hold storage process (step S203), various data (random numbers for jackpot determination, for jackpot symbols) acquired by winning a game ball in the second start port 2102. Random numbers, etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of holding. Next, as the hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM.

In the process of step 203, a winning notification command indicating that the game ball has won the second starting port 2102 (more accurately, the type of special symbol, the holding order, etc.) is set, and thus The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-mentioned command transmission process (step S18). In such a configuration, through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140, when the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like displays the hold display on the second starting port 2102 side, it can be quickly updated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S201 that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 3132 is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second hold count counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the value is 4, then, as the process of step S205, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 3131. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the first starting port sensor 3131, it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 2101 (YES in step S205), and then the next step. The process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first special symbol lottery (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbols, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU4100a is set. Judgment is made as to whether or not it is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the first hold count counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU4100a first, as the first start hold storage process (step S207), various data (random number for jackpot determination, random number for jackpot symbol) acquired by winning a prize in the first start port 2101. Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the type of special symbol and the holding order. Next, as the hold history update process (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM.

Also in the process of step 207, a winning notification command indicating that the game ball has won the first starting port 2101 (more accurately, the type of the special symbol, the holding order, etc.) is set, and thus the winning notification command is set. The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-mentioned command transmission process (step S18). In such a configuration, through control by the peripheral control unit 4140, it is possible to quickly update the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like even when the hold display on the first starting port 2101 side is displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of step S205, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the first starting port 2101, or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first hold number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the value has reached 4, the first and second starting port winning processes are terminated at this point.

Further, as will be described later, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102, the big hit is combined with the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number. Random numbers for determining the game mode (for example, random numbers for determining the number of rounds) are not acquired. Therefore, the random number for determining the jackpot game mode is not acquired in this way, and the opening mode at the jackpot 2103 remains undecided (the middle stage of the series of lottery processing related to the execution of the jackpot game), and the special symbol The game is advanced by determining the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol. The random number for determining the jackpot game mode is used for the jackpot game mode determination process by being acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) after the special symbol is stopped. (See FIG. 207).

In this embodiment, after the winning process for the second starting port 2102 (steps S201 to S204) is executed, the winning process for the first starting port 2101 (steps S205 to step S208) is executed. There is. However, instead of this, there may be a mode in which the winning process for the first starting port 2101 is executed and then the winning process for the second starting port 2102 is executed.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a may execute the advance determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and further transmit a command indicating the result of the advance determination process to the peripheral control unit 4140 as a winning notification command. The advance determination process is performed prior to the lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, the jackpot lottery, the probability variation lottery, and the determination of the variable display pattern described later), and the lottery result is determined in advance. Is. The advance determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the advance determination table. The advance determination table is the same table as the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the advance judgment process, by comparing the random number with the advance judgment table, the lottery result (win / miss of big hit, type of big hit, variable display pattern, etc.) when a lottery using the random number is performed is judged. (The determination made prior to the lottery in this way is also called "look-ahead determination"). Peripheral control unit 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received prize notification command (preceding determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect is "look-ahead". Also called "directing").

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the preceding determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the contents of the prior determination table may be different from the contents of the table used for the lottery.

[About fluctuation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 203. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation start processing.

In the fluctuation start process (step S130) executed when the process flag is “0”, the main control MPU4100a first sets the values of the two hold count counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 (first start memory). It is determined whether or not both the number and the second start storage number) are “0” (step S301). Here, the values in the two hold number counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 are the disturbances stored in the storage areas (special symbol hold storage means 4214 and 4224) related to the first start storage and the second start storage. Each of them indicates the number of numerical values. Therefore, if the values of the hold number counters are all "0" in this step S301 (YES), the variation processing of the first special symbol and the variation processing of the second special symbol are related. It is determined that none of the start conditions are satisfied, the variation start process is exited, the special control process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, if neither the first start memory number nor the second start memory number is "0" (NO in step S301), it is determined that the start condition is satisfied, and the jackpot lottery that is in the pending state is executed. In order to update the order of the above, shift processing is performed in the special symbol holding storage means 4214 and 4224 (steps S302 to S310).

Incidentally, the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 are each provided with four storage areas. In each of these storage areas, a random number storage area for jackpot determination in which random numbers for jackpot determination are stored, and random number storage for jackpot symbols in which random numbers for jackpot symbols, reach determination random numbers, variable display pattern random numbers, etc. are stored. Areas are provided respectively.

That is, the main control MPU4100a appropriately manipulates the random numbers stored in the storage means 4214 and 4224 as shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area when the special symbol fluctuates. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there is a game in which a big hit is won in the lottery process on the first special symbol side and a big hit is won in the lottery process on the second special symbol side. There is no difference in the expected value of the profit given to the person (such as the number of prize balls that can be obtained).

In the shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, the execution of the lottery of the first special symbol is always postponed, and the lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 2102 (the lottery of the second special symbol) is performed. The random numbers stored in the storage means 4214 and 4224 are manipulated so that all of them are digested first.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 203, in the shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, first, as the processing of step S302, the second special symbol display 1186 on the side that is preferentially digested. It is determined whether or not the value (second start storage number) of the hold number counter corresponding to is "0", that is, whether or not a random number is stored in the storage area of the second special symbol hold storage means 4224. As a result, when it is determined that the random number is stored in the storage area of the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 (NO in step S302), the random number related to the second special symbol is read from the storage area and stored. Acquire (step S303). That is, as will be described later, the random numbers read in this way (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbols, random numbers for reach determination, random number of variation display pattern) are not only processed for the lottery of jackpots, but also the variation pattern (variation) of the special symbol. A game to the second starting port 2102 by being subjected to a process for setting the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2106, a process for setting the gaming state, and the like. The second starting game can be advanced with the winning of the ball.

Next, the main control MPU4100a sets various random numbers stored in each nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas in order to update the digestion order related to the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side. Each shifts to the first storage area (step S304). As a result, at least the storage area becomes free, and new start information (holding) for the second special symbol can be stored in the free storage area.

After that, the main control MPU4100a sets the special symbol variation flag to "1" so that the game on the second special symbol side (second start game) is in progress (step S305). ). Further, in order to update the number of reservations related to the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side, the number of reservations counter corresponding to the second special symbol is subtracted by "1" (step S306). At this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp 1187 so that the number of holds for the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side updated in this way is reflected in the lighting mode of the second special symbol storage display 1187. Is done. The special symbol variation flag set to "1" in this way is reset after the variation start processing is completed, for example, when the processing flag is updated to "0".

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 203, when it is determined in the process of step S302 that the random number is not stored in the storage area of the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 (YES in step S302), the second (I) A random number related to the first special symbol is read from the storage area of the special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and acquired (step S307). That is, as will be described later, the random numbers read in this way are processed not only for the lottery of big hits, but also for the setting of the variation pattern of the special symbol, the processing for setting the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2106, and the setting of the gaming state. The first starting game can be advanced with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 by being subjected to the processing related to the above.

Next, the main control MPU4100a sets various random numbers stored in each nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas in order to update the digestion order related to the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side. Each shifts to the first storage area (step S308). As a result, at least the storage area becomes free, and new start information (holding) for the first special symbol can be stored in the free storage area.

After that, the main control MPU4100a sets the special symbol variation flag to "2" so that the game on the first special symbol side (first starting game) is in progress (step S309). ). Further, in order to update the number of holdings related to the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side, the number of holdings counter corresponding to the first special symbol is subtracted by "1" (step S310). At this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp 1184 so that the number of holds for the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side updated in this way is reflected in the lighting mode of the first special symbol storage display 1184. Is done. Similarly, the special symbol variation flag set to "2" is reset after the variation start processing is completed, for example, when the processing flag is updated to "0".

After that, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation function is operating, that is, whether or not the probability fluctuation state is high (step S312), and if it is not in the probability fluctuation state (NO in step S312), the probability fluctuation function is not activated. The jackpot judgment table at the time, that is, the table in which the probability of becoming a jackpot is set low is selected, while in the case of the probability fluctuation state (YES in step S312), the table when the probability fluctuation function is activated, that is, the jackpot is obtained. Select a table with a high probability. In this example, when the probability fluctuation function is not activated (that is, normal time), the probability of becoming a big hit is set to 1/320, and when the probability fluctuation function is activated (that is, when the probability is high), the probability of becoming a big hit is set. Is set to 10/320.

After any table is selected in the process of step S313 or step S314, the jackpot determination random number related to any special symbol acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307 based on the table is a jackpot. It is determined whether or not the random number (big hit value) corresponds to (step S315). Then, in the case of a jackpot value (YES in step S315), the jackpot is probable based on the random number for the jackpot symbol related to any of the special symbols also acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307. It is determined whether or not the variable function or the time saving function is activated (state type related to the game state) (step S316). As a result, the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot state type determined in the process of step S316 is set to the ON state (set) (step S317), and the process proceeds to step S318.

The jackpot symbol random number is, for example, a random number from 0 to 9, and the jackpot symbol random number obtained from the random numbers is, for example, 0, 1, 3, 5, 6, 7 or 9. Is determined to be a jackpot of a type that activates the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function in step S316, and a flag corresponding to the jackpot state type is turned on in step S317. At this time, when the acquired jackpot symbol random number is particularly 7, not only whether or not it is a jackpot of the type that activates the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function, but also a jackpot symbol random number other than 7 (0 to 6, Turn on the jackpot flag of a specific type so that it can be distinguished from the case where 8 and 9) are acquired.

However, the main control MPU4100a according to this embodiment leaves the lottery related to the mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game as a process that has not yet been performed in the process of step S316. Then, as will be described later, the lottery is in an unexecuted state until after the special symbol (identification symbol) is stopped and displayed, the game ball passes through the gate 2575 and a random number for determining the jackpot game mode is acquired. By maintaining it, a part of the lottery process (for example, the lottery related to the number of rounds) of the series of lottery processes (game lottery related to the progress of the game) related to the execution of the jackpot game has not been performed yet. Under the stage of, the fluctuation of the special symbol is started and stopped.

In such a configuration, a lottery process related to a mode (for example, the number of rounds) of a jackpot game that can affect the profit itself that the player can enjoy until the special symbol is stopped based on the winning of the jackpot (special hit). Is left in an unexecuted state without being performed.

That is, in this case, even if the special symbol is stopped based on the winning of the jackpot, the series of lottery processing (game lottery related to the progress of the game) related to the execution of the jackpot game is not completed and the processing stage (winning) is still in the middle. It will be maintained in a state where it is impossible to execute the game after winning because the execution mode of the post-game has not been decided yet.

Moreover, the processing stage in the middle of the game lottery is based on the winning of the jackpot because the game ball can be maintained until the game ball is newly launched by the player and the game ball is accepted by the gate 2575. Even after the special symbol is stopped, until the jackpot game is started, the expected production of the result of the above game lottery is performed without the information being exposed by, for example, the round display 1190. This makes it possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the jackpot game is actually executed.

If the processing flag is updated to [1] in step S318, the processing of step S301 is not performed unless the processing flag is updated to [0]. Therefore, in this case, the start condition is not satisfied and the start is not established. Become.

On the other hand, if the acquired random number is a loss that is not a jackpot value (NO in step S315), the process proceeds to step S318, the processing flag is updated to "1", and the fluctuation start processing is terminated.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of whether the lottery is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the random number for the jackpot symbol is, for example, 0 to 9 as described above. A random number value to be generated is prepared, and in the process of step S303 or step S307, one of these random number values is acquired as a value of a random number for a jackpot symbol. Then, the acquired random number value is subjected to a process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot state type that activates the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function in the process of step S316.

However, in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S607) described later, a 16-round jackpot game in which opening and closing of the opening / closing member 2106 is repeated over a large number of rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment) in a predetermined opening / closing pattern and opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2106 are performed. A 9-round jackpot game that repeats over a medium number of rounds (9 rounds in this embodiment) with a predetermined opening and closing pattern, and a small number of rounds (2 rounds in this embodiment) that repeats opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2106 2 It is supposed to be decided as one of the round jackpot games.

The predetermined opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 2106 is that a predetermined long time (for example, 26 seconds to 33 seconds) elapses after the opening / closing member 2106 is changed from the closed state to the open state, or a predetermined number (for example, 9). This is a pattern in which the opening / closing member 2106 is returned to the closed state when any of the conditions that the game ball of (2) wins the large winning opening 2103 is satisfied.

Therefore, as the number of rounds in which the opening / closing member 2106 is repeatedly executed in a predetermined opening / closing pattern increases, a large number of prize balls (about 1750 in the present embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player. .. In the jackpot game mode determination process in the present embodiment, a lottery for the number of rounds repeatedly executed in the jackpot game is performed, but a plurality of prize balls that can be obtained by the player differ in degree. It is not limited to this as long as it is determined to be one of the jackpot game modes. For example, instead of the mode of the jackpot game that is repeatedly performed over a plurality of rounds in a predetermined opening / closing pattern, as a mode of the jackpot game in which the opening / closing member 2106 is opened for a long time although the number of times the opening / closing member 2106 is opened is one. May be good.

[About fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, a variation pattern setting process in which a variation pattern of a special symbol is set based on the result of a lottery (step S315) for winning a big hit will be described. FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process.

As shown in FIG. 204, in the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is “1”, the main control MPU4100a first sets the jackpot flag to “ON” as the process of step S401. Judge whether or not. Then, as a result, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is "ON" (YES in step S401), the jackpot fluctuation pattern table setting process described later is performed so that the fluctuation pattern when the jackpot is won is set. (Step S402).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S401 that the jackpot flag is not "ON", it is next determined whether or not to perform the reach effect as the process of step S403. As a result, when it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed (YES in step S403), the reach loss variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the variation pattern of the reach effect is set, although it is a loss (step S404). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S403 that the reach effect is not performed, the non-reach loss variation pattern table setting process is performed as the process of step S405 so that the loss effect is performed without performing the reach effect. I do.

The table set in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern table setting process is prepared in such a way that it is associated with each of a plurality of gaming states. For example, in the normal gaming state, the number of holdings is a predetermined value or more. At some point, shortening fluctuations are made.

Then, when the selection table related to the fluctuation pattern is set in any of the processes of step S402, step S404, and step S405, the main control MPU4100a then performs the set selection table as the process of step S410. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on. Next, as the process of step S411, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol thus determined is set as an effect command, and the winning information command (winning or the like for a big hit) is set.

Further, the value of the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is set to ON (step S413). When this special symbol LED operation flag is set to ON, the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol is based on the value of the special symbol fluctuation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The variable display related to the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs as the display 1186 is started. After that, the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414), and the variation pattern setting process is completed.

By the way, the fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S18) shown in FIG. 200 as an effect command set in the process of step S411. .. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the jackpot lottery is shown based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the winning information command through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. Display effects will be performed.

[Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the variable processing (step S180) executed when the processing flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 205, in the variable processing (step S180), the main control MPU4100a first sets the variable time in the timer in the processing of the above step S412 (see FIG. 204) as the processing of the step S501. Determines if the time is up. If the fluctuation time set in the timer has not timed up (NO in step S501), the processing during fluctuation is terminated.

If the fluctuation time set in the timer is timed up (YES in step S501), the special figure LED operation flag set to ON in the process of step S413 is set to OFF (step S502). When this special symbol LED operation flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol is based on the value of the special symbol fluctuation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The variation display (variation of the special symbol) related to the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs as the display 1186 is terminated. Further, in order to end the display effect of the jackpot lottery on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a confirmation stop command indicating to the peripheral control unit 4140 that the effect result of the display effect should be confirmed and displayed. Is set (step S503). The fixed stop command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S18) shown in FIG. 200. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect result in the display effect is confirmed and displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S504). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S504), the processing flag is updated to "3" as the special symbol is in the processing stage where the fluctuation is stopped so as to indicate that the jackpot has been won (step S505). , Ends the processing during the change. Although not shown in the flowchart, the initial value "0" is set in the identification flag described later together with the process of updating the processing flag in step S505 to "3".

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is not ON and the jackpot is lost (NO in step S504), it is assumed that the special symbol is in the processing stage where the fluctuation is stopped so as to indicate that the jackpot was lost. Is updated to "0" (step S506), and the processing during the change is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation related to the special symbol is performed on condition that the interrupt is suspended and digested in the variation start process in step S130.

[About jackpot game preparation process]
Next, the jackpot game preparation process (step S200) executed when the process flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game preparation process.

As shown in FIG. 206, when the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter, simply referred to as the main control MPU) starts the jackpot game preparation process (step S200), it first determines whether or not the identification flag is 0 (step S621). ). As for the value of the identification flag, 0 is set in the identification flag when the processing flag is updated to "3" as described above.

Here, the identification flag is a flag for identifying whether the main control MPU branches to any of the processes in the jackpot game preparation process, in other words, for identifying the game state in the jackpot game preparation process. It is a flag, "0" means the initial setting, "1" specifies the explanation interval production, and "2" specifies the jackpot game mode determination process. 3 ”defines the jackpot start interval production.

When the jackpot game preparation process is executed for the first time, as a result of the identification flag being set to 0, the main control MPU determines that step S621 is YES, proceeds to step S622, and sets an explanatory interval effect command (step S622). ), Set the explanatory interval effect timer (step S623), set the identification flag to 1 (step S624), exit the jackpot game preparation process, and return to the timer interrupt process routine. The timer value set in the explanatory interval effect timer is decremented by 1 in a 4 ms cycle in the timer subtraction process in step S12 of FIG. 200.

The explanatory interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S18) shown in FIG. 200. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the explanatory interval effect display is performed through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

Explanation The interval effect is when a display effect indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and then the big hit is not a specific type of big hit (that is, a normal type big hit). This is an effect in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 explains the game procedure until the jackpot game is actually started. When the jackpot is a jackpot of a specific type, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with a display effect indicating that the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed in addition to the display effect indicating that the jackpot is a jackpot.

The next processing cycle of the jackpot game preparation processing is 4 ms later. As a result of the processing flag being "3" and the identification flag being set to 1, in the jackpot game preparation process of the next cycle, step S621 is determined to be NO, and the process proceeds to step S625. In step S625, it is determined whether or not the value of the identification flag is 1 (step S625). In this case, since 1 is set in the identification flag, it is determined that step S625 is YES, and the process proceeds to step S626 to determine whether or not the explanatory interval effect has timed up (step S626). Description If the interval effect is not timed up, step S626 is determined to be NO, the jackpot game preparation process is exited, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process routine.

Hereinafter, step S621 is determined to be NO, step S625 is determined to be YES, and step S626 is determined to be NO, based on the processing flag value "3" and the identification flag value 1 until the time-up of the explanatory interval effect is reached. The processing routine for determining that is repeated.

Then, when the explanatory interval effect is timed up, step S626 is determined to be YES, and the operation of the condition device is started as one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, assuming that the explanatory interval effect is completed ( Step S627). Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving function is operating (step S628), and when the time saving function is operating (step S628 is determined as YES), the time saving function is based on the start of the operation of the condition device. The operation is stopped (step S629) and the process proceeds to step S630, while when the time saving function is not operating (step S628 is determined to be NO), step S629 is skipped and the process directly proceeds to step S630. When the process proceeds to step S630, the identification flag is set to 2 (step S630), the jackpot game preparation process is exited, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process routine.

As a result of the processing flag being "3" and the identification flag being set to 2, in the jackpot game preparation process of the next cycle, step S621 is determined to be NO, step S625 is determined to be NO, and the process proceeds to step S631. It is determined whether or not the value of the identification flag is 2 (step S631). In this case, since 2 is set in the identification flag, it is determined that step S631 is YES, and the jackpot game mode determination process is performed (step S632).

The jackpot game mode determination process executed in step S632 is one of the jackpot game preparation processes, and the jackpot game preparation process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 207 and 208. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game mode determination process, and FIG. 208 is an example of a table used in the jackpot game mode determination process.

As shown in FIG. 207, in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S632), the main control MPU first determines whether or not the game ball is delayed detected (irregular delay side detection sensor), that is, the upper irregular delay. It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the hole 2586a of the creating means 2586 (step S6071). Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay creating means 2586 (YES in step S6071), whether or not the game ball has passed through the right gate 2575R (distribution detection sensor 2580R). Whether or not it was detected) is determined (step S6072).

When the game ball is detected as delayed (YES in step S6071), even if the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L, the presence or absence of detection by the distribution detection sensor 2580L is not determined. That is, when the game ball is detected with a delay (YES in step S6071), the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L is invalidated even if the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L.

In step S6072, if it is not detected that the game ball has passed through the right gate 2575R, that is, if the game ball is not detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R, step S6072 is determined as NO, and the jackpot game mode determination process is performed. It exits and returns to the jackpot game preparation process, further exits the jackpot game preparation process, and returns to the timer interrupt processing routine.

Hereinafter, until the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R, step S621 is determined to be NO, step S625 is determined to be NO, and the step is determined based on the processing flag value "3" and the identification flag value 2. In the jackpot game mode determination process in which S631 is determined to be YES, the process routine in which step S6071 is determined to be YES and step S6072 is determined to be NO is repeated.

On the other hand, in step S6072, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the right gate 2575R, that is, when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R (YES in step S6072), the big hit in the flag ON state. It is determined whether or not the flag, that is, the jackpot flag turned on in step S317 is a jackpot flag of a specific type (step S6073). Here, if the jackpot flag of the specific type is ON (YES in step S6073), the jackpot game mode is determined with reference to the right gate 2575R of table B in FIG. 208 (step S6074).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6073 that the jackpot flag of the specific type is not ON (that is, the jackpot flag of the normal type is ON) (NO in step S6073), the right gate 2575R of table A in FIG. The jackpot game mode is determined (step S6075).

Here, as can be seen by referring to Table A in FIG. 208, when the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L. When the ball passes (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L), the mode of the jackpot game to be executed is different, but the expected value of the prize ball amount paid out during the jackpot game is the same (complete). The match does not have to be the same, as long as it does not impair the gameplay).

When the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L), the jackpot game of 2 rounds, the jackpot game of 9 rounds, and the jackpot game of 16 rounds By lottery, there is a 100% chance that a 9-round jackpot game will be decided, but when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L, it will be decided to be a 9-round jackpot game without such a lottery. You may try to do it.

Although it is not suitable for the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the expected value of the prize ball amount to be paid out during the jackpot game when the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R than when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L. It can also be a game that makes the game bigger. This is because it is possible to encourage the player to positively launch the game ball so as to pass through the right gate 2575R.

In this example, when the jackpot flag of a specific type is ON, as can be seen by referring to Table B in FIG. 208, the lottery probability is 0% for the jackpot game of 2 rounds and the jackpot game of 9 rounds. The jackpot game of 16 rounds is drawn with a 100% probability, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the jackpot flag of a specific type is ON, a specific jackpot game (book) without lottery. In the example, it may be decided to be a 16-round jackpot game).

If the delay is not detected in step S6071, that is, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay creating means 2586 (NO in step S6071), the game ball has passed through the left gate 2575L. Whether or not (whether or not the distribution detection sensor 2580L is detected) is determined (step S6076).

In step S6076, if it is not detected that the game ball has passed through the left gate 2575L, that is, if the game ball is not detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L, step S6076 is determined as NO, and the jackpot game mode determination process is performed. It exits and returns to the jackpot game preparation process, further exits the jackpot game preparation process, and returns to the timer interrupt processing routine.

Hereinafter, until the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L, step S621 is determined to be NO, step S625 is determined to be NO, and the step is determined based on the processing flag value "3" and the identification flag value 2. The processing routine in which S631 is determined to be YES, step S6071 is determined to be NO, and step S6076 is determined to be NO is repeated in the jackpot game mode determination process.

On the other hand, in step S6076, when the game ball has passed through the left gate 2575L, that is, when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L (YES in step S6076), the jackpot flag in the flag ON state, that is, in step S317. It is determined whether or not the ON jackpot flag is a jackpot flag of a specific type (step S6077). Here, if the jackpot flag of the specific type is ON (YES in step S6077), the jackpot game mode is determined with reference to the left gate 2575L of table B in FIG. 208 (step S6078).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6077 that the jackpot flag of the specific type is not ON (that is, the jackpot flag of the normal type is ON) (NO in step S6077), the jackpot game with reference to the left gate 2575L of the table A. (In this example, the number of rounds) is determined (step S6079).

When the mode of the jackpot game (the number of rounds in this example) is determined in step S6074, step S6075, step S6078 or step S6079, the process proceeds to step S6080 and the operation of the accessory continuous operating device is started (step S6080). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is operating based on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (step S6081).

When it is determined in step S6081 that the probability change function is operating (YES in step S6081), the probability change function is stopped in step S6082 and the process proceeds to step S6083. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6081 that the probability change function is not operating (NO in step S6081), step S6082 is skipped and the process directly proceeds to step S6083.

In step S6083, the main control MPU sets the operation mode of the big winning opening 2103 based on the jackpot game mode determined in the processes of step S6074, step S6075, step S6078, and step S6079 (step S6083).

The operation mode of the big winning opening 2103 is, for example, the maximum number of rounds of the round game in which the big winning opening 2103 is repeatedly opened in the big hit game, and the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 in each round game. The opening mode of the big winning opening 2103 in the big hit game is set, such as the upper limit number (for example, 9) and the opening / closing operation time limit of the opening / closing member 2106 in each round game (step S6083).

Next, a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is to be started, a round information command indicating the determined number of rounds, the above-mentioned jackpot game in-game flag indicating that the jackpot game has already been performed, and the like are set. (Step S6084).

As will be described later, the jackpot start command and the round information command set in this way are transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S18) shown in FIG. 200, whereby in the liquid crystal display device 1900. Through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side, the display effect during the jackpot game can be selectively executed as an effect associated with the determined number of rounds.

As described above, in the main control MPU according to this embodiment, the passage of the game ball to the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) is detected even when the explanatory interval effect timer is timed up. Unless this is done, the progress to the jackpot game is stopped, and the process does not proceed to the next process in the jackpot game mode determination process. That is, even if it is determined in the process of step S315 that the jackpot is a big hit and the condition device is activated (step S604), the jackpot game is not smoothly executed, but the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R). The jackpot game is not executed until the passage of the game ball to the player is detected.

Next, the jackpot start interval effect command is set (step S6085), the jackpot start interval effect timer is set to, for example, 8 seconds (step S6086), the identification flag is set to 3 (step S6087), and the jackpot game mode is determined. The process is completed and the process returns to the jackpot game preparation process, the jackpot game preparation process is exited, and the timer interrupt process routine is returned.

The jackpot start interval effect is a display effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 from the operation of the accessory continuous operation device to the start of opening / closing of the opening / closing device 2106. Is a display effect or the like indicating that is started.

The jackpot start interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S18) shown in FIG. 200. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect display indicating that the jackpot game is started is displayed through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

By the way, according to the processes of steps S621 to S629, among the series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game, the lottery process (the jackpot game mode determination process) for the mode of the jackpot game has not yet been performed. When it is, the time saving function is continuously operating. That is, although it is known that the result of the special symbol lottery has already been a big hit on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the start of operation of the conditional device is suspended while the explanation interval effect is being performed. By doing so, when the time saving function is activated, it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 2102 during the execution of the explanatory interval effect.

When the jackpot game mode determination process of step S632 is completed, the processing flag is "3" and the identification flag is set to 3. As a result, in the jackpot game preparation process of the next cycle, step S621 is determined to be NO, and step S625 is determined. Is determined to be NO, step S631 is determined to be NO, the process proceeds to step S633, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot start interval effect set in step S6084 has timed up (step S633).

If the jackpot start interval effect is not timed up, step S633 is determined to be NO, the jackpot game preparation process is exited, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process routine. Hereinafter, until the jackpot start interval effect is timed up, step S621 is determined to be NO, step S625 is determined to be YES, and step S626 is determined based on the processing flag value "3" and the identification flag value 3. The processing routine for determining NO is repeated.

Then, when the jackpot start interval effect is timed up, step S633 is determined to be YES, the processing flag is updated to "4" (step S634) assuming that the jackpot start interval effect is completed, and the identification flag is set to 0. It is set and returned to the initial value (step S635), the jackpot game preparation process is completed, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process routine.

[About jackpot game processing]
Next, the jackpot game process (step S210) executed when the process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game process.

As shown in FIG. 209, in the big hit game process (step S210), the main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not the big winning opening 2103 is open as the process of step S801. If it is open (YES in step S801), then as the process of step S802, the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the large winning opening 2103 is set in the process of step S803 (see FIG. 207). It is determined whether or not the set opening / closing operation time limit has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation time limit has elapsed (YES in step S802), the opening / closing member 2106 is closed to close the large winning opening 2103 (step S804).

However, even if it is determined in the process of step S802 that the set opening / closing operation time limit has not yet elapsed (NO in step S802), the same applies after the large winning opening 2103 is opened. When the number of game balls entered in the large winning opening 2103 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number (for example, 9) set in the process of step S803 (YES in step S803), step S804 The process shifts to the above process and the large winning opening 2103 is closed. On the other hand, if the opening / closing operation time limit set above has not yet passed (NO in step S802) and the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening 2103 has not yet reached the upper limit. (NO in step S803), the jackpot game process is completed while the jackpot 2103 is maintained in the open state.

On the other hand, in the process of step S801, when it is determined that the large winning opening 2103 is not open, the number of times the large winning opening 2103 is opened by the opening / closing member 2106 (the number of round games) is set to the number of times of the round game (FIG. 207). It is determined whether or not the maximum number of rounds set in the process of (see) has been reached (step S805). If it has not arrived (NO in step S805), the opening / closing member 2106 is operated to open the big winning opening 2103 (step S806), and the big hit game process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of step S805, when it is determined that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is stopped, so that a big hit (a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device). ), The operation (big hit game) of the opening / closing member 2106, which is performed on the condition that the player is elected, will be disabled. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processes of steps S807 to S812, for example, in the process of step S317 (see FIG. 203), in addition to the jackpot flag, the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). Based on the winning type of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the jackpot game stored in, the game state after the jackpot game is set, and then the jackpot game process is terminated. The winning species here refers to whether or not the winning species operates the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function.

In the process of step S805, when it is determined that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds (YES in step S805), first, the jackpot flag and the jackpot game in progress flag are operated to the OFF state (YES). Step S807), the winning species of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is determined (step S808, step S810).

Here, in the process of step S808, it is determined whether or not the winning type (for example, the random numbers for the jackpot symbol are 0, 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9) that activate the probability fluctuation function. As a result, when it is determined that the winning species does not activate the probability variation function, the process proceeds to the process of step S811 without operating either the probability variation function or the time saving function. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S808 that the winning species operates the probability variation function, the probability variation function is activated (step S809) and the time saving function is activated (step S810). Next, the process proceeds to the process of step S811.

Next, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S811), and when the processing flag is set to "0" (step S812), the jackpot game processing is ended.

According to such a jackpot game process, the jackpot 2103 is opened according to the type of jackpot (step S802) until it is determined that the round game has reached the maximum number of rounds in the process of step 805. , Step S803, Step S805), and the prize balls according to the type of jackpot can be obtained by the player.

[4. Game content]
The content of the game in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 195. FIG. 195 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board. First, a functional configuration related to game effect control on the main control board 4100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 195 and the like. The functional configuration related to the payout of the game ball will be omitted. In the main control board 4100 of this example, various game controls, effect controls, and the like are realized by executing a predetermined program stored in advance in a ROM (not shown) by the main control MPU 4100a.

When a game ball detection signal is input from the gate sensor 2302 to the main control board 4100, a normal random number generating means 4200 that generates a predetermined normal random number that is a lottery result for a normal symbol, and a generated normal random number are predetermined. The ROM of the main control board 4100 stores the normal symbol holding storage means 4202 that temporarily stores the normal symbol according to the conditions of the above and the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal random number that is stored and executed by the normal symbol holding storage means 4202. The normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 selected from the predetermined normal symbol variation pattern table stored in the normal symbol display control means for displaying the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in a variable manner based on the selected normal symbol variation pattern. When the ordinary random number (ordinary lottery result) displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 by the ordinary symbol display control means 4206 is "ordinary hit", the start port solenoid 2114 is driven to expand the pair of movable pieces 2105. It is provided with a start port opening / closing control means 4208 for causing the operation, and a normal symbol storage number display control means 4210 for displaying the number of ordinary symbol random numbers stored in the ordinary symbol hold storage means 4202 as a storage number on the ordinary symbol storage display 1188. There is.

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol holding storage means 4202 uses a predetermined number (for example, four) of ordinary random numbers generated by the detection signal of the game ball from the gate sensor 2302 while the ordinary symbol is fluctuatingly displayed by the ordinary symbol display control means 4206. ), And the execution of the memorized ordinary random numbers is suspended until the variable display of the ordinary symbol becomes possible.

Further, the main control board 4100 has a predetermined first special lottery result for the first special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the first start port sensor 3131 due to the start winning of the first start port 2101. The first special random number generating means 4212 for generating a special random number, the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 for temporarily storing the first special random number generated in the first special random number generating means 4212 according to a predetermined condition, A predetermined special symbol variation display pattern stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100 for the first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the first special random number stored and executed by the first special symbol reservation storage means 4214. The first special symbol of the first special symbol display 1185 is selected based on the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 selected from the table and the first special symbol variation pattern selected by the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216. The first special symbol display control means 4218 to be variablely displayed and the first special symbol storage display 1184 to display the number of the first special random numbers held and stored by the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 as the stored number. A symbol storage number display control means 4220 is provided. Although not shown in FIG. 195, the main control board 4100 is further provided with a first jackpot symbol random number generating means and a second jackpot symbol random number generating means. When the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the random number generated by the random number generation means for the first big hit symbol is acquired, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined. Similarly, when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, the random number generated by the random number generation means for the second big hit symbol is acquired, and the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined.

Further, the main control board 4100 has a predetermined second special lottery result for the second special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the second start port sensor 3132 due to the start winning of the second start port 2102. A second special random number generating means 4222 for generating a special random number, a second special symbol holding storage means 4224 for temporarily storing the second special random number generated in the second special random number generating means 4222 according to a predetermined condition, A predetermined special symbol variation display pattern stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100 for the second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the second special random number executed after being stored in the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224. The second special symbol of the second special symbol display 1186 is selected based on the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 selected from the table and the second special symbol variation pattern selected by the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226. The second special symbol display control means 4228 for variable display and the second special symbol storage display 1187 for displaying the number of the second special random numbers held and stored by the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 as a storage number. It is provided with a symbol storage number display control means 4230.

The first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 have new special symbols such as the first and second special symbols being variablely displayed by the first and second special symbol display control means 4218 and 4228. When the variable display cannot be performed, a predetermined number of first special random numbers and second special random numbers triggered by detection signals from the first start port sensor 3131 and the second start port sensor 3132 (for example, four each) ), And the execution of the memorized first special random number and second special random number is suspended until the variable display of the special symbol becomes possible.

In the main control board 4100, the first special random number and the second special random number held by the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 are given to the starting ports 2101, 1022 as a starting prize. It is provided with a priority hold digestion means 4231 that preferentially executes (digests) the second special random number over the timing, and the priority hold digestion means 4231 relates to the second special random number, that is, the second starting port 2102. The hold of the lottery result is prioritized and executed (digested).

Further, on the main control board 4100, the first special random number (first special lottery result) and the second special random number (second special lottery result) stored in the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 An advantageous game state generating means 4232 that generates an advantageous gaming state that gives the player an advantage based on the special lottery result), and an opening / closing member 2106 that closes the large winning opening 2103 based on an instruction from the advantageous gaming state generating means 4232. It is provided with a large winning opening opening / closing control means 4234 that controls the drive of the attacker solenoid 2121 so as to open / close in a predetermined pattern.

Further, on the main control board 4100, according to the first special random number and the second special random number (first special symbol variation pattern and second special symbol variation pattern) in which the advantageous gaming state is generated by the advantageous gaming state generating means 4232, Further, the variation pattern table changing means 4236 for changing the first special symbol variation pattern table and the second special symbol variation pattern table is provided. The fluctuation pattern table changing means 4236 may be changed to, for example, a fluctuation pattern table (for example, a high probability fluctuation pattern table) in which a fluctuation pattern in which an advantageous gaming state occurs is selected with a higher probability than a normal fluctuation pattern table (for example). Change to a fluctuation pattern table (for example, time reduction fluctuation pattern table) with a shorter fluctuation time of the first special symbol or second special symbol than the normal fluctuation pattern table (so-called probability variation) (so-called time reduction). It is changed to a variation pattern table (for example, a probability variation time reduction variation pattern table) in which the probability that an advantageous gaming state occurs is higher than usual and the variation time of the special symbol is short (so-called probability variation / time reduction).

In this example, the detection signal from the distribution detection sensor 2580 (2580L, 2580R) is input to the advantageous gaming state generating means 4232, and the detection signal from the distribution detection sensor 2580 is received. Therefore, the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening 2103 (for example, the determination of the number of rounds during the big hit game) can be determined by the attacker solenoid 2121. It should be noted that the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening 2103 is not limited to the one that determines the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening 2103 according to the detection signal from the distribution detection sensor 2580, and the degree of the prize balls paid out according to the detection signal from the distribution detection sensor 2580 (for example) The opening time of the big winning opening 2103, etc.) may be decided.

Further, the main control board 4100 has a normal symbol variation pattern, a first symbol variation pattern, a second symbol variation pattern, and a first special symbol memory according to the ordinary random number, the first special random number, and the second special random number. Command generation means 4238 that generates commands for predetermined control such as effect commands based on the second special symbol memory, etc., and command transmission means 4240 that sends the commands generated by the command generation means 4238 to the peripheral control unit 4140. And have.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is a transparent game. It is driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 arranged in front of the panel 1200, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 will flow down in the game area 1100 on the upper left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the driving is possible. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1200, and when the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails, the game ball flows down. While the speed is suppressed, various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500, the center is centered by a plurality of obstacle nails or the inclined upper surface of the peripheral wall portion 2503. You will be guided to the area on the left side of the accessory 2500. Further, when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500, the distribution space 2530 is passed through the distribution entry passage 2545. After being sent in, it is discharged into the game area 1100 on the upstream side of the large winning opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100 arranged on the downstream side of the gate portion 2301 and the stage 2510 via the guide passage 2540 (see FIG. 131). To.

Then, when the game ball that has flowed down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 enters and passes through the gate portion 2301 of the gate unit 2300 and is detected by the gate sensor 2302, it is mainly based on the detection signal. In the control board 4100, the ordinary random number generating means 4200 generates an ordinary random number as a result of the ordinary lottery. Then, based on the ordinary random number, the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variablely displayed (the ordinary symbol display 1189 composed of one LED emits light alternately in red, green, and orange). After a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) has elapsed, the normal symbol extracted based on the normal random number (normal lottery result) is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol display 1189 emits light in either red or green). .. The variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed based on the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected from the predetermined ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table in the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection means 4204.

Specifically, if the lottered ordinary random number is a "normal hit" random number, it will be stopped and displayed with a normal symbol that suggests a hit (ordinary symbol display 1189 emits green light), and the lottered ordinary random number will be a "normal loss" random number. In the case of, the stop display (normal symbol display 1189 emits red light) is made with a normal symbol suggesting a loss. Then, when the normal symbol suggesting a hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2105 that close the second starting port 2102 expands for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), and the second starting port 2102 is closed. A game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 2102.

The fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2105 at the second starting port 2102 may be changed according to a special random number (special lottery result) described later, for example, a special random number (special). When "time reduction hit (including normal time reduction hit, high probability time reduction hit, etc.)" is extracted as a lottery result), the fluctuation time and expansion time may be changed to a short time. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 can be easily changed by replacing the ordinary symbol variation pattern table for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern with a different table and then selecting the table.

By the way, in this example, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2302 while the normal symbol is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display 1189, the changing normal symbol is stopped and the normal symbol is generated and extracted first. Until the result of the random number is confirmed, the ordinary random number (including the ordinary symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2302 is temporarily stored by the ordinary symbol storage holding means 4202 and displayed. It is designed to be held, and the number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of holdings) is displayed on the normal symbol storage display 1188. This ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of stored LEDs is suggested by the number of each LED that lights up. In this example, up to four LEDs are stored and displayed. ing. When the number of stored items exceeds four, the ordinary random numbers extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2302 are discarded.

Further, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 and has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 is moved to the center side of the game area 1100 under the center accessory 2500 by the shelves 2202 and 2203 of the front side unit 2200. It is supposed to be. Then, when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 arranged below the center accessory 2500 and is detected by the general winning opening sensors 2123 and 3133, the main control board 4100 uses the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 in response to the payout command to generate a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls. , It is designed to be paid out to the upper plate 301.

If the game ball driven into the game area 1100 does not win any of the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the large winning opening 2103, the game is played. The area 1100 is provided at the lower center in the left-right direction and is discharged from the out port 1232 (1151) to the lower rear side of the game board 4. Further, regardless of whether the game ball wins in any of the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the large winning opening 2103, the winning game ball is returned to the game area 1100. It is designed to be discharged downward on the rear side of the game board 4 without being damaged.

By the way, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2504 that opens on the left side surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500. More specifically, the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2504 is supplied from the warp exit 2505 to the left end of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510, and is mainly the lowest portion after rolling the first stage 2511 in the left-right direction. Is released forward from. Then, the game ball released forward from the first stage 2511 is supplied to the second stage 2512 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the first stage 2511, and is the most after rolling the second stage 2512 in the left-right direction. It is released forward from the lowered central part.

The game ball released forward from the second stage 2512 is supplied to the third stage 2513 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the second stage 2512, and becomes the lowest after rolling the third stage 2513 in the left-right direction. It is released backward from the site. Then, the game balls released from the third stage 2513 are arranged between the third stage 2513 and the first stage 2511 below the third stage 2513 on both the left and right sides of the second stage 2512. It is supplied to 2514, and after rolling the fourth stage 2514 in the left-right direction, it is discharged downward from the drop hole 2514a. Further, the game ball discharged downward from the drop hole 2514a of the fourth stage 2514 is supplied to the fifth stage 2515 arranged directly under the fourth stage 2514, and after rolling the fifth stage 2515 in the left-right direction. , It is discharged forward from the lowest portion on both the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction, and is returned to the game area 1100.

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 enters the first chance entrance 2516 of the first stage 2511 or the second chance entrance 2517 of the second stage 2512, from the chance exit 2518 opened directly above the first starting port 2101. It is released into the game area 1100 and is accepted into the first starting port 2101 with a high probability. Then, when the game balls are received by the first start port 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 3131, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are transmitted from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 or the like. However, it is designed to be paid out to the upper plate 301.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, the game ball released from the stage 2510 has a high probability of being the first. It is designed to be accepted by the starting port 2101 and the like, and when the second starting port 2102 is acceptable, it is highly likely that the game ball will be accepted when it is released from the stage 2510. Therefore, not only the first starting port 2101 but also The second starting port 2102 can also be given a sense of expectation regarding the acceptance of game balls to enhance the interest.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game ball is driven so as to flow down the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game is played to the upstream side of the large winning opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100 via the distribution space 2530 or the like. Since the ball is released, when the large winning opening 2103 can be accepted, the game ball can be accepted into the large winning opening 2103 with a high probability. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2103 is in a game state in which it can be accepted, it is possible to perform a driving operation of the game ball so that the game ball circulates in the distribution space 2530. In other words, when the big winning opening 2103 is in a game state where it can be accepted, the game ball can be accepted into the big winning opening 2103 with a high probability through the distribution space 2530 simply by hitting the game ball harder than a predetermined value. You can do it.

By the way, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301 of the gate member 2400, is detected by the gate sensor 2302, and a "normal hit" is drawn as a result of the normal lottery, the second starting port 2102 is closed as described above. When the pair of movable pieces 2105 are expanded for a predetermined time to be able to win a prize, and the game ball is received by the second starting port 2102 and detected by the second starting port sensor 3132, the main control A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball device 740 to the upper plate 301 via the substrate 4100 or the like.

Further, in the main control board 4100, when a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and is detected by the first start port sensor 3131 and the second start port sensor 3132, the first start is performed. At the mouth 2101, the first special random number generating means 4212 generates and extracts a predetermined first special random number, and at the second starting port 2102, the second special random number generating means 4222 generates and extracts a predetermined second special random number. It is said. Then, based on the extracted special random numbers, it is extracted after the variable display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result.

When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode suggesting "big hit" in the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 opens / closes in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game) occurs, and during that time, a game ball is won in the big winning opening 2103, so that more game balls can be acquired. When one game ball wins the large winning opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

However, even if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner suggesting "big hit", the big hit game does not occur immediately, the explanation interval effect is performed, and the explanation interval effect timer is timed up. As described above, the condition device that is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game operates.

In addition, also in these 1st start opening 2101 and 2nd start opening 2102, the 1st special symbol display 1185 and the 2nd special symbol display are similar to the variation display of the normal symbol due to the passage of the game ball through the gate member 2400. When the special symbol is variablely displayed in the vessel 1186, or when the special symbol cannot be variablely displayed, such as during a jackpot game as a special advantageous gaming state, the game ball wins a prize at the starting ports 2101, 1022 and the first starting port sensor. When detected by the 3131 and the second start port sensor 3132, it was extracted based on the detection signals from the first start port sensor 3131 and the second start port sensor 3132 until the variation display of the special symbol became possible. The first special random number and the second special random number are stored in the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 to hold the display of the stored special random number. The number is displayed on the first special symbol storage display 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187.

The first special symbol storage display 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187 are each composed of two LEDs, and the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emitting states of the LEDs that are turned off, turned on, and blinking. In this example, up to four of each are memorized and displayed. If the number of stored items exceeds four, the extracted special random numbers are discarded. Further, the second special random number stored (held) by the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 by the priority holding digestion means 4231 has priority over the first special random number stored in the first special symbol holding storage means 4214. It is designed to be executed (digested). That is, the holding of the lottery result related to the second starting port 2102 is executed (digested) with priority over the holding of the lottery result related to the first starting port 2101.

Further, in the main control board 4100, the first special random number and the special random number of the second special random number extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 3131 and the second start port sensor 3132 are selected as the first special symbol variation pattern. By collating with the predetermined random number determination table (also referred to as the special symbol variation pattern table) determined in advance by the means 4216 or the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226, the special random numbers are "missed" and "big hit". It is determined which is the case, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is also determined. In addition, the random number determination table also determines "probability variation time reduction hit", "probability variation time reduction hit", "time reduction hit", "probability variation time reduction hit", and the like.

Then, the first special random number and the second special random number (lottery) extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 (the special lottery result) are the "big hits". In this case, as described above, the main control board 4100 operates the condition device which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game based on the time-up of the explanatory interval effect timer.

The advantageous game state generating means 4232 executes a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player, and a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses or a predetermined time is determined after the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened. A round game with an opening / closing pattern in which the opening / closing member 2106 is closed when any of the conditions for winning a prize is satisfied in the large winning opening 2103 (for example, nine game balls) (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round). Is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds), 2 rounds for "2R jackpot", 9 rounds for "9R jackpot", 16 rounds for "16R jackpot", and so on. It is designed to generate an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. After the end of the predetermined number of rounds, for the "big hit", the random number determination table is exchanged with a high-probability time-saving table or the like by the variation pattern table changing means 4236 according to the extracted special random numbers. The mode of the jackpot game is not limited to the round game described above as long as a predetermined amount of prize balls are paid out.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the extracted first special random number or second special random number is a "big hit", the main control board 4100 has a distribution detection sensor based on the operation of the condition device. The number of rounds of the "big hit" game is determined by making the detection signal of the game ball from 2580 (2580L, 2580R) acceptable, and which distribution detection sensor 2580L, 2580R sends the detection signal first. I try to decide.

When the detection signal of the game ball from the distribution detection sensor 2580 can be received, the relationship between the number of rounds and the gate 2575 to which the game ball has passed is displayed in advance on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. It has become like. That is, "when the game ball is passed through the left gate 2575L, the number of rounds is determined to be fixed (9 rounds in this example)", and "when the game ball is passed through the right gate 2575R, 16 rounds and 2 rounds are determined". The relationship between the gate to which the game ball passes and the number of rounds determined based on passing through the gate, such as "determined by lottery," is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. It has become so.

As a result, the player can drive the game ball while observing the movement of the distribution valve 2551 of the distribution unit 2550 so that the game ball passes through the desired gate 2575. In addition to being able to entertain the operation, it is possible to make the distribution of the game balls within the distribution space 2530 exciting and exciting, and it has become possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, according to the first special random number and the second special random number extracted with the start winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 (in the special lottery result). (Accordingly), in addition to the variable display of the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180, the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 also display special random numbers (special). The production image according to the lottery result) is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like, a variable display of each symbol row is started in a state where a series of symbol rows composed of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows), and then sequentially. When the stop display is displayed and all the symbol strings are finally stopped and displayed, the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the stopped display symbols is suggested to the player side. That is, the effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result is displayed after the plurality of symbol rows are variablely displayed according to the special lottery result due to the start winning. Since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like are larger and easier to see than the special symbols of the first and second special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186, the player generally displays them on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. You will pay attention to the design that was made.

As one of the effect images in which the plurality of symbol columns are variablely displayed, a "reach effect image" is displayed so that the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed while leaving one variable symbol sequence satisfies a specific condition (reach). As a special lottery result in which this "reach production image" is displayed, there are "reach hit" and "reach loss". In addition, there is also a "reach development effect image" that is displayed so as to be connected to the "reach effect image" and that after the reach display, the remaining symbol sequence that is variablely displayed is emphasized and displayed. Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like can display not only the effect display related to the start winning prize but also the "big hit game effect image" displayed during the "big hit" game.

The variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 195). , The variation display of the symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control board 4150 based on the command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. It has become.

As a result, since the peripheral control unit 4140 or the like controls the variation display of the symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like that the player pays particular attention to, there is a lottery result related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100. For one command, a plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance to increase the number of symbol variation patterns in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. Further, the "big hit game effect image" and the like displayed during the "big hit" game are also controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like, and various patterns of effect images are prepared in advance. As a result, it is possible to increase the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the load of arithmetic processing on the main control board 4100, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be more entertaining to the player and less likely to get bored. It has become.

In addition to controlling the effect image, the peripheral control unit 4140 controls the drive motors 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508 provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 based on the command related to the lottery result. , 3622, 3640, 3676, etc., solenoids 3624, 3660, etc., and each decorative substrate provided on the game board 4 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320, The LEDs mounted on 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546, 3690, 3692, etc. are made to emit light as appropriate, and the player can be entertained by the movable effect and the light emission effect.

By the way, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, as described above, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 indicate that it is a "big hit". The special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode. However, the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment have different roles to be played from the special symbol lottery in the conventional pachinko machine.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, one result such as this "big hit" is a safe type and throbbing. Two types with different jackpot forms such as types are given to the player. In the present embodiment, the safe type and the pounding type have different processing modes until the mode of the jackpot game to be executed is determined as the jackpot mode. Then, when two types having different jackpot forms, such as a safe type and a throbbing type, are given to the player, one of these types is selected. In the present embodiment, when the game ball launched by the player toward the game ball under the condition device is operating, the safe type is selected when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L, and when it passes through the right gate 2575R, it is throbbing. The type is selected.

It can be said that the safe type and the throbbing type have different hits in which the jackpot game is executed. For details, as can be seen with reference to FIG. 208, when it is a normal type jackpot (see Table A), when it is a safe type (left gate 2575L), it is a 9-round jackpot that can acquire a predetermined amount of game balls. It can be said that only the hit in which the game is executed (hereinafter referred to as "normally safe hit") belongs. In addition, when it is a jackpot of a specific type (see Table B), the safe type (left gate 2575L) is only a hit where a 16-round jackpot game that can acquire a larger amount of game balls than the normal safe type is executed. Can be said to belong to.

Similarly, looking at the pounding type with reference to FIG. 208, when the normal type is a big hit (see Table A), the pounding type (right gate 2575R) has only a smaller amount of game balls than the normal safe hit. It can be said that there is a hit in which a 2-round jackpot game that cannot be obtained is executed and a hit in which a 16-round jackpot game in which a larger amount of game balls can be obtained than a normal safe hit is executed. In addition, when it is a jackpot of a specific type (see Table B), for the pounding type (see the right gate 2575R), only the hit where a 16-round jackpot game that can acquire more game balls than the safe hit is executed is executed. It can be said that it belongs.

When the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot of a specific type when passing through the right gate 2575R, and if it is a jackpot of a specific type, refer to Table B in FIG. It is determined with a 100% probability that a 16-round jackpot game will be executed, and if it is not a specific type of jackpot, refer to Table A in FIG. 208 for a 2-round jackpot game to be executed or 16 rounds. It is decided by lottery when the jackpot game is executed.

Further, when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot of a specific type when passing through the left gate 2575L, and if it is a jackpot of a specific type, refer to Table B in FIG. Then, it is determined that a 16-round jackpot game is executed with a 100% probability, and if it is not a specific type of jackpot, a 9-round jackpot game is executed with a 100% probability with reference to Table A in FIG. It will be decided when it is done. Then, as a result, from the player's point of view, when the jackpot is of a specific type, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed regardless of whether the passing destination of the game ball is the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R. It will be decided on the spot.

By the way, the mode of the jackpot game to be executed is determined when the game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R, but whether the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot of a specific type. Is determined in step S316. Therefore, when it is a big hit of a specific type, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, before the game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R (for example, the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery on the special symbol display 1185, 1186). (When the result of) is displayed), a display effect indicating that the 16-round jackpot game is executed is performed.

In the present embodiment, even if the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot of a specific type, the game ball has gates 2575L and 2575R as in the case of a jackpot of a normal type. When passing, the hit is decided (determined when the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed), but it is not limited to this, and the game ball hits the gates 2575L and 2575R only when it is a jackpot of a specific type. Before passing (for example, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is displayed on the special symbol display 1185, 1186), it is decided to win the 16-round jackpot game. It may be.

In addition, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot of a specific type (when the execution mode of the jackpot game is determined using the table B of FIG. 208), and the first special lottery. When the result of the above or the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot of a normal type and a safe type is selected (when the execution mode of the jackpot game is determined using the left gate 2575L of table A in FIG. 208). , In each case, the lottery is performed, but the execution mode of the jackpot game may be determined without performing such a lottery.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as long as the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot of a normal type, when the game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R, By this passage, one of the jackpot forms (safety type or pounding type) is selected. Then, one of the hits belonging to the selected jackpot form is determined, and the jackpot game is executed in the execution mode of the jackpot game corresponding to the determined hit.

In other words, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, the functions that the gates 2585L and 2575R should perform differ depending on the type of the big hit.

Specifically, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot, only when the acquired jackpot symbol random number out of the jackpot symbol random numbers 0 to 9 is 7, the specific type jackpot When a random number for a jackpot symbol other than 7 out of 0 to 9 is acquired, it is determined to be a normal type jackpot. In this way, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, it is judged with a high probability that it is a normal type big hit. Therefore, the gates 2575L and 2575R (more specifically, the distribution detection sensor 2580L). , 2580R) always functions as a member that determines an execution mode of the jackpot game. That is, step S6075 and step S6079 executed by the main control MPU4100a have the right gate 2575R (distribution detection sensor 2580R) and the left gate 2575L (distribution detection sensor 2580L), respectively, and always the execution mode of the jackpot game. It will play a role as a functioning means for functioning as a determining member.

However, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a specific type jackpot, the execution mode of the jackpot game with reference to Table B in FIG. 208 when the game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R. However, this lottery is only a formal lottery in which the execution mode of the jackpot is predetermined. That is, substantially, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gates 2575L and 2575R, a predetermined 16-round jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the gates 2575L and 2575R (more specifically, distribution). The detection sensors 2580L and 2580R) function as an execution trigger for the jackpot game.

That is, since it is always determined as NO in step S6073 and step S6077, the gates 2575L and 2575R (more specifically, the distribution detection sensors 2580L and 2580R) are always in the execution mode of the jackpot game by step S6075 and step S6079. However, only when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a specific type jackpot, it is judged as YES in step S6073 and step S6077, and the gates 2575L and 2575R (from Specifically, the distribution detection sensors 2580L and 2580R) function as members for determining the execution mode of the jackpot game. Therefore, in steps S6073 and S6077 executed by the main control MPU4100a, the right gate 2575R (distribution detection sensor 2580R) and the left gate 2575L (distribution detection), which always function as members for determining the execution mode of the jackpot game, respectively. The function changing means for changing the function of the sensor 2580L) so as to function as a member for determining the execution trigger of the jackpot game only when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a specific type jackpot. Will play the role of.

In the present embodiment, the right gate 2575R (distribution detection sensor 2580R) and the left gate 2575L (distribution detection sensor 2580L) always function as members for determining the execution mode of the jackpot game, and are selected for the first special lottery. Only when the result or the result of the second special lottery is a specific type jackpot, the role to be played by functioning as a member for determining the execution trigger of the jackpot game is changed, but the function as the gate 2575 is changed. The aspect is not limited to this.

For example, the safe type is always selected when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L, and the pounding type is selected when the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R. The function of the gate 2575 may be changed so that the safe type is selected when the ball passes through and the pounding type is selected when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L.

Further, for example, it is always possible to select either a safe type or a throbbing type according to the gates 2575L and 2575R through which the game ball passes, and when a specific condition is satisfied, it is assumed that the game ball has passed through which gate 2575. The function of the gate 2575 may be changed by setting the selected jackpot form to a pounding type (or a safe type). Further, although only the safe type (or pounding type) is always selected regardless of which gate 2575 the game ball passes through, when a specific condition is satisfied, the safe type or the safe type depending on the gates 2575L and 2575R through which the game ball passes. The function of the gate 2575 may be changed by allowing the pounding type to be selected.

Further, for example, when the game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R in which the pounding type is always selected, there is a hit in which the jackpot game of the first aspect is executed and a hit in which the jackpot game of the second aspect is executed. When the game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R from which the pounding type is selected when a specific condition is satisfied, the jackpot game is executed in a mode different from the first and second aspects. The function of the gate 2575 may be changed by making it determined to be one of a plurality of hits including (that is, even if it is the same in that it is a pounding type, it becomes a pounding type. The function of the gate 2575 may be changed by changing the hit to which it belongs).

Next, the flow until the jackpot game is started will be described from the viewpoint of the player with reference to FIGS. 210 to 216. FIGS. 210 to 216 are image diagrams displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and FIG. 210 (A) is a notice display indicating that the game is explained until the jackpot game is started. FIG. 210 (B) is a guidance display that guides the player's gaze in the game until the jackpot game is started, FIG. 211 is an explanatory display of how to select a safe type jackpot game, and FIG. 212 is a pounding type jackpot. An explanatory display of a method of selecting a game, FIG. 213 is a display prompting the player to select which type of jackpot game to be executed, and FIG. 214 is a display indicating that the current timing is a safe type, FIG. 215. Is a display showing that the current timing is a pounding type, and FIG. 216 is a guide that guides the player's gaze to the back right lower production unit 3600 reminiscent of a rattling lottery machine after the pounding type jackpot game is selected. It is a display.

As described above, FIGS. 210 to 216 are image diagrams displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, but in FIGS. 211 and 212, they correspond to the distribution unit 2550 for convenience. The code of 2550 is used for the picture, the code of 2551b is used for the picture corresponding to the valve portion 2551b, the code of 2590 is used for the picture corresponding to the distribution suggestion member 2590, and the code of 2590 corresponds to the left gate 2575L (distribution detection sensor 2580L). A code of 2575L (2580L) is attached to the picture to be used, and a code of 2575R (2580R) is attached to the picture corresponding to the right gate 2575R (distribution detection sensor 2580R).

If the lottery result for the first special random number or the second special random number is a big hit, an image indicating that it is a big hit is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Here, in the case of a conventional pachinko machine, for example, an image indicating that the jackpot game is started or an image indicating a place to be aimed at in the jackpot game such as "aim to the right" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It had been.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, when the lottery result for the first special random number or the second special random number is a big hit, the condition device is activated and an image indicating that the big hit is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Although it is displayed on the device 1900, the jackpot game is not started immediately, and the jackpot game is executed only after passing through the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R after the condition device is activated. In this way, by allowing the player to proceed with the game at the will of the player without executing the jackpot game immediately after the condition device is activated, the player can perform the game like a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to play the game with peace of mind without feeling frustrated, such as "I have to put the game ball in the big winning opening in a hurry".

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, which enables the player to proceed with the game at the will of the player without immediately executing the jackpot game after the condition device is activated, the player mistakenly or overpowers. Even if the game ball is guided to the distribution unit 2550 as a result of firing the game ball, as described above, by providing the explanation interval effect period, the jackpot game against the player's will is not executed. Has been done.

That is, during this explanatory interval effect, since the condition device has not yet been operated, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is invalidated. As a result, when an image indicating that the lottery result for the first special random number or the second special random number is a big hit is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the gate 2575 is contrary to the intention of the player during the explanation interval production. Even if the game ball passes through, it is possible to reliably execute the type of jackpot game according to the player's intention.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment in which either the safe type or the pounding type can be selected by the player's will, even if the player selects the pounding type, the game ball is played. Immediately after launching, if this game ball passes through the right gate 2575R (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), the player does not feel the excitement of the jackpot game. The number of rounds may be determined. In this case, even though the game ball was launched at the timing when the pounding type was selected by the distribution unit 2550, the significance of allowing the player to select the pounding type at the will of the player disappeared, and this pachinko machine There is a risk that the fun of the game machine 1 will be halved.

Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, when the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is distributed to the pounding type side by the distribution unit 2550, the game ball is immediately distributed to the right gate 2575R. The irregular delay unit 2585 (FIG. 136, 137, 140) that creates an irregular accumulation time so as not to pass through (not immediately detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R) is the distribution unit 2550 and the right gate. It is provided between the 2575R (distribution detection sensor 2580R).

The irregular delay unit 2585 has a function of irregularly delaying the passing of the game ball distributed to the pounding type side through the right gate 2575R (detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R). The irregular delay unit 2585 is composed of an upper irregular delay producing means 2586 and a lower irregular delay producing means 2587, and in the present embodiment, a croon is adopted as the lower irregular delay producing means 2587. Such a croon not only delays the passing of the game ball distributed to the pounding type side through the right gate 2575 (detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), but also causes the game ball to be on the pounding type side. The time from the distribution to the right gate 2575R (the time until the distribution detection sensor 2580R detects the result) can be an irregular time. This is because the time for the game balls distributed to the pounding type side to roll in the croon is irregular (that is, the time for rolling in the croon is different each time).

In the present embodiment, as described above, the croon is adopted as the lower irregular delay creating means 2587, but in the game machine provided with such a croon, the croon is used for the purpose of dropping the game ball from the croon. The game machine may be hit while the game ball is rolling inside. The reason why the player hits the game machine in this way is to bring about a favorable result for the player such as a big hit, but in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player feels excited. It only loses the accumulated time that allows you to enjoy the game by your own actions, and does not give a disadvantage to the hall. However, even if the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is distributed to the pounding type side, the game ball does not immediately pass through the right gate 2575R (so that it is not immediately detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R). If it has a function of delaying the detection by the distribution detection sensor 2580R by an irregular time as a predetermined storage time, the member provided between the distribution unit 2550 and the right gate 2575R (distribution detection sensor 2580R) is provided. , Not necessarily limited to Kroon.

By the way, when a croon functioning as, for example, a lower irregular delay producing means 2587 is provided between the distribution unit 2550 and the right gate 2575R (distribution detection sensor 2580R), while the game ball is rolling in the croon. In addition, another game ball may be distributed to the safe type side and pass through the left gate 2575L (detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L). In this case, even if the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is distributed to the pounding type side in a manner that suits the player's intention, the game ball distributed to the pounding type side passes through the right gate 2575R. A situation may occur in which another game ball passes through the left gate 2575L (detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L) before (detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is not possible to detect that the game ball has been distributed to the pounding type side by the upper irregular delay producing means 2586 provided on the upstream side of the lower irregular delay producing means 2587. A regular delay side detection sensor 2588 is provided.

As described above, the above-mentioned irregular delay side detection sensor 2588 is a mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game after the condition device is activated based on the lottery result for the first special random number and the second special random number being a jackpot. ) Is determined (that is, until the random number continuous actuating device is activated), the detection of the game ball is enabled. Then, when the game ball is detected by the irregular delay side detection sensor 2588 while the irregular delay side detection sensor 2588 is enabled, the distribution detection sensor 2580L detects the game ball based on this. Is invalidated.

As a result, once the game balls are distributed to the pounding type side by the distribution unit 2550 after the condition device is activated, the game balls distributed to the pounding type side are crune as the lower irregular delay producing means 2587. Even if another game ball is distributed to the safe type by the distribution unit 2550 while rolling inside (that is, before passing through the right gate 2575R), the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L (that is, before passing through the right gate 2575R). The detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L) is invalidated. Then, when the game ball rolling in the croon as the lower irregular delay creating means 2587 falls from the croon and passes through the right gate 2575R (when detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), the normal type As long as the jackpot flag is ON, the jackpot game of 2 rounds or the jackpot game of 16 rounds is determined by lottery based on the passage to the right gate 2575R (detection by the distribution detection sensor 2580R).

In this way, even if another game ball is distributed to the safe type side and the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L while the game ball is rolling in the croon, the game by the distribution detection sensor 2580L. Despite the detection of the ball, that is, the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is distributed to the pounding type side in a manner that is in line with the player's intention, the safe type is selected against the player's intention. It is possible to avoid a situation such as being done.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the irregular delay side detection sensor 2588 while the irregular delay side detection sensor 2588 is enabled. , The passage of the game ball to the left gate 2575L (detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L) is invalidated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the irregular delay side detection sensor 2588 while the irregular delay side detection sensor 2588 is enabled, the distribution unit 2550 shields the safe type side, for example. , The game ball may not be physically distributed to the safe type side. That is, even though the game balls are distributed to the pounding type side after the condition device is activated, the game balls distributed to the pounding type side pass through the right gate 2575R (distribution detection sensor). (Detection of the game ball by the 2580R) is irregularly delayed by the irregular delay unit 2585, so that the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R (detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R). If it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the left gate 2575L (detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L), the means is not limited to a specific aspect.

Here, a mode in which the game description from the image indicating that the jackpot is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the start of the jackpot game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 will be described.

First, as a notice display to explain the game until the jackpot game is started, both the character display (see FIG. 210 (A)) of "I will explain the target bonus" and the voice output are performed. This prompts the player to stop firing the game ball. After that, as a display to encourage the player to pay attention to the distribution unit 2550, a picture showing a place where the player should pay attention is displayed together with a character display and a voice output of "Look at the upper right of the board" (FIG. 210 (FIG. 210). B) See). At this time, in order to emphasize the place where the player should pay attention, the lighting effect performed on the game area is darkened so as to be modest, and the distribution unit 2550 is blinked. In particular, since such a display effect is performed during the interval period during which the progress of the game is forcibly stopped, the movement of the game ball launched toward the game area and the effect are used like a conventional pachinko machine. There is no need to pay attention to both the character and the character. Therefore, not only can the game content be explained to the player reliably, but the player's gaze can be transferred to the distribution unit 2550 very naturally without being distracted by the movement of the game ball.

Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 indicates that when the game ball launched by the player is distributed to the route on the left gate 2575L side by the distribution unit 2550, a safe type jackpot game is executed. "It's a 100% safe type when you pass it" is displayed and voice output is performed, and a picture showing the route on the left gate 2575L side with an arrow is displayed (see FIG. 211).

In addition, when the game ball launched by the player is distributed to the route on the right gate 2575R side by the distribution unit 2550, it indicates that a pounding type jackpot game is executed. From here, "50 when the ball is passed through the right route Character display and voice output indicating that there is "16R with a probability of% and 2R with a probability of 50%" are performed, and a picture showing the route on the right gate 575R side with an arrow is displayed (see FIG. 212).

As a result, when the player launches the game ball at the timing when the game ball is distributed to the route on the left gate L side, a safe type jackpot game is executed, and the game is played at the timing when the game ball is distributed to the route on the right gate R side. It is possible to grasp that a pounding type jackpot game is executed when the ball is fired.

After that, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays characters such as "Aim at your favorite person ♪" and outputs voice, and a picture showing that the safe type is 9R with a 100% probability, and A picture showing that the pounding type is 16R with a probability of 50% and 2R with a probability of 50% is displayed (see FIG. 213).

Immediately after that, the characters such as "Aim at your favorite person ♪" are displayed and voice output is performed. At this time, in order to give an impact, characters such as "Aim at your favorite person ♪" are displayed so as to cover almost the entire area of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the normal voice output mode (normal voice output mode). For example, voice output is performed in a mode different from (for example, a mode in which voice is output by a single character) (for example, a mode in which voice is output simultaneously by a plurality of characters). When the effect shown in FIG. 213 is completed and the characters such as "Aim at your favorite person ♪" are displayed and the voice is output, the compulsory interval period ends at this timing and the distribution is performed. The detection of the game ball by the detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is enabled.

When the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is enabled, the launched game ball is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the game ball is launched. An image showing whether it is the timing of distribution to the left gate 2575 (distribution detection sensor 2580L) or the timing of distribution to the right gate (distribution detection sensor 2580R) is displayed. Specifically, "ON" is displayed at substantially the center position in the left-right direction of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and indicators are displayed on the left side and the right side starting from this "ON". ..

As shown in FIG. 214, if the game ball is fired while the indicator on the left side is lit, the game ball is distributed to the route on the left gate 2575L side, and a safe type jackpot game is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 215, if the game ball is fired while the indicator on the right side is lit, the game ball is distributed to the route on the right gate 2575R side, and a pounding type jackpot game is executed. .. In this way, by displaying an indicator whether the launched game ball is distributed to the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R, the remaining time of each timing can be visually grasped. can do.

Here, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an image in which the indicator on the left side is lit as the position of the valve portion 2551b in the distribution valve 2551 of the distribution unit 2550 is switched (see, for example, FIG. 214). And the image in which the indicator on the right side is lit (see, for example, FIG. 215). That is, when the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched from the position where the game ball is distributed to the route on the left gate 2575L side to the position where the game ball is distributed to the route on the right gate 2575R, the indicator on the left side is lit and the indicator on the right side is lit. Is changed to a lit image. Further, when the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched from the position where the game ball is distributed to the route on the right gate 2575R side to the position where the game ball is distributed to the route on the left gate 2575L, the indicator on the left side is displayed from the image in which the indicator on the right side is lit. Is changed to a lit image. In this way, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed based on the timing at which the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched.

The time that the indicator on the right side and the indicator on the left side are lit is the time required for the player who sees the lighting mode of the indicator to be able to select the desired side from the safe type and the pounding type. For example, it is set to 5000 msec. That is, the valve portion 2551b of the distribution unit 2550 moves every 5000 msec, and the image in which the indicator on the right side is lit and the image in which the indicator on the left side is lit are switched accordingly.

However, although the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed based on the timing at which the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched, the timing at which the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched and the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are displayed. When the timing of the change is synchronized, the game ball may be distributed to the route on the side contrary to the player's intention (the route on the left gate 2575L side or the route on the right gate 2575R side). This is because the player tends to launch the game ball in consideration of the time from the launch of the game ball to the distribution unit 2550. For example, even though the player is trying to select a pounding type jackpot game, in anticipation that the left indicator will soon be lit, the game ball will be played before the left indicator is lit. It may cause it to fire. In such a case, a type of jackpot game contrary to the player's intention may be executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the position of the valve portion 2551b is delayed from the timing at which the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched within a range in which the position of the valve portion 2551b and the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be matched. , The image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed. As a result, even if the player fires the game ball before the indicator lights up in anticipation that the indicator lights up soon, the type is against the player's will. It is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being executed and suppress the decline in interest.

"Within the range in which the position of the valve portion 2551b and the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be matched" is despite the fact that the game ball is fired while the image on the left side is lit. This game ball is distributed to the route on the right gate 2575R side, or this game ball is distributed to the route on the left gate 2575L side even though the game ball is fired while the image on the right side is lit. It suffices as long as it does not occur.

Then, as a result of the player selecting, for example, a pounding type jackpot game, when the launched game ball is distributed to the route on the right gate 2575R side, the characters "pounding type" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is displayed so as to cover almost the entire area of. As a result, the expectation that the jackpot game to be executed will be executed is a jackpot game (16R jackpot game) in which the expected value of the prize ball amount to be paid out is larger than that of the safe type (9R) jackpot game. It becomes possible to inspire the player's psychology.

After that, if the text "Attention to rattle" is displayed as an indication to encourage attention to the lower right back effect unit 3600, and the effect ball 3610 emitted from the lower right back effect unit 3600 to the outside is a striped pattern. If the 16-round jackpot game is executed and the probability is 50%, and the production ball 3610 released from the lower right back production unit 3600 to the outside is not striped, the 2-round jackpot game is performed. As soon as it is executed, it is displayed that the probability is 50% (see FIG. 216).

At this time, in order to emphasize the place where the player should pay attention, the lighting effect performed on the game area is darkened so as to be sober, and the back right lower right effect unit 3600 is lit with bright lighting. .. In particular, at this point, the progress of the game is still forcibly stopped, so like a conventional pachinko machine, both the movement of the game ball launched toward the game area and the role for production. There is no need to watch. Therefore, pay attention to whether or not the jackpot game to be played is a jackpot game (16R jackpot game) in which the expected value of the prize ball amount to be paid out is larger than that of the safe type (9R) jackpot game. Not only can it be made to move, but the player's gaze can be transferred to the back right lower right effect unit 3600 without being distracted by the movement of the game ball.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result for the first special random number and the second special random number is a big hit, the condition device is activated and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is a big hit. Even though the image to that effect is displayed, the progress of the game is forcibly stopped for a predetermined period, and when this is stopped, the explanation of the game content (game method) until the jackpot game is executed is explained. It is done (that is, it can be said that the game method is forcibly explained by setting an interval period). In other words, the player can be sure to select the mode of the jackpot game so that the mode of the jackpot game contrary to the player's intention is not executed. Therefore, rather than based on the idea of explaining the game method during the interval period, in order to explain the game method, the interval period is to reset the game until then (until the lottery result becomes a big hit). It is based on the idea of providing a reset.

Further, even if the game ball passes through the gate 2575 against the player's will as a result of the player accidentally or excessively firing the game ball after the image indicating that it is a big hit is displayed. It is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being executed in a manner contrary to the player's intention. Specifically, regardless of whether the player passes through the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R as a result of accidentally or excessively firing the game ball, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580 is invalidated. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being executed in a manner contrary to the intention of the player.

In other words, after the image indicating that it is a big hit is displayed, even if the player voluntarily fires a game ball in an attempt to pass it through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R. However, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is invalidated, and the progress to the jackpot game remains stopped. Even if the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is enabled, the jackpot game does not proceed unless the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R detects the game ball. , The jackpot game can be started by the player's will. Furthermore, the type of jackpot game can be selected according to the player's will. At this time, the progress of the game is stopped, and the lighting effect is performed so as to make the distribution unit 2550 and the lower right back effect unit 3600 stand out. Therefore, the player can see the game ball launched toward the game area. It is not necessary to pay attention to the trend, and it is possible to pay attention to the production ball emitted from the back right lower right production unit 3600.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by allowing the player to select the type of the jackpot game according to the timing of launching the game ball, there is a possibility that the jackpot game contrary to the player's intention is executed. I try to eliminate it as much as possible. For example, it is possible to select the type of jackpot game by hitting left and right, but especially for the game ball immediately after launching, even though the game ball was launched with the intention of hitting left It may be right-handed, or it may be left-handed even though the game ball was fired with the intention of hitting right. In this respect, by allowing the player to select the type of jackpot game according to the timing at which the game ball is launched, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the jackpot game will be executed against the player's intention. Further, since the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed by delaying the timing at which the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched, even if the player flies and launches the game ball. , It is possible to prevent a type of jackpot game that is contrary to the player's intention from being executed, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, even after the jackpot image indicating that the jackpot is displayed is displayed, the explanatory interval period effect timer before the condition device is activated is timed up. Until then, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R has been disabled. Then, during the period during which the explanatory interval effect in which the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is disabled is being performed, the jackpot game to be performed from now on is started. A description of the game content (operation procedure) is displayed (see FIGS. 210 to 213). However, whether or not to explain the game content for starting the jackpot game like this depends on the game state and the type of jackpot when the lottery result for the first special random number and the second special random number becomes a jackpot. It is decided according to.

Specifically, it was acquired based on the start prize to the first start port 1502 in the normal game state (normal game state that is neither a probability fluctuation state, a time reduction state, a probability variation time reduction state, or a jackpot game state). When the lottery result for the first special random number or the second special random number acquired based on the start winning prize to the second starting port 1506 is a big hit, the explanation of the game content for starting the big hit game is displayed ( (See FIGS. 210 to 213).

However, in any of the game states of the probability fluctuation state, the time reduction state, and the probability change time reduction state, the first special random number acquired based on the start winning prize for the first start port 1502 and the start to the second start port 1506 When the lottery result for the second special random number acquired based on the winning is a big hit (that is, when a so-called continuous chan), for example, the game content for starting the big hit game as shown in FIGS. 210 to 212. The explanation is not displayed, and as shown in Fig. 213, the characters such as "Aim for the one you like ♪" are displayed and the voice is output, and the safety type is 9R with a 100% probability. A picture showing that the pounding type is 16R with a probability of 50% and a picture showing that the pounding type is 2R with a probability of 50% are displayed.

As a result, when the jackpot game is executed again in the game state (probability fluctuation state, time reduction state, probability variation time reduction state) shortly after the jackpot game is executed, as shown in FIGS. 210 to 212. Since the explanation of the game content until the jackpot game is started is not displayed, it is possible to avoid having to repeatedly see the same explanation display.

Further, even if the lottery result in the normal game state is a big hit, when the type of the big hit flag ON in step S317 is the big hit flag of a specific type, it is the same as when the lottery result in the probability fluctuation state or the like is a big hit. However, the game content for starting the jackpot game is not explained. When the type of jackpot flag turned on in step S317 is the jackpot flag of a specific type, the jackpot game in a specific mode (in this example, regardless of which of the left gate 2575 and the right gate 2575R is passed through the game ball. This is because 16 rounds of jackpot games) are executed.

In addition, even if the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R after the image indicating that it is a big hit is displayed, the length of the period during which this is invalidated is also set to the game state. It depends on it.

Specifically, when the condition device is activated in the normal game state (a normal game state that is neither a probability fluctuation state, a time reduction state, a probability variation time reduction state, or a jackpot game state), the game until the jackpot game is started. While the description of the content is displayed, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is invalidated. However, when the condition device is activated in any of the probabilistic fluctuation state, the time reduction state, and the probability variation time reduction state, the player mistakenly or overpowers after the image indicating that the jackpot is displayed is displayed. A predetermined period of time (for example, in FIG. 213) is such that the launched game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R and the jackpot game of a type contrary to the player's intention is not executed. The detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R is invalid only while the characters such as "Aim at your favorite person ♪" are displayed and the voice is output as shown. Be transformed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being unnecessarily stopped and the interest from being lowered.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball is distributed to either the route on the distribution detection sensor 2580L side or the route on the distribution detection sensor 2580R side by the distribution unit 2550, which route is used. The distribution suggestion member 2590 on the side to which the game balls are distributed lights up so that the player can grasp whether the game balls have been distributed for a long time, at least until the jackpot game is completed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can distribute the game ball hit into the game area by his / her own operation to the distribution destination according to his / her intention. There is. That is, either the safe type or the throbbing type can be selected according to the player's will.

When the safe type is selected, a jackpot game (for example, a 9-round jackpot game) in which a certain amount or more of prize balls can be expected to be paid out as a predetermined jackpot game is executed. When the pounding type is selected, a rattle lottery effect using the back right lower right effect unit 3600 is executed.

In the rattle lottery effect using the lower right back effect unit 3600, as described above, if the effect ball 3610 emitted from the lower right back effect unit 3600 has a striped pattern, the mode of the jackpot game is a 16-round jackpot game. Is executed. On the other hand, if the effect ball 3610 emitted from the lower right back effect unit 3600 to the outside is not in a striped pattern, a jackpot game in which the mode of the jackpot game is two rounds is executed.

Here, when the player selects the pounding type, that is, when the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580R is enabled, the player detects the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580R. When the game ball is fired, the mode of the jackpot game is whether it is a 2-round jackpot game or a 16-round jackpot game based on the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580R. It is decided by a typical lottery.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a 2-round jackpot game or a 16-round jackpot is performed by an internal lottery performed based on the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580R. Although it is decided whether to play a game, in the rattling lottery production using the back right lower right production unit 3600, it is really a two-round jackpot game based on the result of the rattling lottery production using the back right lower right production unit 3600. It seems as if it has been decided whether to play a 16-round jackpot game.

In detail, even if the lottery result for the first special random number and the second special random number is a big hit, as mentioned above, the big hit game is not started only by this, and when the player selects, for example, a pounding type, the back right A rattling lottery effect (external lottery effect) using the lower effect unit 3600 is executed. Then, the rattle lottery effect using the back right lower right effect unit 3600 is actually 16 rounds as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580R. When it is decided to be a big hit game, a striped production ball 3610 is released, and when it is decided to be a two-round jackpot game, a non-striped production ball 3610 is released.

However, when viewed from the player's point of view, when the player selects the pounding type, a rattling lottery is performed using the back right lower production unit 3600 based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R. , It looks as if the jackpot game is being executed in the mode of the jackpot game determined by this rattling lottery. In particular, the mode of the jackpot game determined by the internal lottery performed based on the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580R is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, but such a display. Is, after the production ball 3160 is discharged from the lower right back production unit 3600, until the time required for the player to confirm whether the released production ball 3610 is a striped pattern or not is elapsed. Not done.

That is, after the effect ball 3160 is discharged from the back right lower effect unit 3600, the mode of the jackpot game is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the pattern of the released effect ball 3160. -ing Therefore, although the mode of the jackpot game is originally determined by an internal lottery performed based on the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580R, the back right lower right effect unit 3600 is used. It is possible to perform a lottery effect as if it was decided based on the result of the rattling lottery (in the rattling lottery effect using the back right lower right effect unit 3600, the game ball was detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R. It is done based on). This makes it possible to attract the player's interest to the rattle lottery production using the back right lower right production unit 3600, unlike the production of a finished race such as a conventional pachinko machine, which in turn reduces the interest. It can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the lottery effect is executed as if the mode of the jackpot game is determined by the rattle lottery effect using the lower right back effect unit 3600. However, the "mode of the jackpot game" referred to here. Is not limited to the degree of prize balls that the player can obtain in the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds), and the type of jackpot (for example, whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot game is executed is set to a high probability state). It is intended to include (whether it is a normal jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot).

In this way, by executing the lottery effect using the lower right back effect unit 3600, it is possible to make the player look as if the mode of the jackpot game is determined based on the external lottery result. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, when a lottery effect is performed as if the mode of the jackpot game is determined based on such an external lottery result, for example, if the back right lower effect unit 3600 malfunctions, the player will be excited. There is a risk. In this regard, as described above, the lower right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment is configured so as not to cause such a malfunction, so that the jackpot game is based on the result of an external lottery without making the player entertained. It is possible to execute a lottery effect as if the mode of the above is determined.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 217 to 220, the rattle production that teaches the player the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery by performing a rattle lottery using the back right lower right effect unit 3600. explain. The rattle lottery (rattle effect) using this back right lower right effect unit 3600 is actually performed based on the result of the internal special lottery, but from the player's point of view, it is based on the result of the rattle lottery. It is based on the idea that the stop mode of the symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is made to appear as if it has been determined. 217 to 220 are diagrams showing an aspect of a display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the result of the special lottery.

As described above, the first special random number is acquired based on the start winning prize to the first starting port 1502, and the second special random number is acquired based on the starting winning prize to the second starting port 1506. Then, a special lottery is performed using these special random numbers, and a predetermined display effect is performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the result of the special lottery.

First, when the reach effect is reached in the display effect based on the result of the special lottery, a plurality of patterns including the pattern of the lucky ticket are displayed (see FIG. 217 (A)). Then, one of the plurality of patterns displayed in this way is selected. In the present embodiment, only one pattern is selected, but it goes without saying that the pattern is not limited to this.

When any of the patterns is selected from the plurality of patterns, the selected pattern is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 217 (B)). In FIG. 217 (B), an image showing that the lucky ticket has been selected is displayed. When the lucky ticket is selected in this way, the player has been granted the right to perform a rattle lottery using the lower right back production unit 3600, in order to clearly indicate to the player the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The characters "rattle chance" are displayed in almost the entire area (see FIG. 218 (A)), and the voice is output.

When the characters "rattle chance" are displayed in almost the entire display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the voice is output, the result of the rattle effect and the corresponding profit content given to the player are displayed. (Fig. 218 (B)). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 218 (B), the result of the rattle production and the profit content given to the player corresponding to the result are the back right lower right production unit when the rattle lottery is performed. If the production ball 3610 released from the 3600 to the outside has a striped pattern, a "Travel Invitation to the Tropical Country" will be presented, and if the production ball 3610 released from the lower right back production unit 3600 has a striped pattern, a "pocket" It is displayed that "Tissue" will be presented, and that the number of remaining prizes is 3 for both "Travel Invitation to the Tropical Country" and "Pocket Tissue". As a result, the player can grasp that the probability of winning the "Travel Invitation to the South" is 50%. Here, when comparing the "tropical travel invitation" and the "pocket tissue", it is common sense that the "tropical travel invitation" is more advantageous for the player. For example, if the result of the rattle lottery is "Invitation to travel to a tropical country", the player is shown that the probability change function is activated, and if the result of the rattle lottery is "Pocket tissue", the probability change function is activated. May be shown to the player that is a normal jackpot that does not work.

As shown in FIG. 218 (B), when a rattle lottery is performed, if the production ball 3610 emitted to the outside from the back right lower right production unit 3600 has a striped pattern, a "tropical travel invitation" is presented. After the image showing that the "pocket tissue" is presented if the production ball 3610 emitted from the production unit 3600 to the outside is not striped, the player's gaze is displayed at the bottom right of the back. Guidance display for guiding to the effect unit 3600 is performed (see FIG. 219 (A)). At this time, in order to emphasize the place where the player should pay attention, the lighting effect performed on the game area is darkened so as to be modest, and the back right lower right effect unit 3600 is lit brightly. In addition, the lower right back effect unit 3600 rotates as if a rattle lottery is being performed, and in order to emphasize this, a display effect as if the rattle lottery machine is rotating is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is displayed on the display screen of.

Then, when the striped production sphere is emitted from the lower right production unit 3600 to the outside, an image indicating that the "invitation to travel to a tropical country" has been hit is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (Fig.). 219 (B)). After that, as an image showing that the game is controlled to a high-probability gaming state, the characters "Enter tropical mode!" Are displayed large over substantially the entire display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 220), and are output as voice. To. As a result, the player can grasp that the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed is controlled to the high-probability gaming state. In this way, the result of the special lottery is notified by the rattling effect by the back right lower right effect unit 3600.

By the way, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, as in the conventional pachinko machine, a symbol (decorative symbol) is variablely displayed in a variable pattern based on the result of a special lottery, and the player displays the symbol when the symbol is stopped. The result of the special lottery can be grasped by the display mode. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to this, if the effect ball 3610 emitted from the back right lower right effect unit 3600 has a striped pattern, it is controlled to a high probability gaming state, and the back right lower effect unit. If the effect ball 3610 emitted from the 3600 to the outside is not in a striped pattern, it is controlled to a normal gaming state (more specifically, the previous gaming state is continued). That is, although it is determined based on a special lottery whether or not it is controlled to a high probability gaming state, by showing the player a rattling lottery using the back right lower right effect unit 3600, this rattling lottery It is possible to make the player think that the result is reflected in the gaming state. In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is certainly possible to grasp the result of the special lottery by looking at the mode when the change of the decorative symbol based on the result of the special lottery is stopped. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation of the decorative pattern based on the result of the special lottery and the rattle lottery using the back right lower right effect unit 3600 are not simply performed in parallel. After the effect ball 3610 is discharged from the lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside, the variation of the decorative pattern is stopped. That is, even though the decorative symbol is still fluctuating, the effect ball 3610 is released from the lower right back effect unit 3600 to the outside prior to the stop of the decorative pattern, so that the result of this rattling lottery Based on this, it makes the fluctuating decorative pattern appear to stop. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the rattling effect using the back right lower right effect unit 3600 is clearly different from the effect of the finished race like a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make people interested in the production using the unit 3600. Further, it is more preferable to make it appear as if a display effect is performed by a character or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the result of the rattle lottery. For example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the result of the special lottery is shown to the player not only by the mode when the decorative symbol is stopped but also by the mode of the display effect by the character or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lower right of the back. By changing the mode of the display effect after the effect ball 3610 is released from the effect unit 3600 to the outside, it is possible to make it appear as if such a display effect is being performed based on the result of the rattling lottery. ..

The result of the special lottery notified by the rattling effect by the lower right effect unit 3600 is not limited to the type of jackpot (whether or not it is controlled to the high probability gaming state), for example, the winning result (the jackpot game is executed). Whether or not it is done). In this case, even though the decorative symbol has fluctuated and the result of the special lottery has not been displayed yet, the result of the special lottery is displayed by stopping this decorative symbol. The effect ball 3610 is discharged from the unit 3600 to the outside, and it is notified whether or not the result of the special lottery is a big hit according to the released effect ball 3610.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the rotary cylinder 3608 having the accommodating recess 3608a capable of accommodating the effect ball 3610 of the back right lower effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000, the outer diameter of the rotary cylinder 3608 Since the gap between the outer circumference of the rotary cylinder 3608 and the inner circumference of the cylindrical portion 3602b of the lower right unit base 3602 is within the range of 1/5 to 1/3 of the diameter of the effect sphere 3610, the effect sphere 3610 is used. When the rotary cylinder 3608 is rotated while being housed in the storage recess 3608a, the effect ball 3610 enters the lateral notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612 whose outer peripheral side is closed by the cylindrical part 3602b of the lower right unit base 3602 on the back. However, as the rotary cylinder 3608 rotates, the circumferential end of the accommodating recess 3608a comes into contact with the portion of the effect sphere 3610 protruding from the lateral notch 3612c toward the accommodating recess 3608a, thereby causing the effect sphere 3610 to side. It can be returned from the notch 3612c into the accommodating recess 3608a, and the lateral notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612 can prevent the effect ball 3610 from being pinched between the cylindrical portion 3602b and the rotary cylinder 3608. , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect, and it is possible to entertain the game by avoiding the player's interest from being lowered due to the interruption of the game.

Further, in the lower right back effect unit 3600, the effect ball 3610 is discharged from the discharge port 3630b formed on the outer circumference of the lower right back rotation decoration body 3630 that can rotate around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. Since the outlet 3630b from which the effect ball 3610 is discharged can be made difficult to see from the player side, it is possible to perform an effect clearly different from the release of the effect ball in the conventional pachinko machine, and the effect is different from that of other pachinko machines. It can be a pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the attention of the player by trying to differentiate the pachinko machine.

Further, the rotating cylinder 3608 in the lower right back effect unit 3600 in the direction in which the accommodating recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608 coincides with the discharge portion 3602c (the side notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612) of the lower right back unit base 3602 from the upper side. The effect ball 3610, which (partially) entered into the lateral notch 3612c of the flap 3612, was discharged from the accommodating recess 3608a due to the rotation of the rotating cylinder 3608. The rotating cylinder 3608 (accommodating recess 3608a) As the rotation of the cylinder, it moves downward and comes into contact with the lower end of the lateral notch 3612c before the upper end of the accommodation recess 3608a in the circumferential direction. There is a margin for the effect sphere 3610 to return to the accommodating recess 3608a before the portion abuts from the upper side, and the circumferential upper end of the accommodating recess 3608a abutting on the effect sphere 3610 due to the gravity acting on the effect sphere 3610. The effect ball 3610 can be returned to the inside of the accommodating recess 3608a, and the effect ball 3610 is sandwiched between the side notch 3612c and the accommodating recess 3680a to prevent the rotation of the rotating cylinder 3608 from being hindered. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to a defect caused by the rotation of the rotating cylinder 3608 being hindered, so that the player can surely enjoy the effect of the effect ball 3610. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, when the effect ball 3610 is discharged from the discharge portion 3602c of the back right lower unit base 3602 in the back right lower effect unit 3600, that is, the discharge port 3630b of the back right lower rotation decoration body 3630, the rotary cylinder 3608 and the release flap 3612 Since the above is reciprocated a plurality of times within a predetermined angle range, by vibrating the accommodating recess 3608a and the side notch 3612c, those dimensional errors and positioning errors are eliminated and the inside of the accommodating recess 3608a is eliminated. The effect ball 3610 can be discharged from the discharge portion 3602c of the lower right unit base 3602, and the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely embodied by reliably performing the effect by the effect ball 3610. ..

Further, when the effect ball 3610 is discharged from the ball receiving portion 3654b of the ball receiving member 3654 in the lower right back effect unit 3600, the ball receiving member 3654 is tilted a plurality of times, so that the effect ball 3610 is tilted from the ball receiving portion 3654b. Can be reliably discharged to the recovery passage 3652b side, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the front end of the third stage 2513 in the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 on which the game ball rolls is in front of the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) and is a front component member. The depth of the stage 2510 in the front-rear direction can be increased as compared with a conventional pachinko machine that extends to substantially the same position as the front end of the 1110A and has the front end at substantially the same position as the front end of the game panel 1200. Therefore, the wide stage 2510 allows the game ball to be rolled in various states, and by making the game ball move in various ways on the stage 2510, the movement of the game ball is prevented from becoming monotonous and it is difficult to get bored. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

Further, the front end of the third stage 2513 in the stage 2510 on which the game ball can roll is extended to a position substantially the same as the front end of the front component 1110A that divides the outer periphery of the game area 1100 in front of the front surface of the game panel 1200. Probably, the front end of the third stage 2513 is at substantially the same position as the front end of the game area 1100. Therefore, when the game ball rolls near the front end of the third stage 2513, the stage in the conventional pachinko machine The game ball can be rolled at a position as close to the player side as possible than the game ball that rolls on the stage 2510, making it easier to see the game ball that rolls on the stage 2510 and making the movement of the game ball more visible. Can be entertained.

Further, the rear end of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 is positioned behind the rear surface of the game panel 1200, and the game ball is positioned on the stage 2510 in front of the front surface of the game panel 1200 and the game. Since it is possible to roll between the position behind the rear surface of the panel 1200 and the depth of the stage 2510 in the front-rear direction can be made as wide as possible, the wide stage 2510 can be used to make various game balls. It can be rolled in a state, and by making the game ball make various movements on the stage 2510, it is possible to prevent the movement of the game ball from becoming monotonous and make it hard to get bored, and at the same time, the stage for the player. It is possible to surely embody the pachinko machine 1 which can entertain the movement of the game ball rolling on the 2510 and suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 is provided with a peripheral wall portion 2503 projecting forward, the stage 2510, which is arranged in the frame by forming a border by the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500, and the production units 3200 and 3400, respectively. The pachinko machine 1 can enhance the 3600, the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the like, and can strongly attract the interest of the player.

Further, when the game ball enters the first chance entrance 2516 and the second chance entrance 2517 opened on the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 in the stage 2510, the chance exit 2518 opened directly above the first starting port 2101. Since the game ball is about to be released and the game ball can be accepted into the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 with a high probability, the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 is the first chance entrance 2516. Alternatively, the player can be thrilled by whether or not he / she enters the second chance entrance 2517, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510, and the interest in the game is reduced. It can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the attacker unit 2100 is driven into the game area 1100 aiming at the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 arranged below the center accessory 2500. Even if the game ball hits the obstacle nail on the lower side of the center accessory 2500 and bounces upward, the game ball bounced by the third stage 2513 bounces downward and invades the window 2501 of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to prevent the game ball from invading the liquid crystal display device 1900 side and causing a problem, and it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the occurrence of the problem. Further, the third stage 2513 for preventing the invasion of the game ball is located between the second stage 2512 and the fourth stage 2514 formed on the lower side of the center accessory 2500 from the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210). Since the third stage 2513 is extended forward, the third stage 2513 can be made relatively inconspicuous by moving away from the inner circumference of the center accessory 2500, and the third stage extending forward can be made relatively inconspicuous. The 2513 can prevent the decoration of other decorative objects from being hindered, and the vertical positional relationship between the third stage 2513 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is farther than that of the conventional pachinko machine. The light emitted from the device 1900 and reflected on the upper surface of the third stage 2513 can be made difficult to reach the player's eyes, and the upper surface of the third stage 2513 can be prevented from appearing to shine to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. It can be avoided to get worse.

In addition, the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 are arranged above the third stage 2513 to prevent the invasion of the game ball, and come into contact with the obstacle nails planted under the center accessory 2500. Since it is possible to prevent the game ball that bounces upward from being placed on the first stage 2511, the second stage 2512, and the third stage 2513, the game ball does not pass through the warp entrance 2504 (regular route). It is possible to prevent the game ball from being supplied onto the stage 2510, and it is a problem to prevent the player from feeling distrust by supplying the game ball onto the stage 2510 without going through the regular route. It is possible to continue the game with this pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 in the stage 2510 are arranged above the third stage 2513 that prevents the invasion of the game ball, the first stage 2511 is not blocked by the third stage 2513. And the game ball rolling on the second stage 2512 can be shown from the player side to make it easier to see the game ball, and the game ball rolling on the first stage 2511, the second stage 2512, and the third stage 2513. It is possible to entertain the movement and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, the stage 2510 is provided so that the game ball can be discharged into the game area 1100 at a position directly above the first start port 2101, and the game ball can be released from the position directly above the first start port 2101 in the game area 1100. When released into the 1100, the game balls are received into the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 with a high probability, so that the game balls supplied on the stage 2510 are released from directly above the first starting port 2101. The player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the game is played, and the expectation for accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 can be raised, and the player rolls on the stage 2510. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball to be played, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Further, since the game ball can be discharged from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 directly above the first starting port 2101, the game ball aimed at the warp entrance 2504 so that the game ball is supplied onto the stage 2510. The driving operation can be positively performed by the player, the driving operation of the game ball can be enjoyed, and the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 are arranged above the third stage 2513. Therefore, it is possible to see the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 well, to enjoy the movement of the game ball, and to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, when the game ball enters the warp entrance 2504 of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2505 to the first stage 2511 and then released to the second stage 2512, and the game ball invades from the second stage 2512. It is supplied to the fourth stage 2514 and the fifth stage 2515 through the third stage 2513 to be prevented, and is discharged from the fifth stage 2515 into the game area 1100, so that the first stage 2511 to the fifth stage 2515 With the stage 2510 having the above, it is possible to entertain the player with a wider variety of rolling of the game ball, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. Further, as described above, the stage 2510 is multi-staged, and the rolling time of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 becomes long. Therefore, depending on the player, the driving time interval for hitting the game ball into the game area 1100 may be set. It is possible to make it longer, it is possible to prevent the game ball to be hit from being consumed early, and it makes the player feel like gained by entertaining the game for a long time, and the interest in the game is reduced. It can be suppressed.

Further, as a part of the stage 2510, a third stage 2513 extending forward from the front surface of the game panel 1200 is provided, so that the player enters the warp entrance 2504 and enters the warp exit 2505 to the stage 2510 (first stage 2511). The game ball supplied to) rolls in the left-right direction on the third stage 2513, and the game ball can be rolled in front of the front surface of the game panel 1200 (game panel 1210), which is a conventional pachinko. The game ball can be rolled in the left-right direction on the side closer to the player than the machine. Therefore, the stage 2510 can give the player an impression different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, and can be the pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the player's attention, and on the third stage 2513. It is possible to make the rolling game ball easier to see from the player side, and it is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, in the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 in the stage 2510, the first chance entrance 2516 and the second chance entrance 2517 through which the game ball can enter are formed, and the first start is performed below the fifth stage 2515. A chance exit 2518 is formed immediately above the mouth 2101 to release the game ball that has entered the first chance entrance 2516 and the second chance entrance 2517 into the game area 1100, and rolls on the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512. It is possible to excite and excite the player depending on whether or not the moving game ball enters the first chance entrance 2516 or the second chance entrance 2517, which raises the player's expectation for the game and reduces the interest in the game. The time until the game ball enters the first chance 2516 or the second chance entrance 2517 and is released from the chance exit 2518 into the game area 1100 is the time required for the first stage 2511. Since the game ball can be released from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 in a shorter time than the time from rolling to the fifth stage 2515 and being released into the game area 1100, the multi-stage stage 2510 is used. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from staying on the stage 2510 for a long time, and depending on the player, the tempo of the game becomes slow and the interest is lowered, and the game is enjoyed and the interest is lowered. Can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back unit 3000 arranged below the front view opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210 between the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) and the liquid crystal display device 1900. On the back bottom unit base 3402 of the back bottom production unit 3400, a back bottom rear middle decoration body 3450 and a pair of back bottom rear side decoration bodies 3420 having predetermined decorations are supported so as to be able to move up and down and rotatably. The lower rear middle decorative body 3450 is supported so as to be able to move up and down via the lower back front base 3502 attached to the front side of the lower rear middle decorative body 3450 and the pair of lower back lower rear side decorative bodies 3420. Then, the lower back middle decoration 3450, the pair of lower back side decorations 3420, and the lower back front middle decoration 3506 are located outside (including the lower side) of the front view opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210. Therefore, from the player side, the back lower rear middle decoration body 3450, the pair of back lower rear side decoration bodies 3420, and the back lower front middle decoration body 3506 are in a difficult state to see. Then, when the player drives the game ball into the game area 1100 to change the game state, the lower back middle decorative body 3450 rises inward of the front view opening 1215 according to the changed game state. , A pair of lower back side decorations 3420 rotate inward of the front view opening 1215 and the tips come into contact with each other, or the lower back front middle decoration 3506 rises inside the front view opening 1215. The lower back middle decoration 3450, the pair of lower back side decorations 3420, and the lower back front middle decoration 3506 move to the inside of the front view opening 1215 in an appropriate combination, so that various movable effects can be achieved. It becomes possible to perform it, and it is possible to make the player less bored by various effects, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the lower back middle decorative body 3450 and the lower back lower middle decorative body 3560 are raised inward of the front view opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210 at substantially the center in the left-right direction, and a pair of lower back rear side decorations. Since the body 3420 is rotated inward of the front view opening 1215 so as to surround the outer periphery of the lower back middle decorative body 3450, for example, the lower back middle decorative body 3450 is raised into the opening 1215. After that, when the pair of lower back side decorative bodies 3420 are rotated into the opening 1215, the player can be surprised by first raising the lower back middle decorative body 3450 to appear. At the same time, the player's attention can be attracted to the back lower rear middle decoration body 3450, and the pair of back lower rear side decoration bodies 3420 are rotated while the player is paying attention to the back lower back middle decoration body 3450. By surrounding the outer circumference of the back bottom rear middle decoration 3450 with a pair of back bottom rear side decorations 3420, the back bottom rear middle decoration 3450 can be made to appear to be slightly deformed, which further surprises the player. It is possible to entertain and make the player think that there is something good for the player by seeing (appearing) the large back bottom rear middle decoration body 3450 and the back bottom rear side decoration body 3420. It is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the pair of lower back side decorations 3420 are rotated from the outside to the inside of the front view opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210, and compared with the case where they are slid linearly, they are rotated. Since the direction of the back lower rear side decoration 3420 changes by moving, the appearance of the back lower rear side decoration 3420 changes during rotation, and the appearance of the back lower rear side decoration 3420 changes with respect to the rotating back lower rear side decoration 3420. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, to entertain the movement of the backside rear side decoration body 3420, and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the pair of back lower rear side decorative bodies 3420 are arranged so that the front surface thereof is located behind the front surface of the back lower rear middle decorative body 3450, and the back lower rear middle decorative body 3450 and the pair of back lower rear side decorative bodies 3450. Assuming that the side decoration body 3420 is moved to the inside of the front view opening 1215 to appear, the front surface of the pair of back bottom rear side decoration body 3420 surrounding the outer circumference of the back bottom rear middle decoration body 3450 is the back bottom rear. Since it is located behind the front surface of the middle decoration body 3450, it gives a sense of depth to the decoration composed of the back bottom rear middle decoration body 3450 and the pair of back bottom rear side decoration bodies 3420, and is more three-dimensional. It can be made into a pachinko machine 1 that can be shown to the player and enhances the decorativeness (design) to strongly attract the attention of the player. Further, the front surface of the pair of back bottom rear side decorations 3420 surrounding the outer circumference of the back bottom rear middle decoration 3450 is located behind the front of the back bottom rear middle decoration 3450, and the back bottom rear middle When the decorative body 3450 and the pair of lower back side decorative bodies 3420 appear, the outer side is farther from the player side than the center, so that the decoration can be made with a sense of perspective, and the player can use it. Even if the inside of the front view opening 1215 is blocked by the appearing lower back middle decoration 3450 and the pair of lower back side decorations 3420, the player can be surprised. It is possible to suppress the feeling of oppression, and to entertain the decoration of the back lower rear middle decorative body 3450 and the pair of back lower rear side decorative bodies 3420 and suppress the decrease in interest in the game. it can.

Further, as described above, the back surface can be given a three-dimensional effect by locating the front surface of the pair of back bottom rear side decoration bodies 3420 to the rear side with respect to the front surface of the back bottom rear middle decoration body 3450. Even if the depth (thickness) in the front-rear direction of the lower rear middle decoration body 3450 and the pair of back lower rear side decoration bodies 3420 is reduced, the three-dimensional decoration can be sufficiently exhibited, and the lower back middle decoration body can be sufficiently exhibited. Since the thickness of the 3450 and the pair of lower back side decorations 3420 can be reduced, the space in the front-rear direction for installing the lower back middle decoration 3450 and the pair of lower back side decorations 3420 is possible. It is possible to make the size smaller, and to secure space for other decorations, or to make the back bottom rear middle decoration 3450, the back bottom rear side decoration 3420, the back bottom front middle decoration 3506, etc. The size of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more attractive to the players and hard to get tired of.

Further, the back lower rear middle decorative body 3450, the pair of back lower rear side decorative bodies 3420, the back lower front middle decorative body 3506, etc., respectively, the back lower rear side decorative substrate 3426, the back lower rear middle decorative substrate 3456, and the back lower Since the front side decorative substrate 3536 and the back lower front middle decorative substrate 3546 are provided, the back lower rear side decorative substrate 3426, the back lower rear middle decorative substrate 3456, and the back lower front side decorative substrate 3536 are provided respectively. By appropriately emitting and decorating the back lower rear middle decorative substrate 3450 and the like with the back lower front middle decorative substrate 3546, it is possible to change the appearance of the back lower rear middle decorative body 3450 and the like in various ways. By combining each of the light emitting decorations of the decorative body 3450, the pair of back lower rear side decorative bodies 3420, and the lower back front middle decorative body 3506, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

Further, it is provided with a rod-shaped pointer member 3458 that rotates in front of the back lower rear middle decorative body 3450 (decorative body main body 3454) that moves up and down between the inside and the lower side of the front view opening 1215 in the panel plate 1210. Therefore, by rotating the pointer member 3458 after raising it to the inside of the front view opening 1215, it is possible to enjoy not only the appearance of the decorative body 3454 but also the rotation of the pointer member 3458, which is versatile for players. It is possible to present the effect and make it hard to get bored, it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered, and the paddle-shaped pointer member 3458 can be made to look like the hands of a clock. By rotating the pointer member 3458, it is possible to make the player feel that time is approaching and to be throbbing, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. ..

Further, since the pointer member 3458 in the lower back middle decorative body 3450 can be made to look like a clock hand, the pointer member 3458 is placed in a predetermined rotation position (for example, the position where the rotation is started, the pointer member 3458 is substantially vertical). It is possible to make it think that it rotates to the position where it stands up, the position of a specific decoration provided on the decorative body body 3454 on the rear side of the pointer member 3458, etc.), and at least the pointer member 3458 is predetermined. Until the rotation position of the player is reached, the player's attention can be attracted to the pointer member 3458 (back lower rear middle decorative body 3450), which makes the player less bored and suppresses the decrease in interest in the game. Can be done.

Further, in the back lower front unit 3500, the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 formed three-dimensionally in a predetermined shape and the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 extend outward from both the left and right sides, respectively, and the base end side can rotate. A pair of lower back front side decorative bodies 3530 that are supported by the lower back and rotate between a position where the tip side is lower than the base end side and a position where the front end side is raised as the back lower front middle decoration body 3506 goes up and down. When the back lower front middle decoration body 3506 is raised from the lower side to the inside of the front view opening 1215, the back lower front middle decoration body 3506 appears, and at the same time, it is arranged on the left and right sides of the back lower front middle decoration body 3506. Since the pair of back lower front side decorations 3530 is rotated to a position where the tip side thereof is higher than the base end side, the pair of back lower front sides extending diagonally upward from the back lower front middle decoration body 3506. The decorative body 3530 can make the entire decorative body look larger, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the back lower front unit 3500, and the movable state of the back lower front unit 3500 allows the player to see it. It is possible to give the impression that the player is spreading, and it is possible to enhance the uplifting feeling of the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, the back lower rear middle decoration body 3450, the pair of back lower rear side decoration bodies 3420, the back lower front middle decoration body 3506, etc. of the back lower back effect unit 3400 are arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, respectively. When the lower back middle decoration 3450, the pair of lower back side decorations 3420, and the lower back front middle decoration 3506 are moved from the outside to the inside of the front view opening 1215, the liquid crystal display device 1900 Since it is positioned (appeared) on the front surface, the back bottom rear middle decoration body 3450, the pair of back bottom rear side decoration bodies 3420, and the back bottom front middle decoration body that appeared the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. By blocking with 3506 etc., it is possible to change the appearance of the displayed production image and the appearance of the decorative body to present a more diverse production to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and reducing the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, since each decorative body such as the back lower rear middle decorative body 3450, the pair of back lower rear side decorative bodies 3420, and the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 moves (appears) to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal display is displayed. By blocking the effect image displayed on the device 1900 by the appearing decorative body, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the movement of each decorative body, and the decorative body moving to the inside of the front view opening 1215. It is possible to draw attention and entertain the movement, and at the same time, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good for the player due to the appearance of the decorative body, which raises the expectation for the game and reduces the interest. Can be suppressed.

Further, since each decorative body such as the back lower rear middle decoration body 3450, the pair of back lower rear side decoration bodies 3420, and the back lower front middle decoration body 3506 can be moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal display can be displayed. It is possible to relate the effect image displayed on the device 1900 to the movement of each decorative body, and it is possible to perform a collaborative effect that combines the image effect by the effect image and the movable effect by moving the decorative body. It is possible to entertain the player with various effects and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the second slide base 3248 of the back-up effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 moves up and down according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball into the game area 1100. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second elevating decorative body 3250) attached to the front surface of the second slide base 3248 is also moved, and the entire effect image can be moved, so that the effect image is displayed. The display device can give a strong impact to the player who has a preconceived idea that the display device is fixed and does not move, and the player's interest is reflected in the production image (second liquid crystal display device 3252). It is possible to attract and entertain the production image, and by displaying the production image that matches the movement of the second elevating decoration body 3250, it is possible to present a variety of productions to the player, making it difficult to get tired of the production. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1100, and the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is the second liquid crystal display device 3252. Since it is blocked by (the second elevating decorative body 3250), it is possible to surprise the player and strongly attract the player's attention to the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the blocked effect image and the second liquid crystal display device. It is possible to entertain the player with the effect image displayed on the 3252 and suppress the decrease in interest in the game, and since the effect image is displayed on the moving second liquid crystal display device 3252, the second The movement of the elevating decoration body 3250 (second liquid crystal display device 3252) and the effect image do not deviate from each other, and the effect images of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be displayed in good condition. It is possible to entertain the movement of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second elevating decorative body 3250) and each of the produced images and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, with the second slide base 3248 and the second elevating decorative body 3250 separated, the second slide base 3248 fixed piece 3248a is inserted into the fixing groove 3250a of the second elevating decorative body 3250. The slide base 3248 and the second elevating decoration 3250 are relatively moved to one side in the vertical direction to insert the fixing piece 3248a into the fixing groove 3250a, and the second elevating decoration is inserted into the locking hole 3248c of the second slide base 3248. By elastically locking the locking claw 3250c of the body 3250, the fixing piece 3248a is prevented from coming off from the fixing groove 3250a, and the second elevating decorative body 3250 (the second elevating decorative body 3250) with respect to the second slide base 3248. (Ii) The liquid crystal display device 3252) is attached. On the other hand, with the second elevating decoration body 3250 attached to the second slide base 3248, the locking claw 3250c of the second elevating decoration body 3250 is elastically deformed to engage with the locking hole 3248c of the second slide base 3248. After releasing the stop, the second slide base 3248 and the second elevating decoration body 3250 are relatively moved to the other side in the vertical direction, and the fixing piece 3248a of the second slide base 3248 is moved to the fixing groove of the second elevating decoration body 3250. By removing it from the inside of 3250a, the second elevating decoration body 3250 (second liquid crystal display device 3252) is removed from the second slide base 3248, and the second elevating decoration body 3250 is securely attached to the second slide base 3248. It can be attached to and detachably. Further, by elastically locking the locking claw 3250c of the second elevating decoration body 3250 to the locking hole 3248c of the second slide base 3248, the fixing piece 3248a of the second slide base 3248 becomes the second elevating decoration body. It is prevented from coming out of the fixing groove 3250a of the 3250, and the second slide base 3248 and the second elevating decorative body 3250 can be easily attached and detached by the elastic deformation of the locking claw 3250c. Therefore, even if a problem occurs in the second liquid crystal display device 3252 of the second elevating decoration body 3250, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be easily removed, so that maintenance such as replacement of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be performed. It can be easily performed, and the time during which the game is interrupted by maintenance can be shortened as much as possible, and the game can be restarted before the player becomes frustrated by the interruption, and the player's interest in the game can be enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decrease, and it is possible to perform various effects using the effect image by the second liquid crystal display device 3252 without any problem, and the movement of the second elevating decorative body 3250 (second liquid crystal display device 3252). It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of suppressing the deterioration of the player's interest by entertaining the player with the display or the production image.

Further, since the second elevating decorative body 3250 is detachably attached to the second slide base 3248, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified, and the cost for manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 increases. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be easily removed when the pachinko machine 1 is discarded, so that the waste sorting work can be easily performed and the pachinko machine 1 is environmentally friendly. Can be.

Further, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the second liquid crystal display device 3248 is located on the outside of the front view of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Since the 3252 is attached so as to extend toward the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, when the second slide base 3248 is moved, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 tends to vibrate and becomes the second liquid crystal display device 3252. There is a risk that problems will occur easily, but as described above, since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is detachably attached to the moving base, even if a problem occurs in the second liquid crystal display device 3252. It is possible to take immediate action and maintain the second liquid crystal display device 3252 in a good state. Therefore, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 without any problem, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is a display device separate from the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect image can be displayed even if the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is moved to the outside of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The effect patterns of the moving second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be made more diverse, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made tireless, and it is not necessary to provide a large liquid crystal display device 1900. , It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, a separate second liquid crystal display device 3252 is moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the positions of the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the effect image of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 in the front-rear direction are different. Therefore, it is possible to perform a deep production with the two production images, it is possible to suppress the surprise of the player and the deterioration of the interest, and at the same time, attract the attention of the player and each production image. And the movement of the image display means can be enjoyed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second elevating decorative body 3250) is arranged behind the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) that partitions the rear end of the game area 1100, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 It is possible to prevent the flow of the game balls circulating in the game area 1100 from being obstructed, so that the pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the movement of the game balls, and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be used as the game panel 1200 ( Since it is visible through the opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210), if a problem occurs in the second liquid crystal display device 3252, it can be removed from the second slide base 3248 through the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200. (Ii) The labor required for the maintenance of the liquid crystal display device 3252 can be facilitated, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Further, since the first elevating decoration body 3218 that can cover a part of the front surface of the second elevating decoration body 3250 and is movable independently of the second elevating decoration body 3250 is provided, the first elevating decoration body 3250 is provided. By appropriately moving the decorative body 3218, it is possible to change the range in which the effect image of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be seen from the player side, and the player can be entertained by a wider variety of effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the first elevating decoration body 3218 that moves on the front side of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 has a predetermined decoration, the player can be made into the first elevating decoration body 3218 by the decoration of the first elevating decoration body 3218. It becomes possible to draw attention, and when the player pays attention to the first elevating decoration body 3218, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second elevating decoration body 3250) also comes into view and is displayed on the second liquid crystal display device 3252. It is possible to surely show the produced production image, entertain the player, and suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b and the lateral notch portion 3612c of the discharge flap 3612 in the lower right back unit base 3602 are in a state of not matching. In the above, the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 (here, the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball into the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102). In a state where the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630 is rotated accordingly, the accommodating recess 3608a in which the effect sphere 3610 of a specific embodiment is rotated and released by rotating the rotating cylinder 3608 is formed into a cylindrical portion in the lower right back unit base 3602. The rotation is stopped at a position substantially coincide with the discharge portion 3602c of 3602b. In this state, the effect ball 3610 housed in the housing recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608 is blocked by the peripheral wall portion 3612b of the discharge flap 3612 and cannot move to the cylindrical portion 3602b side. Then, in this state, the rotation of the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630 is stopped so that the discharge port 3630b of the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630 substantially coincides with the discharging portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b in the lower right back unit base 3602. Subsequently, the discharge flap 3612 is rotated and stopped so that the lateral notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612 substantially coincides with the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b. As a result, the accommodating recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608, the side notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612, the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b in the lower right back unit base 3602, and the discharge port 3630b of the lower right back rotary decoration 3630 are formed. The effect spheres 3610 accommodated in the accommodating recess 3608a are discharged to the outside from the discharge port 3630b of the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630, and the effect spheres 3610 in a specific mode according to the gaming state are released. It can be discharged from the discharge port 3630b of the lower right back rotating decoration body 3630. Since the effect ball 3610 discharged from the discharge port 3630b of the lower right back rotating decoration body 3630 is received by the ball receiving portion 3654b of the ball receiving member 3654, the released effect ball 3610 can be easily seen, and the player can easily see the effect ball 3610. It is possible to reliably recognize the mode (color or pattern) of the effect sphere 3610 emitted from the object. Then, when the ball receiving member 3654 is tilted by the back right lower right recovery solenoid 3660 while the effect ball 3610 is received by the ball receiving member 3654, the effect ball 3610 is moved from the ball receiving member 3654 to the recovery passage 3652b of the recovery unit cover 3652. It is discharged upward and rolls on the collection passage 3652b and is guided to the collection port 3602f below the lower right rotating decorative body 3630. When the effect ball 3610 guided to the collection port 3602f is in a state where the collection port 3602f and the opening 3670a of the ball lift member 3670 are in a state of substantially matching, the opening 3670a of the ball lift member 3670 passes through the collection port 3602f. When the ball lift member 3670 is raised in this state, the effect ball 3610 stored in the opening 3670a is lifted. After that, when the opening 3670a of the ball lift member 3670 rises to a position substantially coincide with the return port 3602e of the lower right unit base 3602, the movable bottom plate 3672 forming the bottom of the opening 3670a of the ball lift member 3670 is moved to the back right. The effect ball 3610 rolls from the inside of the opening 3670a of the ball lift member 3670 to the back right lower right rotating decoration body 3630 side and returns through the return port 3602e by inclining so that the lower rotating decoration body 3630 side is lowered. Become. In the rotating cylinder 3608 arranged inside the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630, since the plurality of accommodating recesses 3608a are sized to accommodate only one effect ball 3610, they are released and emptied. The effect ball 3610 that has returned to the storage recess 3608a enters and is returned to the same storage recess 3608a as before the release. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect ball 3610 is released when the back right lower rotation decorative body 3630 starts to rotate, and the back right lower rotation that rotates the player's interest. It can be strongly attracted to the decorative body 3630, and the player is excited and excited by whether or not the production ball 3610 of the desired mode is released from the discharge port 3630b of the lower right rotating decorative body 3630. It can be enhanced, entertaining the player, and suppressing a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, since the effect ball 3610 having a different mode depending on the game state is discharged from the discharge port 3630b of the back right lower rotation decoration body 3630 in the back right lower effect unit 3600, the mode of the effect ball 3610 to be released ( It is possible to suggest to the player the possibility (for example, probability, reliability, etc.) that the chance will come and the player will be in an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit" game) due to the difference in color, pattern, etc. It is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game, and it is possible to enjoy the production using the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630 and the production ball 3610, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game. Can be done.

Further, the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630 is formed in a polygonal tubular shape with the front end side closed, and the discharge port 3630b at which the effect ball 3610 is discharged is formed at a predetermined position on the outer circumference. On the other hand, the appearance of the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630 can be reminiscent of a rotary lottery machine (so-called rattling lottery machine), and when the player sees the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630, the lower right back at first glance It is possible to recognize that the rotating decorative body 3630 is rotating, and the effect ball 3610 is released from the discharge port 3630b after the rotating decorative body 3630 on the lower right side of the back is rotated according to the game state, so that the lottery is really rattling. It is possible to make an illusion as if it is being performed, and it is possible to entertain the production by the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630 and the production ball 3610 and suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, since the effect sphere 3610 released from the back right lower rotation decoration body 3630 is returned to the inside of the back right lower right rotation decoration body 3630 by the back right lower right recovery solenoid 3660 or the like, the effect ball 3610 is separately replenished. Even if it is not done, the effect using the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630 and the effect ball 3610 can be automatically repeated, and the player can be continuously entertained and less bored, and the effect ball 3610 can be continuously performed. Is returned to the inside of the lower right rotating decorative body 3630, and the effect ball 3610 can be used as a medium separate from the game ball. Therefore, as the effect ball 3610, those having different modes can be used. The pachinko machine 1 can be used to reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the accommodating recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608 for accommodating the effect ball 3610 has a size capable of accommodating only one effect ball 3610, the effect ball 3610 can be inserted from the discharge port 3630b of the lower right back rotating decoration body 3630. When one is released, the next effect ball 3610 is released after being collected via the back right lower right recovery solenoid 3660, the ball lift member 3670, etc., and the released effect ball 3610 is released inside the back right lower right rotating decoration body 3630. When returning to the rotary cylinder 3608, the effect ball 3610 is accommodated only in the empty accommodating recess 3608a, and the effect ball 3610 can be returned to the accommodating recess 3608a initially accommodated. Therefore, each of the effect balls 3610 having a different aspect can be automatically returned and accommodated in the predetermined accommodating recess 3608a, so that when the effect ball 3610 of a specific aspect is released according to the gaming state, each effect ball 3610 is released. By making the effect sphere 3610 and the accommodating recess 3608a correspond to each other, the rotating cylinder 3608 is rotated so that the predetermined accommodating recess 3608a coincides with the discharging portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b in the lower right back unit base 3602. The effect sphere 3610 of a desired mode can be released only by stopping, and the control related to the release of the effect sphere 3610 can be simplified.

Further, if the lateral notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612 provided between the cylindrical portion 3602b and the rotary cylinder 3608 in the lower right unit base 3602 and the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b do not substantially match, the rotary cylinder 3608 Since the effect sphere 3610 accommodated in the accommodating recess 3608a is prevented from passing through the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b, the effect sphere 3610 cannot pass through without substantially matching the lateral notch portion 3612c and the discharge portion 3602c. In the state, it is possible to prevent the effect sphere 3610 from being discharged from the discharge port 3630b during the rotation of the back right lower right rotating decorative body 3630 inserted on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 3602b, and the effect sphere is unintentionally released. When the 3610 is released, it is possible to avoid incomplete production using the back right lower right rotating decoration body 3630 and giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and the back right lower right rotating decoration body 3630 is used. It is possible to surely entertain the former production and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. Further, as described above, since it is possible to prevent the effect ball 3610 from being discharged from the discharge port 3630b during the rotation of the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630, the effect ball 3610 is discharged in an unintended direction. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a problem occurs and the game cannot be followed without interruption, and it is possible to prevent the interruption of the game from causing discomfort to the player and degrading the interest. it can.

Further, if the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b in the lower right back unit base 3602 and the discharge port 3630b of the lower right back rotation decoration body 3630 do not substantially match, the effect sphere 3610 is not discharged to the outside through the discharge port 3630b. Therefore, it is probable that the rotation position of the back right lower rotation decoration body 3630 in which the effect sphere 3610 is discharged from the discharge port 3630b of the back right lower rotation decoration body 3630 corresponds to the discharge part 3602c of the cylindrical part 3602b. It becomes a fixed position of, and the discharge direction of the effect ball 3610 emitted from the back right lower right rotating decoration body 3630 can be made constant, and the effect ball 3610 emitted from the back right lower right rotating decoration body 3630 can be reliably received by the ball receiving member. It can be picked up by 3654.

Further, when collecting the effect ball 3610 released from the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630, the player is given a tilt of the ball receiving member 3654 and an effect ball 3610 that rolls on the collection passage 3652b of the collection unit cover 3652. It is possible to show, not only the release of the production ball 3610 but also the movement of the ball receiving member 3654 and the production ball 3610 can be entertained, and the player can be entertained and the interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered. ..

Further, between the main body portion 3602a of the back right lower unit base 3602 and the back right lower unit case 3604, the ball lift member 3670 raises the back right lower rotation decoration body 3630 to the rear side and passes through the return port 3602e to the back side of the front side. Since the effect ball 3610 is returned to the inside of the lower right rotating decoration body 3630, the player side can see that the effect ball 3610 collected by the back right lower unit base 3602 is lifted up to the back right lower right rotating decoration body 3630. It can be obscured or hidden from the player, and makes the player think that the effect ball 3610 released from the back right lower right rotating decoration body 3630 has not been returned to the back right lower right rotating decoration body 3630. be able to. Therefore, when the effect sphere 3610 is released from the back right lower right rotating decoration body 3630, it can be thought that the number of the effect balls 3610 inside the back right lower right rotating decoration body 3630 is reduced. If the mode of the effect sphere 3610 released from the body 3630 is not the effect sphere 3610 of the desired mode, it is possible to make an illusion that the probability that the effect sphere 3610 of the desired mode is released increases. It is possible to raise the expectation for the release of the production ball 3610 from the lower rotating decoration body 3630, and to entertain the production using the lower right rotating decoration body 3630 and the production ball 3610, and to reduce the interest of the player. It can be suppressed.

Further, since the collection port 3602f in the lower right unit base 3602 on the back is arranged directly under the return port 3602e, the effect ball 3610 is held straight with a mechanism for lifting the effect ball 3610 from the collection port 3602f to the return port 3602e. The mechanism may be a mechanism that can be raised. For example, it is possible to suppress the mechanism for lifting the effect ball 3610 from becoming larger than in the case where the mechanism is rotated and lifted, and the mechanism is collected. The mechanism (recovery mechanism) can be made compact and compact, and the recovery mechanism can be miniaturized so that the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630 and the like can be made relatively large. It can be a pachinko machine 1 that makes the 3630 or the like stand out and strongly attracts the attention of the player.

Further, the lower right back unit base 3602 and the lower right back unit case 3604 are formed in a box shape, and the strength and rigidity can be increased as a matter of fact. The 3630, the rotating cylinder 3608, the discharge flap 3612, etc. can be firmly and rotatably held, and the lower right back rotating decorative body 3630, etc. can be prevented from rotating unstablely, resulting in poor appearance during rotation. The discharge port 3630b, the side notch 3612c, the accommodating recess 3608a, etc. can be accurately matched with the discharge portion 3602c of the lower right unit base 3602, thereby ensuring the effect ball 3610. Can be released to.

Further, when the opening 3670a of the ball lift member 3670 does not coincide with the collection port 3602f of the back right lower unit base 3602, the effect ball 3610 released from the back right lower right rotating decoration body 3630 is collected from the ball receiving member 3654. Even if the recovery port 3602f is reached via 3652b, the front surface of the ball lift member 3670 can prevent the effect ball 3610 from falling off through the collection port 3602f, so that the effect ball 3610 can be reliably collected. Then, it can be returned to the lower right rotating decorative body 3630, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be surely embodied.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball driven into the game area 1100 is received by the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102, a predetermined lottery result is drawn and then a predetermined lottery result is drawn. The large winning opening 2103 can be accepted according to the lottery result, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by accepting the game balls to the large winning opening 2103. Therefore, the first starting port is given to the player. It is possible to enjoy the operation of driving the game ball aiming at 2101, the second starting port 2103, and the large winning opening 2103, and the payout of the game ball. In this pachinko machine 1, when the game ball is driven, the hit game ball is driven so as to circulate along the inner circumference of the game area 1100, that is, the game ball is hit with a strength equal to or higher than a predetermined value. When it is pushed in (so-called right-handed), the game ball hit from the left side along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 to the upper part of the game area 1100 is circulated as it is to the right side on the opposite side along the inner circumference and distributed. Since the ball enters the distribution space 2530 via the approach passage 2545, the game ball can be driven (entered) into the distribution space 2530 with a simple driving operation, and has entered the distribution space 2530. Since the game ball is discharged from the distribution space 2530 through the guide passage 2540 to the upper side of the large prize opening 2103, when the large prize opening 2103 is acceptable, it is released from the guide passage 2540 through the distribution space 2530. The game ball that has been played can be accepted into the large winning opening 2103 with a high probability. As a result, when the large winning opening 2103 becomes acceptable, the driving operation aiming at the distribution space 2530 can be performed so that the game ball is discharged from the guide passage 2540. A distribution valve 2551 is arranged in the distribution space 2530, and when the distribution valve 2551 distributes the game ball in either the left or right direction and is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580, Benefits (eg, the number of rounds for a "big hit" game) are awarded according to the direction distributed by the distribution valve 2551. At this time, the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decorative body 2565, which can be seen on the rear side through the transparent distribution space 2530, rotate in the same direction as the game ball is distributed by the distribution valve 2551. Since it tilts, it is possible to clearly recognize the direction in which the game ball is distributed by the movement of the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decorative body 2565. Therefore, it is clear by looking at the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decorative body 2565 whether or not the distribution direction of the game ball by the distribution valve 2551 is the direction in which the desired privilege is given. Therefore, it is possible to easily take the timing at which the game ball is distributed in a desired direction, and it is possible to entertain the driving operation of the game ball and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the distribution detection sensor 2580 for detecting the passage of the game ball is arranged on the front side of the moving lower decorative body 2567, the distribution for detecting the game ball distributed by the distribution valve 2551 is provided. The detection sensor 2580 is pointed to by the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567, so that the player can be surely recognized the distribution direction by the distribution valve 2551, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, since the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 are arranged behind the distribution space 2530, the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 are used for distribution. It is possible to avoid pressing the inside of the game area 1100 including the space 2530 and prevent the inside of the game area 1100 from becoming narrow, and it becomes possible to distribute the game balls within the widest possible range, and pachinko. The original movement of the game ball of the machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decorative body 2565 can be enlarged or the movement range can be increased without pressing the inside of the game area 1100. It is possible to make the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decorative body 2565 stand out, and to make the player surely recognize the direction to be distributed by the distribution valve 2551, as described above. Can produce the effects of.

Further, since the rotation centers of the distribution valve 2551 that distributes the game ball by rotation and the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 are arranged substantially concentrically and rotate in the same direction, the vibration is performed. The movement of the distribution valve 2551 and the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 are almost the same, and even if the game ball is driven at the timing matching the movement of the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567, the movement of the distribution valve 2551 is substantially the same. At the same timing, the distribution valve 2551 can distribute the game ball in a desired direction, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. Further, since the distribution valve 2551 and the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 are rotated in the same direction, the distribution valve 2551 and the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 can be made to look as one. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 is distributing the game ball, and to entertain the movement of the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution valve 2551. At the same time, it is possible to raise the expectation for the distribution of the game balls by the distribution valve 2551 (the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567) and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the front surface of the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567, the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565, and the distribution valve 2551 is each decorated to imitate the same predetermined character, the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 And the distribution movable upper decorative body 2565 can be made more conspicuous, and the player can be surely recognized the direction to be distributed by the distribution valve 2551. Further, since a predetermined character is formed by the decoration of the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567, the distribution movable upper decorative body 2565, and the distribution valve 2551, the predetermined character moves by moving these, and the distribution is performed. It is possible to entertain the movements of the movable lower decorative body 2567, the distributed movable upper decorative body 2565, and the distribution valve 2551 (character), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, by emitting light of the LED mounted on the distribution decoration substrate 2590, the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 can be illuminated from the rear side to be light-emitting and decorated. The distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 arranged on the rear side of the 2530 emit light and become brighter, so that the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 are emitted from the player side. The sorting movable lower decoration body 2567 and the sorting movable upper decoration body 2565 can be made more conspicuous, and the direction to be sorted by the sorting valve 2551 can be divided into the sorting movable lower decoration body 2567 and the sorting movable upper decoration body 2567. It can be surely recognized by 2565. Further, since the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 can be light-emitting decorated by the distribution decoration substrate 2590, for example, the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 can be arranged according to the optimum driving timing. When the decorative body 2565 is made to emit light and decorate the movable distribution, it is possible to make it easier for the player to take the timing of hitting the game ball, which makes the player more entertaining and reduces the interest in the game. It can be suppressed.

Further, the slide of the distribution slider 2555 that reciprocates by the distribution drive motor 2558 is transmitted to the distribution valve 2551 via the connecting spring 2556 and the like, and the distribution is movable via the rack gear 2555f and the first transmission gear 2562 and the like. Since it is transmitted to the lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565, the distribution valve 2551, the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 are transmitted by one distribution drive motor 2558. Can be driven, and the configuration related to each drive can be simplified to reduce the overall space related to the drive. That is, by reducing the space for driving the distribution valve 2551, the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567, and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565, the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 can be relatively reduced. Since it is possible to widen the space such as, etc., and the sorting movable lower decorative body 2567 and the sorting movable upper decorative body 2565 can be enlarged or moved greatly, the sorting movable lower decorative body 2567 and the sorting can be moved. The movable upper decorative body 2565 can be made to stand out and the direction of distribution by the distribution valve 2551 can be surely recognized by the player, making it easier to take the timing of driving the game ball and suppressing the deterioration of the player's interest. can do.

Further, when the game ball is hit with a strength equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the game ball hit from the left side along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 to the upper part of the game area 1100 is directly moved to the right side on the opposite side along the inner circumference. The game ball can be driven (entered) into the distribution space 2530 with a simple driving operation because it is distributed to the distribution space 2545 and enters the distribution space 2530 through the distribution entry passage 2545. In the driving operation of the game ball by the player, it is only necessary to emphasize the driving timing at which the ball is distributed in the desired direction with respect to the distribution direction of the distribution valve 2530, so that the game ball can be easily distributed in the desired direction. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player first hits a game ball aiming at the first start port 2101 (second start port 2102), and the game ball hit into the game area 1100 is the first. When a special lottery result (big hit) is drawn, which allows the big winning opening 2103 to be accepted into the starting port 2101 and pay out a predetermined number of game balls by accepting the game balls, the big hit flag is turned on and the big prize is won. A "big hit" game is started in which the mouth 2103 is acceptable. However, even if the jackpot is drawn, it is not possible to immediately accept the game ball into the big winning opening 2103, and the explanation interval effect is first performed, and when the explanation interval effect is completed, the condition device is activated. Then, in this state, when the game ball is hit with a strength equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the game ball hit from one side in the left-right direction along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 to the upper part of the game area 1100 remains as it is It circulates to the opposite side along the inner circumference of 1100 and enters the distribution space 2530. In this distribution space 2530, the distribution valve 2551 distributes the game ball in the left-right direction at regular intervals regardless of the game state that changes by hitting the game ball into the game area 1100, and the distribution space The game ball that has entered the 2530 is distributed to either the left or right direction by the distribution valve 2551, and while the condition device is operating, the distribution detection sensor 2580 provided in the distribution direction is provided. When the game ball is detected, the number of rounds of the "big hit" game is determined as a predetermined privilege. Then, the game balls distributed in the distribution space 2530 are released to the upstream side of the large winning opening 2103, and are accepted to the large winning opening 2103 that can be accepted with a high probability. Therefore, when it becomes possible to accept the game ball into the large winning opening 2103 according to the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2103 or the like, the game ball is made stronger than the predetermined value. When the ball is driven into the game area 1100, it can be accepted into the large winning opening 2103 through the distribution space 2530 with a high probability, so that the game ball can be easily accepted into the large winning opening 2103, and even a beginner is sufficient. In addition to being able to entertain, the number of rounds is given according to the direction of distribution by the distribution valve 2551 in the distribution space 2530, and the movement and state of the distribution valve 2551 so that it can be distributed in the desired direction. Since the game ball can be driven while looking at the above, the driving operation of the game ball can be enjoyed, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

Further, the game balls distributed in the predetermined direction by the distribution valve 2551 in the distribution space 2530 are all discharged into the game area 1100 on the upstream side of the large winning opening 2103, and the distribution valve is used. Since it is possible to make the distance through which the game balls circulate from the distribution valve 2551 to the release into the game area 1100 different depending on the direction in which the game balls are distributed by 2551, the game is played according to the direction in which the game balls are distributed. By making the distribution distance of the balls different, it is possible to make the game balls hit later catch up with the game balls hit first, and multiple game balls can be placed on the upstream side of the grand prize opening 2103 of the normal game balls. It can be continuously discharged into the game area 1100 at intervals shorter than the distribution interval. Therefore, it is possible to release and accept more game balls from the upstream side than usual with respect to the time when the large winning opening 2103 is acceptable, which makes the player more entertaining and less entertaining. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the game balls are distributed by the distribution valve 2551 at regular intervals regardless of the game state, when the game balls are to be distributed in a desired direction, the game balls are distributed according to the movement of the distribution valve 2551. It is possible to make it easier to measure the timing of hitting the game ball, and it is possible to hit the game ball at the right timing so that the game ball is distributed in the desired direction. Can be suppressed from decreasing. In addition, since the game balls are distributed at regular intervals regardless of the game state, it is possible to prevent the distribution valve 2551 from feeling that the game balls are being distributed intentionally. It is possible to enjoy the distribution of the game balls by the distribution means without causing the player to feel distrust, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

In addition, the game ball cannot enter the distribution space 2530 while the distribution direction is changed, and the game ball that tries to enter the distribution space 2530 while the distribution direction is changed is distributed. Since it can be stopped at the entrance of the distribution space 2530 (upper side of the distribution valve 2551), as a driving operation of the game ball, the game ball is driven so as to reach the distribution valve 2551 while the distribution direction is changed. As a result, a plurality of game balls can be stopped in front of the distribution valve 2551. Therefore, when the distribution valve 2551 changes the distribution direction so as to distribute the game balls in a desired direction, a plurality of game balls are driven in and the game balls are stopped in front of the distribution valve 2551. When the change of the distribution direction is completed, the stopped game balls can be reliably distributed in the desired direction, and at the same time, a plurality of game balls can be distributed in the desired direction to obtain more benefits. , It is possible to entertain the granting of benefits and the operation of driving the game ball at the same time and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, as described above, the game ball can be stopped on the front side of the distribution valve 2551 while the distribution direction is changed. Therefore, by hitting more game balls while the game ball is stopped, the game ball can be stopped. The interval (temporal interval, distance interval) in which the stationary game ball and the game ball hit after that are distributed can be narrowed as much as possible. That is, since the distribution interval of a plurality of game balls can be shortened by the time stopped by the distribution valve 2551 to be in a state of being close to each other, the change of the distribution direction is completed and the distribution space 2530 is entered. When the game balls can enter, at least two game balls can be continuously released to the large winning opening 2103 side at shorter intervals than usual, and at the time when the large winning opening 2103 is acceptable. On the other hand, it is possible to accept more game balls than usual, which makes the player more entertaining and suppresses the deterioration of the interest. Further, as described above, in order to allow the large winning opening 2103 to receive more game balls, the timing at which the game balls are stopped by the distribution valve 2551 and the large winning opening 2103 through the distribution space 2530 are reached. Since it is necessary to hit the game ball at a timing that takes into consideration the timing at which the game ball is accepted, the difficulty of the hitting operation is likely to increase, and the player who is accustomed to the hitting operation will not get bored. At the same time, it is possible to improve the motivation for the driving operation, to entertain the game and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the game balls distributed by the distribution valve 2551 are detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580 and the corresponding number of rounds is assigned, the game balls distributed in the direction in which the corresponding number of rounds is assigned. Can be reliably detected, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be reliably embodied. In addition, a distribution detection sensor 2580 that detects the game balls distributed in the distribution space 2530 is provided, and the player can be made aware of the existence of the distribution detection sensor 2580 by the distribution valve 2551. Since you can see where the sorted game balls are detected by the sorting detection sensor 2580, you can prevent distrust of the benefits (number of rounds) given, and you can rest assured. The game can be continued, the expectation for the number of rounds given can be increased, the player can be entertained, and the interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered.

In addition, since the predetermined privilege given by the privilege giving means is the number of rounds of the "big hit" game, if a larger number of rounds is given, more game balls can be accepted into the big winning opening 2103. It becomes possible to play, and the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the game ball is distributed in the direction in which the desired number of rounds is given by the distribution valve 2551, and the player can raise the expectation for the distribution. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of. Further, the player can be made to perform the driving operation (driving timing) of the game ball so that the game ball is distributed in the direction in which the desired number of rounds is given by the distribution valve 2551. It is possible to entertain the driving operation and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[Recovery measures in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage]
By the way, when the pachinko game machine is configured as described above, before the player starts the jackpot game, after watching the game explanation, the game medium is driven into the game area in order to select the safe type or the pounding type. Before the game medium enters the distribution unit 2550, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, and then the power supply supplied to the power supply board. When the voltage (24V in this embodiment) is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), an instruction screen (hereinafter referred to as power recovery) for allowing the game medium to enter the distribution unit 2550 on the display screen of the effect display means (liquid crystal display device 1900). Before the display of "Aim at your favorite person ♪" in Fig. 213, or because the instruction screen has already been displayed, the instruction screen is not displayed, so some players may be able to recover. The game status cannot be grasped.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a process of returning to the state at the time of power failure (processing at the time of power recovery) according to the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e, and returns to the jackpot game preparation process (FIG. 206). However, unless the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L (first distribution detection sensor) or the distribution detection sensor 2580R (second distribution detection sensor), the jackpot game does not proceed (the execution mode of the jackpot game is not yet available). (Because it is a decision), the progress of the jackpot game is not stopped, and the process does not proceed to the next process in the jackpot game mode determination process. Therefore, no command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140. For this reason, the player cannot grasp the game state at the time of restoration and cannot start the jackpot game.

FIG. 221 is a time chart showing the process from the occurrence of the jackpot by the special symbol to the start of the jackpot game. In FIG. 221, when a predetermined stop symbol display time (for example, 1.008 seconds in the embodiment) elapses after the special symbol stops and a jackpot occurs, the process shifts to the jackpot game preparation process and is described. The interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S622 in FIG. 206 and step S18 in FIG. 200). In FIG. 221 the period A indicates the explanatory interval effect period from the time when the explanatory interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140.

In the period A, even if the player voluntarily launches the game ball in an attempt to pass it through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R, the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection The detection of the game ball by the sensor 2580R has been disabled, and the progress to the jackpot game remains stopped.

Description When the interval effect period elapses, the condition device starts operating (step S627 in FIG. 206), and the gate 2575 of the distribution unit 2550 becomes effective. That is, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is effective. In FIG. 221 the period B indicates the valid period of the distribution detection sensor 2580.

Then, the valid period of the distribution detection sensor 2580 continues until the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R. In period B, even if the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is enabled, the jackpot game proceeds unless the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R. do not do. In other words, the jackpot game can be started at the will of the player.

When the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is invalidated. Further, when the number of rounds (big hit game mode) is determined, the accessory continuous operating device starts operating (step S6080 in FIG. 207). Further, the jackpot start interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S6085 in FIG. 207 and step S18 in FIG. 200). In FIG. 221 the period C indicates the jackpot start interval effect period from the time when the jackpot start interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140. Then, when the jackpot start interval production period elapses, the jackpot 2103 opens and the jackpot game starts (FIG. 209).

By the way, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during a game, a power failure warning signal is transmitted from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 as described above, and when the main control MPU detects the power failure warning signal, a power failure occurrence processing (Fig. 199) is executed, the checksum of the RAM is calculated and saved, and the backup flag is set. The game data stored in the RAM when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs is held by the backup power supply (backup data).

Then, in the case of a power failure, the power is turned on again, and in the case of a momentary power failure, the watchdog timer is reset by inputting a reset signal to start the power. Executes the power recovery process to return to the current state.

In FIG. 221, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during the period A, that is, the explanatory interval production period (x mark in the figure), the game state at that time is set to the processing flag of "3" by the jackpot game preparation process of FIG. 206. Moreover, it is specified that the identification flag has a value of 1. In addition, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during the period B, that is, the distribution detection sensor valid period (x mark in the figure), the game state at that time is that the processing flag is "3" and the identification flag is a value 2. Is specified in. However, in both the period A and the period B, since the explanatory interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140, the command is not transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 at the time of restoration.

The embodiment described below is made in view of such circumstances, and when it is determined that a power failure or a momentary power failure has occurred in the period A or the period B in the above-mentioned power recovery processing, peripheral control is performed. The present invention relates to an invention in which a driving instruction effect command for displaying a driving instruction screen (FIG. 213) for driving a game ball into the distribution unit 2550 is transmitted to the unit 4140.

FIG. 222 is a flowchart of a game state determination process executed by the main control MPU according to backup data as one process in the power recovery process (power-on process). When the main control MPU starts the game state determination process, it first determines whether or not the process flag is "3" (step S30). If the processing flag is not "3", step S30 is determined to be NO, the game state determination processing is exited, and the process returns to the power recovery processing routine (not shown).

On the other hand, when the processing flag is "3", the step S30 is determined to be YES, and then it is determined whether or not the identification flag is 2 (step S31). That is, it is determined whether or not a power failure or a momentary power failure has occurred during the valid period of the distribution detection sensor. When the identification flag is 2, it is determined that step S31 is YES, the process proceeds to step S37, the driving instruction effect command is set (step S37), the game state determination process is exited, and the process returns to the power recovery processing routine. To do.

On the other hand, when the identification flag is not 2, it is determined that step S31 is NO, the process proceeds to step S32, and it is determined whether or not the identification flag is 1. (Step S32). That is, it is determined whether or not a power failure or a momentary power failure has occurred during the explanation interval production period. If the identification flag is not 1 in step S32, it is determined that step S32 is NO, the game state determination process is exited, and the process returns to the power recovery processing routine.

On the other hand, if the identification flag is 1 in step S32, it is determined that step S32 is YES, and the process proceeds to step S33. If it is determined that a power failure or momentary power failure has occurred during the explanation interval production period, it is assumed that the explanation interval production has ended, and the operation of the condition device is started as one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game. (Step S33).

Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving function is operating (step S34), and when the time saving function is operating, step S34 is determined to be YES, and the time saving function is started based on the start of the operation of the condition device. The operation is stopped (step S35) and the process proceeds to step S36. On the other hand, when the time saving function is not operating, step S34 is determined to be NO, step S35 is skipped, and the process directly proceeds to step S36. When the process proceeds to step S36, the identification flag is updated to 2 (step S36), the process proceeds to step S37, the driving instruction effect command is set (step S37), the game state determination process is exited, and the power recovery processing routine is performed. Return to.

As explained above, when the power supply of the game machine is cut off during the distribution detection sensor valid period (when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs), the power supply of the game machine is cut off during the explanation interval production period. At that time (when it is determined that a power failure or momentary power failure has occurred), a driving instruction effect command is set.

The input instruction effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S18) shown in FIG. 200. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect display (see FIG. 213) indicating that the game ball is driven into the distribution unit 2550 is displayed through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

On the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 1900, characters such as "Aim at your favorite person ♪" and voice output are performed. At this time, in order to give an impact, characters such as "Aim at your favorite person ♪" are displayed so as to cover almost the entire area of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the normal voice output mode (normal voice output mode). For example, voice output is performed in a mode different from (for example, a mode in which voice is output by a single character) (for example, a mode in which voice is output simultaneously by a plurality of characters).

In this way, at the time of power recovery, the driving instruction screen for driving the game ball into the distribution unit 2550 is displayed on the effect display means, so that the player is required to drive the game ball into the distribution unit 2550. It can be clearly recognized. The player who sees the driving instruction screen may hit the game ball to the right aiming at the distribution unit 2550 arranged on the right side of the game area. When the game ball driven into the game area enters the distribution unit and the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R, the execution mode in the jackpot game is determined, so that the jackpot game Will start, so you can enjoy the jackpot game with confidence even after the restoration.

The main control MPU returns to the distribution detection sensor valid period by executing the special control process of step S14 of FIG. 200 based on the value “3” of the processing flag and the value 2 of the identification flag (FIG. 206). Step S632).

When the jackpot game can be started, jackpot related commands (S6084, S6085) are transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140. As a result, the lamp, voice, drive motor, etc. are returned to the normal state.

[Modification example]
In the above-described embodiment, when the main control MPU 4100a transmits an explanatory interval effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 and the peripheral control unit 4140 receives the explanatory interval effect command, the jackpot game of FIG. 210 (A) is sequentially performed over time. A notice display indicating that the game will be explained until the start of the game, a guidance display that guides the player's gaze in the game until the jackpot game of FIG. 210 (B) is started, and a safe type jackpot game of FIG. 211. An explanation display for the selection method, FIG. 212 is an explanation display for the method of selecting the pounding type jackpot game, and a display for prompting the player to select which type of the jackpot game to be executed in FIG. (Direction), a display showing that the present of FIG. 214 is a safe type timing, a display showing that the present of FIG. 215 is a pounding type timing, and a game after the pounding type jackpot game of FIG. 216 is selected. The production screen is switched such as a guidance display that guides the person's gaze to the back right lower right production unit 3600 reminiscent of a rattling lottery machine, but it may be configured as follows.

For example, at the end of the explanatory interval effect (when it is determined that step S626 in FIG. 206 is YES), the main control MPU 4100a transmits a drive instruction effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140, and the peripheral control unit 4140 sends the drive instruction effect command. Is received, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 may display an effect indicating a driving instruction screen (FIG. 213) for driving the game ball into the distribution unit 2550 through control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

Further, when the main control MPU 4100a is configured to transmit the driving instruction effect command at the end of the explanatory interval effect, the main control MPU 4100a transmits to the peripheral control unit 4140 when the power is restored after the power supply of the game machine is cut off. The driving instruction effect command (step S37 in FIG. 222) may be the same command, or a separate command (referred to as the driving instruction effect 2 command) may be provided.

FIG. 223 is an image diagram displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device when the input instruction effect 2 command is separately provided, and is an example of a specific operation instruction screen indicating that the player performs a specific operation. When the driving instruction effect 2 command is separately provided, the peripheral control unit 4140 receives the driving instruction effect 2 command, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 distributes the game ball through control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. It is a figure which shows the driving instruction screen to drive into a unit 2550. As shown in FIG. 223, on the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the characters "Power has been restored" and "Please hit right" and the image of the arrow indicating the right direction are displayed. As a result, the player can understand that the electric power has been restored, and can easily grasp at a glance that he / she should hit right by operating the steering wheel.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 1100 Game area 1200 Game panel 1900 Liquid crystal display device 2000 Front unit 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3040 Panel relay board 3041 Lamp drive board 3045 Motor drive board 3600 Back right lower Production unit 3602 Lower right unit base (base member)
3602a Main body (rear wall)
3602b Cylindrical part 3602c Discharge part 3602e Return port 3602f Collection port 3604 Back right lower unit case (base member)
3608 Rotating cylinder 3608a Storage recess 3610 Directing ball (directing medium)
3612 Release flap (door member)
3612a Base 3612b Peripheral wall 3612c Side notch (notch)
3612d Rear notch 3612e Operating rod 3622 Back right lower first drive motor 3623 Back right lower first detection sensor 3626 Release link member 3630 Back right lower rotating decoration (rotating decoration)
3630b Discharge port 3640 Lower right back Second drive motor 3652 Recovery unit cover 3652b Recovery passage 3654 Ball receiving member (receiving member)
3654a Bearing 3656 Recovery link member 3658 Recovery slider 3660 Back right lower right Recovery solenoid 3670 Ball lift member (lift member)
3670a Opening (storage)
3672 Movable bottom plate (movable bottom member)
3672a Operating piece 3676 Lower right back third drive motor 3686 Backflow prevention front member 4010 Peripheral control board (effect control means)
4140 Peripheral control unit (effect control means)

Claims (1)

A game board with a game area where a game ball is hit by the operation of the player,
A body frame that detachably supports the game board and
A door frame having a game window so that at least the game area of the game board supported by the main body frame faces the player side when the front surface of the main body frame is openably and closably supported and closed.
A dish light emitting decoration means having a dish portion formed below the game window and bulging forward to store a game ball, and a light emitting decoration portion capable of emitting light decoration.
A first light emitting decoration means provided close to the dish light emitting decoration means, which decorates a predetermined area on the outer periphery of the game window and enables light emission toward the player side.
A second light emitting decoration means that decorates an area different from the predetermined area on the outer periphery of the game window and has a bulging portion that bulges forward from the first light emitting decoration means and can emit light.
With
The dish light emitting decoration means
It has a left side decoration area that is integrally decorated with the decoration by the first light emitting decoration means and a right side decoration area that is integrally decorated with the decoration by the second light emitting decoration means.
The bulging portion is located on the open side of the door frame that is openable and closable with respect to the front surface of the main body frame.
further,
A ball feeding unit that sends out a game ball stored in the dish portion of the dish light emitting decoration means to a launching position through a passage port, and a ball feeding unit .
It is provided with a launching means capable of launching a game ball sent to the launch position by the ball feed unit toward the game area one by one with respect to the launch passage .
The ball feed unit comprises a fraud prevention member made of a metal plate material,
The metal plate material has a first plate surface portion which is a plate surface portion on one side of a predetermined dividing line and a second plate surface portion which is a plate surface portion on the other side of the dividing line. The first plate surface portion is bent with respect to the second plate surface portion, and a substantially V-shaped gap that gradually narrows toward the end point of the dividing line is formed between the first plate surface portion and the second plate surface portion. By forming the wire rod attached to the game ball and making it possible to cut at the end point of the dividing line by entering the gap, it is difficult to cheat using the wire rod.
The ball feed unit is formed with an accommodating portion capable of accommodating the metal plate material , and the accommodating portion is provided with the metal plate material .
Further, the passage port is an opening formed on the outer surface of the ball feeding unit, and has a first opening having a size through which the game ball can pass and a second opening having a size through which the game ball cannot pass .
The second opening is an opening continuously formed from the first opening so that the end point of the dividing line is located at the second opening.
The first plate surface portion of the first plate surface portion and the second plate surface portion in which the dividing line is located in the second opening and the gap is formed by using the dividing line. However, by arranging the metal plate material in the ball feed unit so as to be closer to the launch passage than the second plate surface portion, the game ball passing through the first opening can be moved to the first plate surface portion and the second plate surface portion. A gaming machine characterized in that, in addition to making it difficult to collide with a plate surface portion, it is easy for a wire rod to enter the gap .